Dell Dimension 5100 620 Manuels -> Accéder au site Dell -> Accéder aux Codes Promo et Bons de réduction Dell -> Voir d'autres manuels Dell Revenir à l'accueil

 

 

 

Dimension 5100
 
 
 
 
 
Dell Dimension 5100 Service Manual    
 
info icon Ce document est disponible en anglais uniquement
 
 
 
 
 
Manuel d'utilisation    
 
 Autres langues
 
 
 
Schéma d'installation    
 
 Autres langues
 
-> Commander sur Dell.com, Cliquez ici

 

Autres manuels :

Dell

Dell-Inspiron-1721-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-1520-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-1501-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-XPS-710-H2C-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Laser-Printer-5100cn-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-OptiPlex-9010-7010-Mini-tour-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-1300-B120-B130-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-1955-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-6400-E1505-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Imprimante-personnelle-Tout-en-un-Dell-A920-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-XPS-M1710-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerVault-DL2000-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-8600-Guide-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-5160-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-XPS-Gen-2-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-300m-Guide-du-proprietaire-Manuel

Dell-Axim-X50-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel

Dell-Inspiron-640M-E1405-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-8500-Guide-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-1000-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-XPS-M2010-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-One-2330-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel

Dell-Inspiron-3000-Series-Service-Manual

Dell-Inspiron-3500-Portable-Computer-Service-Manual

Dell-Inspiron-5423-Owner-s-Manual

Dell-poweredge-r520-technical-guide

Dell-Pave-Tactile-Sans-Fil-Dell-TP713-Manuel-d-utilisateur

Dell-PowerVault-NX3300-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel

Dell-Inspiron-2600-et-2650-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-Manuel

Dell-Manuel-de-maintenance-Adamo-XPS

Dell-XPS-13-Manuel-du-proprietairexps-13-l321x_owner_manual_fr-fr

Dell-xps-13-l321x_setup_guide_fr-fr.pdf-Manuel

Dell-Storage-Center-5.5-Guide-de-configuration-systeme

Dell-MANUEL-DE-L-ORDINATEUR-DE-BUREAU-ALIENWARE

Dell-Vostro-410-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide

Dell-ALIENWARE-M18x-MANUEL-DE-L-ORDINATEUR-PORTABLE

Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWARE-M14x-MOBILE

Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWARE-M11x-MOBILE

Dell-Configuration-de-votre-ecran-de-televiseur-LCD-Dell-W2607C-26-pouces

Dell-PERC-6-i-PERC-6-E-et-CERC-6-i-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Dimension-Serie-8300-Manuel

Dell-2145cn-Imprimante-multifonction-Guide-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-PowerEdge-C6220-Systems-Hardware-Owner-s-Manual

Dell-server-poweredge-m610-tech-guidebook

Dell-Vostro-270-Owner-s-Manual

Dell-Controleurs-RAID-Dell-PowerEdge-PERC-H310-H710-H710P-et-H810-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Laser-MFP-Dell-3333dn-et-3335dn-Guide-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-PowerVault-DL-Backup-to-Disk-Appliance-Powered-by-Symantec-Backup-Exec-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-XPS-015-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-NX3300-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-INSPIRON-GUIDE-DE-REFERENCE

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-Network-Attached-Storage-NAS-Guide-de-depannage

Dell-Commutateur-de-consoles-2161DS-Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-d-OSCAR-et-du-materiel

Dell-PowerEdge-T420-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-PowerEdge-C8000XD-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel

Dell-OptiPlex-755-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3200i-et-MD3220i-Guide-de-deploiement

Dell-Latitude-E5400-et-E5500-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide

Dell-Set-Up-Your-Computer

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-XPS-M1730-Manuel

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-M620-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel

Dell-PowerEdge-C410x-Getting-Started-With-Your-System

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-SUSE-Linux-Enterprise-Server-10-Instructions-d-installation

Dell-Utilitaires-de-gestion-du-Dell-OpenManage-Baseboard-Management-Controller-Version%204.6-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-OpenManage-Server-Administrator-Guide-d-installation-de-la-version-7.1

Dell-Systeme-Dell-DR4000-Guide-de-l-administrateur

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge%20Red-Hat-Enterprise-Linux-6-x86_64-x86-Instructions-d-installation-et-informations-importantes

Dell-Integrated-Dell-Remote-Access-Controller-7-iDRAC7-Version-1.20.20-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Management-Plug-In-pour-VMware-vCenter-Version-1.5-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Projecteur-7700FullHD-Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Projecteur-Dell-1420X-1430X-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Solutions-Guide-de-l-administrateur

Dell-PowerEdge-Express-SSD-PCIe-Flash-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Update-Packages-DUP-Version-7.0-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-PowerEdge-R720-et-R720xd-Guide-de-mise-en-route-Manuel

Dell-PowerEdge-R320-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R510-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Precision-M4400-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide

Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-SCSI-Dell-EqualLogic-PS-Series-a-clusters-de-basculement-Microsoft-Windows-Server-Guide-d-installation-et-de-depannage-du-materie

Dell-PowerEdge-C410x-Guide-de-mise-en-route-du-systeme

Dell-Moniteur-a-ecran-plat-Dell-U2713HM-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell-P1913-P1913S-P2213

Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-du-moniteur-Dell-E1913S-E1913-E2213

Dell-Systems-Service-and-Diagnostics-Tools-Version-7.0-Guide-d-installation-rapide

Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell-S2740L-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-INSPIRON-GUIDE-DE-CONFIGURATION

Dell-Dimension-Serie-8300

Dell-PowerEdge-R820-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-PowerEdge-C8000-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel-manuel

Dell-OpenManage-Server-Administrator-Version-7.1-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-PowerEdge-M1000e-M915-M910-M820-M710HD-M710-M620-M610x-M610-M520-et-M420-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-OpenManage-Server-Administrator-Version-7.0-Guide-d-installation

Dell-Inspiron-15R-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-NX3200-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-PowerEdge-RAID-Controller-PERC-S110-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Solutions-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-Micrologiciel-Dell-Chassis-Management-Controller-Version-4-1-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-3260i-3660i-3660f-3060e-Storage-Arrays-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-Vostro-470-Manuel-du-proprietaire

/Dell-Systeme-Dell-PowerVault-NX3500-Guide-de-l-administrateur

Dell-Latitude-E6420-XFR-Guide-technique

Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-du-moniteur-S2240M-S2340M

Dell-Systemes-Dell-DR4000-Manuel-du-proprietaire-manuel

Dell-PowerEdge-T320-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-Precision-Workstation-T3600-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-DR4000-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerEdge-R420-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-PowerEdge-C8220-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel-manuel

Dell-Vostro-470-Owner-s-Manual

Dell-Projecteur-Dell-M110-Guide-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Upgrading-to-BackupExec-2012-PowerVault-DL-Backup-to-Disk-Appliance

Dell-PowerVault-NX3300-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerConnect-5500-Series-CLI-Reference-Guide

Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-Series-Guide-de-deploiement

Dell-Inspiron-One-2020-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-XPS-14-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-1900-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-M620-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerEdge-R815-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerEdge-R720-and-R720xd-Owner-s-Manual

Dell-Micrologiciel-Dell-Chassis-Management-Controller-Version-4.0-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Inspiron-17R-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel

Dell-Inspiron-One-2020-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-C5220-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel

Dell-Inspiron-660s-Manuel-du-proprietaire-manuel

Dell-PowerEdge-R820-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-270-Manuel-du-proprietaire-manuel

Dell-Systeme-Dell-PowerEdge-C6220-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-14R-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Guide-de-l-Utilisateur-de-l-Ecran-Large-Dell-IN1940MW

Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell-S2440L-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Alienware-X51-Owner-s-Manual

Dell-ALIENWARE-M17x-MOBILE-MANUAL

Dell-Emplacement-des-cavaliers-de-la-carte-systeme-des-systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R310-Mise-a-jour-des-informations

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-6950-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Alienware-M17x-R4-Owner-s-Manual

Dell-XPS-13-Owner-s-Manual

Dell-HBA-SAS-Dell-PowerEdge-6-Gb-s-et-Internal-Tape-Adapter-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R910-Mise-a-jour-des-informations

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T610-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R420-Manuel-du-proprietaire

/Dell-PowerEdge-R905-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Imprimantes-laser-Dell-2350d-et-Dell-2350dn

Dell-XPS-430-Guide-de-reference-rapide

Dell-PowerEdge-RAID-Controller-PERC-H700-et-H800-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Lifecycle-Controller-2-Version-1.00.00-User-s-Guide

Dell-OpenManage-Server-Administrator-Version-7.0-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Solutions-NAS-Dell-FluidFS-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manue

Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-Dell-V525w

Dell-XPS-13-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Adaptateurs-Brocade-Manuel-d-installation-et-de-reference

Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Solutions-NX3600-NX3610-Guide-de-deploiement

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T410-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Latitude-ST-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel

Dell-OptiPlex-360-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide

Dell-PowerEdge-R810-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel

Dell-Guide-d-installation-des-systemes-Dell-PowerVault-Modular-Disk-3000

Dell-Imprimante-laser-Dell-2230d-Guide-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-C6105-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel

Dell-Imprimante-personnelle-a-jet-d-encre-Dell-J740-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-2130cn-IMPRIMANTE-LASER-COULEUR

Dell-Guide-d-utilisation-de-la-station-de-travail-Dell-Precision-T3400

Dell-1235cn-Imprimante-Multifonction-Mode-d-emploi

Dell-Vostro-1310-1510-1710-et-2510-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide

Dell-Guide-d-utilisation-APC-Smart-UPS-750VA-1000VA-1500VA-100-120-230-V-CA-2U-Montage-en-baie-Onduleur

Dell-Guide-d-utilisation-Modele-TL24iSCSIxSAS%201Gb-iSCSI-a-SAS

Dell-Imprimantes-laser-Dell-1130-et-Dell-1130n

Dell-Precision-M6400-Guide-de-configuration-et-de-reference-rapide

Dell-M770mm-Color-Monitor-Quick-Set-up

Dell-Carte-de-gestion-reseau-AP9617-AP9618-AP9619-Manuel-d-installation-et-de-demarrage-rapide

Dell-Projecteur-Dell-1410X-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Imprimante-couleur-Dell-1350cnw

Dell-Manuel-d-utilisation-Dell-Inspiron-M5040-15-N5040-15-N5050-Manuel

Dell-Manuel-de-maintenance-Dell-Inspiron-620

Dell-3D-VISION-MANUEL-D-UTILISATION

Dell-Inspiron-600m-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R805-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R900-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-2970-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-C6145-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel

Dell-Inspiron-660s-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-P513w-User-s-Guide-Francais-manuel

Dell-Inspiron-660-manuels

Dell-Serveur-de-sauvegarde-sur-disque-Dell-PowerVault-DL-optimise-par-CommVault-Simpana-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-P513w-User-s-Guide-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-manuel

Dell-Precision-Workstation-T1650-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-ALIENWARE-M17x-MANUEL-DE-L-ORDINATEUR-PORTABLE

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-de-Dell-PowerEdge-M905-M805-M600-et-M605

Dell-Inspiron-One-2330-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Dimension-1100-B110-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-270-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T320-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Station-de-travail-mobile-Dell-Precision-M4700-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-XPS-8500-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-1230c-Imprimante-laser-couleur-mode-d-emploi-Manuel

Dell-Client-Management-Manuel

Dell-Studio-XPS-Setup-Guide-Manue

Dell-Adaptateur-hote-Dell-PCIe-SCSI-Ultra320-monocanal-Guide-d-utilisation-Manuel

Dell-INSPIRON-DUO-SETUP-GUIDE-Manuel

Dell-INSPIRON-DUO-GUIDE-DE-CONFIGURATION-Manuel

Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-Dell-Inspiron-M4040-14-N4050-Manuel

Dell-Guide-de-l-administrateur-de-Dell-PowerVault-705N-Manuel

Dell-Vostro-420-220-220s-Guide-de-Configuration-et-de-Reference-Rapide-Manuel

Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3660f-Series-Guide-de-deploiement-Manuel

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-Network-Attached-Storage-NAS-Guide-de-l-administrateur-Manuel

Dell-Latitude-D430-Guide-d-utilisation-Manuel

Dell-Studio-XPS-Guide-de-configuration-Manuel

Dell-PowerEdge-C410x-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Precision-Workstation-T1650-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R300-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes%20-Dell%20PowerEdge-T110-II-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-200-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Mini-Tower

Dell-Inspiron-531-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-ALIENWARE-MANUEL-DE-L-ORDINATEUR-DE-BUREAU-Francais

Dell-PowerEdge-R520-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Projecteur-Dell-1201MP-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-PowerEdge-R910-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Dimension-C521-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T605-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Mobile-Jamz

Dell-Inspiron-530-Series-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-3460-Manuels

Dell-OPENMANAGE-POWER-CENTER-1.1-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-PowerVault-MD3660f-Storage-Arrays-Manuels

Dell™ Ekran Yöneticisi Kullanıcı Kılavuzu

Dell-PowerEdge-R620-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-PowerEdge-R520-Guide-de-mise-en-route

DELL-POWERVAULT-MD1200-et-MD1220-TECHNICAL-GUIDEBOOK

Console-de-gestion-multi-onduleurs-Dell-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-pour-l-installation-et-la-configuration

DELL-OPTIPLEX580-TECHNICAL-GUIDEBOOK-INSIDE-THE-OPTIPLEX-580

Dell-Inspiron-1720-manuels

Dell-PowerEdge-R720-et-R720xd-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-Vostro-1540-1550-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Latitude-E5430-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell™ S2240L/S2340L Monitör Kullanıcı Kılavuzu

Dell PowerEdge Sistemleri İçin Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Önemli Bilgiler Kılavuzu

Dell-Guide-de-l-utilisateur-du-moniteur-Dell-S2240L-S2340L

Dell™ S320/S320wi Projektör Kullanım Kılavuzu

Dell-%20Vostro-270-Manuels

Dell-Vostro-3460-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Francais

Dell-Inspiron-9200-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Inspiron-2600-et-2650-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Axim-X30-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Vostro-2520-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-1721-Manuel

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T710-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Precision-Workstation-T5600-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Solutions-NAS-Dell-FluidFS-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-C5220-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel

Dell-Dimension-3000-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerEdge-R210-Technical-Guide

Dell-Inspiron-Manuels

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-Vostro-1700

Dell-Clavier-sans-fil-et-souris-Dell-KM713-Manuel-de-l'utilisateur

Dell-Systeme-de-navigation-GPS-Dell-Manuel-de-l'utilisateur

Dell-Logiciel-de-gestion-de-l-onduleur-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-pour-l-installation-et-la-configuration

Dell-Demarrage-rapide-du-moniteur-couleur-M990

Dell-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-de-la-station-de-travail-Dell-Precision-370

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-2800-Guide-d-installation-et-de-depannage

Dell-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-du-systeme-Dell-OptiPlex-SX280

Dell-Vostro-1440-1450-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Photo-Printer-540-Guide-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Streak-7-Francais-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Venue-Pro-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Imprimante-laser-personnelle-Dell-P1500-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerEdge-C5125-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-materiel

Dell-Latitude-D630-Manuels

Dell-Vostro-400-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Mini-Tower

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T100-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-OptiPlex-9010-7010-compact-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerVault%20NX3200-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-1200-et-2200-Manuel-de%20l-utilisateur

Dell-Vostro-1540-1550-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-8600-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerVault-Baie-de-stockage-MD1120-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Dimension-E521-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-9100-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-3360-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T300-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-XPS-One-2710-manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Inspiron-1150-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Latitude-E5530-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-660-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Acceder-au-site-Dell

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-des-Dell-Latitude-E6420-et-E6420-ATG-Francais

Dell-OptiPlex-9010-Tout-en-un-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-3560-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T110-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-server-poweredge-m710-tech-guidebook_fr

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R420-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Latitude-5420-E5420-E5420m-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Latitude-E6320-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Systemes-Dell-Inspiron-8200-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-Francais

Dell-server-poweredge-r610-tech-guidebook_fr

Dell-server-poweredge-t710-technical-guide-book_fr

Dell-server-poweredge-m1000e-tech-guidebook_fr

Dell-server-poweredge-m610-tech-guidebook_fr

Dell-poweredge-r210-technical-guidebook-en_fr

Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWARE-M15x-MOBILE-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Axim-X51-X51v-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Beats-By-dr.dre-Manuel-et-Garantie

Dell-Dimension-3100C-Manuel-du-proprietaire

 

Dell-Precision-Workstation-T3600-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-200-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Slim-Tower

Dell-ALIENWARE-MANUEL-DE-L-ORDINATEUR-DE-BUREAU

Dell-OPENMANAGE-POWER-CENTER-1-1-Guide-d-utilisation

Dell-Vostro-360-Proprietaire-du-manuel

Dell-Dimension-3100C-Manuel-du-proprietaire

AlienwareArea-51Area-51ALX

Dell-Ordinateurs-de-Bureau-PC-Portables-Netbooks/AlienwareAurora-R3

AlienwareAurora-R4

lienwareAuroraAuroraALXAurora-R2

Chassis-RAID-Dell-PowerVault-MD3000i-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Axim-X50-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Axim-X51-X51v-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Baie-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD1000-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Boîtier-Dell-PowerEdge-M1000e-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Clavier-Axim-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Dimension-3100-E310-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Dimension-9200-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Dimension-E520-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Imprimante-laser-Dell-1100-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Imprimante-laser-de-groupe-de-travail-Dell-M5200-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Imprimante-laser-monochrome-Dell-5330dn-Mode-d-emploi

Dell-Imprimante-laser-multifonction-Dell-1600n-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-13z-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-17R-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-530s-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Inspiron-530s-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-700m-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-1100-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Inspiron-1525-1526-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-5100-et-5150-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Inspiron-9300-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-9400-E1705-Manuel-du-proprietaire

http://www.audentia-gestion.fr/Dell-Ordinateurs-de-Bureau-PC-Portables-Netbooks/Dell-Laser-Printer-1700-1700n-Manuel-du-proprietaire.htm

Dell-Laser-Printer-1710-1710n-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Laser-Printer-3100cn-manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Latitude-ST-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Latitude-XT3-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Liste-des-manuels-et-de-la-documentation-Dell

Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWARE-M11x-MOBILE-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWARE-M15x-MOBILE

Dell-MANUEL-D-ALIENWARE-M17x-MOBILE-francais

Dell-MANUEL-D-ALIENWARE-M17x-MOBILE

Dell-Manuel-d-utilisation-Dell-Inspiron-M5040-15-N5040-15-N5050

Dell-Manuel-d-utilisation-du-Dell-XPS-420

Dell-Manuel-de-l-Utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6220

Dell-Manuel-de-l-Utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6520

Dell-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6320

Dell-Manuel-de-maintenance-Dell-Inspiron-N5110

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Dell-Vostro-1500

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Dell-XPS-M1330

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-des-Dell-Latitude-E6420-et-E6420-ATG

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-Inspiron-1721

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-XPS-M1730

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-XPS-One

Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3260i-Series-Guide-de-deploiement

Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3660i-Series-Guide-de-deploiement

Dell-Photo-All-In-One-Printer-944-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Photo-All-In-One-Printer-964-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Photo-All-In-One-Printer%20942-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Photo-Printer-720-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerEdge-C8220-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerEdge-R620-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-3260i-3660i-3660f-3060e-Storage-Arrays-Guide-de-l-administrateur

Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-3260i-3660i-3660f-3060e-Storage-Arrays-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerVault-NX400-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-Precision-Workstation-T7600-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Streak-7-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Streak-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Systemes-Dell-Inspiron-4150-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Systemes-Dell-Inspiron-8200-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-1950-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-M420-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R210-II-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R410-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R710-Manuel-du-proprietaire%20-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T310-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T420-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T620-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-NX400-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Tout-en-un-Dell-Photo-924-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-360-Proprietaire-du-manuel

Dell-Vostro-3750-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Vostro-V131-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-XP-M1530-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-XPS-630i-Manuel-du-proprietair

Dell-moniteur-D1920-Manuel-du-proprietaire

DellDimension1100Series

Imprimante-Dell-Photo-All-In-One-Printer-922-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Imprimante-laser-de-groupe-de-travail-Dell-S2500-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Imprimante-personnelle-Dell-AIO-A960-Manuel-du-proprietaire

alienwareX51

Dell-Manuel-de-l-Utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6220

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-T420-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-Inspiron-4150-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur

Dell-Streak-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-XPS-M1730

Dell-Photo-All-In-One-Printer-944-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-du-Dell-XPS-One

Dell-Clavier-Axim-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R410-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Manuel-d-utilisation-Dell-Inspiron-M5040-15-N5040-15-N5050

Dell-Manuel-de-maintenance-Dell-Inspiron-N5110

Dell-Inspiron-1100-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Imprimante-laser-de-groupe-de-travail-Dell-M5200-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Photo-Printer-720-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Imprimante-laser-Dell-1100-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Dell-Vostro-1500

Dell-XP-M1530-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-530s-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-R710-Manuel-du-proprietaire-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Inspiron-5100-et-5150-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Manuel-de-l-Utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6520

Dell-MANUEL-D-ALIENWARE-M17x-MOBILE

Dell-Manuel-de-l-utilisateur-Dell-Latitude-E6320

Dell-Laser-Printer-3100cn-manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-530s-Manuel-d-utilisation

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-1950-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Manuel-du-proprietaire-des-Dell-Latitude-E6420-et-E6420-ATG

Dell-Imprimante-laser-monochrome-Dell-5330dn-Mode-d-emploi

Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-3260i-3660i-3660f-3060e-Storage-Arrays-Guide-de-l-administrateur

Dell-PowerVault-NX400-Guide-de-mise-en-route

Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3260i-Series-Guide-de-deploiement

Dell-PowerEdge-C8220-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWARE-M11x-MOBILE-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerEdge-M420-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Systemes-Dell-PowerVault-NX400-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-PowerVault-MD3260-3260i-3660i-3660f-3060e-Storage-Arrays-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Matrices-de-stockage-Dell-PowerVault-MD3660i-Series-Guide-de-deploiement

Dell-Laser-Printer-1700-1700n-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-9400-E1705-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Tout-en-un-Dell-Photo-924-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Laser-Printer-1710-1710n-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Dimension-3100-E310-Manuel-du-proprietaire

Dell-Inspiron-1525-1526-Manuel-du-proprietaire

[TXT]

 Acceder-au-site-Dell..> 24-Oct-2012 06:36  1.0M  

[TXT]

 Adaptateurs-Brocade-..> 05-Nov-2012 15:05  3.6M  

[TXT]

 AlienwareArea-51Area..> 18-Oct-2012 16:42  2.7M  

[TXT]

 AlienwareAurora-R3.htm  18-Oct-2012 16:54  3.2M  

[TXT]

 AlienwareAurora-R4.htm  18-Oct-2012 16:48  2.9M  

[TXT]

 AlienwareAuroraAuror..> 18-Oct-2012 16:51  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Chassis-RAID-Dell-Po..> 18-Oct-2012 16:49  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Code-Promo-Dell.htm     04-Feb-2013 09:17  1.0M  

[TXT]

 Console-de-gestion-m..> 26-Oct-2012 14:51  3.3M  

[TXT]

 DELL-OPTIPLEX580-TEC..> 25-Oct-2012 18:32  2.9M  

[TXT]

 DELL-POWERVAULT-MD12..> 26-Oct-2012 14:50  3.3M  

[TXT]

 DELLmanuelsutilisate..> 18-Oct-2012 17:06   12M  

[TXT]

 Dellâ„¢ Logiciel-de..> 25-Oct-2012 12:03  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-3D-VISION-MANUE..> 02-Nov-2012 09:39  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-1130-Dell-1130n..> 27-Nov-2012 09:15  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-1230c-Imprimant..> 01-Nov-2012 18:37  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-1235cn-Impriman..> 02-Nov-2012 10:06  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-1250c-Color-Pri..> 05-Nov-2012 12:12  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-1815dn-Manuel ..> 27-Nov-2012 09:09  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-2130cn-IMPRIMAN..> 02-Nov-2012 10:05  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-2145cn-Impriman..> 12-Nov-2012 16:55  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-ALIENWARE-M17x-..> 01-Nov-2012 19:00  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-ALIENWARE-M17x-..> 02-Nov-2012 16:28  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-ALIENWARE-M18x-..> 12-Nov-2012 16:51  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-ALIENWARE-MANUE..> 29-Oct-2012 07:39  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-ALIENWARE-MANUE..> 19-Oct-2012 07:41  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-APC-Smart-UPS-A..> 04-Nov-2012 10:41  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Adaptateur-hote..> 01-Nov-2012 18:38  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Adaptateurs-Bro..> 02-Nov-2012 11:22  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Adaptateurs-Del..> 05-Nov-2012 07:30  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Adaptateurs-Del..> 14-Nov-2012 21:39  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 18-Nov-2012 20:44  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 18-Nov-2012 20:44  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-Area-..> 18-Nov-2012 20:45  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-Auror..> 18-Nov-2012 20:44  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-Auror..> 18-Nov-2012 20:43  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-Auror..> 18-Nov-2012 20:43  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-Auror..> 18-Nov-2012 20:49  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-M17x-..> 02-Nov-2012 16:30  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Alienware-X51-O..> 02-Nov-2012 16:28  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Axim-X3-Guide-d..> 14-Nov-2012 21:38  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Axim-X30-Manuel..> 25-Oct-2012 12:08  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Axim-X50-Manuel..> 13-Nov-2012 08:12  4.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Axim-X50-Manuel..> 18-Oct-2012 16:53  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Axim-X51-X51v-M..> 27-Nov-2012 07:18  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Axim-X51-X51v-M..> 24-Oct-2012 07:42  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Axim-X51-X51v-M..> 18-Oct-2012 16:52  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-B1160-Dell-B116..> 05-Nov-2012 18:11  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-B1260dn-Mode-d-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:11  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Baie-de-stockag..> 18-Oct-2012 16:41  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Bandotheques-De..> 05-Nov-2012 09:03  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Beats-By-dr.dre..> 24-Oct-2012 07:42  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Boîtier-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 17:07  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Boitiers-de-sto..> 05-Nov-2012 18:14  1.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Carte-de-Gestio..> 06-Nov-2012 18:45  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Carte-de-gestio..> 14-Nov-2012 12:05  4.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Cartes-controle..> 05-Nov-2012 10:08  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Cartes-d-extens..> 05-Nov-2012 09:01  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Clavier-Axim-Ma..> 18-Oct-2012 16:38  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Clavier-sans-fi..> 25-Oct-2012 12:02  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Client-Manageme..> 01-Nov-2012 18:37  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Commutateur-de-..> 03-Nov-2012 18:19  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Configuration-d..> 12-Nov-2012 16:53  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Console-de-gest..> 27-Nov-2012 07:40  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Controleurs-Del..> 05-Nov-2012 12:14  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Controleurs-RAI..> 03-Nov-2012 18:11  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-DX-Object-Stora..> 04-Nov-2012 11:04  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Demarrage-rapid..> 25-Oct-2012 12:04  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Deploiement-de-..> 05-Nov-2012 12:15  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-1000-..> 18-Nov-2012 20:57  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-1100-..> 14-Nov-2012 12:08  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-3000-..> 25-Oct-2012 18:30  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-3100-..> 18-Oct-2012 16:31  906K  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-3100C..> 24-Oct-2012 07:42  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-9150-..> 27-Nov-2012 07:07  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-9200-..> 18-Oct-2012 16:54  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-9200C..> 18-Nov-2012 21:03  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-C521-..> 29-Oct-2012 07:41  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-E520-..> 18-Oct-2012 16:50  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-E521-..> 24-Oct-2012 09:12  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-Serie..> 12-Nov-2012 16:54  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-Serie..> 03-Nov-2012 18:01  5.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-XPS-G..> 04-Nov-2012 11:03  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-XPS-M..> 14-Nov-2012 21:39  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Dimension-serie..> 12-Nov-2012 17:07  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-E-Legacy-Extend..> 14-Nov-2012 21:40  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-E1913S-E1913-E2..> 06-Nov-2012 07:29  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Ekran-Yönetici..> 26-Oct-2012 14:49  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Emplacement-des..> 02-Nov-2012 16:29  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-EqualLogic-Stor..> 03-Nov-2012 21:47  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Sol..> 03-Nov-2012 18:10  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Sol..> 03-Nov-2012 08:45  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-FluidFS-NAS-Sol..> 02-Nov-2012 11:24  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-d-install..> 05-Nov-2012 14:58  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-d-install..> 04-Nov-2012 11:03  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 02-Nov-2012 10:06  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 02-Nov-2012 10:06  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 05-Nov-2012 12:12  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 02-Nov-2012 10:05  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 14-Nov-2012 21:03  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 14-Nov-2012 21:05  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 14-Nov-2012 21:38  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 05-Nov-2012 08:58  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-d-utilisa..> 05-Nov-2012 07:29  4.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-config..> 05-Nov-2012 12:13  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-demarr..> 05-Nov-2012 12:13  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-l-Util..> 02-Nov-2012 16:27  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-l-admi..> 01-Nov-2012 18:39  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 01-Nov-2012 18:39  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 02-Nov-2012 11:21  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 05-Nov-2012 18:31  4.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 05-Nov-2012 07:31  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 05-Nov-2012 09:06  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 03-Nov-2012 11:07  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 26-Oct-2012 14:45  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-l-util..> 03-Nov-2012 08:27  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-de-soluti..> 05-Nov-2012 17:29  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide-technique..> 05-Nov-2012 09:00  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Guide d-install..> 02-Nov-2012 09:43  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-HBA-SAS-Dell-Po..> 02-Nov-2012 16:31  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-INSPIRON-DUO-GU..> 01-Nov-2012 18:38  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-INSPIRON-DUO-SE..> 01-Nov-2012 18:38  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-INSPIRON-GUIDE-..> 03-Nov-2012 11:09  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-INSPIRON-GUIDE-..> 03-Nov-2012 18:16  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-INSPIRON-Setup-..> 05-Nov-2012 07:32  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimante-coul..> 02-Nov-2012 09:38  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 18-Oct-2012 16:41  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 05-Nov-2012 14:59  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 02-Nov-2012 09:44  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 18-Oct-2012 16:32  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 05-Nov-2012 12:11  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 18-Oct-2012 16:44  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 18-Oct-2012 16:36  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimante-lase..> 25-Oct-2012 12:07  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimante-pers..> 13-Nov-2012 08:10  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimante-pers..> 02-Nov-2012 09:44  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimantes-las..> 02-Nov-2012 10:07  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Imprimantes-las..> 02-Nov-2012 10:07  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-13z-Ma..> 18-Oct-2012 17:09  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-14R-M4..> 05-Nov-2012 07:32  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-14R-Ma..> 02-Nov-2012 17:20  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-14z-N4..> 06-Nov-2012 07:27  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-15R-Ma..> 03-Nov-2012 08:43  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-17R-Ma..> 02-Nov-2012 17:17  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-17R-Ma..> 18-Oct-2012 16:56  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-300m-G..> 13-Nov-2012 08:12  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-530-Se..> 29-Oct-2012 07:41  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-530s-M..> 18-Oct-2012 17:01  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-530s-M..> 18-Oct-2012 17:00  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-531-Ma..> 29-Oct-2012 07:38  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-600m-M..> 05-Nov-2012 14:57  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-600m-M..> 02-Nov-2012 09:40  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-640M-E..> 13-Nov-2012 08:13  4.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-660-Ma..> 24-Oct-2012 09:15  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-660-ma..> 01-Nov-2012 18:42  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-660s-M..> 02-Nov-2012 17:18  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-660s-M..> 02-Nov-2012 09:42  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-700m-M..> 18-Oct-2012 16:47  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1000-M..> 13-Nov-2012 08:15  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1100-M..> 18-Oct-2012 16:33  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1150-M..> 27-Nov-2012 09:07  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1150-M..> 24-Oct-2012 09:15  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1200-e..> 25-Oct-2012 09:48  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1300-B..> 13-Nov-2012 08:19  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1420-M..> 14-Nov-2012 21:01  5.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1501-M..> 14-Nov-2012 21:06  5.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1520-M..> 13-Nov-2012 08:17  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1525-1..> 18-Oct-2012 16:31  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1720-m..> 25-Oct-2012 18:32  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1721-M..> 13-Nov-2012 08:17  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-1721-M..> 25-Oct-2012 12:09  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-2600-e..> 12-Nov-2012 16:59  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-2600-e..> 25-Oct-2012 12:08  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-3000-S..> 12-Nov-2012 16:56  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-3500-P..> 12-Nov-2012 16:57  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-5100-e..> 27-Nov-2012 09:09  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-5100-e..> 18-Oct-2012 17:05  4.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-5160-M..> 13-Nov-2012 08:11  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-5423-O..> 12-Nov-2012 16:57  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-6000-M..> 05-Nov-2012 07:31  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-6400-E..> 13-Nov-2012 08:20  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-8500-G..> 13-Nov-2012 08:14  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-8600-G..> 13-Nov-2012 08:11  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-8600-M..> 24-Oct-2012 09:11  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-9100-M..> 24-Oct-2012 09:13  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-9200-M..> 25-Oct-2012 12:07  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-9300-M..> 18-Oct-2012 17:12  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-9400-E..> 18-Oct-2012 16:32  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-Guide-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:08  1.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-Manuel..> 25-Oct-2012 18:31  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-One-20..> 02-Nov-2012 17:23  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-One-23..> 13-Nov-2012 08:16  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-One-23..> 14-Nov-2012 12:08  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Inspiron-XPS-Ge..> 13-Nov-2012 08:11  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Integrated-Dell..> 03-Nov-2012 18:09  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Laser-MFP-Dell-..> 03-Nov-2012 18:12  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Laser-Printer-1..> 18-Oct-2012 16:32  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Laser-Printer-1..> 18-Oct-2012 16:31  1.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Laser-Printer-3..> 18-Oct-2012 17:02  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Laser-Printer-5..> 13-Nov-2012 08:18  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-5420-E..> 24-Oct-2012 07:38  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-D430-G..> 01-Nov-2012 18:41  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-D430-G..> 14-Nov-2012 21:36  4.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-D531-G..> 14-Nov-2012 21:36  4.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-D630-M..> 25-Oct-2012 09:46  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-D830-G..> 14-Nov-2012 20:59  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E4300-..> 03-Nov-2012 21:46  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E5400-..> 03-Nov-2012 18:02  4.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E5430-..> 26-Oct-2012 17:29  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E5530-..> 24-Oct-2012 09:15  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E6320-..> 24-Oct-2012 07:38  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E6420-..> 03-Nov-2012 08:27  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E6500-..> 04-Nov-2012 11:02  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-E6520-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:13  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-ST-Kul..> 06-Nov-2012 07:29  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-ST-Man..> 02-Nov-2012 11:23  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-ST-Man..> 18-Oct-2012 16:38  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-XT2-XF..> 05-Nov-2012 14:54  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-XT3-Ma..> 18-Oct-2012 16:42  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Latitude-XT3-Ow..> 06-Nov-2012 07:28  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Lifecycle-Contr..> 02-Nov-2012 11:20  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Liste-des-manue..> 18-Oct-2012 17:01  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Logiciel-de-ges..> 27-Nov-2012 07:26  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-M770mm-Color-Mo..> 02-Nov-2012 09:37  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-M5200-Carte-de-..> 05-Nov-2012 07:58  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 18-Oct-2012 16:51  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 27-Nov-2012 07:20  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 12-Nov-2012 16:51  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 24-Oct-2012 07:41  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 18-Oct-2012 16:33  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-MANUEL-ALIENWAR..> 05-Nov-2012 14:58  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-MANUEL-D-ALIENW..> 18-Oct-2012 17:12  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-MANUEL-D-ALIENW..> 18-Oct-2012 17:03  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-MANUEL-DE-L-ORD..> 12-Nov-2012 16:51  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Management-Plug..> 03-Nov-2012 18:09  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manual-del-prop..> 06-Nov-2012 07:33  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manual-del-prop..> 06-Nov-2012 07:32  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-d-utilis..> 02-Nov-2012 09:38  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-d-utilis..> 18-Oct-2012 16:35  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-d-utilis..> 18-Oct-2012 17:10  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-de-l-Uti..> 12-Nov-2012 17:07  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-de-l-Uti..> 18-Oct-2012 17:04  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-de-l-uti..> 18-Oct-2012 17:02  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-de-l-uti..> 25-Oct-2012 12:04  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-de-l-uti..> 25-Oct-2012 12:05  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 12-Nov-2012 16:59  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 02-Nov-2012 09:39  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 14-Nov-2012 12:07  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 18-Oct-2012 16:35  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-de-maint..> 06-Nov-2012 07:28  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 18-Oct-2012 16:37  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 18-Oct-2012 17:13  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 01-Nov-2012 19:14  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 24-Oct-2012 07:36  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 18-Oct-2012 16:46  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 18-Oct-2012 17:07  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 25-Oct-2012 18:31  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 03-Nov-2012 18:04  4.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 18-Oct-2012 16:55  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Manuel-du-propr..> 18-Oct-2012 16:44  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 05-Nov-2012 09:02  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 05-Nov-2012 08:59  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 03-Nov-2012 18:02  4.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 27-Nov-2012 07:40  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 02-Nov-2012 17:22  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 18-Oct-2012 16:55  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 04-Nov-2012 11:01  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 06-Nov-2012 07:26  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 04-Nov-2012 11:01  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 03-Nov-2012 21:46  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 01-Nov-2012 18:40  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 18-Oct-2012 16:33  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Matrices-de-sto..> 03-Nov-2012 11:05  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Media-Center-Gu..> 14-Nov-2012 22:11  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Micrologiciel-D..> 03-Nov-2012 08:46  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Micrologiciel-D..> 02-Nov-2012 16:35  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Mobile-Jamz.htm    29-Oct-2012 07:41  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Module-de-venti..> 06-Nov-2012 07:27  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Modules-optique..> 05-Nov-2012 18:13  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell..> 03-Nov-2012 11:07  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell..> 02-Nov-2012 16:27  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Moniteur-a-Dell..> 03-Nov-2012 11:09  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Moniteur-a-ecra..> 03-Nov-2012 11:06  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Multifunktionsp..> 27-Nov-2012 09:07  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OPENMANAGE-POWE..> 19-Oct-2012 07:41  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OPENMANAGE-POWE..> 26-Oct-2012 14:47  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Onduleur-en-Bai..> 05-Nov-2012 09:00  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OpenManage-Remo..> 14-Nov-2012 22:12  4.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 03-Nov-2012 18:07  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 14-Nov-2012 21:38  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 03-Nov-2012 08:43  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 05-Nov-2012 18:10  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 02-Nov-2012 11:20  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 03-Nov-2012 08:42  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OpenManage-Serv..> 14-Nov-2012 22:12  5.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OptiPlex-360-Gu..> 02-Nov-2012 11:23  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OptiPlex-755-Gu..> 03-Nov-2012 21:12  5.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OptiPlex-9010-7..> 13-Nov-2012 08:18  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OptiPlex-9010-7..> 25-Oct-2012 09:48  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-OptiPlex-9010-T..> 24-Oct-2012 07:54  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Ordinateurs-por..> 14-Nov-2012 21:02  4.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-P513w-User-s-Gu..> 01-Nov-2012 18:42  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-P513w-User-s-Gu..> 01-Nov-2012 18:46  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-P1913-P1913S-P2..> 06-Nov-2012 07:31  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PERC-6-i-PERC-6..> 05-Nov-2012 07:31  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PERC-6-i-PERC-6..> 12-Nov-2012 16:53  4.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Pave-Tactile-Sa..> 12-Nov-2012 16:58  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Photo-All-In-On..> 18-Oct-2012 16:48  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Photo-All-In-On..> 05-Nov-2012 12:10  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Photo-All-In-On..> 18-Oct-2012 16:35  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Photo-All-In-On..> 18-Oct-2012 16:45  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Photo-All-in-On..> 14-Nov-2012 12:06  4.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Photo-Printer-5..> 25-Oct-2012 12:06  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Photo-Printer-7..> 18-Oct-2012 16:46  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Point-d-acces-D..> 05-Nov-2012 18:12  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Points-d-acces-..> 06-Nov-2012 07:26  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerConnect-55..> 02-Nov-2012 17:22  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-2900-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:12  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-2950-..> 05-Nov-2012 15:01  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-C410x..> 03-Nov-2012 18:05  4.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-C410x..> 03-Nov-2012 11:06  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-C410x..> 29-Oct-2012 07:36  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-C5125..> 25-Oct-2012 09:46  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-C6220..> 12-Nov-2012 16:55  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-C8000..> 03-Nov-2012 08:30  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-C8000..> 03-Nov-2012 18:23  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-C8220..> 27-Nov-2012 09:07  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-C8220..> 03-Nov-2012 08:29  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-C8220..> 18-Oct-2012 16:50  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-Expan..> 04-Nov-2012 11:02  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-Expre..> 03-Nov-2012 18:11  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-M1000..> 03-Nov-2012 08:42  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R210-..> 25-Oct-2012 18:30  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R310-..> 06-Nov-2012 07:29  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R320-..> 03-Nov-2012 11:04  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R410-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:09  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R415-..> 05-Nov-2012 15:01  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R420-..> 03-Nov-2012 08:29  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R520-..> 26-Oct-2012 14:50  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R520-..> 29-Oct-2012 07:39  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R620-..> 26-Oct-2012 14:49  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R620-..> 18-Oct-2012 17:11  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R710-..> 06-Nov-2012 07:31  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R710-..> 05-Nov-2012 15:00  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R720-..> 02-Nov-2012 16:34  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R720-..> 03-Nov-2012 11:04  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R720-..> 25-Oct-2012 18:33  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R810-..> 02-Nov-2012 09:43  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R815-..> 02-Nov-2012 16:34  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R820-..> 03-Nov-2012 08:30  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R820-..> 02-Nov-2012 17:19  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R900-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:13  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R905-..> 02-Nov-2012 16:32  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-R910-..> 29-Oct-2012 07:40  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-RAID-..> 02-Nov-2012 10:08  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-RAID-..> 05-Nov-2012 09:02  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-RAID-..> 03-Nov-2012 08:44  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-Siste..> 26-Oct-2012 14:44  1.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-Syste..> 06-Nov-2012 07:32  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-T110-..> 14-Nov-2012 21:04  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-T300-..> 06-Nov-2012 07:33  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-T310-..> 05-Nov-2012 18:10  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-T320-..> 03-Nov-2012 08:27  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-T420-..> 03-Nov-2012 18:19  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerEdge-T620-..> 04-Nov-2012 11:04  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerQuest-Data..> 05-Nov-2012 12:15  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-Baie..> 24-Oct-2012 09:12  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-DL-B..> 03-Nov-2012 18:12  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-DL20..> 13-Nov-2012 08:11  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-Data..> 03-Nov-2012 21:47  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-Data..> 04-Nov-2012 10:41  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-Data..> 04-Nov-2012 11:00  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-Encr..> 04-Nov-2012 10:41  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-MD-S..> 05-Nov-2012 15:01  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-MD11..> 05-Nov-2012 15:00  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 27-Nov-2012 09:08  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 27-Nov-2012 09:07  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 27-Nov-2012 09:06  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 18-Oct-2012 16:45  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 02-Nov-2012 18:07  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-MD32..> 18-Oct-2012 16:34  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-MD36..> 26-Oct-2012 14:48  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-MD36..> 26-Oct-2012 14:48  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-NX20..> 05-Nov-2012 15:00  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-NX40..> 18-Oct-2012 16:56  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-NX33..> 12-Nov-2012 16:58  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault-NX33..> 02-Nov-2012 17:21  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-PowerVault NX32..> 25-Oct-2012 09:48  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-M4400..> 03-Nov-2012 11:05  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-M6400..> 02-Nov-2012 09:37  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-Works..> 01-Nov-2012 18:46  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-Works..> 03-Nov-2012 08:28  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-Works..> 19-Oct-2012 07:41  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-Works..> 25-Oct-2012 12:10  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Precision-Works..> 18-Oct-2012 17:09  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Projecteur-7700..> 03-Nov-2012 18:09  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Projecteur-Dell..> 02-Nov-2012 09:38  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Projecteur-Dell..> 03-Nov-2012 18:10  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Projecteur-Dell..> 02-Nov-2012 17:20  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-S320-S320wi-Pro..> 26-Oct-2012 14:45  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-S320-S320wi-Pro..> 05-Nov-2012 09:02  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-S2240L-S2340L-M..> 26-Oct-2012 14:44  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-S2440L-Monitor-..> 06-Nov-2012 07:31  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-SAS-RAID-Storag..> 05-Nov-2012 14:59  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Sansa-Clip-MP3-..> 27-Nov-2012 09:15  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Server-Deployme..> 05-Nov-2012 14:56  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Server-PRO-Mana..> 05-Nov-2012 15:00  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Serveur-de-sauv..> 01-Nov-2012 18:42  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Set-Up-Your-Com..> 03-Nov-2012 18:04  4.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Setting-up-Your..> 05-Nov-2012 08:59  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Setting-up-Your..> 05-Nov-2012 10:08  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Setting-up-Your..> 05-Nov-2012 10:08  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Setting-up-Your..> 05-Nov-2012 12:15  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Solutions-NAS-D..> 02-Nov-2012 11:21  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Solutions-NAS-D..> 25-Oct-2012 18:29  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Station-de-trav..> 01-Nov-2012 18:36  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Storage-Center-..> 06-Nov-2012 11:43  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Storage-Center-..> 06-Nov-2012 07:29  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Streak-7-Franca..> 25-Oct-2012 12:06  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Streak-7-Manuel..> 18-Oct-2012 17:13  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Streak-Manuel-d..> 18-Oct-2012 16:40  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Studio-GUIDE-DE..> 14-Nov-2012 21:01  5.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Studio-One-GUID..> 05-Nov-2012 18:14  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Studio-XPS-1640..> 06-Nov-2012 18:40  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Studio-XPS-8100..> 05-Nov-2012 07:38  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Studio-XPS-GUID..> 06-Nov-2012 18:40  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Studio-XPS-Guid..> 01-Nov-2012 18:41  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Studio-XPS-Setu..> 01-Nov-2012 18:38  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Studio-XPS-Setu..> 05-Nov-2012 12:09  1.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systeme-Dell-DR..> 03-Nov-2012 18:08  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systeme-Dell-Po..> 02-Nov-2012 17:20  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systeme-Dell-Po..> 02-Nov-2012 18:07  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systeme-de-navi..> 25-Oct-2012 12:02  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-D..> 03-Nov-2012 08:27  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-D..> 03-Nov-2012 08:28  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-D..> 27-Nov-2012 07:40  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-D..> 14-Nov-2012 21:05  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-I..> 18-Oct-2012 16:47  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-I..> 24-Oct-2012 07:39  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-I..> 18-Oct-2012 17:11  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 14-Nov-2012 20:59  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 05-Nov-2012 12:14  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 16:33  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 16:52  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 13-Nov-2012 08:19  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 25-Oct-2012 12:05  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 27-Nov-2012 07:42  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 05-Nov-2012 18:13  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 09:41  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 16:29  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 17:18  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 09:44  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 09:42  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 16:36  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 03-Nov-2012 18:05  4.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 16:33  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 17:13  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 14-Nov-2012 21:00  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 29-Oct-2012 07:37  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 14-Nov-2012 12:05  4.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 16:39  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 16:32  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 03-Nov-2012 11:04  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 16:58  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 09:40  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 09:41  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 16:31  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 03-Nov-2012 18:06  3.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 05-Nov-2012 08:58  4.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 25-Oct-2012 09:47  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 05-Nov-2012 12:10  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 24-Oct-2012 07:37  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 24-Oct-2012 09:14  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 17:08  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 01-Nov-2012 19:02  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 11:45  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 16:38  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 29-Oct-2012 07:41  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 02-Nov-2012 16:32  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 17:08  3.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 25-Oct-2012 12:10  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 03-Nov-2012 18:08  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 27-Nov-2012 09:09  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 27-Nov-2012 09:06  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 18-Oct-2012 16:43  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 03-Nov-2012 08:44  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 03-Nov-2012 18:15  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 14-Nov-2012 21:42  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes-Dell-P..> 01-Nov-2012 18:41  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systemes -Dell ..> 29-Oct-2012 07:37  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Systems-Service..> 03-Nov-2012 11:08  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-TSi-500-TSi-400..> 27-Nov-2012 09:15  1.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Tout-en-un-Dell..> 18-Oct-2012 16:31  1.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-U2713HM-Flat-Pa..> 06-Nov-2012 07:30  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-U2713HM-Flat-Pa..> 06-Nov-2012 07:30  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Update-Packages..> 03-Nov-2012 11:04  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Upgrading-to-Ba..> 02-Nov-2012 17:21  1.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Utilitaires-de-..> 03-Nov-2012 18:06  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Venue-Pro-Manue..> 25-Oct-2012 12:06  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vizioncore-vCon..> 05-Nov-2012 10:08  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vizioncore-vRan..> 05-Nov-2012 09:01  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vizioncore-vRep..> 05-Nov-2012 14:57  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-200-Manu..> 29-Oct-2012 07:38  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-200-Manu..> 19-Oct-2012 07:41  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-270-Manu..> 02-Nov-2012 17:19  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-270-Manu..> 01-Nov-2012 19:02  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell- Vostro-270-Man..> 26-Oct-2012 14:46  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-270-Owne..> 12-Nov-2012 16:56  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-360-Prop..> 19-Oct-2012 07:42  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-400-Manu..> 25-Oct-2012 09:47  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-410-Guid..> 12-Nov-2012 17:26  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-420-220-..> 01-Nov-2012 18:40  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-470-Manu..> 02-Nov-2012 18:07  3.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-470-Owne..> 02-Nov-2012 17:20  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-1310-151..> 05-Nov-2012 18:14  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-1310-151..> 02-Nov-2012 10:06  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-1440-145..> 25-Oct-2012 12:05  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-1540-155..> 26-Oct-2012 14:44  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-2520-Man..> 25-Oct-2012 12:09  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-3360-Man..> 27-Nov-2012 09:10  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-3450-Man..> 06-Nov-2012 07:27  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-3460-Man..> 26-Oct-2012 14:46  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-3460-Man..> 26-Oct-2012 14:47  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-3560-Man..> 24-Oct-2012 07:37  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-3750-Man..> 18-Oct-2012 16:58  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-Vostro-V131-Man..> 18-Oct-2012 16:59  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XP-M1530-Manuel..> 18-Oct-2012 16:34  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-13-Arabe-Ma..> 05-Nov-2012 12:08  1.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-13-Chinois-..> 05-Nov-2012 12:08  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-13-Kullanı..> 05-Nov-2012 12:09  1.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-13-Manuel-d..> 02-Nov-2012 11:22  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-13-Manuel-d..> 12-Nov-2012 16:59  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-13-Owner-s-..> 02-Nov-2012 16:30  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-14-Manuel-d..> 02-Nov-2012 17:36  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-410-Anglais..> 18-Nov-2012 21:25  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-420-francai..> 18-Nov-2012 21:25  3.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-430-Guide-d..> 02-Nov-2012 10:08  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-430-francai..> 19-Nov-2012 06:24  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-600-Manuel-..> 05-Nov-2012 12:11  3.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-600-francai..> 19-Nov-2012 06:29  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-630i-Manuel..> 18-Oct-2012 16:49  3.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-710-H2C-Man..> 13-Nov-2012 08:18  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-8500-Manuel..> 01-Nov-2012 18:36  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-GUIDE-DE-CO..> 05-Nov-2012 07:38  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-L412z-Manue..> 05-Nov-2012 07:38  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-M1210-Owner..> 05-Nov-2012 07:32  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-M1710-Manue..> 14-Nov-2012 21:03  4.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-M1710-Manue..> 13-Nov-2012 09:56  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-M2010-Manue..> 13-Nov-2012 08:16  3.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-One-2710-ma..> 24-Oct-2012 09:14  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS-One-GUIDE-D..> 05-Nov-2012 07:37  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Dell-XPS 15-Manuel-d..> 03-Nov-2012 18:15  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-moniteur-D1920-..> 18-Oct-2012 16:43  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-poweredge-r210-..> 24-Oct-2012 07:41  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-poweredge-r520-..> 12-Nov-2012 16:58  2.7M  

[TXT]

 Dell-server-poweredg..> 12-Nov-2012 16:56  2.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-server-poweredg..> 24-Oct-2012 07:40  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Dell-server-poweredg..> 24-Oct-2012 07:37  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Dell-server-poweredg..> 24-Oct-2012 07:40  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Dell-server-poweredg..> 24-Oct-2012 07:39  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Dell-server-poweredg..> 24-Oct-2012 07:39  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Dell-xps-13-l321x_se..> 12-Nov-2012 17:00  1.9M  

[TXT]

 DellDimension1100Ser..> 18-Oct-2012 16:59  3.4M  

[TXT]

 IOGEAR-Guide-d-insta..> 05-Nov-2012 14:58  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Imprimante-Dell-Phot..> 18-Oct-2012 16:39  2.6M  

[TXT]

 Imprimante-laser-de-..> 18-Oct-2012 16:53  3.2M  

[TXT]

 Imprimante-personnel..> 18-Oct-2012 16:57  3.4M  

[TXT]

 Lien-Manuels-Utilisa..> 19-Nov-2012 07:12   92K  

[TXT]

 Planification-du-dep..> 05-Nov-2012 14:57  3.1M  

[TXT]

 Projecteur-Dell-1201..> 29-Oct-2012 07:40  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Systemes-Dell-PowerE..> 25-Oct-2012 18:29  2.8M  

[TXT]

 alienwareX51.htm        18-Oct-2012 16:37  2.5M 

http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_printers_main/esuprt_printers/dell-1130n_User's%20Guide_en-us.pdf ftp://ftp.dell.com/Manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_cloud_products/poweredge-c8000_owner's%20manual3_en-us.pdf http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_printers_main/esuprt_printers/dell-2145cn_User's%20Guide_da-dk.pdf http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_powervault/powervault-md3200i_Setup%20Guide_cs-cz.pdf http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_powervault/powervault-md3200_Setup%20Guide_de-de.pdf http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_powervault/powervault-md3220i_Setup%20Guide_fr-fr.pdf http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_printers_main/esuprt_printers/dell-1815dn_User's%20Guide_fr-fr.pdf http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_powervault/powervault-dp500_owner's%20manual3_fr-fr.pdf http://ftp.dell.com/Manuals/Common/inspiron-5100_setup%20guide_fr-fr.pdf http://support.dell.com/support/edocs/systems/Vos3360/fr/OM/om_fr.pdf http://support.euro.dell.com/support/edocs/systems/Alw_dt_Area_51/en/sm/sm_en.pdf http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_laptop/esuprt_alienware_laptops/alienware-m11x_Reference%20Guide_fr-fr.pdf http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_laptop/esuprt_alienware_laptops/alienware-m18x_user's%20guide_fr-fr.pdf http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_rack_infrastructure/dell-line-interactive-tower-ups-500t_User's%20Guide9_fr-fr.pdf http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_poweredge/poweredge-2800_User's%20Guide12_fr-fr.pdf http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_powervault/powervault-md3220i_Owner's%20Manual_fr-fr.pdf http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_equallogic/dell-dx6000_Owner's%20Manual_fr-fr.pdf http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_rack_infrastructure/dell-line-interactive-tower-ups-500t_User's%20Guide10_fr-fr.pdf http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_laptop/esuprt_precision_mobile/precision-m4700_Owner's%20Manual_fr-fr.pdf http://ftp.dell.com/manuals/all-products/esuprt_ser_stor_net/esuprt_powervault/powervault-md3200_Setup%20Guide_es-mx.pdf

Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual Before You Begin Removing the Computer Cover About Your Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Computer Advanced Troubleshooting Removing and Installing Parts Replacing the Computer Cover Specifications Technical Overview System Setup Notes, Notices, and Cautions If you purchased a Dell™ n Series computer, any references in this document to Microsoft® Windows® operating systems are not applicable. Information in this document is subject to change without notice. © 2005 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo, and Dimension are trademarks of Dell Inc.; Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation; Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. Model DCSM October 2005     Rev. A01 NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer. NOTICE: A NOTICE indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death.Back to Contents Page  About Your Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Computer  Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual Front View of the Computer Back View of the Computer Front View of the Computer 1 cover latch release Use this latch to remove the computer cover. 2 location of Service Tag Use the Service Tag to identify your computer when you access the Dell Support website or call technical support. 3 CD or DVD eject button Press to eject a disk from the CD or DVD drive. 4 CD or DVD activity light The drive light is on when the computer reads data from the CD or DVD drive. 5 FlexBay Can contain an optional floppy drive or optional Media Card Reader. For more information about the Media Card Reader, see your computer Owner's Manual. 6 microphone connector Use the microphone connector to attach a personal computer microphone for voice or musical input into a sound or telephony program. On computers with a sound card, the microphone connector is on the card. 7 headphone connector Use the headphone connector to attach headphones. 8 diagnostic lights (4) Use the lights to help you troubleshoot a computer problem based on the diagnostic code. For more information, see "Diagnostic Lights." 9 hard-drive activity light The hard drive activity light is on when the computer reads data from or writes data to the hard drive. The light might also be on when a device such as a CD player is operating. 10 power button, power light Press the power button to turn on the computer. The power light in the center of this button indicates the power state. See "Specifications" for more information. NOTICE: To avoid losing data, do not use the power button to turn off the computer. Instead, perform an operating system shutdown. 11 USB 2.0 connectors (2) Use the front USB connectors for devices that you connect occasionally, such as joysticks or cameras. It is recommended that you use the back USB connectors for devices that typically remain connected, such as printers, keyboards, and mice, or for bootable USB devices, which may not function properly if attached to the front connectors. 12 vents For adequate cooling, do not block any of the vents. NOTICE: Ensure that there is a minimum of two inches of space between all vents and any object near these vents.Back View of the Computer NOTICE: Do not lift or carry the computer by the vents to avoid damage to the computer. NOTICE: Keep the vent area clean and dust-free to ensure that the computer is adequately ventilated. Use only a dry cloth to clean the vent area to avoid water damage to the computer. 1 voltage selection switch (may not be available on all computers) See the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide for more information. 2 power connector Insert the power cable. 3 back panel connectors Plug USB, audio, and other devices into the appropriate connector. 4 card slots Access connectors for any installed PCI and PCI Express cards. 1 link integrity light l Green — A good connection exists between a 10-Mbps network and the computer. l Orange — A good connection exists between a 100-Mbps network and the computer. l Off — The computer is not detecting a physical connection to the network. 2 network adapter connector To attach your computer to a network or broadband device, connect one end of a network cable to either a network jack or your network or broadband device. Connect the other end of the network cable to the network adapter connector on the back panel of your computer. A click indicates that the network cable has been securely attached. NOTE: Do not plug a telephone cable into the network connector. On computers with a network connector card, use the connector on the card. It is recommended that you use Category 5 wiring and connectors for your network. If you must use Category 3 wiring, force the network speed to 10 Mbps to ensure reliable operation. 3 network activity light Flashes a yellow light when the computer is transmitting or receiving network data. A high volume of network traffic may make this light appear to be in a steady "on" state.Back to Contents Page 4 surround connector Use the black surround connector to attach multichannel-capable speakers. 5 line-in connector Use the blue line-in connector to attach a record/playback device such as a cassette player, CD player, or VCR. On computers with a sound card, use the connector on the card. 6 line-out connector Use the green line-out connector (available on computers with integrated sound) to attach headphones and most speakers with integrated amplifiers. On computers with a sound card, use the connector on the card. 7 micro-phone/side surround connector Use the pink and silver connector to attach a personal computer microphone for voice or musical input into a sound or telephony program. On computers with a sound card, the microphone connector is on the card. The side-surround output provides enhanced surround audio for computers with 7.1 speakers. 8 center/subwoofer connector Use the yellow connector to attach a speaker to a Low Frequency Effects (LFE) audio channel. 9 VGA video connector If your monitor has a VGA connector, plug it into the VGA connector on the computer. 10 USB 2.0 connectors (5) Use the back USB connectors for devices that typically remain connected, such as printers, keyboards, and mice, or for bootable USB devices which may not function properly if attached to the front connectors (see "System Setup" for more information on booting to a USB device) It is recommended that you use the front USB connectors for devices that you connect occasionally, such as joysticks or cameras.Back to Contents Page  About Your Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Computer  Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual Front View of the Computer Back View of the Computer Front View of the Computer 1 cover latch release Use this latch to remove the computer cover. 2 location of Service Tag Use the Service Tag to identify your computer when you access the Dell Support website or call technical support. 3 CD or DVD eject button Press to eject a disk from the CD or DVD drive. 4 CD or DVD activity light The drive light is on when the computer reads data from the CD or DVD drive. 5 FlexBay Can contain an optional floppy drive or optional Media Card Reader. For more information about the Media Card Reader, see your computer Owner's Manual. 6 microphone connector Use the microphone connector to attach a personal computer microphone for voice or musical input into a sound or telephony program. On computers with a sound card, the microphone connector is on the card. 7 headphone connector Use the headphone connector to attach headphones. 8 diagnostic lights (4) Use the lights to help you troubleshoot a computer problem based on the diagnostic code. For more information, see "Diagnostic Lights." 9 hard-drive activity light The hard drive activity light is on when the computer reads data from or writes data to the hard drive. The light might also be on when a device such as a CD player is operating. 10 power button, power light Press the power button to turn on the computer. The power light in the center of this button indicates the power state. See "Specifications" for more information. NOTICE: To avoid losing data, do not use the power button to turn off the computer. Instead, perform an operating system shutdown. 11 USB 2.0 connectors (2) Use the front USB connectors for devices that you connect occasionally, such as joysticks or cameras. It is recommended that you use the back USB connectors for devices that typically remain connected, such as printers, keyboards, and mice, or for bootable USB devices, which may not function properly if attached to the front connectors. 12 vents For adequate cooling, do not block any of the vents. NOTICE: Ensure that there is a minimum of two inches of space between all vents and any object near these vents. NOTICE: Do not lift or carry the computer by the vents to avoid damage to the computer.Back View of the Computer NOTICE: Keep the vent area clean and dust-free to ensure that the computer is adequately ventilated. Use only a dry cloth to clean the vent area to avoid water damage to the computer. 1 voltage selection switch (may not be available on all computers) See the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide for more information. 2 power connector Insert the power cable. 3 back panel connectors Plug USB, audio, and other devices into the appropriate connector. 4 card slots Access connectors for any installed PCI and PCI Express cards. 1 link integrity light l Green — A good connection exists between a 10-Mbps network and the computer. l Orange — A good connection exists between a 100-Mbps network and the computer. l Off — The computer is not detecting a physical connection to the network. 2 network adapter connector To attach your computer to a network or broadband device, connect one end of a network cable to either a network jack or your network or broadband device. Connect the other end of the network cable to the network adapter connector on the back panel of your computer. A click indicates that the network cable has been securely attached. NOTE: Do not plug a telephone cable into the network connector. On computers with a network connector card, use the connector on the card. It is recommended that you use Category 5 wiring and connectors for your network. If you must use Category 3 wiring, force the network speed to 10 Mbps to ensure reliable operation. 3 network activity light Flashes a yellow light when the computer is transmitting or receiving network data. A high volume of network traffic may make this light appear to be in a steady "on" state. 4 surround connector Use the black surround connector to attach multichannel-capable speakers. 5 line-in connector Use the blue line-in connector to attach a record/playback device such as a cassette player, CD player, or VCR. On computers with a sound card, use the connector on the card. 6 line-out connector Use the green line-out connector (available on computers with integrated sound) to attach headphones and most speakers with integrated amplifiers. On computers with a sound card, use the connector on the card. 7 micro-phone/side surround connector Use the pink and silver connector to attach a personal computer microphone for voice or musical input into a sound or telephony program. On computers with a sound card, the microphone connector is on the card.Back to Contents Page The side-surround output provides enhanced surround audio for computers with 7.1 speakers. 8 center/subwoofer connector Use the yellow connector to attach a speaker to a Low Frequency Effects (LFE) audio channel. 9 VGA video connector If your monitor has a VGA connector, plug it into the VGA connector on the computer. 10 USB 2.0 connectors (5) Use the back USB connectors for devices that typically remain connected, such as printers, keyboards, and mice, or for bootable USB devices which may not function properly if attached to the front connectors (see "System Setup" for more information on booting to a USB device) It is recommended that you use the front USB connectors for devices that you connect occasionally, such as joysticks or cameras.Back to Contents Page Before You Begin Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual Getting Started Recommended Tools Turning Off Your Computer Before Working Inside Your Computer Getting Started This section provides procedures for removing and installing the components in your computer. Unless otherwise noted, each procedure assumes that the following conditions exist: l You have performed the steps in "Turning Off Your Computer" and "Before Working Inside Your Computer." l You have read the safety information in your Dell™ Product Information Guide. l A component can be replaced by performing the removal procedure in reverse order. Recommended Tools The procedures in this document may require the following tools: l Small flat-blade screwdriver l Phillips screwdriver l Flash BIOS update program floppy disk or CD Turning Off Your Computer 1. Shut down the operating system: a. Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, click the Start button, and then click Turn Off Computer. b. In the Turn off computer window, click Turn off. The computer turns off after the operating system shutdown process finishes. 2. Ensure that the computer and any attached devices are turned off. If your computer and attached devices did not automatically turn off when you shut down your operating system, press and hold the power button for 4 seconds. Before Working Inside Your Computer Use the following safety guidelines to help protect your computer from potential damage and to help ensure your own personal safety. 1. Turn off your computer. NOTICE: To avoid losing data, save and close any open files and exit any open programs before you turn off your computer. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: Handle components and cards with care. Do not touch the components or contacts on a card. Hold a card by its edges or by its metal mounting bracket. Hold a component such as a processor by its edges, not by its pins. NOTICE: Only a certified service technician should perform repairs on your computer. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered by your warranty. NOTICE: When you disconnect a cable, pull on its connector or on its strain-relief loop, not on the cable itself. Some cables have a connector with locking tabs; if you are disconnecting this type of cable, press in on the locking tabs before you disconnect the cable. As you pull connectors apart, keep them evenly aligned to avoid bending any connector pins. Also, before you connect a cable, ensure that both connectors are correctly oriented and aligned. NOTICE: To avoid damaging the computer, perform the following steps before you begin working inside the computer. NOTICE: To disconnect a network cable, first unplug the cable from your computer and then unplug it from the network port or device.2. Disconnect any telephone or telecommunication lines from the computer. 3. Disconnect your computer and all attached devices from their electrical outlets, and then press the power button to ground the system board. 4. Remove the computer cover. Back to Contents Page CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before opening the cover. NOTICE: Before touching anything inside your computer, ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface, such as the metal at the back of the computer. While you work, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface to dissipate any static electricity that could harm internal components.Back to Contents Page Before You Begin Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual Getting Started Recommended Tools Turning Off Your Computer Before Working Inside Your Computer Getting Started This section provides procedures for removing and installing the components in your computer. Unless otherwise noted, each procedure assumes that the following conditions exist: l You have performed the steps in "Turning Off Your Computer" and "Before Working Inside Your Computer." l You have read the safety information in your Dell™ Product Information Guide. l A component can be replaced by performing the removal procedure in reverse order. Recommended Tools The procedures in this document may require the following tools: l Small flat-blade screwdriver l Phillips screwdriver l Flash BIOS update program floppy disk or CD Turning Off Your Computer 1. Shut down the operating system: a. Save and close any open files, exit any open programs, click the Start button, and then click Turn Off Computer. b. In the Turn off computer window, click Turn off. The computer turns off after the operating system shutdown process finishes. 2. Ensure that the computer and any attached devices are turned off. If your computer and attached devices did not automatically turn off when you shut down your operating system, press and hold the power button for 4 seconds. Before Working Inside Your Computer Use the following safety guidelines to help protect your computer from potential damage and to help ensure your own personal safety. 1. Turn off your computer. NOTICE: To avoid losing data, save and close any open files and exit any open programs before you turn off your computer. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: Handle components and cards with care. Do not touch the components or contacts on a card. Hold a card by its edges or by its metal mounting bracket. Hold a component such as a processor by its edges, not by its pins. NOTICE: Only a certified service technician should perform repairs on your computer. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered by your warranty. NOTICE: When you disconnect a cable, pull on its connector or on its strain-relief loop, not on the cable itself. Some cables have a connector with locking tabs; if you are disconnecting this type of cable, press in on the locking tabs before you disconnect the cable. As you pull connectors apart, keep them evenly aligned to avoid bending any connector pins. Also, before you connect a cable, ensure that both connectors are correctly oriented and aligned. NOTICE: To avoid damaging the computer, perform the following steps before you begin working inside the computer. NOTICE: To disconnect a network cable, first unplug the cable from your computer and then unplug it from the network port or device.2. Disconnect any telephone or telecommunication lines from the computer. 3. Disconnect your computer and all attached devices from their electrical outlets, and then press the power button to ground the system board. 4. Remove the computer cover. Back to Contents Page CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before opening the cover. NOTICE: Before touching anything inside your computer, ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface, such as the metal at the back of the computer. While you work, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface to dissipate any static electricity that could harm internal components.Back to Contents Page Replacing the Computer Cover Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual 1. Ensure that all cables are connected, and fold cables out of the way. 2. Ensure that no tools or extra parts are left inside the computer. 3. Align the bottom of the cover with the tabs located along the bottom edge of the computer. 4. Using the tabs as leverage, rotate the cover downward and press down to close it. 5. Ensure that the cover is seated correctly before moving it to the upright position. 6. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. Back to Contents Page CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer.Back to Contents Page Replacing the Computer Cover Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual 1. Ensure that all cables are connected, and fold cables out of the way. 2. Ensure that no tools or extra parts are left inside the computer. 3. Align the bottom of the cover with the tabs located along the bottom edge of the computer. 4. Using the tabs as leverage, rotate the cover downward and press down to close it. 5. Ensure that the cover is seated correctly before moving it to the upright position. 6. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. Back to Contents Page CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer.Back to Contents Page Removing the Computer Cover Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Lay your computer on its side with the computer cover facing up. 3. Pull back the cover latch release located on the top panel. Back to Contents Page CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover. NOTICE: Ensure that sufficient space exists to support the removed cover—at least 30 cm (1 ft) of desk top space. NOTICE: Ensure that you are working on a level, protected surface to avoid scratching either the computer or the surface on which it is resting.Back to Contents Page Removing the Computer Cover Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Lay your computer on its side with the computer cover facing up. 3. Pull back the cover latch release located on the top panel. Back to Contents Page CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover. NOTICE: Ensure that sufficient space exists to support the removed cover—at least 30 cm (1 ft) of desk top space. NOTICE: Ensure that you are working on a level, protected surface to avoid scratching either the computer or the surface on which it is resting.Back to Contents Page Removing and Installing Parts Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual Memory You can increase your computer memory by installing memory modules on the system board. Your computer supports DDR2 memory. For additional information on the type of memory supported by your computer, see your Owner's Manual. DDR2 Memory Overview DDR2 memory modules should be installed in pairs of matched memory size, speed, and technology. If the DDR2 memory modules are not installed in matched pairs, the computer will continue to operate, but with a slight reduction in performance. See the label on the module to determine the module's capacity. The recommended memory configurations are: ¡ A pair of matched memory modules installed in DIMM connectors 1 and 2 or ¡ A pair of matched memory modules installed in DIMM connectors 1 and 2 and another matched pair installed in DIMM connectors 3 and 4 l If you install mixed pairs of DDR2 400-MHz (PC2-3200) and DDR2 533-MHz (PC2-4300) memory, the modules function at the slowest speed installed. l Be sure to install a single memory module in DIMM connector 1, the connector closest to the processor, before you install modules in the other connectors. Memory CD/DVD Drive Cards Heat-Sink Assembly Drive Panel Processor Front Panel Fan Assembly Drives Front I/O Panel Hard Drive System Board Floppy Drive Power Supply Media Card Reader (Optional) NOTE: Always install DDR2 memory modules in the order indicated on the system board. NOTICE: Do not install ECC or buffered memory modules. Only unbuffered, non-ECC memory is supported. NOTE: If you install DDR2 667-MHz memory, the speed is reduced to 533 MHz. NOTE: Memory purchased from Dell is covered under your computer warranty.Addressing Memory With 4-GB Configurations Your computer supports a maximum of 4 GB of memory when you use four 1-GB DIMMs. Current operating systems, such as Microsoft® Windows® XP, can only use a maximum of 4 GB of address space; however, the amount of memory available to the operating system is less than 4 GB. Certain components within the computer require address space in the 4-GB range. Any address space reserved for these components cannot be used by computer memory. Removing Memory 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Press out the securing clip at each end of the memory module connector. 4. Grasp the module and pull up. If the module is difficult to remove, gently ease the module back and forth to remove it from the connector. Installing Memory 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Press out the securing clip at each end of the memory module connector. 4. Align the notch on the bottom of the module with the crossbar in the connector. NOTICE: If you remove your original memory modules from the computer during a memory upgrade, keep them separate from any new modules that you may have, even if you purchased the new modules from Dell. If possible, do not pair an original memory module with a new memory module. Otherwise, your computer may not start properly. You should install your original memory modules in pairs either in DIMM connectors 1 and 2 or DIMM connectors 3 and 4. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis. 1 memory connector closest to processor 2 securing clips (2) 3 memory connector5. Insert the module into the connector until the module snaps into position. If you insert the module correctly, the securing clips snap into the cutouts at each end of the module. 6. Replace the computer cover. 7. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. 8. When a message appears, stating that memory size has changed, press to continue. 9. Log on to your computer. 10. Right-click the My Computer icon on your Microsoft® Windows® desktop and click Properties. 11. Click the General tab. 12. To verify that the memory is installed correctly, check the amount of memory (RAM) listed. Cards Your Dell™ computer provides the following slots for PCI and PCI Express cards: l Two PCI card slots l One PCI Express x16 card slot l One PCI Express x1 card slot PCI Cards Your computer supports two PCI cards. 1 notch 2 memory module 3 cutouts (2) 4 crossbar NOTICE: To avoid damage to the memory module, press the module straight down into the connector while you apply equal force to each end of the module. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.If you are installing or replacing a card, follow the procedures in the next section. If you are removing but not replacing a PCI card, see "Removing a PCI Card." If you are replacing a card, remove the current driver for the card from the operating system. If you are installing or replacing a PCI Express card, see "Installing a PCI Express Card." Installing a PCI Card 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Gently push the release tab on the card retention door from the inside to pivot the door open. Because the door is captive, it will remain in the open position. 4. If you are installing a new card, remove the filler bracket to create a card-slot opening. Then continue with step 6. 5. If you are replacing a card that is already installed in the computer, remove the card. If necessary, disconnect any cables connected to the card. Grasp the card by its top corners, and ease it out of its connector. 6. Prepare the card for installation. See the documentation that came with the card for information on configuring the card, making internal connections, or otherwise customizing it for your computer. 7. Place the card in the connector and press down firmly. Ensure that the card is fully seated in the slot. 1 release tab 2 card retention door CAUTION: Some network adapters automatically start the computer when they are connected to a network. To guard against electrical shock, be sure to unplug your computer from its electrical outlet before installing any cards.8. Before you close the card retention door, ensure that: l The tops of all cards and filler brackets are flush with the alignment bar. l The notch in the top of the card or filler bracket fits around the alignment guide. 9. Close the card retention door by snapping it into place to secure the card(s). 10. Connect any cables that should be attached to the card. See the documentation for the card for information about the card's cable connections. 11. Replace the computer cover, reconnect the computer and devices to electrical outlets, and then turn them on. 12. If you installed a sound card: a. Enter system setup, select Audio Controller, and then change the setting to Off. b. Connect external audio devices to the sound card's connectors. Do not connect external audio devices to the microphone, speaker/headphone, or line-in connectors on the back panel. 13. If you installed an add-in network adapter and want to disable the integrated network adapter: 1 bracket within slot 4 alignment guide 2 bracket caught outside of slot 5 fully seated card 3 alignment bar 6 not fully seated card 1 alignment guide 3 release tab 2 alignment bar 4 card retention door NOTICE: Do not route card cables over or behind the cards. Cables routed over the cards can prevent the computer cover from closing properly or cause damage to the equipment. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer.a. Enter system setup, select Integrated NIC, and then change the setting to Off. b. Connect the network cable to the add-in network adapter's connectors. Do not connect the network cable to the integrated connector on the back panel. 14. Install any drivers required for the card as described in the card documentation. Removing a PCI Card 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Gently push the release tab on the card retention door from the inside to pivot the door open. Because the door is captive, it will remain in the open position. 4. If you are removing the card permanently, install a filler bracket in the empty card-slot opening. If you need a filler bracket, contact Dell (see your Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell). 5. Close the card retention door by snapping it into place to secure the card(s). 6. Replace the computer cover, reconnect the computer and devices to electrical outlets, and then turn them on. 7. Remove the card's driver from the operating system. 8. If you removed a sound card: a. Enter system setup, select Audio Controller, and then change the setting to On. b. Connect external audio devices to the audio connectors on the back panel of the computer. 9. If you removed an add-in network connector: a. Enter system setup, select Integrated NIC, and then change the setting to On. b. Connect the network cable to the integrated connector on the back panel of the computer. PCI Express Cards Your computer supports one PCI Express x16 card and one PCI Express x1 card. If you are installing or replacing a PCI Express card, follow the procedures in the next section. If you are removing but not replacing a card, see "Removing a PCI Express Card." If you are replacing a card, remove the current driver for the card from the operating system. If you are installing or replacing a PCI card, see "Installing a PCI Card." Installing a PCI Express Card 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. NOTE: Installing filler brackets over empty card-slot openings is necessary to maintain FCC certification of the computer. The brackets also keep dust and dirt out of your computer. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer.3. Gently push the release tab on the card retention door from the inside to pivot the door open. Because the door is captive, it will remain in the open position. 4. If your computer includes a card retention mechanism, to secure the x16 card in place from the top: a. Pivot the mechanism upward and gently squeeze in on the sides to release the mechanism from the two tab slots holding it in place. b. Set the retention mechanism aside in a secure location. 5. If you are installing a new card, remove the filler bracket to create a card-slot opening. Then continue with step 6. 6. If you are replacing a card that is already installed in the computer, remove the card. If necessary, disconnect any cables connected to the card. If your computer includes a card retention mechanism, remove the top of the retention mechanism by pressing the tab and pulling up on the top. Gently pull the securing tab, grasp the card by its top corners, and then ease it out of its connector. 7. Prepare the card for installation. See the documentation that came with the card for information on configuring the card, making internal connections, or otherwise customizing it for your computer. 8. If you are installing the card into the x16 card connector, position the card so the securing slot is aligned with the securing tab, and gently pull the securing tab. 9. Place the card in the connector and press down firmly. Ensure that the card is fully seated in the slot. 1 card retention door 2 card retention mechanism 3 release tabs (2) 1 securing tab 4 PCI Express x16 card slot 2 PCI Express x1 card 5 PCI Express x16 card 3 PCI Express x1 card slot CAUTION: Some network adapters automatically start the computer when they are connected to a network. To guard against electrical shock, be sure to unplug your computer from its electrical outlet before installing any cards. NOTICE: Ensure that you release the securing tab to unseat the card. If the card is not removed correctly, the system board may be damaged.10. If you replaced a card that was already installed in the computer and you removed the retention mechanism, you may reinstall the retention mechanism. 11. Before replacing the card retention mechanism, ensure that: l The tops of all cards and filler brackets are flush with the alignment bar. l The notch in the top of the card or filler bracket fits around the alignment guide. 12. Snap the card retention mechanism into place, securing the x16 PCI card. 13. Replace the computer cover, reconnect the computer and devices to electrical outlets, and then turn them on. 14. If you installed a sound card: a. Enter system setup, select Audio Controller, and then change the setting to Off. b. Connect external audio devices to the sound card's connectors. Do not connect external audio devices to the microphone, speaker/headphone, or line-in connectors on the back panel. 15. If you installed an add-in network adapter and want to disable the integrated network adapter: a. Enter system setup, select Integrated NIC, and then change the setting to Off. b. Connect the network cable to the add-in network adapter's connectors. Do not connect the network cable to the integrated connector on the back panel. 16. Install any drivers required for the card as described in the card documentation. 1 bracket within slot 4 alignment guide 2 bracket caught outside of slot 5 fully seated card 3 alignment bar 6 not fully seated card 1 card retention door 2 card retention mechanism 3 release tabs (2) NOTICE: Do not route card cables over or behind the cards. Cables routed over the cards can prevent the computer cover from closing properly or cause damage to the equipment. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer.Removing a PCI Express Card 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Gently push the release tab on the card retention door from the inside to pivot the door open. Because the door is captive, it will remain in the open position. 4. If your computer includes a card retention mechanism, to secure the x16 card in place from the top: a. Pivot the mechanism upward and gently squeeze in on the sides to release the mechanism from the two tab slots holding it in place. b. Set the retention mechanism aside in a secure location. 5. If you are removing the card permanently, install a filler bracket in the empty card-slot opening. If you need a filler bracket, contact Dell (see your Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell). 6. Reseat the card retention mechanism in the tabs and pivot downward to snap it into place. 7. Close the card retention door to snap it into place, securing the card(s). 8. Replace the computer cover, reconnect the computer and devices to electrical outlets, and then turn them on. 9. Remove the card's driver from the operating system. 10. If you removed a sound card: a. Enter system setup, select Audio Controller, and then change the setting to On. b. Connect external audio devices to the audio connectors on the back panel of the computer. 11. If you removed an add-in network connector: a. Enter system setup, select Integrated NIC, and then change the setting to On. b. Connect the network cable to the integrated connector on the back panel of the computer. 12. Install any drivers required for the card as described in the card documentation. Drive Panel Removing the Drive Panel 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. NOTE: Installing filler brackets over empty card-slot openings is necessary to maintain FCC certification of the computer. The brackets also keep dust and dirt out of your computer. NOTE: When you install a filler bracket, ensure that the bracket is seated correctly. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover.3. Grasping the sliding plate lever, slide and hold the sliding plate until the drive panel snaps open. 4. Pivot the drive panel outward and lift away from the computer. 5. Set the drive panel aside in a secure location. Removing the Drive-Panel Insert 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Remove the drive panel. 1. Turn the drive panel sideways and find the tip of the drive-panel insert tab that latches over a tab on the right side of the drive panel. 2. Pull the inner tip of the drive-panel insert tab away from the drive panel. 1 sliding plate lever 3 drive panel 2 sliding plate 4 front panel NOTE: The sliding plate secures and releases the drive panel and helps to secure the drives. 1 drive-panel insert tab 2 drive-panel insert 3 drive panel3. Pivot the drive-panel insert out and away from the drive panel. 4. Set the drive-panel insert aside in a secure location. Replacing the Drive-Panel Insert 1. Slide the tab on the left side of the drive-panel insert under the center-drive panel tab. 2. Rotate the drive-panel insert into place and snap the drive-panel insert tab over the corresponding tab on the drive panel. Replacing the Drive Panel 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover if you have not already done so. 3. If you are installing a replacement drive panel, remove the old drive panel. 4. Align the drive panel tabs with the side-door hinges. 5. Rotate the drive panel toward the computer until it snaps into place on the front panel. 1 drive-panel insert tab 3 center drive-panel tab 2 drive panel insert 4 drive panel 1 sliding plate lever 3 drive panel 2 sliding plate 4 front panelFront Panel Removing the Front Panel 1. Remove the computer cover. 2. Remove the drive panel. 3. Remove the hard drive and second hard drive, if applicable. 4. Remove the two front-panel screws. 5. Using a small, flat-blade screwdriver, press the four top front-panel release tabs upwards and press down on the four bottom release tabs to loosen the front panel. 6. Starting from the bottom of the front panel, pivot the panel toward the top of the computer and remove the panel. Drives Your computer supports a combination of these devices: l Up to two serial ATA hard drives l One FlexBay drive (may contain an optional floppy drive or an optional Media Card Reader) l Up to two CD or DVD drives CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover. NOTICE: Use care when handling the front-panel release tabs to avoid damaging them. 1 top front-panel release tabs (4) 2 front-panel screws (2) 3 front panel 4 bottom front-panel release tabs (4)Connect CD/DVD drives to the connector labeled "IDE1" on the system board. Serial ATA hard drives should be connected to the connectors labeled "SATA0" or "SATA2" on the system board. IDE Drive Addressing When you connect two IDE devices to a single IDE interface cable and configure them for the cable select setting, the device attached to the last connector on the interface cable is the master or boot device (drive 0), and the device attached to the middle connector on the interface cable is the slave device (drive 1). See the drive documentation in your upgrade kit for information on configuring devices for the cable select setting. Connecting and Disconnecting Drive Interface Cables When you install a drive, you connect two cables—a DC power cable and a data cable—to the back of the drive and to the system board. When removing an IDE drive data cable, grasp the colored pull-tab and pull until the connector detaches. Most interface connectors are keyed for correct insertion; that is, a notch or a missing pin on one connector matches a tab or a filled-in hole on the other connector. Keyed connectors ensure that the pin-1 wire in the cable (indicated by the colored stripe along one edge of the IDE cable—serial ATA cables do not use a colored stripe) goes to the pin-1 end of the connector. The pin-1 end of a connector on a board or a card is usually indicated by a silk-screened "1" printed directly on the board or card. Power Cable Connector To connect a drive using the power cable, locate the power connector on the power supply. 1 CD/DVD drive(s) 2 FlexBay for optional floppy drive or optional Media Card Reader 3 hard drive(s) NOTICE: When you connect an IDE interface cable, do not place the colored stripe away from pin 1 of the connector. Reversing the cable prevents the drive from operating and could damage the controller, the drive, or both. 1 interface cable 2 interface connectorHard Drive Check the documentation for the drive to verify that it is configured for your computer. Removing a Hard Drive 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Disconnect the power and data cables from the drive. 4. Press the blue tabs on either side of the hard drive bracket toward each other and slide the drive up and out of the computer. 1 SATA power cable connector 3 power cable connector 2 power connector 4 power connector CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer. NOTICE: To avoid damage to the drive, do not set it on a hard surface. Instead, set the drive on a surface, such as a foam pad, that will sufficiently cushion it. NOTICE: If you are replacing a hard drive that contains data you want to keep, back up your files before you begin this procedure. NOTICE: Use the pull-tab to remove the data cable from your hard drive or from the system board. 1 serial ATA data cable 2 power cableInstalling a Hard Drive 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. If you are installing a replacement hard drive, remove the old hard drive. 4. Unpack the replacement hard drive, and prepare it for installation. 5. Check the documentation for the drive to verify that it is configured for your computer. 6. Gently slide the drive into place until you feel a click or feel the drive securely installed. 7. Connect the power and hard-drive cables to the drive. 1 hard drive 2 tabs (2) NOTE: If your replacement hard drive does not have the hard drive bracket attached, remove the bracket from the old drive by unsnapping it from the drive. Snap the bracket onto the new drive. 1 drive 2 hard drive bracket 1 serial ATA data cable8. Check all connectors to be certain that they are properly cabled and firmly seated. 9. Replace the computer cover. 10. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. See the documentation that came with the drive for instructions on installing any software required for drive operation. Adding a Second Hard Drive 1. Check the documentation for the drive to verify that it is configured for your computer. 2. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 3. Remove the computer cover. 4. Press the blue release tabs on each side of the hard drive bracket toward each other and slide the drive up and out of the computer. 5. Snap the bracket onto the hard drive. 6. Gently slide the new drive (the second hard drive) into place until you feel a click or feel the drive securely installed. 7. Connect a power cable to the drive. 8. Connect the data cable to the drive and to the system board. Floppy Drive 2 power cable NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer. NOTICE: To avoid damage to the drive, do not set it on a hard surface. Instead, set the drive on a surface, such as a foam pad, that will sufficiently cushion it. 1 release tabs (2) 3 hard drive bay 2 second hard drive in lower bay 4 primary hard drive in upper bay CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer.Removing a Floppy Drive 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Remove the drive panel. 4. Disconnect the power and data cables from the back of the floppy drive. 5. Slide the sliding plate lever toward the bottom of the computer and, without releasing the sliding plate lever, slide the floppy drive out through the front of the computer. NOTE: If you are adding a floppy drive, see "Installing a Floppy Drive." 1 power cable 2 data cable NOTE: If you are installing a PCI Express x16 card, the card may cover the floppy-drive connectors. Remove the card before connecting the floppy-drive cables. 1 sliding plate lever 2 sliding plate 3 floppy driveInstalling a Floppy Drive 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Remove the drive panel. 4. Slide the drive into place until you feel a click or feel the drive securely installed. 5. Attach the power and data cables to the floppy drive. 6. Connect the other end of the data cable to the connector labeled "DSKT2" on the system board and route the cable through the clip on the shroud. 7. Check all cable connections and fold cables out of the way to avoid blocking the fan and cooling vents. 8. Replace the drive panel. 9. Replace the computer cover. 10. Connect your computer and devices to their electrical outlets, and turn them on. See the documentation that came with the drive for instructions on installing any software required for drive operation. NOTE: If the new floppy drive does not include shoulder screws, use the screws within the drive panel insert. 1 drive 2 screws (4) NOTE: If you are installing a new drive, you need to remove the drive-panel insert. 1 power cable 2 data cable NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable in to the network port or device and then plug it in to the computer.11. Enter system setup and select the appropriate Diskette Drive option. 12. Verify that your computer works correctly by running the Dell Diagnostics. Media Card Reader (Optional) For information about using a Media Card Reader, see your Owner's Manual. Removing a Media Card Reader 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Remove the drive panel. 4. Disconnect the FlexBay USB cable on the back of the Media Card Reader from the Media Card Reader connector on the system board and route the cable through the cable routing clip. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis. 1 cable 2 Media Card Reader5. Slide the sliding plate toward the bottom of the computer and, without releasing the sliding plate, slide the Media Card Reader out through the front of the computer. 6. Replace the drive panel. 7. Replace the computer cover. Installing a Media Card Reader 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Remove the drive panel. 4. Remove the Media Card Reader and bracket from its packaging and ensure that all of the screws are included. 1 sliding plate lever 2 sliding plate 3 Media Card Reader CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis. 1 Media Card Reader 2 screws (4)5. Slide the Media Card Reader into place until you feel a click or feel the drive securely installed. 6. Connect the FlexBay USB cable to the back of the Media Card Reader and to the Media Card Reader connector on the system board. 7. Route the FlexBay USB cable through the cable routing clip. 8. Replace the drive panel. 9. Replace the computer cover. CD/DVD Drive Removing a CD/DVD Drive 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Remove the drive panel. 4. Disconnect the power and data cables from the back of the drive. NOTE: Ensure that the Media Card Reader is installed before the FlexBay cable is connected. 1 Media Card Reader 2 FlexBay USB cable CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.5. Slide the sliding plate lever toward the bottom of the computer and, without releasing the sliding plate lever, slide the CD/DVD drive out through the front of the computer. Installing a CD/DVD Drive 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Remove the drive panel. 4. Slide the drive into place until you feel a click or feel the drive securely installed. NOTE: If you are installing a new drive, you need to remove the drive-panel insert.5. Connect the power and data cables to the drive. 6. Check all cable connections, and fold cables out of the way to avoid blocking the fan and cooling vents. 7. Replace the drive panel. 8. Replace the computer cover. 9. Connect your computer and devices to their electrical outlets, and turn them on. See the documentation that came with the drive for instructions on installing any software required for drive operation. 10. Enter system setup and select the appropriate Drive option. 11. Verify that your computer works correctly by running the Dell Diagnostics. Heat-Sink Assembly Removing the Heat-Sink Assembly NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable in to the network port or device and then plug it in to the computer. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Loosen the two captive screws that attach the heat-sink assembly to the system board on either side of the assembly. 4. Pivot the assembly toward the back of the computer and lift to remove the assembly. 5. Lay the assembly aside on its side. Processor Removing the Processor 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Remove the heat-sink assembly. 4. Open the processor cover: a. Push down on the release lever and slide the lever out from under the side latch on the processor socket. CAUTION: Despite having a plastic shield, the heat-sink assembly may be very hot during normal operation. Ensure that the assembly has had sufficient time to cool before you touch it. NOTE: To loosen the two captive screws on each side of the heat-sink assembly, you need a long Phillips screwdriver. NOTICE: After you remove the heat-sink assembly, lay the assembly on its side. Do not set the heat-sink assembly upright or touch the thermal interface, as this may result in damage to the thermal interface material. 1 heat-sink assembly 2 captive screws (2) NOTICE: When you install the heat-sink assembly, do not touch the thermal interface on its underside, as this may result in damage to the thermal interface material. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis. NOTICE: If you are installing a processor upgrade kit from Dell, discard the original heat-sink assembly. If you are not installing a processor upgrade kit from Dell, reuse the original heat-sink assembly when you install your new processor.b. Pull the lever back to release the processor cover. 1 processor cover 4 release lever 2 processor 5 side latch 5. Grasp the processor by the edges to remove it from the processor socket. Leave the release lever extended in the release position so that the socket is ready for the new processor. Installing the Processor 1. Unpack the new processor, being careful not to touch the underside of the processor. 2. If the release lever on the processor socket is not fully extended, move it to that position. 3. Orient the front and rear alignment notches on the processor with the front and rear alignment notches on the socket. 4. Align the pin-1 corners of the processor and socket. 3 processor socket NOTICE: When removing or replacing the processor, do not touch any of the pins inside the processor socket or allow any objects to fall onto the pins in the socket. NOTICE: Ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface on the back of the computer. NOTICE: When installing the processor, do not touch any of the pins inside the socket or allow any objects to fall onto the pins in the socket. NOTICE: You must position the processor correctly in the socket to avoid permanent damage to the processor and the computer when you turn on the computer. 1 processor cover 6 release lever5. Set the processor lightly in the socket and ensure that the processor is positioned correctly. 6. When the processor is fully seated in the socket, close the processor cover. Ensure that the tab on the processor cover is positioned underneath the release lever at the front of the socket. 7. Pivot the release lever back toward the socket and snap it into place under the side latch to secure the processor. If you installed a processor replacement kit from Dell, return the original heat-sink assembly and processor to Dell in the same package in which your replacement kit was sent. 8. Install the heat-sink assembly. 9. Replace the computer cover. 10. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. Fan Assembly Removing the Fan Assembly 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Remove the heat-sink assembly. 4. Press the release tab on the fan-cable connector on the system board to remove the connector. 2 tab 7 front alignment notch 3 processor 8 socket and processor pin-1 indicators 4 processor socket 9 rear alignment notch 5 cover latch NOTICE: To avoid damage, ensure that the processor aligns properly with the socket, and do not use excessive force when you install the processor. NOTICE: If you are not installing a processor upgrade kit from Dell, reuse the original heat-sink assembly when you replace the processor. NOTICE: When installing the heat-sink assembly, do not touch the thermal interface on its underside, as this may result in damage. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug the cable into the computer. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.5. Simultaneously press the fan-release tab on one side of the fan assembly and pull the fan- release tab located on the bottom of the opposite side of the assembly upwards. 6. Slide the fan assembly toward the back of the computer and lift to remove the assembly. Front I/O Panel Removing the Front I/O Panel 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Remove the heat-sink assembly. 4. Remove the fan assembly. 1 fan release tabs (2) 2 fan assembly 3 fan cable connector 4 release tab on fan cable connector CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.5. Remove the screw that secures the front I/O panel to the front of the computer. 6. Pull the I/O panel toward the back of the computer and lift the panel to remove from the computer. 7. Disconnect any cables from the I/O panel. System Board Jumper Settings The jumper locations are shown below. 1 screw 2 front I/O panelRemoving the System Board 1. Shut down the computer through the Start menu. 2. Ensure that your computer and attached devices are turned off. If your computer and attached devices did not automatically turn off when you shut down your computer, turn them off now. 3. Disconnect any telephone or telecommunication lines from the computer. 4. Disconnect your computer and all attached devices from their electrical outlets, and then press the power button to ground the system board. 5. Remove the computer cover. 6. Remove any components that restrict access to the system board (CD/DVD drive(s), floppy drive, hard drive, front I/O panel). 7. Remove the heat-sink assembly and processor. 8. Disconnect all cables from the system board. 9. Remove the eight system-board screws and the two mounting-bracket screws. 10. Slide the system board assembly toward the front of the computer, and then lift the board away. Jumper Setting Description PSWD (default) Password features are enabled. Password features are disabled. RTCRST (default) Real-time clock reset in normal operation. Clear CMOS settings. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before opening the cover. NOTICE: Before touching anything inside your computer, ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface, such as the metal at the back of the computer. While you work, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface to dissipate any static electricity that could harm internal components. NOTICE: To disconnect a network cable, first unplug the cable from your computer and then unplug it from the network port or device. NOTE: The mounting-bracket screws also hold the system board and need to be removed for the removal of the system board.11. Place the system board assembly that you just removed next to the replacement system board to ensure that it is identical. Replacing the System Board 1. Gently align the system board in the chassis and slide the board toward the back of the computer. 2. Replace the eight system-board screws and the two mounting-bracket screws. 3. Replace any components and cables that you removed from the system board. 4. Reconnect all cables to their connectors at the back of the computer. 5. Replace the computer cover. 6. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. Power Supply Removing the Power Supply 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Disconnect the DC power cables from the system board and the drives. 1 mounting-bracket screws (2) 2 system-board screws (8) NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device, and then plug the cable into the computer. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.4. Remove the four screws that attach the power supply to the back of the computer frame. 5. Press the release button located on the floor of the computer frame. 6. Slide the power supply toward the front of the computer approximately 1 inch. 7. Lift the power supply out of the computer. Replacing the Power Supply 1. Slide the power supply into place. 2. Replace the screws that secure the power supply to the back of the computer frame. 3. Reconnect the DC power cables. 4. Route the cables through the routing clips, and press the clips to close them over the cables. 5. Replace the computer cover. 6. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. Back to Contents Page 1 release button 2 power supply 3 screws (4) 4 AC power connector NOTICE: Note the routing of the DC power cables underneath the routing clips in the computer frame as you remove them from the system board and drives. You must route these cables properly when you replace them to prevent them from being pinched or crimped. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTICE: You must route the DC power cables properly through the routing clips when you replace the cables to prevent them from being pinched or crimped. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug the cable into the computer.Back to Contents Page Removing and Installing Parts Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual Memory You can increase your computer memory by installing memory modules on the system board. Your computer supports DDR2 memory. For additional information on the type of memory supported by your computer, see your Owner's Manual. DDR2 Memory Overview DDR2 memory modules should be installed in pairs of matched memory size, speed, and technology. If the DDR2 memory modules are not installed in matched pairs, the computer will continue to operate, but with a slight reduction in performance. See the label on the module to determine the module's capacity. The recommended memory configurations are: ¡ A pair of matched memory modules installed in DIMM connectors 1 and 2 or ¡ A pair of matched memory modules installed in DIMM connectors 1 and 2 and another matched pair installed in DIMM connectors 3 and 4 l If you install mixed pairs of DDR2 400-MHz (PC2-3200) and DDR2 533-MHz (PC2-4300) memory, the modules function at the slowest speed installed. l Be sure to install a single memory module in DIMM connector 1, the connector closest to the processor, before you install modules in the other connectors. Memory Cards Drive Panel Front Panel Drives Hard Drive Floppy Drive Media Card Reader (Optional) CD/DVD Drive Heat-Sink Assembly Processor Fan Assembly Front I/O Panel System Board Power Supply NOTE: Always install DDR2 memory modules in the order indicated on the system board. NOTICE: Do not install ECC or buffered memory modules. Only unbuffered, non-ECC memory is supported. NOTE: If you install DDR2 667-MHz memory, the speed is reduced to 533 MHz.Addressing Memory With 4-GB Configurations Your computer supports a maximum of 4 GB of memory when you use four 1-GB DIMMs. Current operating systems, such as Microsoft® Windows® XP, can only use a maximum of 4 GB of address space; however, the amount of memory available to the operating system is less than 4 GB. Certain components within the computer require address space in the 4-GB range. Any address space reserved for these components cannot be used by computer memory. Removing Memory 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Press out the securing clip at each end of the memory module connector. 4. Grasp the module and pull up. If the module is difficult to remove, gently ease the module back and forth to remove it from the connector. Installing Memory 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Press out the securing clip at each end of the memory module connector. 4. Align the notch on the bottom of the module with the crossbar in the connector. NOTE: Memory purchased from Dell is covered under your computer warranty. NOTICE: If you remove your original memory modules from the computer during a memory upgrade, keep them separate from any new modules that you may have, even if you purchased the new modules from Dell. If possible, do not pair an original memory module with a new memory module. Otherwise, your computer may not start properly. You should install your original memory modules in pairs either in DIMM connectors 1 and 2 or DIMM connectors 3 and 4. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis. 1 memory connector closest to processor 2 securing clips (2) 3 memory connector5. Insert the module into the connector until the module snaps into position. If you insert the module correctly, the securing clips snap into the cutouts at each end of the module. 6. Replace the computer cover. 7. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. 8. When a message appears, stating that memory size has changed, press to continue. 9. Log on to your computer. 10. Right-click the My Computer icon on your Microsoft® Windows® desktop and click Properties. 11. Click the General tab. 12. To verify that the memory is installed correctly, check the amount of memory (RAM) listed. Cards Your Dell™ computer provides the following slots for PCI and PCI Express cards: l Two PCI card slots l One PCI Express x16 card slot l One PCI Express x1 card slot PCI Cards Your computer supports two PCI cards. 1 notch 2 memory module 3 cutouts (2) 4 crossbar NOTICE: To avoid damage to the memory module, press the module straight down into the connector while you apply equal force to each end of the module. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.If you are installing or replacing a card, follow the procedures in the next section. If you are removing but not replacing a PCI card, see "Removing a PCI Card." If you are replacing a card, remove the current driver for the card from the operating system. If you are installing or replacing a PCI Express card, see "Installing a PCI Express Card." Installing a PCI Card 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Gently push the release tab on the card retention door from the inside to pivot the door open. Because the door is captive, it will remain in the open position. 4. If you are installing a new card, remove the filler bracket to create a card-slot opening. Then continue with step 6. 5. If you are replacing a card that is already installed in the computer, remove the card. If necessary, disconnect any cables connected to the card. Grasp the card by its top corners, and ease it out of its connector. 6. Prepare the card for installation. See the documentation that came with the card for information on configuring the card, making internal connections, or otherwise customizing it for your computer. 7. Place the card in the connector and press down firmly. Ensure that the card is fully seated in the slot. 1 release tab 2 card retention door CAUTION: Some network adapters automatically start the computer when they are connected to a network. To guard against electrical shock, be sure to unplug your computer from its electrical outlet before installing any cards.8. Before you close the card retention door, ensure that: l The tops of all cards and filler brackets are flush with the alignment bar. l The notch in the top of the card or filler bracket fits around the alignment guide. 9. Close the card retention door by snapping it into place to secure the card(s). 10. Connect any cables that should be attached to the card. See the documentation for the card for information about the card's cable connections. 11. Replace the computer cover, reconnect the computer and devices to electrical outlets, and then turn them on. 12. If you installed a sound card: a. Enter system setup, select Audio Controller, and then change the setting to Off. b. Connect external audio devices to the sound card's connectors. Do not connect external audio devices to the microphone, speaker/headphone, or line-in connectors on the back panel. 13. If you installed an add-in network adapter and want to disable the integrated network adapter: 1 bracket within slot 4 alignment guide 2 bracket caught outside of slot 5 fully seated card 3 alignment bar 6 not fully seated card 1 alignment guide 3 release tab 2 alignment bar 4 card retention door NOTICE: Do not route card cables over or behind the cards. Cables routed over the cards can prevent the computer cover from closing properly or cause damage to the equipment. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer.a. Enter system setup, select Integrated NIC, and then change the setting to Off. b. Connect the network cable to the add-in network adapter's connectors. Do not connect the network cable to the integrated connector on the back panel. 14. Install any drivers required for the card as described in the card documentation. Removing a PCI Card 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Gently push the release tab on the card retention door from the inside to pivot the door open. Because the door is captive, it will remain in the open position. 4. If you are removing the card permanently, install a filler bracket in the empty card-slot opening. If you need a filler bracket, contact Dell (see your Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell). 5. Close the card retention door by snapping it into place to secure the card(s). 6. Replace the computer cover, reconnect the computer and devices to electrical outlets, and then turn them on. 7. Remove the card's driver from the operating system. 8. If you removed a sound card: a. Enter system setup, select Audio Controller, and then change the setting to On. b. Connect external audio devices to the audio connectors on the back panel of the computer. 9. If you removed an add-in network connector: a. Enter system setup, select Integrated NIC, and then change the setting to On. b. Connect the network cable to the integrated connector on the back panel of the computer. PCI Express Cards Your computer supports one PCI Express x16 card and one PCI Express x1 card. If you are installing or replacing a PCI Express card, follow the procedures in the next section. If you are removing but not replacing a card, see "Removing a PCI Express Card." If you are replacing a card, remove the current driver for the card from the operating system. If you are installing or replacing a PCI card, see "Installing a PCI Card." Installing a PCI Express Card 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. NOTE: Installing filler brackets over empty card-slot openings is necessary to maintain FCC certification of the computer. The brackets also keep dust and dirt out of your computer. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer.3. Gently push the release tab on the card retention door from the inside to pivot the door open. Because the door is captive, it will remain in the open position. 4. If your computer includes a card retention mechanism, to secure the x16 card in place from the top: a. Pivot the mechanism upward and gently squeeze in on the sides to release the mechanism from the two tab slots holding it in place. b. Set the retention mechanism aside in a secure location. 5. If you are installing a new card, remove the filler bracket to create a card-slot opening. Then continue with step 6. 6. If you are replacing a card that is already installed in the computer, remove the card. If necessary, disconnect any cables connected to the card. If your computer includes a card retention mechanism, remove the top of the retention mechanism by pressing the tab and pulling up on the top. Gently pull the securing tab, grasp the card by its top corners, and then ease it out of its connector. 7. Prepare the card for installation. See the documentation that came with the card for information on configuring the card, making internal connections, or otherwise customizing it for your computer. 8. If you are installing the card into the x16 card connector, position the card so the securing slot is aligned with the securing tab, and gently pull the securing tab. 9. Place the card in the connector and press down firmly. Ensure that the card is fully seated in the slot. 1 card retention door 2 card retention mechanism 3 release tabs (2) 1 securing tab 4 PCI Express x16 card slot 2 PCI Express x1 card 5 PCI Express x16 card 3 PCI Express x1 card slot CAUTION: Some network adapters automatically start the computer when they are connected to a network. To guard against electrical shock, be sure to unplug your computer from its electrical outlet before installing any cards. NOTICE: Ensure that you release the securing tab to unseat the card. If the card is not removed correctly, the system board may be damaged.10. If you replaced a card that was already installed in the computer and you removed the retention mechanism, you may reinstall the retention mechanism. 11. Before replacing the card retention mechanism, ensure that: l The tops of all cards and filler brackets are flush with the alignment bar. l The notch in the top of the card or filler bracket fits around the alignment guide. 12. Snap the card retention mechanism into place, securing the x16 PCI card. 13. Replace the computer cover, reconnect the computer and devices to electrical outlets, and then turn them on. 14. If you installed a sound card: a. Enter system setup, select Audio Controller, and then change the setting to Off. b. Connect external audio devices to the sound card's connectors. Do not connect external audio devices to the microphone, speaker/headphone, or line-in connectors on the back panel. 15. If you installed an add-in network adapter and want to disable the integrated network adapter: a. Enter system setup, select Integrated NIC, and then change the setting to Off. b. Connect the network cable to the add-in network adapter's connectors. Do not connect the network cable to the integrated connector on the back panel. 16. Install any drivers required for the card as described in the card documentation. 1 bracket within slot 4 alignment guide 2 bracket caught outside of slot 5 fully seated card 3 alignment bar 6 not fully seated card 1 card retention door 2 card retention mechanism 3 release tabs (2) NOTICE: Do not route card cables over or behind the cards. Cables routed over the cards can prevent the computer cover from closing properly or cause damage to the equipment. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer.Removing a PCI Express Card 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Gently push the release tab on the card retention door from the inside to pivot the door open. Because the door is captive, it will remain in the open position. 4. If your computer includes a card retention mechanism, to secure the x16 card in place from the top: a. Pivot the mechanism upward and gently squeeze in on the sides to release the mechanism from the two tab slots holding it in place. b. Set the retention mechanism aside in a secure location. 5. If you are removing the card permanently, install a filler bracket in the empty card-slot opening. If you need a filler bracket, contact Dell (see your Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell). 6. Reseat the card retention mechanism in the tabs and pivot downward to snap it into place. 7. Close the card retention door to snap it into place, securing the card(s). 8. Replace the computer cover, reconnect the computer and devices to electrical outlets, and then turn them on. 9. Remove the card's driver from the operating system. 10. If you removed a sound card: a. Enter system setup, select Audio Controller, and then change the setting to On. b. Connect external audio devices to the audio connectors on the back panel of the computer. 11. If you removed an add-in network connector: a. Enter system setup, select Integrated NIC, and then change the setting to On. b. Connect the network cable to the integrated connector on the back panel of the computer. 12. Install any drivers required for the card as described in the card documentation. Drive Panel Removing the Drive Panel 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. NOTE: Installing filler brackets over empty card-slot openings is necessary to maintain FCC certification of the computer. The brackets also keep dust and dirt out of your computer. NOTE: When you install a filler bracket, ensure that the bracket is seated correctly. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover.3. Grasping the sliding plate lever, slide and hold the sliding plate until the drive panel snaps open. 4. Pivot the drive panel outward and lift away from the computer. 5. Set the drive panel aside in a secure location. Removing the Drive-Panel Insert 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Remove the drive panel. 1. Turn the drive panel sideways and find the tip of the drive-panel insert tab that latches over a tab on the right side of the drive panel. 2. Pull the inner tip of the drive-panel insert tab away from the drive panel. 1 sliding plate lever 3 drive panel 2 sliding plate 4 front panel NOTE: The sliding plate secures and releases the drive panel and helps to secure the drives. 1 drive-panel insert tab 2 drive-panel insert 3 drive panel3. Pivot the drive-panel insert out and away from the drive panel. 4. Set the drive-panel insert aside in a secure location. Replacing the Drive-Panel Insert 1. Slide the tab on the left side of the drive-panel insert under the center-drive panel tab. 2. Rotate the drive-panel insert into place and snap the drive-panel insert tab over the corresponding tab on the drive panel. Replacing the Drive Panel 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover if you have not already done so. 3. If you are installing a replacement drive panel, remove the old drive panel. 4. Align the drive panel tabs with the side-door hinges. 5. Rotate the drive panel toward the computer until it snaps into place on the front panel. 1 drive-panel insert tab 3 center drive-panel tab 2 drive panel insert 4 drive panel 1 sliding plate lever 3 drive panel 2 sliding plate 4 front panelFront Panel Removing the Front Panel 1. Remove the computer cover. 2. Remove the drive panel. 3. Remove the hard drive and second hard drive, if applicable. 4. Remove the two front-panel screws. 5. Using a small, flat-blade screwdriver, press the four top front-panel release tabs upwards and press down on the four bottom release tabs to loosen the front panel. 6. Starting from the bottom of the front panel, pivot the panel toward the top of the computer and remove the panel. Drives Your computer supports a combination of these devices: l Up to two serial ATA hard drives l One FlexBay drive (may contain an optional floppy drive or an optional Media Card Reader) l Up to two CD or DVD drives CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover. NOTICE: Use care when handling the front-panel release tabs to avoid damaging them. 1 top front-panel release tabs (4) 2 front-panel screws (2) 3 front panel 4 bottom front-panel release tabs (4)Connect CD/DVD drives to the connector labeled "IDE1" on the system board. Serial ATA hard drives should be connected to the connectors labeled "SATA0" or "SATA2" on the system board. IDE Drive Addressing When you connect two IDE devices to a single IDE interface cable and configure them for the cable select setting, the device attached to the last connector on the interface cable is the master or boot device (drive 0), and the device attached to the middle connector on the interface cable is the slave device (drive 1). See the drive documentation in your upgrade kit for information on configuring devices for the cable select setting. Connecting and Disconnecting Drive Interface Cables When you install a drive, you connect two cables—a DC power cable and a data cable—to the back of the drive and to the system board. When removing an IDE drive data cable, grasp the colored pull-tab and pull until the connector detaches. Most interface connectors are keyed for correct insertion; that is, a notch or a missing pin on one connector matches a tab or a filled-in hole on the other connector. Keyed connectors ensure that the pin-1 wire in the cable (indicated by the colored stripe along one edge of the IDE cable—serial ATA cables do not use a colored stripe) goes to the pin-1 end of the connector. The pin-1 end of a connector on a board or a card is usually indicated by a silk-screened "1" printed directly on the board or card. Power Cable Connector To connect a drive using the power cable, locate the power connector on the power supply. 1 CD/DVD drive(s) 2 FlexBay for optional floppy drive or optional Media Card Reader 3 hard drive(s) NOTICE: When you connect an IDE interface cable, do not place the colored stripe away from pin 1 of the connector. Reversing the cable prevents the drive from operating and could damage the controller, the drive, or both. 1 interface cable 2 interface connectorHard Drive Check the documentation for the drive to verify that it is configured for your computer. Removing a Hard Drive 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Disconnect the power and data cables from the drive. 4. Press the blue tabs on either side of the hard drive bracket toward each other and slide the drive up and out of the computer. 1 SATA power cable connector 3 power cable connector 2 power connector 4 power connector CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer. NOTICE: To avoid damage to the drive, do not set it on a hard surface. Instead, set the drive on a surface, such as a foam pad, that will sufficiently cushion it. NOTICE: If you are replacing a hard drive that contains data you want to keep, back up your files before you begin this procedure. NOTICE: Use the pull-tab to remove the data cable from your hard drive or from the system board. 1 serial ATA data cable 2 power cableInstalling a Hard Drive 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. If you are installing a replacement hard drive, remove the old hard drive. 4. Unpack the replacement hard drive, and prepare it for installation. 5. Check the documentation for the drive to verify that it is configured for your computer. 6. Gently slide the drive into place until you feel a click or feel the drive securely installed. 7. Connect the power and hard-drive cables to the drive. 1 hard drive 2 tabs (2) NOTE: If your replacement hard drive does not have the hard drive bracket attached, remove the bracket from the old drive by unsnapping it from the drive. Snap the bracket onto the new drive. 1 drive 2 hard drive bracket 1 serial ATA data cable8. Check all connectors to be certain that they are properly cabled and firmly seated. 9. Replace the computer cover. 10. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. See the documentation that came with the drive for instructions on installing any software required for drive operation. Adding a Second Hard Drive 1. Check the documentation for the drive to verify that it is configured for your computer. 2. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 3. Remove the computer cover. 4. Press the blue release tabs on each side of the hard drive bracket toward each other and slide the drive up and out of the computer. 5. Snap the bracket onto the hard drive. 6. Gently slide the new drive (the second hard drive) into place until you feel a click or feel the drive securely installed. 7. Connect a power cable to the drive. 8. Connect the data cable to the drive and to the system board. Floppy Drive 2 power cable NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer. NOTICE: To avoid damage to the drive, do not set it on a hard surface. Instead, set the drive on a surface, such as a foam pad, that will sufficiently cushion it. 1 release tabs (2) 3 hard drive bay 2 second hard drive in lower bay 4 primary hard drive in upper bay CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover.Removing a Floppy Drive 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Remove the drive panel. 4. Disconnect the power and data cables from the back of the floppy drive. 5. Slide the sliding plate lever toward the bottom of the computer and, without releasing the sliding plate lever, slide the floppy drive out through the front of the computer. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer. NOTE: If you are adding a floppy drive, see "Installing a Floppy Drive." 1 power cable 2 data cable NOTE: If you are installing a PCI Express x16 card, the card may cover the floppy-drive connectors. Remove the card before connecting the floppy-drive cables. 1 sliding plate lever 2 sliding plate 3 floppy driveInstalling a Floppy Drive 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Remove the drive panel. 4. Slide the drive into place until you feel a click or feel the drive securely installed. 5. Attach the power and data cables to the floppy drive. 6. Connect the other end of the data cable to the connector labeled "DSKT2" on the system board and route the cable through the clip on the shroud. 7. Check all cable connections and fold cables out of the way to avoid blocking the fan and cooling vents. 8. Replace the drive panel. 9. Replace the computer cover. 10. Connect your computer and devices to their electrical outlets, and turn them on. NOTE: If the new floppy drive does not include shoulder screws, use the screws within the drive panel insert. 1 drive 2 screws (4) NOTE: If you are installing a new drive, you need to remove the drive-panel insert. 1 power cable 2 data cable NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable in to the network port or device and then plug it in to the computer.See the documentation that came with the drive for instructions on installing any software required for drive operation. 11. Enter system setup and select the appropriate Diskette Drive option. 12. Verify that your computer works correctly by running the Dell Diagnostics. Media Card Reader (Optional) For information about using a Media Card Reader, see your Owner's Manual. Removing a Media Card Reader 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Remove the drive panel. 4. Disconnect the FlexBay USB cable on the back of the Media Card Reader from the Media Card Reader connector on the system board and route the cable through the cable routing clip. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis. 1 cable 2 Media Card Reader5. Slide the sliding plate toward the bottom of the computer and, without releasing the sliding plate, slide the Media Card Reader out through the front of the computer. 6. Replace the drive panel. 7. Replace the computer cover. Installing a Media Card Reader 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Remove the drive panel. 4. Remove the Media Card Reader and bracket from its packaging and ensure that all of the screws are included. 1 sliding plate lever 2 sliding plate 3 Media Card Reader CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis. 1 Media Card Reader 2 screws (4)5. Slide the Media Card Reader into place until you feel a click or feel the drive securely installed. 6. Connect the FlexBay USB cable to the back of the Media Card Reader and to the Media Card Reader connector on the system board. 7. Route the FlexBay USB cable through the cable routing clip. 8. Replace the drive panel. 9. Replace the computer cover. CD/DVD Drive Removing a CD/DVD Drive 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Remove the drive panel. 4. Disconnect the power and data cables from the back of the drive. NOTE: Ensure that the Media Card Reader is installed before the FlexBay cable is connected. 1 Media Card Reader 2 FlexBay USB cable CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.5. Slide the sliding plate lever toward the bottom of the computer and, without releasing the sliding plate lever, slide the CD/DVD drive out through the front of the computer. Installing a CD/DVD Drive 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Remove the drive panel. 4. Slide the drive into place until you feel a click or feel the drive securely installed. NOTE: If you are installing a new drive, you need to remove the drive-panel insert.5. Connect the power and data cables to the drive. 6. Check all cable connections, and fold cables out of the way to avoid blocking the fan and cooling vents. 7. Replace the drive panel. 8. Replace the computer cover. 9. Connect your computer and devices to their electrical outlets, and turn them on. See the documentation that came with the drive for instructions on installing any software required for drive operation. 10. Enter system setup and select the appropriate Drive option. 11. Verify that your computer works correctly by running the Dell Diagnostics. Heat-Sink Assembly Removing the Heat-Sink Assembly NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable in to the network port or device and then plug it in to the computer. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Loosen the two captive screws that attach the heat-sink assembly to the system board on either side of the assembly. 4. Pivot the assembly toward the back of the computer and lift to remove the assembly. 5. Lay the assembly aside on its side. Processor Removing the Processor 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Remove the heat-sink assembly. 4. Open the processor cover: CAUTION: Despite having a plastic shield, the heat-sink assembly may be very hot during normal operation. Ensure that the assembly has had sufficient time to cool before you touch it. NOTE: To loosen the two captive screws on each side of the heat-sink assembly, you need a long Phillips screwdriver. NOTICE: After you remove the heat-sink assembly, lay the assembly on its side. Do not set the heat-sink assembly upright or touch the thermal interface, as this may result in damage to the thermal interface material. 1 heat-sink assembly 2 captive screws (2) NOTICE: When you install the heat-sink assembly, do not touch the thermal interface on its underside, as this may result in damage to the thermal interface material. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis. NOTICE: If you are installing a processor upgrade kit from Dell, discard the original heat-sink assembly. If you are not installing a processor upgrade kit from Dell, reuse the original heat-sink assembly when you install your new processor.a. Push down on the release lever and slide the lever out from under the side latch on the processor socket. b. Pull the lever back to release the processor cover. 5. Grasp the processor by the edges to remove it from the processor socket. Leave the release lever extended in the release position so that the socket is ready for the new processor. Installing the Processor 1. Unpack the new processor, being careful not to touch the underside of the processor. 2. If the release lever on the processor socket is not fully extended, move it to that position. 3. Orient the front and rear alignment notches on the processor with the front and rear alignment notches on the socket. 4. Align the pin-1 corners of the processor and socket. 1 processor cover 4 release lever 2 processor 5 side latch 3 processor socket NOTICE: When removing or replacing the processor, do not touch any of the pins inside the processor socket or allow any objects to fall onto the pins in the socket. NOTICE: Ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface on the back of the computer. NOTICE: When installing the processor, do not touch any of the pins inside the socket or allow any objects to fall onto the pins in the socket. NOTICE: You must position the processor correctly in the socket to avoid permanent damage to the processor and the computer when you turn on the computer.5. Set the processor lightly in the socket and ensure that the processor is positioned correctly. 6. When the processor is fully seated in the socket, close the processor cover. Ensure that the tab on the processor cover is positioned underneath the release lever at the front of the socket. 7. Pivot the release lever back toward the socket and snap it into place under the side latch to secure the processor. If you installed a processor replacement kit from Dell, return the original heat-sink assembly and processor to Dell in the same package in which your replacement kit was sent. 8. Install the heat-sink assembly. 9. Replace the computer cover. 10. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. Fan Assembly Removing the Fan Assembly 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Remove the heat-sink assembly. 4. Press the release tab on the fan-cable connector on the system board to remove the connector. 1 processor cover 6 release lever 2 tab 7 front alignment notch 3 processor 8 socket and processor pin-1 indicators 4 processor socket 9 rear alignment notch 5 cover latch NOTICE: To avoid damage, ensure that the processor aligns properly with the socket, and do not use excessive force when you install the processor. NOTICE: If you are not installing a processor upgrade kit from Dell, reuse the original heat-sink assembly when you replace the processor. NOTICE: When installing the heat-sink assembly, do not touch the thermal interface on its underside, as this may result in damage. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug the cable into the computer. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.5. Simultaneously press the fan-release tab on one side of the fan assembly and pull the fan- release tab located on the bottom of the opposite side of the assembly upwards. 6. Slide the fan assembly toward the back of the computer and lift to remove the assembly. Front I/O Panel Removing the Front I/O Panel 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Remove the heat-sink assembly. 4. Remove the fan assembly. 1 fan release tabs (2) 2 fan assembly 3 fan cable connector 4 release tab on fan cable connector CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before removing the cover. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.5. Remove the screw that secures the front I/O panel to the front of the computer. 6. Pull the I/O panel toward the back of the computer and lift the panel to remove from the computer. 7. Disconnect any cables from the I/O panel. System Board Jumper Settings The jumper locations are shown below. 1 screw 2 front I/O panelRemoving the System Board 1. Shut down the computer through the Start menu. 2. Ensure that your computer and attached devices are turned off. If your computer and attached devices did not automatically turn off when you shut down your computer, turn them off now. 3. Disconnect any telephone or telecommunication lines from the computer. 4. Disconnect your computer and all attached devices from their electrical outlets, and then press the power button to ground the system board. 5. Remove the computer cover. 6. Remove any components that restrict access to the system board (CD/DVD drive(s), floppy drive, hard drive, front I/O panel). 7. Remove the heat-sink assembly and processor. 8. Disconnect all cables from the system board. 9. Remove the eight system-board screws and the two mounting-bracket screws. 10. Slide the system board assembly toward the front of the computer, and then lift the board away. Jumper Setting Description PSWD (default) Password features are enabled. Password features are disabled. RTCRST (default) Real-time clock reset in normal operation. Clear CMOS settings. CAUTION: To guard against electrical shock, always unplug your computer from the electrical outlet before opening the cover. NOTICE: Before touching anything inside your computer, ground yourself by touching an unpainted metal surface, such as the metal at the back of the computer. While you work, periodically touch an unpainted metal surface to dissipate any static electricity that could harm internal components. NOTICE: To disconnect a network cable, first unplug the cable from your computer and then unplug it from the network port or device. NOTE: The mounting-bracket screws also hold the system board and need to be removed for the removal of the system board.11. Place the system board assembly that you just removed next to the replacement system board to ensure that it is identical. Replacing the System Board 1. Gently align the system board in the chassis and slide the board toward the back of the computer. 2. Replace the eight system-board screws and the two mounting-bracket screws. 3. Replace any components and cables that you removed from the system board. 4. Reconnect all cables to their connectors at the back of the computer. 5. Replace the computer cover. 6. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. Power Supply Removing the Power Supply 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Remove the computer cover. 3. Disconnect the DC power cables from the system board and the drives. 1 mounting-bracket screws (2) 2 system-board screws (8) NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device, and then plug the cable into the computer. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTICE: To prevent static damage to components inside your computer, discharge static electricity from your body before you touch any of your computer's electronic components. You can do so by touching an unpainted metal surface on the computer chassis.4. Remove the four screws that attach the power supply to the back of the computer frame. 5. Press the release button located on the floor of the computer frame. 6. Slide the power supply toward the front of the computer approximately 1 inch. 7. Lift the power supply out of the computer. Replacing the Power Supply 1. Slide the power supply into place. 2. Replace the screws that secure the power supply to the back of the computer frame. 3. Reconnect the DC power cables. 4. Route the cables through the routing clips, and press the clips to close them over the cables. 5. Replace the computer cover. 6. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. 1 release button 2 power supply 3 screws (4) 4 AC power connector NOTICE: Note the routing of the DC power cables underneath the routing clips in the computer frame as you remove them from the system board and drives. You must route these cables properly when you replace them to prevent them from being pinched or crimped. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTICE: You must route the DC power cables properly through the routing clips when you replace the cables to prevent them from being pinched or crimped. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug the cable into the computer.Back to Contents PageBack to Contents Page System Setup Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual Overview Entering System Setup System Setup Options Boot Sequence Clearing Forgotten Passwords Clearing CMOS Settings Overview Use system setup as follows: l To change the system configuration information after you add, change, or remove any hardware in your computer l To set or change a user-selectable option such as the user password l To read the current amount of memory or set the type of hard drive installed Before you use system setup, it is recommended that you write down the system setup screen information for future reference. Entering System Setup 1. Turn on (or restart) your computer. 2. When the blue DELL™ logo is displayed, you must watch for the F2 prompt to appear.  3. Once this F2 prompt appears, press immediately. 4. If you wait too long and the operating system logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Microsoft® Windows® desktop. Then, shut down your computer and try again. System Setup Screens The system setup screen displays current or changeable configuration information for your computer. Information on the screen is divided into three areas: the options list, active options field, and key functions. NOTICE: Unless you are an expert computer user, do not change the settings for this program. Certain changes can make your computer work incorrectly. NOTE: The F2 prompt indicates that the keyboard has initialized. This prompt can appear very quickly, so you must watch for it to display, and then press . If you press before you are prompted, this keystroke will be lost. Options List — This field appears on the left side of the system setup window. The field is a scrollable list containing features that define the configuration of your computer, including installed hardware, power conservation, and security features. Scroll up and down the list with the up- and downarrow keys. As an option is highlighted, the Option Field displays more information about that option and the option's current and available settings. By pressing or the left and right arrow keys, you can toggle between a primary topic (collapsed) and subtopics (expanded). Option Field — This field contains information about each option. In this field you can view your current settings and make changes to your settings. Use the right and left arrow keys to highlight an option. Press to make that selection active. Key Functions — This field appears below the Option System Setup Options Field and lists keys and their functions within the active system setup field. NOTE: Depending on your computer and installed devices, the items listed in this section may not appear, or may not appear exactly as listed. System Processor Info Displays the following information for the processor installed in the system: Processor Type, Processor Clock Speed, Processor Bus Speed, Processor Cache Size, Processor ID number, whether the processor is Hyperthreading Capable or multiple-core capable, and if the processor has 64-bit Technology. Memory Info Displays the amount of Installed Memory, Memory Speed, Memory Channel Mode, and a description of the Memory Technology. This option also displays a table that describes the memory size, whether the memory module is ECC capable, single or dual rank, type, and organization. PCI Info Displays the contents of each PCI slot. Date/Time Controls the system's internal calendar and clock. Boot Sequence (Diskette drive default) Determines the order in which the system searches for boot devices during system startup. NOTE: If you insert a boot device and restart the computer, this option appears in the system setup menu. To boot from a USB memory device, select the USB device and move it so it becomes the first device in the list. Drives Diskette Drive (Internal default) Enables and disables the floppy drives and sets read permission for the internal floppy drive. Off disables all floppy drives. USB enables the USB floppy drive. Internal enables the internal floppy drive. Read Only enables the internal drive controller and allows the internal floppy drive read-only permission. NOTE: Operating systems with USB support will recognize USB floppy drives regardless of this setting. Drives 0 through 3 (On default) Enables or disables an ATA or SATA device (such as hard-drive, CD drive, or DVD drive). On enables the interface so that the device can be used. Displays the Controller type (ATA or SATA), Port number the drive is using, Drive ID number, Capacity, and whether the drive is controlled by the BIOS. SATA Operation (Normal default) Determines the integrated SATA controller's operating mode: Normal – native mode, which provides the highest drive performance and optimal flexibility. Combination – combination mode, which offers compatibility with versions of the operating system that do not support SATA drives. Onboard Devices Integrated NIC (On default) Enables or disables the integrated NIC controller. Settings are On, Off, or On w/ PXE. When the On w/ PXE setting is active (available only for setting up a future boot process), the computer prompts you to press . Pressing this key combination causes a menu to display that allows you to select a method for booting from a network server. If a boot routine is not available from the network server, the computer attempts to boot from the next device in the boot sequence list. Integrated Audio Controller Enables or disables the onboard audio controller. Front USB Ports (On default) Enables or disables the front USB ports. USB for Flexbay (On default) On enables internal USB for FlexBay. NOTE: This USB option appears only if a FlexBay device is installed. Video Primary Video (Auto default) Specifies which video controller is primary when two video controllers are present on the computer. Auto enables the add-in video controller. Onboard enables the integrated video controller. Video Configures the system memory allocation reserved for the integrated video controller. Settings Memory Size (8 MB default) are 1MB and 8MB. Performance HyperThreading (On default) Determines whether the physical processor appears as one or two logical processors. The performance of some applications improve with additional logical processors installed. On enables hyperthreading. SpeedStep (On default) Enables SpeedStep for all supported processors in the computer. Hard Drive Acoustics (Bypass default) l Bypass (default) — Your computer does not test or change the current acoustics mode setting. l Quiet — The hard drive operates at its most quiet setting. l Suggested — The hard drive operates at the level suggested by the drive manufacturer. l Performance — The hard drive operates at its maximum speed. NOTE: Switching to performance mode will cause the drive heads to move faster, causing the hard drive to be noisier. However, some drives may not see an increase in data transfer rates. NOTE: Changing the acoustics setting does not alter your hard drive image. Security Admin Password (Not Set default) Displays the current status of your System Setup program's password security feature and allows you to verify and assign a new admin password. System Password (Not Set default) Displays the current status of the system's password security feature and allows a new system password to be assigned and verified. Password Changes Determines the interaction between the System password and the Admin password. Locked prevents a user without a valid Admin password from being able to modify the System password. Unlocked allows a user with a valid Admin password to modify the system password. Execute Disable (On default) Enables or disables Execute Disable memory protection technology. Power Management AC Recovery (Off default) Determines how the system responds when AC power is re-applied after a power loss. Off commands the system to stay off when the power is re-applied. You must press the front-panel power button before the system turns on. On commands the system to turn on when the power is re-applied. Last commands the system to return to the last power state the system was in just before it was turned off. Auto Power On (Off default) Sets the computer to automatically turn on. Off disables this feature. Everyday turns the computer on every day at the time set in Auto Power Time. Weekdays turns the computer on every day from Monday through Friday at the time set in Auto Power Time. NOTE: This feature does not work if you turn off your computer using a power strip or surge protector. Auto Power Time Sets time to automatically turn on the computer. Time is kept in the standard 12-hour format (hours:minutes). Change the startup time by pressing the right- or left-arrow key to increase or decrease the numbers, or type numbers in both the date and time fields. Suspend Mode Sets the computer's suspend mode. The options are S1, a suspend state where the computer is running in a low-power mode, and S3, a standby state where the power is reduced or turned off for most components, however, system memory remains active. Maintenance Load Defaults Restores System Setup options to their factory defaults. Event Log Allows you to view the Event Log. Entries are marked R for Read and U for Unread. Mark All Boot Sequence This feature allows you to change the boot sequence for devices. Option Settings l Diskette Drive — The computer attempts to boot from the floppy drive. If the floppy disk in the drive is not bootable, if no floppy disk is in the drive, or if there is no floppy drive installed in the computer, the computer generates an error message. l Hard Drive — The computer attempts to boot from the primary hard drive. If no operating system is on the drive, the computer generates an error message. l CD Drive — The computer attempts to boot from the CD drive. If no CD is in the drive, or if the CD has no operating system, the computer generates an error message. l USB Flash Device — Insert the memory device into a USB port and restart the computer. When F12 = Boot Menu appears in the upper-right corner of the screen, press . The BIOS detects the device and adds the USB flash option to the boot menu. Changing Boot Sequence for the Current Boot You can use this feature, for example, to restart your computer to a USB device such as a floppy drive, memory key, or CD-RW drive. 1. If you are booting to a USB device, connect the USB device to a USB connector (see "Front View of the Computer" and "Back View of the Computer"). 2. Turn on (or restart) your computer. 3. When F2 = Setup, F12 = Boot Menu appears in the upper-right corner of the screen, press . If you wait too long and the operating system logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Microsoft Windows desktop. Then shut down your computer and try again. The Boot Device Menu appears, listing all available boot devices. Each device has a number next to it. 4. At the bottom of the menu, enter the number of the device that is to be used for the current boot only. For example, if you are booting to a USB memory key, highlight USB Flash Device and press . Changing Boot Sequence for Future Boots 1. Enter system setup. Entries Read puts an R to the left of all the entries. Clear Log clears the Event Log. POST Behavior Fastboot (On default) When enabled, this feature reduces computer startup time by bypassing some compatibility steps. Off does not skip any steps during computer startup. On starts the system more quickly. Numlock Key (On default) Determines the functionality of the numeric keys on the right side of your keyboard. Off commands the right keypad keys to function as arrows. On commands the right keypad keys to function as numbers. POST Hotkeys Determines whether the sign-on screen displays a message stating the keystroke sequence that is required to enter the Setup program or the Quickboot feature. Setup & Boot Menu displays both messages (F2=Setup and F12=Boot Menu). Setup displays the setup message only (F2=Setup). Boot Menu displays the Quickboot message only (F12=Boot Menu). None displays no message. Keyboard Errors When set to Report (enabled) and an error is detected during POST, the BIOS will display the error message and prompt you to press to continue or press to enter System Setup. When set to Do Not Report (disabled) and an error is detected during POST, the BIOS will display the error message and continue booting the system. NOTE: To boot to a USB device, the device must be bootable. To make sure that your device is bootable, check the device documentation. NOTE: If you are booting to a USB floppy drive, you must first set the floppy drive to OFF in system setup. NOTE: To boot to a USB device, the device must be bootable. To make sure your device is bootable, check the device documentation.2. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Boot Sequence menu option and press to access the menu. 3. Press the up- and down-arrow keys to move through the list of devices. 4. Press the spacebar to enable or disable a device (enabled devices have a checkmark). 5. Press plus (+) or minus (–) to move a selected device up or down the list. Clearing Forgotten Passwords 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Locate the 3-pin password jumper (PSWD) on the system board, and attach the jumper plug to pins 2 and 3 to clear the password. 3. Close the computer cover. 4. Connect your computer and monitor to electrical outlets, and turn them on. 5. After the Microsoft® Windows® desktop appears on your computer, shut down your computer. Turn off the monitor and disconnect it from the electrical outlet. 6. Disconnect the computer power cable from the electrical outlet, and press the power button to ground the system board. 7. Open the computer cover. 8. Locate the 3-pin password jumper (PSWD) on the system board and attach the jumper to pins 1 and 2 to re-enable the password feature. 9. Close the computer cover. 10. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. NOTE: Write down your current boot sequence in case you want to restore it. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTE: When you receive your computer, the jumper plug is attached to pins 1 and 2. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer.Clearing CMOS Settings 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Reset the current CMOS settings: a. Locate the 3-pin CMOS jumper (RTCRST) on the system board. b. Remove the jumper plug from pins 2 and 3. c. Place the jumper plug on pins 1 and 2 and wait for approximately 5 seconds. d. Replace the jumper plug on pins 2 and 3. 3. Close the computer cover. 4. Connect your computer and devices Back to Contents Page CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer.Back to Contents Page System Setup Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual Overview Entering System Setup System Setup Options Boot Sequence Clearing Forgotten Passwords Clearing CMOS Settings Overview Use system setup as follows: l To change the system configuration information after you add, change, or remove any hardware in your computer l To set or change a user-selectable option such as the user password l To read the current amount of memory or set the type of hard drive installed Before you use system setup, it is recommended that you write down the system setup screen information for future reference. Entering System Setup 1. Turn on (or restart) your computer. 2. When the blue DELL™ logo is displayed, you must watch for the F2 prompt to appear.  3. Once this F2 prompt appears, press immediately. 4. If you wait too long and the operating system logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Microsoft® Windows® desktop. Then, shut down your computer and try again. System Setup Screens The system setup screen displays current or changeable configuration information for your computer. Information on the screen is divided into three areas: the options list, active options field, and key functions. NOTICE: Unless you are an expert computer user, do not change the settings for this program. Certain changes can make your computer work incorrectly. NOTE: The F2 prompt indicates that the keyboard has initialized. This prompt can appear very quickly, so you must watch for it to display, and then press . If you press before you are prompted, this keystroke will be lost. Options List — This field appears on the left side of the system setup window. The field is a scrollable list containing features that define the configuration of your computer, including installed hardware, power conservation, and security features. Scroll up and down the list with the up- and downarrow keys. As an option is highlighted, the Option Field displays more information about that option and the option's current and available settings. By pressing or the left and right arrow keys, you can toggle between a primary topic (collapsed) and subtopics (expanded). Option Field — This field contains information about each option. In this field you can view your current settings and make changes to your settings. Use the right and left arrow keys to highlight an option. Press to make that selection active.System Setup Options Key Functions — This field appears below the Option Field and lists keys and their functions within the active system setup field. NOTE: Depending on your computer and installed devices, the items listed in this section may not appear, or may not appear exactly as listed. System Processor Info Displays the following information for the processor installed in the system: Processor Type, Processor Clock Speed, Processor Bus Speed, Processor Cache Size, Processor ID number, whether the processor is Hyperthreading Capable or multiple-core capable, and if the processor has 64-bit Technology. Memory Info Displays the amount of Installed Memory, Memory Speed, Memory Channel Mode, and a description of the Memory Technology. This option also displays a table that describes the memory size, whether the memory module is ECC capable, single or dual rank, type, and organization. PCI Info Displays the contents of each PCI slot. Date/Time Controls the system's internal calendar and clock. Boot Sequence (Diskette drive default) Determines the order in which the system searches for boot devices during system startup. NOTE: If you insert a boot device and restart the computer, this option appears in the system setup menu. To boot from a USB memory device, select the USB device and move it so it becomes the first device in the list. Drives Diskette Drive (Internal default) Enables and disables the floppy drives and sets read permission for the internal floppy drive. Off disables all floppy drives. USB enables the USB floppy drive. Internal enables the internal floppy drive. Read Only enables the internal drive controller and allows the internal floppy drive read-only permission. NOTE: Operating systems with USB support will recognize USB floppy drives regardless of this setting. Drives 0 through 3 (On default) Enables or disables an ATA or SATA device (such as hard-drive, CD drive, or DVD drive). On enables the interface so that the device can be used. Displays the Controller type (ATA or SATA), Port number the drive is using, Drive ID number, Capacity, and whether the drive is controlled by the BIOS. SATA Operation (Normal default) Determines the integrated SATA controller's operating mode: Normal – native mode, which provides the highest drive performance and optimal flexibility. Combination – combination mode, which offers compatibility with versions of the operating system that do not support SATA drives. Onboard Devices Integrated NIC (On default) Enables or disables the integrated NIC controller. Settings are On, Off, or On w/ PXE. When the On w/ PXE setting is active (available only for setting up a future boot process), the computer prompts you to press . Pressing this key combination causes a menu to display that allows you to select a method for booting from a network server. If a boot routine is not available from the network server, the computer attempts to boot from the next device in the boot sequence list. Integrated Audio Controller Enables or disables the onboard audio controller. Front USB Ports (On default) Enables or disables the front USB ports. USB for Flexbay (On default) On enables internal USB for FlexBay. NOTE: This USB option appears only if a FlexBay device is installed. Video Primary Video (Auto Specifies which video controller is primary when two video controllers are present on the computer. Auto enables the add-in video controller. Onboard enables the integrated video controller.default) Video Memory Size (8 MB default) Configures the system memory allocation reserved for the integrated video controller. Settings are 1MB and 8MB. Performance HyperThreading (On default) Determines whether the physical processor appears as one or two logical processors. The performance of some applications improve with additional logical processors installed. On enables hyperthreading. SpeedStep (On default) Enables SpeedStep for all supported processors in the computer. Hard Drive Acoustics (Bypass default) l Bypass (default) — Your computer does not test or change the current acoustics mode setting. l Quiet — The hard drive operates at its most quiet setting. l Suggested — The hard drive operates at the level suggested by the drive manufacturer. l Performance — The hard drive operates at its maximum speed. NOTE: Switching to performance mode will cause the drive heads to move faster, causing the hard drive to be noisier. However, some drives may not see an increase in data transfer rates. NOTE: Changing the acoustics setting does not alter your hard drive image. Security Admin Password (Not Set default) Displays the current status of your System Setup program's password security feature and allows you to verify and assign a new admin password. System Password (Not Set default) Displays the current status of the system's password security feature and allows a new system password to be assigned and verified. Password Changes Determines the interaction between the System password and the Admin password. Locked prevents a user without a valid Admin password from being able to modify the System password. Unlocked allows a user with a valid Admin password to modify the system password. Execute Disable (On default) Enables or disables Execute Disable memory protection technology. Power Management AC Recovery (Off default) Determines how the system responds when AC power is re-applied after a power loss. Off commands the system to stay off when the power is re-applied. You must press the front-panel power button before the system turns on. On commands the system to turn on when the power is re-applied. Last commands the system to return to the last power state the system was in just before it was turned off. Auto Power On (Off default) Sets the computer to automatically turn on. Off disables this feature. Everyday turns the computer on every day at the time set in Auto Power Time. Weekdays turns the computer on every day from Monday through Friday at the time set in Auto Power Time. NOTE: This feature does not work if you turn off your computer using a power strip or surge protector. Auto Power Time Sets time to automatically turn on the computer. Time is kept in the standard 12-hour format (hours:minutes). Change the startup time by pressing the right- or left-arrow key to increase or decrease the numbers, or type numbers in both the date and time fields. Suspend Mode Sets the computer's suspend mode. The options are S1, a suspend state where the computer is running in a low-power mode, and S3, a standby state where the power is reduced or turned off for most components, however, system memory remains active. Maintenance Load Defaults Restores System Setup options to their factory defaults.Boot Sequence This feature allows you to change the boot sequence for devices. Option Settings l Diskette Drive — The computer attempts to boot from the floppy drive. If the floppy disk in the drive is not bootable, if no floppy disk is in the drive, or if there is no floppy drive installed in the computer, the computer generates an error message. l Hard Drive — The computer attempts to boot from the primary hard drive. If no operating system is on the drive, the computer generates an error message. l CD Drive — The computer attempts to boot from the CD drive. If no CD is in the drive, or if the CD has no operating system, the computer generates an error message. l USB Flash Device — Insert the memory device into a USB port and restart the computer. When F12 = Boot Menu appears in the upper-right corner of the screen, press . The BIOS detects the device and adds the USB flash option to the boot menu. Changing Boot Sequence for the Current Boot You can use this feature, for example, to restart your computer to a USB device such as a floppy drive, memory key, or CD-RW drive. 1. If you are booting to a USB device, connect the USB device to a USB connector (see "Front View of the Computer" and "Back View of the Computer"). 2. Turn on (or restart) your computer. 3. When F2 = Setup, F12 = Boot Menu appears in the upper-right corner of the screen, press . If you wait too long and the operating system logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Microsoft Windows desktop. Then shut down your computer and try again. The Boot Device Menu appears, listing all available boot devices. Each device has a number next to it. 4. At the bottom of the menu, enter the number of the device that is to be used for the current boot only. For example, if you are booting to a USB memory key, highlight USB Flash Device and press . Changing Boot Sequence for Future Boots Event Log Allows you to view the Event Log. Entries are marked R for Read and U for Unread. Mark All Entries Read puts an R to the left of all the entries. Clear Log clears the Event Log. POST Behavior Fastboot (On default) When enabled, this feature reduces computer startup time by bypassing some compatibility steps. Off does not skip any steps during computer startup. On starts the system more quickly. Numlock Key (On default) Determines the functionality of the numeric keys on the right side of your keyboard. Off commands the right keypad keys to function as arrows. On commands the right keypad keys to function as numbers. POST Hotkeys Determines whether the sign-on screen displays a message stating the keystroke sequence that is required to enter the Setup program or the Quickboot feature. Setup & Boot Menu displays both messages (F2=Setup and F12=Boot Menu). Setup displays the setup message only (F2=Setup). Boot Menu displays the Quickboot message only (F12=Boot Menu). None displays no message. Keyboard Errors When set to Report (enabled) and an error is detected during POST, the BIOS will display the error message and prompt you to press to continue or press to enter System Setup. When set to Do Not Report (disabled) and an error is detected during POST, the BIOS will display the error message and continue booting the system. NOTE: To boot to a USB device, the device must be bootable. To make sure that your device is bootable, check the device documentation. NOTE: If you are booting to a USB floppy drive, you must first set the floppy drive to OFF in system setup. NOTE: To boot to a USB device, the device must be bootable. To make sure your device is bootable, check the device documentation.1. Enter system setup. 2. Use the arrow keys to highlight the Boot Sequence menu option and press to access the menu. 3. Press the up- and down-arrow keys to move through the list of devices. 4. Press the spacebar to enable or disable a device (enabled devices have a checkmark). 5. Press plus (+) or minus (–) to move a selected device up or down the list. Clearing Forgotten Passwords 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Locate the 3-pin password jumper (PSWD) on the system board, and attach the jumper plug to pins 2 and 3 to clear the password. 3. Close the computer cover. 4. Connect your computer and monitor to electrical outlets, and turn them on. 5. After the Microsoft® Windows® desktop appears on your computer, shut down your computer. Turn off the monitor and disconnect it from the electrical outlet. 6. Disconnect the computer power cable from the electrical outlet, and press the power button to ground the system board. 7. Open the computer cover. 8. Locate the 3-pin password jumper (PSWD) on the system board and attach the jumper to pins 1 and 2 to re-enable the password feature. 9. Close the computer cover. NOTE: Write down your current boot sequence in case you want to restore it. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTE: When you receive your computer, the jumper plug is attached to pins 1 and 2. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer.10. Connect your computer and devices to electrical outlets, and turn them on. Clearing CMOS Settings 1. Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." 2. Reset the current CMOS settings: a. Locate the 3-pin CMOS jumper (RTCRST) on the system board. b. Remove the jumper plug from pins 2 and 3. c. Place the jumper plug on pins 1 and 2 and wait for approximately 5 seconds. d. Replace the jumper plug on pins 2 and 3. 3. Close the computer cover. 4. Connect your computer and devices Back to Contents Page CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTICE: To connect a network cable, first plug the cable into the network port or device and then plug it into the computer.Back to Contents Page Specifications Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual Processor Expansion Bus Memory Connectors Computer Information Controls and Lights Video Power Audio Physical Drives Environmental Processor Processor type Intel® Pentium® 4 5XXX and 6XXX processors with Hyper-Threading technology NOTE: Not all Pentium 4 processors support HyperThreading technology. Level 1 (L1) cache 16 KB Level 2 (L2) cache 1 MB for Pentium 5XXX processors 2 MB for Pentium 6XXX processors (depending on your computer configuration) pipelined-burst, eight-way set associative, write-back SRAM Memory Type 400-MHz and 533-MHz DDR2 unbuffered SDRAM Memory connectors four Memory capacities 256 MB, 512 MB, or 1 GB non-ECC Maximum memory 4 GB NOTE: See "Addressing Memory With 4-GB Configurations" to verify the amount of memory available to the operating system. BIOS address F0000h Computer Information  Chipset Intel 945G Express DMA channels eight Interrupt levels 24 BIOS chip (NVRAM) 4 Mb NIC Integrated network interface capable of 10/100 communication System clock 800- or 1066-MHz data rate Video Type Integrated Intel Graphics Media Accelerator 950 (GMA950) Audio Type Sigmatel STAC9220 Expansion Bus  Bus type PCI 2.3 PCI Express x1 and x16 Bus speed PCI: 33 MHz PCI Express: x1 slot bidirectional speed - 500 MB/s x16 slot bidirectional speed - 8 GB/s PCI connectors twoconnector size 120 pins connector data width (maximum) 32 bits PCI Express connector one x1 connector size 36 pins connector data width (maximum) 1 PCI Express lane PCI Express connector one x16 connector size 164 pins connector data width (maximum) 16 PCI Express lanes Drives  Externally accessible: one 3.5-inch FlexBay (may contain an optional floppy drive or an optional Media Card Reader) two 5.25-inch drive bays Available devices Serial ATA drives (2), floppy drive, USB memory devices, CD drive, CD-RW drive, DVD drive, DVD-RW drive, DVD and CD-RW combo drive, and Media Card Reader Internally accessible: two bays for 1-inch high serial ATA hard drives Connectors External connectors: Video 15-hole connector Network adapter RJ-45 connector USB two front-panel and five back-panel USB 2.0- compliant connectors Audio five connectors for line-in, line-out, microphone/ sidesurround, surround, and center/subwoofer connector (LFE channel); two front-panel connectors for headphones and microphone System board connectors: Primary IDE drive one 40-pin connector Serial ATA two 7-pin connectors FlexBay Drive one USB 10-pin header for optional Media Card Reader (3.5-inch bay device) Floppy drive one 33-pin connector Fan one 5-pin connectors PCI 2.3 two 120-pin connectors PCI Express x1 one 36-pin connector PCI Express x16 one 164-pin connector Controls and Lights  Power button push button Power light green light — Blinking green in sleep state; solid green for power-on state. amber light — Blinking amber indicates a problem with the power supply inside the computer. If the system cannot boot and there is a solid amber light, this indicates a problem with the system board (see "Power Problems" in your computer Owner's Manual). Hard-drive access light green Link integrity light (on integrated network adapter) green light — A good connection exists between a 10-Mbps network and the computer. orange light — A good connection exists between a 100-Mbps network and the computer. off (no light) — The computer is not detecting a physical connection to the network. Activity light (on integrated network adapter) yellow blinking light Diagnostic lights four lights on the front panel (see "Diagnostic Lights") Standby power light AUX_PWR on the system board Power DC power supply:Back to Contents Page Wattage 305 W Heat dissipation 1039 BTU/hr Voltage (see the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide for important voltage setting information) 90 to 135 V and 180 to 265 V at 50/60 Hz Backup battery 3-V CR2032 lithium coin cell Physical Height 41.4 cm (16.3 inches) Width 18.8 cm (7.4 inches) Depth 45.7 cm (18.0 inches) Weight 12.7 kg (28 lb) Environmental  Temperature: Operating 10° to 35°C (50° to 95°F) Storage –40° to 65°C (–40° to 149°F) Relative humidity 20% to 80% (noncondensing) Maximum vibration: Operating 0.25 G at 3 to 200 Hz at 0.5 octave/min Storage 0.5 G at 3 to 200 Hz at 1 octave/min Maximum shock: Operating bottom half-sine pulse with a change in velocity of 20 inches/sec (50.8 cm/sec) Storage 27-G faired square wave with a velocity change of 200 inches/sec (508 cm/sec) Altitude: Operating –15.2 to 3048 m (–50 to 10,000 ft) Storage –15.2 to 10,668 m (–50 to 35,000 ft)Back to Contents Page Specifications Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual Processor Memory Computer Information  Video Audio Drives  Expansion Bus  Connectors Controls and Lights  Power Physical Environmental  Processor Processor type Intel® Pentium® 4 5XXX and 6XXX processors with Hyper-Threading technology NOTE: Not all Pentium 4 processors support HyperThreading technology. Level 1 (L1) cache 16 KB Level 2 (L2) cache 1 MB for Pentium 5XXX processors 2 MB for Pentium 6XXX processors (depending on your computer configuration) pipelined-burst, eight-way set associative, write-back SRAM Memory Type 400-MHz and 533-MHz DDR2 unbuffered SDRAM Memory connectors four Memory capacities 256 MB, 512 MB, or 1 GB non-ECC Maximum memory 4 GB NOTE: See "Addressing Memory With 4-GB Configurations" to verify the amount of memory available to the operating system. BIOS address F0000h Computer Information  Chipset Intel 945G Express DMA channels eight Interrupt levels 24 BIOS chip (NVRAM) 4 Mb NIC Integrated network interface capable of 10/100 communication System clock 800- or 1066-MHz data rate Video Type Integrated Intel Graphics Media Accelerator 950 (GMA950) Audio Type Sigmatel STAC9220 Expansion Bus  Bus type PCI 2.3 PCI Express x1 and x16 Bus speed PCI: 33 MHz PCI Express: x1 slot bidirectional speed - 500 MB/s x16 slot bidirectional speed - 8 GB/s PCIconnectors two connector size 120 pins connector data width (maximum) 32 bits PCI Express connector one x1 connector size 36 pins connector data width (maximum) 1 PCI Express lane PCI Express connector one x16 connector size 164 pins connector data width (maximum) 16 PCI Express lanes Drives  Externally accessible: one 3.5-inch FlexBay (may contain an optional floppy drive or an optional Media Card Reader) two 5.25-inch drive bays Available devices Serial ATA drives (2), floppy drive, USB memory devices, CD drive, CD-RW drive, DVD drive, DVD-RW drive, DVD and CD-RW combo drive, and Media Card Reader Internally accessible: two bays for 1-inch high serial ATA hard drives Connectors External connectors: Video 15-hole connector Network adapter RJ-45 connector USB two front-panel and five back-panel USB 2.0- compliant connectors Audio five connectors for line-in, line-out, microphone/ sidesurround, surround, and center/subwoofer connector (LFE channel); two front-panel connectors for headphones and microphone System board connectors: Primary IDE drive one 40-pin connector Serial ATA two 7-pin connectors FlexBay Drive one USB 10-pin header for optional Media Card Reader (3.5-inch bay device) Floppy drive one 33-pin connector Fan one 5-pin connector PCI 2.3 two 120-pin connectors PCI Express x1 one 36-pin connector PCI Express x16 one 164-pin connector Controls and Lights  Power button push button Power light green light — Blinking green in sleep state; solid green for power-on state. amber light — Blinking amber indicates a problem with the power supply inside the computer. If the system cannot boot and there is a solid amber light, this indicates a problem with the system board (see "Power Problems" in your computer Owner's Manual). Hard-drive access light green Link integrity light (on integrated network adapter) green light — A good connection exists between a 10-Mbps network and the computer. orange light — A good connection exists between a 100-Mbps network and the computer. off (no light) — The computer is not detecting a physical connection to the network. Activity light (on integrated network adapter) yellow blinking light Diagnostic lights four lights on the front panel (see "Diagnostic Lights") Standby power light AUX_PWR on the system boardBack to Contents Page Power DC power supply: Wattage 305 W Heat dissipation 1039 BTU/hr Voltage (see the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide for important voltage setting information) 90 to 135 V and 180 to 265 V at 50/60 Hz Backup battery 3-V CR2032 lithium coin cell Physical Height 41.3 cm (16.3 inches) Width 18.7 cm (7.4 inches) Depth 45.9 cm (18.0 inches) Weight 14.2 kg (32 lb) Environmental  Temperature: Operating 10° to 35°C (50° to 95°F) Storage –40° to 65°C (–40° to 149°F) Relative humidity 20% to 80% (noncondensing) Maximum vibration: Operating 0.25 G at 3 to 200 Hz at 0.5 octave/min Storage 0.5 G at 3 to 200 Hz at 1 octave/min Maximum shock: Operating bottom half-sine pulse with a change in velocity of 20 inches/sec (50.8 cm/sec) Storage 27-G faired square wave with a velocity change of 200 inches/sec (508 cm/sec) Altitude: Operating –15.2 to 3048 m (–50 to 10,000 ft) Storage –15.2 to 10,668 m (–50 to 35,000 ft)Back to Contents Page Technical Overview Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual Inside View of Your Computer System Board Components Power Supply DC Connector Pin Assignments Inside View of Your Computer Follow the procedures in "Before You Begin." System Board Components CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.Power Supply DC Connector Pin Assignments DC Main Power Connector P1 DC Processor Power Connector P2 DC Peripheral Connectors P3 and P5 DC FDD Connector P7 Pin Number Signal Name 18-AWG Wire 1 +3.3 VDC* Orange 2 +3.3 VDC* Orange 3 COM Black 4 +5VDC Red 5 COM Black 6 +5 VDC Red 7 COM Black 8 POK Gray 9 +5 VFP Purple 10 +12 VBDC White 11 +12 VBDC White 12 +3.3 VDC* Orange 13 +3.3 VDC*/SE* Orange 14 –12 VDC Blue 15 COM Black 16 PS-ON Green 17 COM Black 18 COM Black 19 COM Black 20 NA NA 21 +5 VDC Red 22 +5 VDC Red 23 +5 VDC Red 24 COM Black *The orange +3.3 VDC output wires must be 16 AWG. The +3.3 VDC terminals are high current type (9 A current rating/Molex-HCS type). *The +3.3VDC/SE is a brown sense wire for +3.3VDC and is optional. Pin Number Signal Name 18-AWG Wire 1 COM Black 2 COM Black 3 +12 VADC Yellow 4 +12 VADC Yellow Pin Number Signal Name 18-AWG Wire 1 +3.3 VDC Orange 2 COM Black 3 +5 VADC Red 4 COM Black 5 +12 VBDC White Pin Number Signal Name 18-AWG Wire 1 +5 VDC Red 2 COM Black 3 COM Black 4 +12 VADC YellowDC Peripheral Connectors P8 and P9 Back to Contents Page Pin Number Signal Name 18-AWG Wire 1 +12 VBDC White 2 COM Black 3 COM Black 4 +5 VDC RedBack to Contents Page Technical Overview Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual Inside View of Your Computer System Board Components Power Supply DC Connector Pin Assignments Inside View of Your Computer System Board Components CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide.Power Supply DC Connector Pin Assignments DC Main Power Connector P1 DC Processor Power Connector P2 DC Peripheral Connectors P3 and P5 DC FDD Connector P7 Pin Number Signal Name 18-AWG Wire 1 +3.3 VDC* Orange 2 +3.3 VDC* Orange 3 COM Black 4 +5VDC Red 5 COM Black 6 +5 VDC Red 7 COM Black 8 POK Gray 9 +5 VFP Purple 10 +12 VBDC White 11 +12 VBDC White 12 +3.3 VDC* Orange 13 +3.3 VDC*/SE* Orange 14 –12 VDC Blue 15 COM Black 16 PS-ON Green 17 COM Black 18 COM Black 19 COM Black 20 NA NA 21 +5 VDC Red 22 +5 VDC Red 23 +5 VDC Red 24 COM Black *The orange +3.3 VDC output wires must be 16 AWG. The +3.3 VDC terminals are high current type (9 A current rating/Molex-HCS type). *The +3.3VDC/SE is a brown sense wire for +3.3VDC and is optional. Pin Number Signal Name 18-AWG Wire 1 COM Black 2 COM Black 3 +12 VADC Yellow 4 +12 VADC Yellow Pin Number Signal Name 18-AWG Wire 1 +3.3 VDC Orange 2 COM Black 3 +5 VADC Red 4 COM Black 5 +12 VBDC White Pin Number Signal Name 18-AWG Wire 1 +5 VDC Red 2 COM Black 3 COM Black 4 +12 VADC YellowDC Peripheral Connectors P8 and P9 Back to Contents Page Pin Number Signal Name 18-AWG Wire 1 +12 VBDC White 2 COM Black 3 COM Black 4 +5 VDC RedBack to Contents Page Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual If you purchased a Dell™ n Series computer, any references in this document to Microsoft® Windows® operating systems are not applicable. Information in this document is subject to change without notice. © 2005 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo, and Dimension are trademarks of Dell Inc.; Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation; Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. Model DCSM September 2005     Rev. A01 Back to Contents Page NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer. NOTICE: A NOTICE indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death.Back to Contents Page Advanced Troubleshooting Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual Dell Diagnostics System Lights Diagnostic Lights Beep Codes Dell Diagnostics When to Use the Dell Diagnostics If you experience a problem with your computer, perform the checks in this section and run the Dell Diagnostics before you contact Dell for technical assistance. It is recommended that you print these procedures before you begin. Enter system setup to review your computer's configuration information, and ensure that the device you want to test displays in system setup and is active. Start the Dell Diagnostics from either your hard drive or from the optional Drivers and Utilities CD (ResourceCD). Starting the Dell Diagnostics From Your Hard Drive 1. Turn on (or restart) your computer. 2. When the DELL™ logo appears, press  immediately.  If you wait too long and the operating system logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Microsoft® Windows® desktop. Then shut down your computer and try again. 3. When the boot device list appears, highlight Boot to Utility Partition and press . 4. When the Dell Diagnostics Main Menu appears, select the test you want to run. Starting the Dell Diagnostics From the Optional Drivers and Utilities CD 1. Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD. 2. Shut down and restart the computer. When the DELL logo appears, press immediately. If you wait too long and the Windows logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Windows desktop. Then shut down your computer and try again. 3. When the boot device list appears, highlight IDE CD-ROM Device and press . 4. Select the IDE CD-ROM Device option from the CD boot menu. 5. Select the Boot from CD-ROM option from the menu that appears. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTE: The Drivers and Utilities CD (ResourceCD) is optional, and as such, may not ship with all computers. NOTICE: The Dell Diagnostics works only on Dell™ computers. NOTE: If you see a message stating that no diagnostics utility partition has been found, run the Dell Diagnostics from your (optional) Drivers and Utilities CD. NOTE: The next steps change the boot sequence for one time only. On the next start-up, the computer boots according to the devices specified in system setup.6. Type 1 to start the ResourceCD menu. 7. Type 2 to start the Dell Diagnostics. 8. Select Run the 32 Bit Dell Diagnostics from the numbered list. If multiple versions are listed, select the version appropriate for your computer. 9. When the Dell Diagnostics Main Menu appears, select the test you want to run. Dell Diagnostics Main Menu 1. After the Dell Diagnostics loads and the Main Menu screen appears, click the button for the option you want. 2. If a problem is encountered during a test, a message appears with an error code and a description of the problem. Write down the error code and problem description and follow the instructions on the screen. If you cannot resolve the error condition, contact Dell (see your computer Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell). 3. If you run a test from the Custom Test or Symptom Tree option, click the applicable tab described in the following table for more information. 4. When the tests are completed, if you are running the Dell Diagnostics from the Drivers and Utilities CD, remove the CD. 5. Close the test screen to return to the Main Menu screen. To exit the Dell Diagnostics and restart the computer, close the Main Menu screen. System Lights Your power button light and hard-drive activity light may indicate a computer problem. Option Function Express Test Performs a quick test of devices. This test typically takes 10 to 20 minutes and requires no interaction on your part. Run Express Test first to increase the possibility of tracing the problem quickly. Extended Test Performs a thorough check of devices. This test typically takes 1 hour or more and requires you to answer questions periodically. Custom Test Tests a specific device. You can customize the tests you want to run. Symptom Tree Lists the most common symptoms encountered and allows you to select a test based on the symptom of the problem you are having. NOTE: The Service Tag for your computer is located at the top of each test screen. If you contact Dell, technical support will ask for your Service Tag. Your computer's Service Tag is listed in the system information option in system setup. Tab Function Results Displays the results of the test and any error conditions encountered. Errors Displays error conditions encountered, error codes, and the problem description. Help Describes the test and may indicate requirements for running the test. Configuration Displays your hardware configuration for the selected device. The Dell Diagnostics obtains configuration information for all devices from system setup, memory, and various internal tests, and it displays the information in the device list in the left pane of the screen. The device list may not display the names of all the components installed on your computer or all devices attached to your computer. Parameters Allows you to customize the test by changing the test settings. Power Light Problem Description Suggested Resolution Solid green Power is on, and the computer is operating normally. No corrective action is required. Blinking green The computer is in the suspended state (Microsoft® Windows® 2000 and Windows XP). Press the power button, move the mouse, or press a key on the keyboard to wake the computer. Blinks green several times and then turns off A configuration error exists. Check the diagnostic lights to see if the specific problem is identified. Solid amber The Dell Diagnostics is running a test, or a device on the system board may be faulty or incorrectly installed. If the Dell Diagnostics is running, allow the testing to complete. Check the diagnostic lights to see if the specific problem is identified. Diagnostic Lights To help you troubleshoot a problem, your computer has four diagnostic lights labeled "1," "2," "3," and "4" on the front panel. When the computer starts normally, the lights flash. After the computer starts, all four lights display solid green. If the computer malfunctions, the color and sequence of the lights identify the problem.the patterns or codes on the lights change as the boot process completes. If the POST portion of system boot completes successfully, all four lights display solid green. If the computer malfunctions during the POST process, the pattern displayed on the lights may help identify where in the process the computer halted. If the computer does not boot, contact Dell for technical assistance (see your computer Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell). Blinking amber A power supply or system board failure has occurred. Check the diagnostic lights to see if the specific problem is identified. Also, see "Power Problems" in your computer Owner's Manual. Solid green and a beep code during POST A problem was detected while the BIOS was executing. See "Beep Codes" for instructions on diagnosing the beep code. Also, check the diagnostic lights to see if the specific problem is identified. Solid green power light and no beep code and no video during POST The monitor or the graphics card may be faulty or incorrectly installed. Check the diagnostic lights to see if the specific problem is identified. See "Video and Power Problems" in your computer Owner's Manual. Solid green power light and no beep code but the computer locks up during POST An integrated system board device may be faulty. Check the diagnostic lights to see if the specific problem is identified. If the problem is not identified, contact Dell for technical assistance. See your computer Owner's Manual for information on how to contact Dell. Hard-Drive Activity Light Problem Description Suggested Resolution Solid green The hard-drive activity light is on when the computer reads data from or writes data to the hard drive. The light might also be on when a device such as a CD player is operating. No corrective action is required. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. Light Pattern  Problem Description Suggested Resolution The computer is in a normal "off" condition, has successfully booted to the operating system, or a possible pre-BIOS failure has occurred. Plug the computer into a working electrical outlet and press the power button. Also see "Power Problems" in your computer Owner's Manual. A possible processor failure has occurred. Contact Dell (see your computer Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell). Memory modules are detected, but a memory failure has occurred. l If you have two or more memory modules installed, remove the modules, reinstall one module, and then restart the computer. If the computer starts normally, reinstall an additional module. Continue until you have identified a faulty module or reinstalled all modules without error. l If available, install properly working memory of the same type into your computer. l If the problem persists, contact Dell (see your computer Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell). A possible graphics card failure has occurred. l If the computer has a graphics card, remove the card, and then restart the computer. l If the problem still exists, install a graphics card that you know works and restart the computer. l If the problem persists or the computer has integrated graphics, contact Dell (see your computer Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell). A possible floppy or hard drive failure has occurred. Reseat all power and data cables and restart the computer. A possible USB failure has occurred. Reinstall all USB devices, check cable connections, and then restart the computer. No memory modules are detected. l If you have two or more memory modules installed, remove the modules, reinstall one module, and then restart the computer. If the computer starts normally, reinstall an additional module. Continue until you have identified a faulty module or reinstalled all modules without error. l If available, install properly working memory of the same type into your computer. l If the problem persists, contact Dell (see your computer Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell). Memory modules are detected, but a memory configuration or compatibility error exists. l Ensure that no special memory module/memory connector placement requirements exist (see "Memory"). l Verify that the memory modules that you are installing are compatible with your computer (see "Memory"). l If the problem persists, contact Dell (see your computer Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell).Beep Codes Your computer might emit a series of beeps during start-up if the monitor cannot display errors or problems. This series of beeps, called a beep code, identifies a problem. One possible beep code (code 1-3-1) consists of one beep, a burst of three beeps, and then one beep. This beep code tells you that the computer encountered a memory problem. If your computer beeps during start-up: 1. Write down the beep code. 2. Run the Dell Diagnostics to identify a more serious cause. 3. Contact Dell for technical assistance (see your computer Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell). A possible expansion card failure has occurred. 1. Determine if a conflict exists by removing a card (not a graphics card) (see "Cards") and restarting the computer. 2. If the problem persists, reinstall the card that you removed, remove a different card, and then restart the computer. 3. Repeat this process for each card. If the computer starts normally, troubleshoot the last card removed from the computer for resource conflicts (see "Resolving Software and Hardware Compatibilities" in your computer Owner's Manual). 4. If the problem persists, contact Dell (see your computer Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell). Another failure has occurred. l Ensure that the cables are properly connected to the system board from the hard drive, CD drive, and DVD drive (see "System Board Components"). l If there is an error message on your screen identifying a problem with a device (such as the floppy drive or hard drive), check the device to ensure that it is functioning properly. l The operating system is attempting to boot from a device (such as the floppy drive or hard drive); check system setup to ensure that the boot sequence is correct for the devices installed on your computer. l Check the computer message that appears on your monitor screen. l If the problem persists, contact Dell (see your computer Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell). The computer is in a normal operating condition after POST. NOTE: The diagnostic lights are not lit after the system successfully boots to the operating system. None. Code Cause 1-1-2 Microprocessor register failure 1-1-3 NVRAM read/write failure 1-1-4 ROM BIOS checksum failure 1-2-1 Programmable interval timer failure 1-2-2 DMA initialization failure 1-2-3 DMA page register read/write failure 1-3 Video Memory Test failure 1-3-1 through 2-4-4 Memory not being properly identified or used 3-1-1 Slave DMA register failure 3-1-2 Master DMA register failure 3-1-3 Master interrupt mask register failure 3-1-4 Slave interrupt mask register failure 3-2-2 Interrupt vector loading failure 3-2-4 Keyboard Controller Test failure 3-3-1 NVRAM power loss 3-3-2 Invalid NVRAM configuration 3-3-4 Video Memory Test failure 3-4-1 Screen initialization failure 3-4-2 Screen retrace failure 3-4-3 Search for video ROM failure 4-2-1 No timer tick 4-2-2 Shutdown failure 4-2-3 Gate A20 failureBack to Contents Page 4-2-4 Unexpected interrupt in protected mode 4-3-1 Memory failure above address 0FFFFh 4-3-3 Timer-chip counter 2 failure 4-3-4 Time-of-day clock stopped 4-4-1 Serial or parallel port test failure 4-4-2 Failure to decompress code to shadowed memory 4-4-3 Math-coprocessor test failure 4-4-4 Cache test failureBack to Contents Page Advanced Troubleshooting Dell™ Dimension™ 5100 Service Manual Dell Diagnostics System Lights Diagnostic Lights Beep Codes Dell Diagnostics When to Use the Dell Diagnostics If you experience a problem with your computer, perform the checks in this section and run the Dell Diagnostics before you contact Dell for technical assistance. Start the Dell Diagnostics from either your hard drive or from the optional Drivers and Utilities CD (ResourceCD). Starting the Dell Diagnostics From Your Hard Drive 1. Turn on (or restart) your computer. 2. When the DELL™ logo appears, press  immediately.  If you wait too long and the operating system logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Microsoft® Windows® desktop. Then shut down your computer and try again. 3. When the boot device list appears, highlight Boot to Utility Partition and press . 4. When the Dell Diagnostics Main Menu appears, select the test you want to run. Starting the Dell Diagnostics From the Optional Drivers and Utilities CD 1. Insert the Drivers and Utilities CD. 2. Shut down and restart the computer. When the DELL logo appears, press immediately. If you wait too long and the Windows logo appears, continue to wait until you see the Windows desktop. Then shut down your computer and try again. 3. When the boot device list appears, highlight IDE CD-ROM Device and press . 4. Select the IDE CD-ROM Device option from the CD boot menu. 5. Select the Boot from CD-ROM option from the menu that appears. 6. Type 1 to start the ResourceCD menu. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. NOTE: The Drivers and Utilities CD (ResourceCD) is optional, and as such, may not ship with all computers. NOTICE: The Dell Diagnostics works only on Dell™ computers. . NOTE: If you see a message stating that no diagnostics utility partition has been found, run the Dell Diagnostics from your (optional) Drivers and Utilities CD. NOTE: The next steps change the boot sequence for one time only. On the next start-up, the computer boots according to the devices specified in system setup.7. Type 2 to start the Dell Diagnostics. 8. Select Run the 32 Bit Dell Diagnostics from the numbered list. If multiple versions are listed, select the version appropriate for your computer. 9. When the Dell Diagnostics Main Menu appears, select the test you want to run. Dell Diagnostics Main Menu 1. After the Dell Diagnostics loads and the Main Menu screen appears, click the button for the option you want. 2. If a problem is encountered during a test, a message appears with an error code and a description of the problem. Write down the error code and problem description and follow the instructions on the screen. If you cannot resolve the error condition, contact Dell (see your computer Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell). 3. If you run a test from the Custom Test or Symptom Tree option, click the applicable tab described in the following table for more information. 4. When the tests are completed, if you are running the Dell Diagnostics from the Drivers and Utilities CD, remove the CD. 5. Close the test screen to return to the Main Menu screen. To exit the Dell Diagnostics and restart the computer, close the Main Menu screen. System Lights Your power button light and hard-drive activity light may indicate a computer problem. Option Function Express Test Performs a quick test of devices. This test typically takes 10 to 20 minutes and requires no interaction on your part. Run Express Test first to increase the possibility of tracing the problem quickly. Extended Test Performs a thorough check of devices. This test typically takes 1 hour or more and requires you to answer questions periodically. Custom Test Tests a specific device. You can customize the tests you want to run. Symptom Tree Lists the most common symptoms encountered and allows you to select a test based on the symptom of the problem you are having. NOTE: The Service Tag for your computer is located at the top of each test screen. If you contact Dell, technical support will ask for your Service Tag. Your computer's Service Tag is listed in the system information option in system setup. Tab Function Results Displays the results of the test and any error conditions encountered. Errors Displays error conditions encountered, error codes, and the problem description. Help Describes the test and may indicate requirements for running the test. Configuration Displays your hardware configuration for the selected device. The Dell Diagnostics obtains configuration information for all devices from system setup, memory, and various internal tests, and it displays the information in the device list in the left pane of the screen. The device list may not display the names of all the components installed on your computer or all devices attached to your computer. Parameters Allows you to customize the test by changing the test settings. Power Light Problem Description Suggested Resolution Solid green Power is on, and the computer is operating normally. No corrective action is required. Blinking green The computer is in the suspended state (Microsoft® Windows® 2000 and Windows XP). Press the power button, move the mouse, or press a key on the keyboard to wake the computer. Blinks green several times and then turns off A configuration error exists. Check the diagnostic lights to see if the specific problem is identified. Solid amber The Dell Diagnostics is running a test, or a device on the system board may be faulty or incorrectly installed. If the Dell Diagnostics is running, allow the testing to complete. Check the diagnostic lights to see if the specific problem is identified. If the computer does not boot, contact Dell for technical assistance (see your computer Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell).Diagnostic Lights To help you troubleshoot a problem, your computer has four diagnostic lights labeled "1," "2," "3," and "4" on the front panel. When the computer starts normally, the lights flash. After the computer starts, all four lights display solid green. If the computer malfunctions, the color and sequence of the lights identify the problem. Blinking amber A power supply or system board failure has occurred. Check the diagnostic lights to see if the specific problem is identified. Also, see "Power Problems" in your computer Owner's Manual. Solid green and a beep code during POST A problem was detected while the BIOS was executing. See "Beep Codes" for instructions on diagnosing the beep code. Also, check the diagnostic lights to see if the specific problem is identified. Solid green power light and no beep code and no video during POST The monitor or the graphics card may be faulty or incorrectly installed. Check the diagnostic lights to see if the specific problem is identified. See "Video and Power Problems" in your computer Owner's Manual. Solid green power light and no beep code but the computer locks up during POST An integrated system board device may be faulty. Check the diagnostic lights to see if the specific problem is identified. If the problem is not identified, contact Dell for technical assistance. See your computer Owner's Manual for information on how to contact Dell. Hard-Drive Activity Light Problem Description Suggested Resolution Solid green The hard-drive activity light is on when the computer reads data from or writes data to the hard drive. The light might also be on when a device such as a CD player is operating. No corrective action is required. CAUTION: Before you begin any of the procedures in this section, follow the safety instructions in the Product Information Guide. Light Pattern  Problem Description Suggested Resolution The computer is in a normal "off" condition, has successfully booted to the operating system, or a possible pre-BIOS failure has occurred. Plug the computer into a working electrical outlet and press the power button. Also see "Power Problems" in your computer Owner's Manual. A possible processor failure has occurred. Contact Dell (see your computer Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell). Memory modules are detected, but a memory failure has occurred. l If you have two or more memory modules installed, remove the modules, reinstall one module, and then restart the computer. If the computer starts normally, reinstall an additional module. Continue until you have identified a faulty module or reinstalled all modules without error. l If available, install properly working memory of the same type into your computer. l If the problem persists, contact Dell (see your computer Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell). A possible graphics card failure has occurred. l If the computer has a graphics card, remove the card, and then restart the computer. l If the problem still exists, install a graphics card that you know works and restart the computer. l If the problem persists or the computer has integrated graphics, contact Dell (see your computer Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell). A possible floppy or hard drive failure has occurred. Reseat all power and data cables and restart the computer. A possible USB failure has occurred. Reinstall all USB devices, check cable connections, and then restart the computer. No memory modules are detected. l If you have two or more memory modules installed, remove the modules, reinstall one module, and then restart the computer. If the computer starts normally, reinstall an additional module. Continue until you have identified a faulty module or reinstalled all modules without error. l If available, install properly working memory of the same type into your computer. l If the problem persists, contact Dell (see your computer Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell). Memory modules are detected, but a memory configuration or compatibility error exists. l Ensure that no special memory module/memory connector placement requirements exist (see "Memory"). l Verify that the memory modules that you are installing are compatible with your computer (see "Memory"). l If the problem persists, contact Dell (see your computer Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell). A possible expansion card failure has occurred. 1. Determine if a conflict exists by removing a card (not a graphics card) (see "Cards") and restarting the computer. 2. If the problem persists, reinstall the card that you removed, remove a different card, and then restart the computer. 3. Repeat this process for each card. If the computer starts normally, troubleshoot the last card removed from the computer for resource conflicts (see "Resolving Software Beep Codes Your computer might emit a series of beeps during start-up if the monitor cannot display errors or problems. This series of beeps, called a beep code, identifies a problem. One possible beep code (code 1-3-1) consists of one beep, a burst of three beeps, and then one beep. This beep code tells you that the computer encountered a memory problem. If your computer beeps during start-up: 1. Write down the beep code. 2. Run the Dell Diagnostics to identify a more serious cause. 3. Contact Dell for technical assistance (see your computer Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell). and Hardware Compatibilities" in your computer Owner's Manual). 4. If the problem persists, contact Dell (see your computer Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell). Another failure has occurred. l Ensure that the cables are properly connected to the system board from the hard drive, CD drive, and DVD drive (see "System Board Components"). l If there is an error message on your screen identifying a problem with a device (such as the floppy drive or hard drive), check the device to ensure that it is functioning properly. l The operating system is attempting to boot from a device (such as the floppy drive or hard drive); check system setup to ensure that the boot sequence is correct for the devices installed on your computer. l If the problem persists, contact Dell (see your computer Owner's Manual for information about how to contact Dell). The computer is in a normal operating condition after POST. NOTE: The diagnostic lights are not lit after the system successfully boots to the operating system. None. Code Cause 1-1-2 Microprocessor register failure 1-1-3 NVRAM read/write failure 1-1-4 ROM BIOS checksum failure 1-2-1 Programmable interval timer failure 1-2-2 DMA initialization failure 1-2-3 DMA page register read/write failure 1-3 Video Memory Test failure 1-3-1 through 2-4-4 Memory not being properly identified or used 3-1-1 Slave DMA register failure 3-1-2 Master DMA register failure 3-1-3 Master interrupt mask register failure 3-1-4 Slave interrupt mask register failure 3-2-2 Interrupt vector loading failure 3-2-4 Keyboard Controller Test failure 3-3-1 NVRAM power loss 3-3-2 Invalid NVRAM configuration 3-3-4 Video Memory Test failure 3-4-1 Screen initialization failure 3-4-2 Screen retrace failure 3-4-3 Search for video ROM failure 4-2-1 No timer tick 4-2-2 Shutdown failure 4-2-3 Gate A20 failure 4-2-4 Unexpected interrupt in protected mode 4-3-1 Memory failure above address 0FFFFh 4-3-3 Timer-chip counter 2 failure 4-3-4 Time-of-day clock stoppedBack to Contents Page 4-4-1 Serial or parallel port test failure 4-4-2 Failure to decompress code to shadowed memory 4-4-3 Math-coprocessor test failure 4-4-4 Cache test failure Quick Start Guida rapida | Démarrage rapide البدء السريع | Schnellstart Uniquely Dell support.dell.com/manuals | www.dell.com Information in this document is subject to change without notice. © 2011 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Trademarks used in this text: Dell™, the DELL logo, and Inspiron™ are trademarks of Dell Inc. 2011 - 02 Regulatory model: D11M Regulatory type: D03M004 Computer model: Dell Inspiron 620 Le informazioni contenute nel presente documento sono soggette a modifica senza preavviso. © 2011 Dell Inc. Tutti i diritti riservati. Marchi commerciali utilizzati nel presente documento: Dell™, il logo DELL e Inspiron™ sono marchi commerciali di Dell Inc. 2011 - 02 Modello normativo: D11M Tipo normativo: D03M004 Modello di computer: Dell Inspiron 620 Les informations de ce document sont sujettes à modification sans préavis. © 2011 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés. Marques mentionnées dans ce document : Dell™, le logo DELL et Inspiron™ sont des marques de Dell Inc. 2011 - 02 Modèle réglementaire : D11M Type réglementaire : D03M004 Modèle de l’ordinateur : Dell Inspiron 620 Die in diesem Dokument enthaltenen Informationen können ohne vorherige Ankündigung geändert werden. © 2011 Dell Inc. Alle Rechte vorbehalten. In diesem Text verwendete Marken: Dell™, das DELL Logo und Inspiron™ sind Marken von Dell Inc. 2011 - 02 Modellnummer: D11M Modelltyp: D03M004 Computermodell: Dell Inspiron 620 المعلومات الواردة بهذا المستند عرضة للتغيير دون إشعار. حقوق النشر © لعام 2011 لشركة .Dell Inc كافة الحقوق محفوظة. العالمات التجارية المستخدمة في هذا النص: ™Dell وشعار DELL و™Inspiron هي عالمات تجارية لشركة .Dell Inc 2011 - 02 الطراز التنظيمي: D11M النوع التنظيمي: D03M004 طراز الكمبيوتر: الطراز Inspiron 620 من Dell Connect the power cable Collegare il cavo di alimentazione Branchez le câble d’alimentation Schließen Sie das Netzkabel an توصيل كابل الطاقة Connect the network cable (optional) Collegare il cavo di rete (opzionale) Branchez le câble réseau (facultatif) Schließen Sie das Netzwerkkabel an (optional) توصيل كابل الشبكة )اختياري( Press the power button Premere il pulsante di accensione Appuyez sur le bouton d’alimentation Drücken Sie den Betriebsschalter اضغط على زر الطاقة Connect the keyboard and mouse Collegare la tastiera e il mouse Branchez le clavier et la souris Schließen Sie Tastatur und Maus an توصيل لوحة المفاتيح والماوس Connection Type Tipo di collegamento Type de connexion Verbindungstyp نوع التوصيل Computer Computer Ordinateur Computer الكمبيوت Cable and Adapter Cavo e adattatore Câble et adaptateur Kabelund Adapter الكابل والمهايئ Display Schermo Écran Display الشاشة VGA  VGA DVI  DVI DVI  VGA HDMI  HDMI HDMI  DVI Connect the display Collegare lo schermo Branchez l’écran Schließen Sie den Bildschirm an توصيل الشاشة Printed in PolandFeatures 1. Media Card Reader 2. Optical drive bays (2) 3. USB 2.0 connectors (2) 4. Microphone or line-in connector 5. Headphone connector 6. Power button and light 7. Hard drive activity light 8. Power supply light 9. Voltage selector switch 10. Power connector 11. Network connector and light 12. USB 2.0 connectors (6) 13. HDMI connector 14. VGA connector 15. Microphone connector 16. Expansion card slots (4) 17. Security cable slot 18. Padlock slot 19. Service tag and express service code 20. Front L/R line-out connector 21. Line-in connector الميزات 1. قارئ بطاقات وسائط 2. فتحات إضافة محركات أقراص ضوئية )فتحتان( )موصالن( USB 2.0 موصالت .3 4. ميكروفون أو موصل دخل خط 5. موصل سماعة رأس 6. زر ومصباح الطاقة 7. مصباح نشاط محرك األقراص الثابتة 8. مصباح مصدر الطاقة 9. مفتاح تحديد الجهد الكهربائي 10. موصل التيار 11. موصل ومصباح الشبكة )موصالت ستة( USB 2.0 موصالت .12 HDMI موصل .13 VGA موصل .14 15. موصل ميكروفون 16. فتحات بطاقات التوسعة )4 فتحات( 17. فتحة كابل األمان 18. فتحة قفل 19. رقم الصيانة ورمز الخدمة السريعة 20. موصل خرج خط أمامي أيمن/أيسر 21. موصل دخل خط Fonctionnalités 1. Lecteur de carte multimédia 2. Baies de lecteur optique (2) 3. Connecteurs USB 2.0 (2) 4. Microphone ou connecteur d’entrée 5. Prise casque 6. Bouton et voyant d’alimentation 7. Voyant d’activité du disque dur 8. Voyant d’alimentation 9. Sélecteur de tension 10. Connecteur d’alimentation 11. Connecteur et voyant réseau 12. Connecteurs USB 2.0 (6) 13. Connecteur HDMI 14. Connecteur VGA 15. Connecteur de microphone 16. Logements de carte d’extension (4) 17. Logement pour câble de sécurité 18. Logement pour cadenas 19. Numéro de service et code de service express 20. Connecteur de sortie droite/gauche avant 21. Connecteur d’entrée Caratteristiche 1. Lettore di schede multimediali 2. Alloggiamenti delle unità ottiche (2) 3. Connettori USB 2.0 (2) 4. Microfono o connettore linea di ingresso 5. Connettore della cuffia 6. indicatore e pulsante di accensione 7. Indicatore di attività del disco rigido 8. indicatore dell’alimentatore 9. Selettore di tensione 10. Connettore di alimentazione 11. Connettore e indicatore di rete 12. Connettori USB 2.0 (6) 13. Connettore HDMI 14. Connettore VGA 15. Connettore del microfono 16. Alloggiamento per schede di espansione (4) 17. Alloggiamento cavo di sicurezza 18. Alloggiamento per lucchetto 19. Numero di servizio e codice del servizio espresso 20. Connettore della linea in uscita L/R anteriore 21. Connettore linea di ingresso Merkmale 1. Medienkartenlesegerät 2. Schächte für optisches Laufwerk (2) 3. USB 2.0-Anschlüsse (2) 4. Mikrofonanschluss/Line-In-Anschluss 5. Kopfhöreranschluss 6. Betriebsschalter und -anzeige 7. Aktivitätsanzeige für die Festplatte 8. Anzeige des Netzteils 9. Spannungswahlschalter 10. Netzanschluss 11. Netzwerkanschluss und -anzeige 12. USB 2.0-Anschlüsse (6) 13. HDMI-Anschluss 14. VGA-Anschluss 15. Mikrofonanschluss 16. Erweiterungskartensteckplätze (4) 17. Sicherheitskabelsteckplatz 18. Einschub für Vorhängeschloss 19. Service-Tag-Nummer und ExpressServicecode 20. L/R Line-Out-Anschluss (vorn) 21. Line-In-Anschluss More Information • To learn about the features and advanced options available on your desktop, click Start→ All Programs→ Dell Help Documentation or go to support.dell.com/manuals. • To contact Dell for sales, tech support, or customer service issues, go to dell.com/ContactDell. Customers in the United States, can call 800-WWW-DELL (800-999-3355). Ulteriori informazioni • Per informazioni sulle funzionalità e le opzioni avanzate disponibili sul computer desktop, fare clic su Start→ Tutti i programmi→ Dell Help Documentation oppure visitare il sito support.dell.com/manuals. • Per rivolgersi a Dell per problematiche relative alla vendita, al supporto tecnico o all’assistenza clienti, visitare il sito dell.com/ContactDell. Per i clienti negli Stati Uniti, chiamare il numero 800-WWW-DELL (800-999-3355). En savoir plus • Pour en savoir plus sur les fonctionnalités et les options avancées de votre poste de travail, cliquez sur Démarrer→ Tous les programmes→ Documentation de l’aide Dell ou visitez la page support.dell.com/manuals. • Pour contacter Dell en cas de problèmes concernant les ventes, le support technique ou le service client, consultez la page dell.com/ContactDell. Aux États-Unis, appelez le 800-WWW-DELL (800-999-3355). Weitere Informationen • Weitere Informationen zu den Merkmalen und erweiterten Optionen Ihres Desktops finden Sie unter Start→ Programme→ Dell Hilfedokumentation oder unter http://support.euro.dell.com. • Antworten auf alle Fragen zum Verkauf sowie unseren technischen Support und unseren Kundenservice finden Sie ebenfalls unter http://support.euro.dell.com. Kunden in den USA erreichen uns unter der Nummer 800-WWW-DELL (800-999-3355). مزيد من المعلومات • للتعرف على الميزات والخيارات المتقدمة المتوفرة في الكمبيوتر المكتبي الذي بحوزتك، انقر فوق Start )ابدأ(← Dell Help ←)البرامج كافة( All Programs Documentation )وثائق تعليمات Dell( أو انتقل إلى .support.dell.com/manuals • لالتصال بشركة Dell لالستفسار عن مسائل تتعلق بالمبيعات أو الدعم الفني أو خدمة العمالء، انتقل إلى dell.com/ContactDell. بالنسبة للعمالء في الواليات المتحدة، يُرجى االتصال على 800-WWW-DELL .)800-999-3355( Información para NOM o Norma Oficial Mexicana (sólo para México) La información que se proporciona a continuación aparecerá en el dispositivo que se describe en este documento, en conformidad con los requisitos de la Norma Oficial Mexicana (NOM): Importador: Dell México S.A. de C.V. Paseo de la Reforma 2620 - Piso 11° Col. Lomas Altas 11950 México, D.F. Número de modelo reglamentario: D11M Voltaje de entrada: 115/230 V CA Frecuencia de entrada: 50/60 Hz Corriente nominal de salida: 6 A/7 A Para obtener información detallada, lea la información sobre seguridad incluida con su equipo. Para obtener información adicional sobre prácticas recomendadas de seguridad, visite dell.com/regulatory_compliance. 8 9 10 14 15 13 12 11 16 19 17 18 20 21 2 1 3 4 5 6 7 Views Viste | Vues | Ansichten | المناظر GUIDE DE RÉFÉRENCE INSPIRON™GUIDE DE RÉFÉRENCE Modèle réglementaire : D11M Type réglementaire : D11M001 INSPIRON™Remarques, précautions et avertissements REMARQUE : une REMARQUE fournit des informations importantes qui vous aident à mieux utiliser votre ordinateur. PRÉCAUTION : une PRÉCAUTION vous avertit d'un risque d'endommagement du matériel ou de perte de données et vous indique comment éviter le problème. AVERTISSEMENT : un AVERTISSEMENT signale un risque d'endommagement du matériel, de blessure corporelle ou de mort. __________________ Les informations de ce document sont sujettes à modification sans préavis. © 2011 Dell Inc. Tous droits réservés. La reproduction de ce document, de quelque manière que ce soit, sans l'autorisation écrite de Dell Inc. est strictement interdite. Marques mentionnées dans ce document : Dell™, le logo DELL, Inspiron™, Solution Station™, et DellConnect™ sont des marques de Dell Inc. ; Intel® ,Celeron® et Pentium® sont des marques déposées et Core™ est une marque d'Intel Corporation aux États-Unis et dans d'autres pays ; Microsoft®, Windows® et le logo du bouton Démarrer Windows sont soit des marques commerciales soit des marques déposées de Microsoft Corporation aux Etats-Unis et/ou dans d'autres pays ; Blu-ray Disc™ est une marque de Blu-ray Disc Association ; Bluetooth® est une marque déposée de Bluetooth SIG, Inc. utilisée par Dell sous licence. Les autres marques et appellations commerciales utilisées dans ce document font référence aux entités propriétaires des marques ou des noms de produit. Dell Inc. ne revendique aucun droit de propriété sur les marques et les appellations commerciales ne lui appartenant pas. 2011 - 03 Rév. A003 Installation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron......................... 5 Considérations préalables à l'installation .......................5 Branchement de l'écran...............6 Branchement du clavier et de la souris...8 Branchement du câble réseau (en option) .........................9 Branchement du câble d'alimentation ...10 Appui sur le bouton d'alimentation.....10 Installation du système d'exploitation... 11 Création d'un support de récupération système (recommandé) ..............12 Installation du tuner TV (facultatif) .....13 Connexion à Internet (facultatif).......13 Utilisation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron........................ 16 Fonctionnalités du panneau avant . . . . .16 Fonctionnalités du panneau arrière . . . 20 Connecteurs du panneau arrière ......22 Fonctionnalités logicielles ............24 Dell DataSafe Online Backup..........25 Dell Stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Résolution des problèmes ........ 28 Codes sonores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Problèmes liés au réseau.............29 Problèmes d'alimentation . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Problèmes de mémoire .............32 Blocages et problèmes logiciels ......33 Table des matières4 Table des matières Utilisation des outils de support technique ...................... 35 Centre de support Dell ..............35 Mes Téléchargements Dell............36 Messages système . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Utilitaire de résolution de problèmes matériels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Dell Diagnostics ................... 40 Restauration du système d'exploitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Restauration du système . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 Dell DataSafe Local Backup.......... 44 Support de récupération système......47 Dell Factory Image Restore .......... 48 Accès à l'aide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Support technique et service clientèle...51 DellConnect .......................52 Services en ligne....................52 Service d'état des commandes automatisé ........................53 Informations sur les produits..........54 Retour d'articles pour réparation dans le cadre de la garantie ou pour avoir . . . . .54 Avant d'appeler.....................56 Contacter Dell .....................57 Recherche d'informations et de ressources supplémentaires . . . . . . 58 Caractéristiques ................ 60 Annexe ........................ 65 Informations sur la norme NOM ou Norme Officielle Mexicaine (pour le Mexique uniquement) ...............65 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665 Cette section indique comment installer l'ordinateur de bureau Dell Inspiron 620. AVERTISSEMENT : avant de commencer toute procédure de cette section, lisez les informations de sécurité fournies avec votre ordinateur. Pour plus d'informations sur les meilleures pratiques en matière de sécurité, consultez la page d'accueil Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation) à l'adresse suivante : www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance. Considérations préalables à l'installation Lorsque vous installez votre ordinateur, assurez-vous que la source d'alimentation électrique est facilement accessible, que la ventilation est adaptée et que la surface est plane. Une mauvaise ventilation peut provoquer une surchauffe de l'ordinateur. Pour éviter cela, assurez-vous de laisser au moins 10,2 cm (4 pouces) à l'arrière de l'ordinateur et au moins 5,1 cm (2 pouces) sur chacun des autres côtés. Ne placez jamais votre ordinateur dans un espace clos, tel qu'un placard ou un tiroir, lorsque l'appareil est sous tension. Installation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron INSPIRON6 Installation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron Branchement de l'écran Si vous avez acheté la carte graphique séparée disponible en option, connectez l'écran à l'aide du connecteur qui se trouve sur cette carte. Sinon, connectez-le au connecteur VGA ou HDMI intégré. REMARQUE : les connecteurs VGA et HDMI intégrés seront désactivés et protégés par un couvercle si votre ordinateur possède une carte graphique séparée. Utilisez le câble approprié en fonction des connecteurs disponibles sur l'ordinateur et l'écran. Il se peut que vous deviez utiliser un adaptateur approprié (DVI à VGA ou HDMI à DVI) pour connecter votre écran à la carte graphique séparée, si le connecteur de votre écran et celui de la carte graphique diffèrent. Vous pouvez acheter les adaptateurs DVI à VGA, HDMI à DVI ainsi que des câbles HDMI ou DVI supplémentaires à l'adresse www.dell.com. REMARQUE : lors du branchement d'un seul écran, reliez l'écran à UN SEUL connecteur de l'ordinateur. REMARQUE : votre ordinateur prend en charge la fonction d'écrans multiples Intel (désactivée par défaut). Cette fonction vous permet de connecter votre ordinateur à plusieurs écrans simultanément. Pour activer cette fonction, accédez à l'utilitaire de configuration du système (BIOS) et définissez le paramètre Intel Multiple Monitor Feature (Fonction d'écrans multiples Intel) sur Auto (Automatique) dans la section Advanced Graphic Configuration (Configuration graphique avancée).7 Installation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron Consultez le tableau suivant afin d'identifier les connecteurs disponibles sur l'ordinateur et l'écran. Type de connexion Ordinateur Câble Écran VGA à VGA (câble VGA) DVI à DVI (câble DVI) DVI à VGA (adaptateur DVI à VGA + câble VGA) HDMI à HDMI (câble HDMI) HDMI à DVI (adaptateur HDMI à DVI + câble DVI)8 Installation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron Branchement du clavier et de la souris Branchez le clavier et la souris USB aux connecteurs USB du panneau arrière de l'ordinateur.9 Installation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron Branchement du câble réseau (en option) Une connexion réseau n'est pas requise pour terminer l'installation de l'ordinateur. Cependant, si vous avez une connexion réseau ou Internet utilisant une connexion câblée (p. ex. un périphérique haut débit ou une prise Ethernet), vous pouvez effectuer son branchement maintenant. REMARQUE : utilisez uniquement un câble Ethernet (connecteur RJ45) pour brancher votre connecteur réseau. Ne branchez pas de câble téléphonique (connecteur RJ11) au connecteur réseau. Pour relier l'ordinateur à un périphérique réseau ou haut débit, branchez l'une des extrémités du câble réseau sur un port réseau ou sur un périphérique haut débit. Branchez l'autre extrémité du câble réseau au connecteur réseau (connecteur RJ45) situé sur le panneau arrière de votre ordinateur. Un déclic indique que le câble réseau est correctement inséré.10 Installation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron Branchement du câble d'alimentation Appui sur le bouton d'alimentation11 Installation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron Installation du système d'exploitation Votre ordinateur Dell est préconfiguré avec le système d'exploitation Microsoft Windows. Pour procéder à la première installation de Windows, suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran. Ces étapes sont obligatoires et peuvent prendre un certain temps. Les écrans d'installation de Windows vous guident à travers plusieurs procédures qui vous permettent notamment d'accepter des contrats de licence, de définir des préférences et de configurer une connexion Internet. PRÉCAUTION : veillez à ne pas interrompre le processus d'installation du système d'exploitation. Vous risqueriez de rendre votre ordinateur inutilisable et de devoir réinstaller le système d'exploitation. REMARQUE : pour optimiser le fonctionnement de l'ordinateur, nous vous recommandons de télécharger et d'installer les derniers BIOS et pilotes pour votre ordinateur, disponibles à l'adresse support.dell.com. REMARQUE : pour plus d'informations sur le système d'exploitation et ses fonctionnalités, reportez-vous à l'adresse support.dell.com/MyNewDell.12 Installation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron Création d'un support de récupération système (recommandé) REMARQUE : nous vous recommandons de créer un support de récupération système, immédiatement après l'installation de Microsoft Windows. Le support de récupération système vous permet de restaurer votre ordinateur à son état d'exploitation lorsque vous l'avez acheté, tout en préservant les fichiers de données (sans recourir au disque du système d'exploitation). Vous pouvez utiliser le support de récupération système si les modifications apportées au matériel, aux logiciels, aux pilotes et aux autres paramètres du système empêchent l'ordinateur de fonctionner correctement. La création d'un support de restauration du système requiert les éléments suivants : • Dell DataSafe Local Backup • Une clé USB avec une capacité minimum de 8 Go ou un DVD-R/DVD+R/Blu-ray Disc REMARQUE : Dell DataSafe Local Backup ne prend pas en charge les disques réinscriptibles. Pour créer un support de récupération système : 1. Insérez le disque ou la clé USB dans l'ordinateur. 2. Cliquez sur Démarrer → Tous les programmes→ Dell DataSafe Local Backup. 3. Cliquez sur Créer un support de récupération. 4. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent. REMARQUE : pour en savoir plus sur la restauration de votre système d'exploitation à l'aide du support de récupération système, reportez-vous à la rubrique « Support de récupération système », page 47.13 Installation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron Installation du tuner TV (facultatif) REMARQUE : la disponibilité du tuner TV peut varier d'une région à l'autre. Pour installer le tuner TV : 1. Branchez le câble d'antenne numérique/ TV ou le câble de l'adaptateur au connecteur d'entrée d'antenne de votre ordinateur. 2. Allumez l'ordinateur. 3. Cliquez sur Démarrer → Tous les programmes→ Windows Media Center→ Tâches→ Paramètres→ TV. 4. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent. Connexion à Internet (facultatif) Pour vous connecter à Internet, vous devez disposer d'un modem externe ou d'une connexion réseau et d'un fournisseur d'accès Internet (FAI). Si vous n'avez pas commandé de modem USB externe ou d'adaptateur réseau sans fil à l'achat, vous pouvez vous en procurer à l'adresse www.dell.com. Configuration d'une connexion filaire • Si vous utilisez une ligne téléphonique commutée, branchez le cordon téléphonique sur le modem USB externe en option et sur la prise téléphonique murale avant de configurer la connexion Internet. 14 Installation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron • Si vous utilisez une connexion ADSL ou modem câble/satellite, contactez votre fournisseur d'accès Internet ou votre prestataire de services mobiles pour obtenir les instructions relatives à la configuration. Pour terminer la configuration de votre connexion Internet filaire, suivez les instructions fournies dans la section « Configuration d'une connexion Internet » à la page 15. Configuration d'une connexion sans fil REMARQUE : pour configurer votre routeur sans fil, reportez-vous à la documentation fournie avec le routeur. Vous devez vous connecter à votre routeur sans fil pour pouvoir utiliser une connexion Internet sans fil. Pour configurer une connexion à un routeur sans fil : 1. Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers, puis quittez tous les programmes. 2. Cliquez sur Démarrer → Panneau de configuration. 3. Dans la zone de recherche, saisissez réseau, puis cliquez sur Centre Réseau et partage→ Connexion à un réseau. 4. Pour procéder à la configuration, suivez les instructions qui s'affichent. 15 Installation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron Configuration d'une connexion Internet Les fournisseurs d'accès Internet (FAI) et leurs offres varient selon les pays. Contactez votre fournisseur d'accès Internet pour prendre connaissance des offres disponibles dans votre pays. Si vous n'arrivez plus à vous connecter à Internet, il est possible que le fournisseur d'accès Internet subisse une interruption de service. Contactez-le pour vérifier l'état du service ou essayez de vous connecter ultérieurement. Munissez-vous des informations communiquées par votre fournisseur d'accès Internet. Si vous ne disposez d'aucun fournisseur, l'Assistant Connexion à Internet peut vous aider à en trouver un. Pour configurer la connexion Internet : 1. Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers, puis quittez tous les programmes. 2. Cliquez sur Démarrer → Panneau de configuration. 3. Dans la zone de recherche, saisissez réseau, puis cliquez sur Centre Réseau et partage→ Configurer une nouvelle connexion ou un nouveau réseau→ Se connecter à Internet. La fenêtre Se connecter à Internet apparaît. REMARQUE : si vous ne savez pas quel type de connexion choisir, cliquez sur Comment choisir ou contactez votre fournisseur d'accès Internet. 4. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent et terminez la configuration à l'aide des informations de configuration remises par votre fournisseur.16 Utilisation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron Cette section fournit des informations sur les fonctionnalités disponibles sur votre ordinateur de bureau Inspiron. Fonctionnalités du panneau avant 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 INSPIRON17 Utilisation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron 1 Lecteur optique (2) : permet de lire ou de graver des CD, DVD et disques Bluray (en option). 2 Connecteurs USB 2.0 (2) : permettent de connecter un périphérique USB, comme une souris, un clavier, une imprimante, un lecteur externe ou un lecteur MP3. 3 Microphone ou connecteur d'entrée audio : permet de connecter un microphone ou recevoir un signal audio à traiter avec des logiciels audio. 4 Connecteur pour casque : permet de connecter un casque. REMARQUE : pour le branchement à un haut-parleur ou à un périphérique audio sous tension, utilisez le connecteur de sortie ligne situé à l'arrière de votre ordinateur. 5 Bouton et voyant d'alimentation : pour allumer ou éteindre l'ordinateur. Le voyant central indique l'état de l'alimentation : • Eteint: l'ordinateur est éteint, en mode veille prolongée ou n'est pas connecté à une source d'alimentation. • Blanc fixe : l'ordinateur est allumé. • Orange fixe : l'ordinateur est en mode Veille/Sommeil ou un problème s'est produit au niveau de la carte système ou de l'alimentation. Pour obtenir de l'aide, contactez Dell (voir la section « Contacter Dell », page 57). • Orange clignotant: signale un problème au niveau de la carte système ou de l'alimentation. Pour obtenir de l'aide, contactez Dell (voir la section « Contacter Dell », page 57). • REMARQUE: pour en savoir plus sur les problèmes d'alimentation, reportez-vous à la rubrique « Problèmes d'alimentation », page 30.18 Utilisation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron 6 Voyant d'activité du disque dur: s'allume lorsque l'ordinateur lit ou écrit des données. Il clignote lorsqu'une activité est en cours d'exécution sur le disque dur. PRÉCAUTION : pour éviter toute perte de données, n'éteignez jamais l'ordinateur lorsque le voyant d'activité du disque dur clignote. 7 Lecteur de carte multimédia : permet de consulter et de partager rapidement et facilement des photos numériques, de la musique et des vidéos enregistrées sur une carte multimédia. 8 Bouton d'éjection du lecteur optique (2) : permet d'ouvrir le lecteur optique.19 Utilisation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron 20 Utilisation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron Fonctionnalités du panneau arrière 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 821 Utilisation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron 1 Voyant du bloc d'alimentation : indique l'énergie disponible pour le bloc d'alimentation. REMARQUE : le voyant du bloc d'alimentation n'est pas disponible sur tous les ordinateurs. 2 Sélecteur de tension : permet de sélectionner la tension correspondant à votre région 3 Connecteur d'alimentation : permet de brancher le câble d'alimentation. L'aspect de ce connecteur peut varier. 4 Connecteurs du panneau arrière : permettent de brancher des périphériques USB, audio, vidéo et autres à leur emplacement réservé. 5 Logements pour cartes d'extension : permettent d'accéder aux connecteurs des cartes PCI Express installées. 6 Numéro de série et code de service express : permettent d'identifier votre ordinateur lorsque vous accédez au site Web, ou que vous appelez, le support technique de Dell. 7 Emplacement du cadenas : permet d’attacher un cadenas standard pour éviter tout accès non autorisé à l’intérieur de votre ordinateur. 8 Emplacement pour câble de sécurité : permet de rattacher à l'ordinateur un câble de sécurité vendu dans le commerce. REMARQUE : avant d'acheter un câble de sécurité, vérifiez qu'il est adapté à l'emplacement pour câble de sécurité de votre ordinateur.22 Utilisation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron Connecteurs du panneau arrière 1 2 3 4 5 6 723 Utilisation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron 1 Connecteurs USB 2.0 (6) : permettent de connecter des périphériques USB, comme les souris, les claviers, les imprimantes, les lecteurs externes ou les lecteurs MP3. 2 Connecteur HDMI : se connecte au connecteur HDMI de votre écran ou téléviseur. 3 Connecteur VGA : permet de connecter un moniteur ou un projecteur. 4 Connecteur de microphone : pour brancher un microphone ou un câble pour entrer des données audio. 5 Connecteur de sortie gauche/ droite avant: permet de brancher des haut-parleurs gauche/droite avant. 6 Connecteur d'entrée : permet de connecter des périphériques d'enregistrement ou de lecture (microphone, magnétophones, lecteurs de CD ou magnétoscopes). 7 Connecteur réseau et voyant: permet de connecter votre ordinateur à un périphérique réseau ou large bande si vous utilisez un réseau filaire. Les deux voyants près du connecteur signalent l'état et l'activité sur une connexion réseau filaire.24 Utilisation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron Fonctionnalités logicielles Productivité et communication Vous pouvez utiliser votre ordinateur pour créer des présentations, des brochures, des cartes de vœux, des prospectus et des feuilles de calcul. Vous pouvez également retoucher et visualiser des photographies et des images numériques. Reportez-vous à votre bon de commande pour connaître les logiciels installés sur votre ordinateur. Une fois connecté à Internet, vous pouvez consulter des sites Web, configurer un compte de messagerie et envoyer et télécharger des fichiers. Divertissement et multimédia Vous pouvez utiliser votre ordinateur pour regarder des vidéos, jouer, créer vos propres CD, DVD, disques Blu-Ray (en option), écouter de la musique et des stations de radio. Votre lecteur optique peut prendre en charge plusieurs formats de disque comme les CD, les DVD et les disques Blu-ray (en option). Vous pouvez télécharger ou copier des images et des vidéos à partir de périphériques portables, comme un appareil photo numérique ou un téléphone portable. D'autres logiciels en option vous permettent d'organiser et de créer des fichiers de musique et de vidéo, qui peuvent être gravés sur un disque, copiés sur des appareils portables (lecteur MP3 ou lecteur multimédia portable, par exemple) ou lus et affichés directement sur un téléviseur, un projecteur et une installation home cinema.25 Utilisation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron Dell DataSafe Online Backup REMARQUE : il se peut que Dell DataSafe Online Backup ne soit pas disponible dans votre région. REMARQUE : une connexion haut débit est recommandée pour des vitesses de chargement/téléchargement rapides. Dell DataSafe Online est un service de sauvegarde et de récupération automatisé qui vous aide à protéger vos données et vos fichiers importants des accidents comme un vol, un incendie ou une catastrophe naturelle. Vous pouvez accéder au service sur votre ordinateur à l'aide d'un compte -protégé par un mot de passe. Pour plus d'informations, consultez le site DellDataSafe.com. Pour planifier des sauvegardes : 1. Cliquez deux fois sur l'icône Dell DataSafe Online dans la zone de notification de votre bureau. 2. Suivez les instructions à l'écran. Dell Stage Le logiciel Dell Stage fournit un accès à vos contenus multimédias et applications MultiTouch préférés. Pour lancer Dell Stage, cliquez sur Démarrer → Tous les programmes→ Dell Stage→ Dell Stage. REMARQUE: vous pouvez également lancer directement certaines applications de Dell Stage via le menu Tous les programmes. Vous pouvez personnaliser Dell Stage de la façon suivante : • Réorganiser un raccourci d'application : cliquez sur le raccourci de l'application et maintenez le bouton de la souris enfoncé jusqu'à ce qu'il clignote, puis faites-le glisser vers l'emplacement souhaité sur Dell Stage. • Réduire : faites glisser la fenêtre Dell Stage vers le bas de l'écran. • Personnaliser : sélectionnez l'icône des paramètres, puis choisissez l'option souhaitée.26 Utilisation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron Les applications disponibles sur Dell Stage sont les suivantes : REMARQUE : il se peut que certaines applications ne soient pas disponibles en fonction des sélections effectuées lors de l'achat de votre ordinateur. •MUSIC: écoutez de la musique ou parcourez vos fichiers musicaux par album, artiste ou titre de chanson. Vous pouvez également écouter des stations de radio Internet du monde entier. L'application Napster en option vous permet de télécharger des chansons lorsque vous êtes connecté à Internet. •DOCUMENTS : accédez rapidement au dossier Documents de votre ordinateur. •PHOTO : affichez, organisez ou retouchez vos photos. Vous pouvez également créer des diaporamas et des ensembles de photos, puis les télécharger sur Facebook ou Flickr une fois connecté à Internet. •DELL WEB : obtenez un aperçu d'un maximum de quatre pages Web de votre choix. Cliquez ou appuyez sur l'aperçu de la page Web pour l'ouvrir dans le navigateur. •VIDEO : visionnez des vidéos. L'application CinemaNow disponible en option vous permet d'acheter ou de louer des films et des émissions télévisées une fois connecté à Internet. •SHORTCUTS : accédez rapidement aux programmes fréquemment utilisés. • Web Tile : obtenez un aperçu d'un maximum de quatre pages Web de votre choix. Cette application vous permet d'ajouter, de modifier ou de supprimer un aperçu de page Web. Cliquez sur l'aperçu de la page Web pour l'ouvrir dans le navigateur. Vous pouvez également créer plusieurs icônes Web via la galerie des applications.27 Utilisation de l'ordinateur de bureau Inspiron 28 Cette section contient des informations de dépannage de votre ordinateur. Si vous n'arrivez pas à résoudre un problème en suivant les consignes ci-dessous, consultez la section « Utilisation des outils de support technique » à la page 35 ou « Contacter Dell » à la page 57. AVERTISSEMENT : seul un technicien qualifié est autorisé à retirer le capot de l'ordinateur. Consultez le Manuel de maintenance à l'adresse support.dell.com/manuals pour des instructions techniques plus poussées. Codes sonores Votre ordinateur peut émettre une série de signaux sonores au démarrage s'il rencontre une erreur ou un problème. Cette série de signaux, appelée « code sonore », permet d'identifier les problèmes de fonctionnement de l'ordinateur. Si cela se produit, notez le code sonore et contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la section « Contacter Dell », page 57) pour obtenir de l'aide. REMARQUE : pour remplacer des pièces, veuillez vous reporter au Manuel de maintenance disponible à l'adresse support.dell.com/manuals. Résolution des problèmes INSPIRON29 Résolution des problèmes Code sonore Problème éventuel Un seul Défaillance possible de la carte système : échec de la somme de contrôle du BIOS en mémoire ROM. Deux Aucune RAM détectée REMARQUE : si vous avez installé ou remplacé vous-même le module de mémoire, assurezvous qu'il est correctement inséré. Trois Défaillance possible de la carte système : erreur liée aux puces Quatre Défaillance de lecture/écriture en mémoire vive Cinq Défaillance de l'horloge temps réel Six Défaillance de la carte ou de la puce vidéo Sept Défaillance du processeur Problèmes liés au réseau Connexions sans fil Si vous avez perdu la connexion réseau : le routeur sans fil est hors ligne ou la fonction sans fil a été désactivée sur l'ordinateur. • Vérifiez votre routeur sans fil pour vous assurer qu'il est sous tension et connecté à votre source de données (modem câble ou concentrateur réseau). • Rétablissez la connexion à votre routeur sans fil (consultez la section « Configuration d'une connexion sans fil », page 14). • Il se peut que des interférences perturbent ou interrompent la connexion sans fil. Essayez de rapprocher l'ordinateur du routeur sans fil.30 Résolution des problèmes Connexions filaires Si la connexion réseau est coupée — Le câble réseau est mal branché ou est endommagé. • Vérifiez le câble réseau pour vous assurer qu'il est correctement branché et ne présente aucun dommage. • Le voyant d'intégrité de liaison figurant sur le connecteur réseau intégré vous permet de vérifier que votre connexion fonctionne et vous renseigne sur son état : – Vert (gauche) : une bonne connexion est établie entre un réseau 10/100 Mbits/s et l'ordinateur. – Orange (gauche) : une connexion de bonne qualité est établie entre un réseau à 1000 Mb/s et l'ordinateur. – Éteint : l'ordinateur ne détecte aucune connexion physique au réseau. REMARQUE : le voyant d'intégrité de liaison du connecteur réseau ne sert que pour les connexions filaires. Le voyant d'intégrité de liaison n'indique pas l'état des connexions sans fil. Problèmes d'alimentation Si le voyant d'alimentation est éteint: l'ordinateur est en veille prolongée, hors tension ou n'est pas alimenté. • Appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation. L'ordinateur redémarre normalement s'il est éteint ou en état de veille prolongée. • Rebranchez le câble d'alimentation sur le connecteur d'alimentation situé à l'arrière de l'ordinateur et sur la prise électrique. • Si l'ordinateur est branché sur une barrette d'alimentation, vérifiez que celle-ci est branchée sur une prise électrique et qu'elle est allumée. • Contournez également les périphériques de protection contre les surtensions électriques, les barrettes d'alimentation et les rallonges d'alimentation pour vérifier que l'ordinateur est correctement sous tension. • Vérifiez que la prise électrique fonctionne en la testant avec un autre appareil, comme une lampe.31 Résolution des problèmes • Vérifiez que le voyant du bloc d'alimentation à l'arrière de l'ordinateur est allumé. S'il est éteint, il s'agit peut-être d'une défaillance de l'alimentation ou du câble d'alimentation. • Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell (voir la section « Contacter Dell », page 57). Voyant d'alimentation blanc fixe et aucune réponse de l'ordinateur: l'écran n'est peut- être pas branché ou alimenté en énergie. • Vérifiez que l'écran est branché correctement, puis éteignez-le et rallumez-le. • Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell (voir la section « Contacter Dell », page 57). Si le voyant d'alimentation est orange fixe : L'ordinateur est en mode Veille/Sommeil ou un problème s'est produit au niveau de la carte système ou de l'alimentation. • Appuyez sur une touche du clavier, déplacez la souris ou appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation pour revenir au fonctionnement normal. • Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell (voir la section « Contacter Dell », page 57). Si le voyant d'alimentation est orange clignotant: l'ordinateur a détecté une erreur lors de l'autotest de la mise sous tension (POST). Il se peut qu'un problème soit survenu au niveau de la carte système ou de l'alimentation. Pour obtenir de l'aide, contactez Dell (voir la section « Contacter Dell », page 57). Si vous rencontrez des interférences qui gênent la réception sur votre ordinateur: un signal parasite crée des interférences qui interrompent ou perturbent les autres signaux. Les interférences peuvent être dues à divers facteurs : • Rallonges utilisées pour le clavier, la souris et l'alimentation. • Trop de périphériques raccordés à une même multiprise. • Plusieurs multiprises raccordées à la même prise électrique.32 Résolution des problèmes Problèmes de mémoire Si un message indiquant une mémoire insuffisante s'affiche : • Enregistrez et fermez tous les fichiers ouverts, puis quittez tous les programmes que vous n'utilisez pas pour vérifier si cela permet de résoudre le problème. • Reportez-vous à la documentation du logiciel pour connaître la mémoire minimale requise pour son exécution. Le cas échéant, installez davantage de mémoire (reportez-vous au Guide de maintenance disponible sur support.dell.com/manuals). • Réinstallez les modules de mémoire (reportez-vous au Guide de maintenance sur le site support.dell.com/manuals) pour vérifier que votre ordinateur communique bien avec la mémoire. • Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell (voir la section « Contacter Dell », page 57). Si d'autres problèmes de mémoire se produisent: • Veillez à suivre les consignes d'installation de la mémoire (reportez-vous au Guide maintenance sur le site support.dell.com/manuals). • Vérifiez si la barrette de mémoire est compatible avec votre ordinateur. Votre ordinateur prend en charge la mémoire de type DDR3. Pour plus d'informations sur le type de mémoire pris en charge par votre ordinateur, voir « Spécifications de base », page 60. • Exécutez Dell Diagnostics (reportez-vous à la section « Dell Diagnostics », page 40). • Réinstallez les modules de mémoire (reportez-vous au Guide de maintenance sur le site support.dell.com/manuals) pour vérifier que votre ordinateur communique bien avec la mémoire. • Si le problème persiste, contactez Dell (voir la section « Contacter Dell », page 57).33 Résolution des problèmes Blocages et problèmes logiciels Si l'ordinateur ne démarre pas : vérifiez que le câble d'alimentation est bien branché sur l'ordinateur et sur la prise secteur. Si un programme ne répond plus : terminez le programme : 1. Appuyez simultanément sur <Échap>. 2. Cliquez sur Applications. 3. Cliquez sur le programme qui ne répond plus. 4. Cliquez sur End Task (Fin de tâche). Si un programme se bloque fréquemment: consultez la documentation du logiciel. Le cas échéant, désinstallez puis réinstallez le programme. REMARQUE : les logiciels sont généralement fournis avec une documentation ou un CD comprenant les instructions d'installation. Si l'ordinateur ne répond plus ou si un écran bleu uni s'affiche : PRÉCAUTION : vous risquez de perdre des données si vous ne parvenez pas à arrêter le système d'exploitation. Si vous n'obtenez aucune réponse lorsque vous appuyez sur une touche du clavier ou lorsque vous déplacez la souris, appuyez sur le bouton d'alimentation et maintenez-le enfoncé pendant au moins 8 à 10 secondes (jusqu'à ce que l'ordinateur s'éteigne), puis redémarrez votre ordinateur. Si le programme est conçu pour un système d'exploitation Microsoft Windows antérieur, exécutez l'Assistant Compatibilité des programmes. L'Assistant Compatibilité des programmes configure un programme afin qu'il fonctionne dans un environnement similaire au système d'exploitation Microsoft Windows antérieur.34 Résolution des problèmes Pour exécuter l'Assistant Compatibilité des programmes : 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer → Panneau de configuration→ Programmes→ Exécuter des programmes plus anciens avec cette version de Windows. 2. Dans l'écran d'accueil, cliquez sur Suivant. 3. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent. Si d'autres problèmes logiciels surviennent: • Sauvegardez vos fichiers immédiatement. • Utilisez un logiciel antivirus pour analyser le disque dur ou les CD. • Enregistrez et fermez les fichiers ouverts et quittez tous les programmes, puis arrêtez l'ordinateur à l'aide du menu Démarrer . • Consultez la documentation fournie avec le logiciel ou contactez son éditeur pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur le dépannage : – Vérifiez que le programme est compatible avec le système d'exploitation installé sur l'ordinateur. – Vérifiez que le matériel du système répond à la configuration matérielle minimale requise pour l'exécution du logiciel. Consultez la documentation du logiciel pour de plus amples informations. – Vérifiez que le programme est correctement installé et configuré. – Vérifiez que les pilotes de périphériques n'entrent pas en conflit avec le programme. – Le cas échéant, désinstallez puis réinstallez le programme. – Notez le message d'erreur affiché pour le communiquer au support technique Dell et obtenir de l'aide.35 Centre de support Dell Toute l'assistance dont vous avez besoin – un seul emplacement. Le Centre d'assistance Dell Support Center fournit des notifications à propos des systèmes, des solutions pour améliorer les performances, des informations sur les systèmes et des liens vers d'autres outils et services de diagnostic Dell. Pour démarrer l'application, cliquez sur Démarrer → Tous les programmes→ Dell→ Dell Support Center (Centre d'assistance Dell)→ Launch Dell Support Center (Démarrer le Centre d'assistance Dell). La page d'accueil du Centre d'assistance Dell affiche le numéro de modèle de votre ordinateur, le numéro de service, le code de service express, le statut de la garantie et des notifications indiquant comment améliorer les performances de votre ordinateur. La page d'accueil fournit également des liens vers : Vérification de l'ordinateur: exécutez des diagnostics matériels, découvrez quel programme occupe le plus de mémoire sur votre disque dur et suivez les modifications apportées chaque jour à votre ordinateur. Utilitaires de vérification de l'ordinateur • Gestionnaire d'espace disque : gérez votre disque dur grâce à une représentation visuelle de l'espace occupé par chaque type de fichier. • Historique des performances et de la configuration : surveillez les événements système et les modifications au fil du temps. Cet utilitaire affiche toutes les analyses, tous les tests, toutes les modifications du système, tous les événements critiques et tous les points de restauration avec l'indication du jour. Utilisation des outils de support technique INSPIRON36 Utilisation des outils de support technique Informations détaillées sur le système : affichez des informations détaillées sur les configurations du matériel et du système d'exploitation ; accédez à des copies de vos contrats de service, informations de garantie et options de renouvellement de garantie. Obtenir de l'aide : affichez les options du Support technique Dell, Support client, Visites guidées et formations, Outils en ligne, Modes d'emploi, Informations de garantie, FAQ, etc. Sauvegarde et restauration : créez un support de récupération, lancez l'outil de récupération et sauvegardez les fichiers en ligne. Solutions pour améliorer les performances du système : procurez-vous des solutions logicielles et matérielles qui vous aideront à améliorer les performances de votre système. Pour plus d'informations sur le Centre d'assistance Dell Support Center et le téléchargement et l'installation des outils de support disponibles, accédez à la page DellSupportCenter.com. Mes Téléchargements Dell REMARQUE : il se peut que Mes Téléchargements Dell ne soit pas disponible dans votre région. Certains logiciels préinstallés sur votre nouvel ordinateur Dell ne disposent pas de CD ou DVD de récupération. Ces logiciels sont disponibles en ligne sur la page Mes Téléchargements Dell. Vous pouvez à partir de ce site Web télécharger tous les logiciels disponibles pour les réinstaller ou créer votre propre support de sauvegarde. Pour vous enregistrer et utiliser Mes Téléchargements Dell : 1. Rendez-vous sur DownloadStore.dell.com/media. 2. Suivez les instructions à l'écran pour vous enregistrer et télécharger le logiciel. 3. Réinstallez le logiciel ou créez un support de sauvegarde à utiliser ultérieurement.37 Utilisation des outils de support technique Messages système Si votre ordinateur rencontre un problème ou une erreur, il peut afficher un message système qui vous permettra d'en identifier la cause et vous renseignera sur les mesures à prendre pour résoudre le problème. REMARQUE : si le message affiché par l'ordinateur ne figure pas parmi les exemples suivants, reportez-vous à la documentation du système d'exploitation ou du programme qui était en cours d'exécution au moment où le message est apparu contactez Dell (consultez la section « Contacter Dell » à la page 57) pour obtenir de l'aide. Alert! Previous attempts at booting this system have failed at checkpoint [nnnn] (Alerte ! Les précédentes tentatives d'amorçage de ce système ont échoué au point de reprise [nnnn]). For help in resolving this problem, please note this checkpoint and contact Dell Technical Support (Pour obtenir de l'aide afin de résoudre ce problème, veuillez noter le point de reprise et contacter le Support technique Dell) : l'ordinateur n'a pas réussi à exécuter la procédure d'amorçage après trois tentatives consécutives à cause de la même erreur. Pour obtenir de l'aide, contactez Dell (voir la section « Contacter Dell », page 57). CMOS checksum error or RTC is reset, BIOS Setup default has been loaded (Erreur somme de contrôle CMOS ou réinitialisation RTC, la configuration par défaut du BIOS a été chargée) : défaillance possible de la carte système ou pile de l'horloge en temps réel déchargée. Remplacez la pile (reportez-vous à la Notice d'entretien à l'adresse support.dell.com/manuals) ou contactez Dell (consultez la section « Contacter Dell » à la page 57) pour obtenir de l'aide. CPU fan failure : Défaillance du ventilateur du processeur. Le ventilateur du processeur doit être remplacé. Consultez le Guide de maintenance à l'adresse support.dell.com/manuals38 Utilisation des outils de support technique Hard-disk drive failure (défaillance du lecteur de disque dur) : défaillance possible du lecteur de disque dur lors de l'auto-test de démarrage (POST). Pour obtenir de l'aide, contactez Dell (voir la section « Contacter Dell », page 57). Hard-disk drive read failure (défaillance de lecture du lecteur de disque dur) : défaillance possible du lecteur de disque dur lors du test de démarrage du disque dur. Pour obtenir de l'aide, contactez Dell (voir la section « Contacter Dell », page 57). Keyboard failure (défaillance du clavier) : remplacez le clavier ou vérifiez s'il est branché correctement. No boot device available (aucun périphérique d'amorçage disponible) : absence de partition d'amorçage sur le disque dur, le câble du disque dur est mal branché ou aucun périphérique d'amorçage n'existe. • Si le disque dur est le périphérique d'amorçage, assurez-vous que les câbles sont connectés et que le disque est correctement installé et partitionné en tant que périphérique d'amorçage. • Accédez au programme de configuration du système et vérifiez que les informations de séquence d'amorçage sont correctes (voir le Guide de maintenance sur le site support.dell.com/manuals). No timer tick interrupt (absence d'interruption de cadence de l'horloge) : puce sur la carte système peut-être défectueuse ou défaillance de la carte système (voir le Guide de maintenance sur le site support.dell.com/manuals) ou contactez Dell (voir la section « Contacter Dell » page 57) pour obtenir de l'aide.39 Utilisation des outils de support technique USB over current error (erreur de surintensité USB) : déconnectez le périphérique USB. Votre périphériqueUSB a besoin d'une alimentation en électricité plus importante pour fonctionner correctement. Utilisez une source d'alimentation externe pour connecter le périphériqueUSB ou, si votre périphérique possède deux câblesUSB, connectez-les tous les deux. CAUTION - Hard Drive SELF MONITORING SYSTEM has reported that a parameter has exceeded its normal operating range. Dell recommends that you back up your data regularly. A parameter out of range may or may not indicate a potential hard drive problem (PRECAUTION : le système d'autosurveillance de disque dur indique qu'un paramètre se situe en dehors de la plage de fonctionnement normal. Dell vous recommande de sauvegarder régulièrement vos données. Un paramètre en dehors de la plage de fonctionnement normal peut indiquer un éventuel problème de disque dur): erreur SMART, défaillance possible du disque dur. Pour obtenir de l'aide, contactez Dell (voir la section « Contacter Dell », page 57). Utilitaire de résolution de problèmes matériels Si un périphérique n'est pas détecté pendant la configuration du système d'exploitation ou s'il est détecté mais n'est pas configuré correctement, servez-vous de l'Utilitaire de résolution des problèmes matériels pour résoudre ce problème d'incompatibilité. Pour lancer l'utilitaire de résolution des problèmes matériels : 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer → Aide et support. 2. Saisissez utilitaire de résolution des problèmes matériels dans le champ de recherche, puis appuyez sur pour lancer la recherche. 3. Dans les résultats de la recherche, sélectionnez l'option décrivant le mieux le problème et effectuez les étapes suivantes de dépannage.40 Utilisation des outils de support technique Dell Diagnostics Si vous rencontrez un problème avec votre ordinateur, procédez aux vérifications décrites dans la section « Blocages et problèmes logiciels », page 33 et exécutez Dell Diagnostics avant de contacter Dell pour obtenir une assistance technique. REMARQUE : le programme Dell Diagnostics fonctionne uniquement sur les ordinateurs Dell. Vérifiez que le périphérique que vous souhaitez tester s'affiche dans l'utilitaire de configuration du système et qu'il est activé. Pour accéder à l'utilitaire de configuration système (BIOS), mettez l'ordinateur sous tension (ou redémarrez-le) et appuyez sur lorsque le logo DELL apparaît. Démarrage de Dell ePSA Diagnostics ePSA (Enhanced Pre-boot System Assessment) teste des périphriques tels que la carte système, le clavier, l'écran, la mémoire, le disque dur, etc. 1. Mettez l'ordinateur sous tension (ou redémarrez-le). 2. Lorsque le logo Dell apparaît, appuyez immédiatement sur . REMARQUE : si vous tardez trop et que le logo du système d'exploitation apparaît, patientez jusqu'à ce que le Bureau de Microsoft Windows s'affiche, puis éteignez votre ordinateur et réessayez. 3. Sélectionnez Diagnostics dans le menu d'amorçage et appuyez sur . 4. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent.41 Utilisation des outils de support technique Si un périphérique ne passe pas le test, celui-ci s'arrête et l'ordinateur émet un signal sonore. Notez le(s) code(s) d'erreur qui s'affichent à l'écran, puis contactez Dell (reportez-vous à la section « Contacter Dell » à la page 57) pour obtenir de l'aide. • Pour arrêter ePSA et redémarrer votre ordinateur, appuyez sur . • Pour passer au test suivant, appuyez sur . • Pour réexécuter un test ayant échoué, appuyez sur . Si ePSA réussit, le message suivant s'affiche « Do you want to run the remaining memory tests ? This will take about 30 minutes or more. Do you want to continue ? (Recommended) » (Voulezvous exécuter les tests de mémoire restants ? Cette opération dure au moins 30 minutes. Voulez-vous continuer ? (recommandé).) Si vous rencontrez des problèmes avec la mémoire, appuyez sur , sinon appuyez sur . Le message suivant apparaît : « Enhanced Pre-boot System Assessment Complete. (Évaluation du système de préamorçage terminée.) » 5. Cliquez sur Quitter pour redémarrer l'ordinateur. Démarrage de Dell PC Checkup Dell PC Checkup analyse et teste le matériel de votre ordinateur. Il propose des solutions automatisées pour les problèmes de configuration les plus courants. 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer → Tous les programmes→ Dell→ Centre de support Dell→ Lancer PC Checkup. 2. Sélectionnez le test à exécuter et suivez les instructions qui s'affichent à l'écran. REMARQUE : si une erreur est signalée à la fin des tests, notez le(s) périphérique(s) et le(s) (s) ayant échoué. Pour obtenir de l'aide, contactez Dell (voir la section « Contacter Dell », page 57). 3. Fermez la fenêtre pour quitter PC Checkup.42 Vous pouvez restaurer le système d'exploitation de votre ordinateur à l'aide des options suivantes : PRÉCAUTION : si vous utilisez Dell Factory Image Restore ou le disque du système d'exploitation, vous perdrez tous les fichiers de données de votre ordinateur. Si possible, sauvegardez toutes les données avant de lancer ces options. Option Utilisation Restauration du système en tant que première solution Dell DataSafe Local Backup si la restauration du système ne permet pas de résoudre votre problème. Support de récupération système si une défaillance du système d'exploitation vous empêche d'utiliser la Restauration du système ou DataSafe Local Backup. lors de l'installation des logiciels installés en usine par Dell sur un disque dur nouvellement installé. Dell Factory Image Restore pour restaurer votre ordinateur à son état d'exploitation initial, lorsqu'il vous a été livré. Disque Operating System (Système d'exploitation) pour installer uniquement le système d'exploitation sur votre ordinateur. REMARQUE : le disque Operating System (Système d'exploitation) est en option et n'est pas fourni avec tous les ordinateurs. Restauration du système d'exploitation INSPIRON43 Restauration du système d'exploitation Restauration du système Les systèmes d'exploitation Microsoft Windows proposent une option de restauration du système qui vous permet de restaurer l'ordinateur à un état antérieur (sans affecter les fichiers de données) si les modifications apportées au matériel, aux logiciels ou à d'autres paramètres du système empêchent l'ordinateur de fonctionner correctement. Toute modification apportée à votre ordinateur par la restauration du système est totalement réversible. PRÉCAUTION : Effectuez des sauvegardes régulières de vos fichiers de données. La fonction Restauration du système n'assure ni la surveillance ni la restauration de vos données personnelles. Démarrage de la restauration du système 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer . 2. Dans la zone Rechercher, saisissez Restauration du système, puis appuyez sur . REMARQUE : la fenêtre Contrôle de compte d'utilisateur peut apparaître. Si vous êtes administrateur de l'ordinateur, cliquez sur Continuer. Sinon, prenez contact avec votre administrateur pour pouvoir poursuivre. 3. Cliquez sur Suivant et suivez les instructions qui s'affichent. Si la fonction Restauration du système n'a pas résolu le problème, vous pouvez annuler la dernière restauration du système.44 Restauration du système d'exploitation Annulation de la dernière restauration du système REMARQUE : avant de procéder à l'annulation de la dernière restauration du système, sauvegardez et fermez tous les fichiers ouverts, et quittez tous les programmes. Vous ne devez en aucun cas modifier, ouvrir ni supprimer des fichiers ou des programmes tant que la restauration du système n'est pas terminée. 1. Cliquez sur Démarrer . 2. Dans la zone Rechercher, saisissez Restauration du système, puis appuyez sur . 3. Cliquez sur Annuler ma dernière restauration, puis sur Suivant. DellDataSafe Local Backup PRÉCAUTION : l'utilisation de Dell DataSafe Local Backup pour restaurer votre système d'exploitation supprime définitivement tous les programmes ou les pilotes installés sur votre ordinateur après l'avoir reçu. Créez une sauvegarde des applications que vous devez installer sur votre ordinateur avant d'utiliser Dell DataSafe Local Backup. N'utilisez Dell DataSafe Local Backup que si la fonction Restauration du système n'a pas résolu votre problème de système d'exploitation. PRÉCAUTION : Bien que la fonction Dell DataSafe Local Backup soit conçue pour préserver les fichiers de données de votre ordinateur, nous vous recommandons de sauvegarder ces fichiers avant de l'utiliser. REMARQUE : il se peut que Dell DataSafe Local Backup ne soit pas disponible dans votre pays.45 Restauration du système d'exploitation REMARQUE : si Dell DataSafe Local Backup n'est pas disponible sur votre ordinateur, utilisez Dell Factory Image Restore (Restauration de l'image d'usine Dell), (reportez vous à « Dell Factory Image Restore », page 48) pour restaurer votre système d'exploitation. Vous pouvez utiliser Dell DataSafe Local Backup pour restaurer le disque dur à l'état dans lequel il se trouvait lorsque vous avez acheté l'ordinateur tout en préservant les fichiers de données. Dell DataSafe Local Backup vous permet de : • Sauvegarder et restaurer votre ordinateur à son état d'exploitation antérieur • Créer un support de récupération système (voir « Création d'un support de récupération système (recommandé) » page 12) Dell DataSafe Local Backup Basic Pour restaurer le système d'exploitation et les logiciels installés en usine par Dell tout en conservant les fichiers de données : 1. Éteignez l'ordinateur. 2. Déconnectez tous les périphériques (lecteur USB, imprimante, etc.) reliés à votre ordinateur et retirez tout matériel interne que vous avez ajouté récemment. 3. Allumez l'ordinateur. 4. Lorsque le logo DELL apparaît, appuyez plusieurs fois sur afin d'accéder à la fenêtre Options de démarrage avancées. REMARQUE : si vous tardez trop et que le logo du système d'exploitation apparaît, patientez jusqu'à ce que le Bureau de Microsoft Windows s'affiche, puis éteignez votre ordinateur et réessayez. 5. Sélectionnez Repair Your Computer (Réparer l'ordinateur).46 Restauration du système d'exploitation 6. Sélectionnez Dell DataSafe Restore and Emergency Backup dans le menu System Recovery Options (Options de récupération système) et suivez les instructions qui apparaissent. REMARQUE : le processus de restauration peut prendre une heure voire plus selon le volume des données à restaurer. REMARQUE : pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous à la base de connaissances, article nº 353560, disponible sur le site support.dell.com. Mise à niveau vers Dell DataSafe Local Backup Professional REMARQUE : il est possible que Dell DataSafe Local Backup Professional soit installé sur votre ordinateur, si vous l'avez commandé lors de votre achat. Dell DataSafe Local Backup Professional fournit des fonctionnalités supplémentaires vous permettant de : • Sauvegarder et restaurer votre ordinateur sur la base des types de fichiers. • Sauvegarder les fichiers sur un périphérique de stockage local • Planifier des sauvegardes automatiques Pour effectuer une mise à niveau vers Dell DataSafe Local Backup Professional : 1. Cliquez deux fois sur l'icône Dell DataSafe Local Backup Online dans la zone de notification de votre Bureau. 2. Cliquez sur UPGRADE NOW ! (METTRE à NIVEAU MAINTENANT !) 3. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent.47 Restauration du système d'exploitation Support de récupération système PRÉCAUTION : bien que le support de récupération système soit conçu pour préserver les fichiers de données de votre ordinateur, nous vous recommandons de sauvegarder ces fichiers avant de l'utiliser. Vous pouvez utiliser le support de récupération système, créé à l'aide de Dell DataSafe Local Backup, pour restaurer le disque dur à l'état dans lequel il se trouvait lorsque vous avez acheté l'ordinateur tout en préservant les fichiers de données. Utilisez le support de récupération système dans les cas où : • Une défaillance du système d'exploitation vous empêche d'utiliser les options de récupération installées sur votre ordinateur. • Une défaillance du disque dur empêche la récupération des données. Pour restaurer le système d'exploitation et les logiciels installés en usine par Dell sur votre ordinateur à l'aide du support de récupération système : 1. Insérez le disque ou la clé USB de récupération système et redémarrez votre ordinateur. 2. Lorsque le logo DELL apparaît, appuyez immédiatement sur . REMARQUE : si vous tardez trop et que le logo du système d'exploitation apparaît, patientez jusqu'à ce que le Bureau de Microsoft Windows s'affiche, puis éteignez votre ordinateur et réessayez. 3. Sélectionnez le périphérique d'amorçage approprié dans la liste et appuyez sur . 4. Suivez les instructions qui s'affichent.48 Restauration du système d'exploitation Dell Factory Image Restore PRÉCAUTION: l'utilisation de Dell Factory Image Restore pour restaurer votre système d'exploitation supprime définitivement toutes les données qui figurent sur le disque dur ainsi que tous les programmes et tous les pilotes installés après que vous avez reçu votre ordinateur. Dans la mesure du possible, sauvegardez toutes vos données avant d'utiliser cette option. Utilisez Dell Factory Image Restore uniquement si la fonction Restauration du système n'a pas résolu votre problème de système d'exploitation. REMARQUE : Dell Factory Image Restore peut ne pas être disponible dans certains pays ou sur certains ordinateurs. REMARQUE : si Dell Factory Image Restore n'est pas disponible sur votre ordinateur, utilisez Dell DataSafe Local Backup (reportez vous à « Dell DataSafe Local Backup », page 44) pour restaurer votre système d'exploitation. Utilisez Dell Factory Image Restore pour restaurer le système d'exploitation uniqiuement en dernier recours. Cette option restaure le disque dur à l'état de fonctionnement dans lequel il se trouvait lorsque vous avez acheté l'ordinateur. Tous les programmes ou fichiers ajoutés depuis que vous avez reçu votre ordinateur, notamment les fichiers de données, sont définitivement supprimés du disque dur. Les fichiers de données incluent les documents, feuilles de calcul, messages électroniques, photos numériques, fichiers audio, etc. Si possible, sauvegardez toutes les données avant de lancer Dell Factory Image Restore. Démarrage de Dell Factory Image Restore 1. Allumez l'ordinateur. 2. Lorsque le logo DELL apparaît, appuyez plusieurs fois sur afin d'accéder à la fenêtre Options de démarrage avancées.49 Restauration du système d'exploitation REMARQUE : si vous tardez trop et que le logo du système d'exploitation apparaît, patientez jusqu'à ce que le Bureau de Microsoft Windows s'affiche, puis éteignez votre ordinateur et réessayez. 3. Sélectionnez Repair Your Computer (Réparer votre ordinateur). La fenêtre System Recovery Options (Options de récupération système) apparaît. 4. Sélectionnez une disposition de clavier, puis cliquez sur Next (Suivant). 5. Pour accéder aux options de réparation, ouvrez une session en tant qu'utilisateur local. Pour accéder à l'invite de commande, saisissez administrateur dans le champ Nom d'utilisateur puis cliquez sur OK. 6. Cliquez sur Dell Factory Image Restore. L'écran de bienvenue Dell Factory Image Restore apparaît. REMARQUE: selon la configuration de votre ordinateur, vous devrez peut-être sélectionner Dell Factory Tools (Outils d'usine Dell), puis Dell Factory Image Restore (Restauration d'image d'usine Dell). 7. Cliquez sur Next (Suivant). L'écran Confirm Data Deletion (Confirmer la suppression des données) apparaît. REMARQUE : si vous ne souhaitez pas effectuer la restauration d'image d'usine, cliquez sur Cancel (Annuler). 8. Cochez la case pour confirmer le reformatage du disque dur et la restauration des logiciels du système à l'état d'origine, puis cliquez sur Next (Suivant). Le processus de restauration commence ; il peut prendre au moins cinq minutes. Un message apparaît lorsque le système d'exploitation et les applications pré- installées en usine ont été restaurés à leur état de sortie d'usine. 9. Cliquez sur Finish (Terminer) pour redémarrer votre ordinateur.50 Si vous rencontrez un problème lié à l'ordinateur, effectuez les étapes suivantes pour diagnostiquer et résoudre ce problème : 1. Reportez-vous à la section « Résolution des problèmes » à la page 28 pour obtenir des informations et connaître les procédures de résolution relatives au problème rencontré par votre ordinateur. 2. Reportez-vous à la section « Dell Diagnostics » à la page 40 pour connaître les procédures d'exécution de Dell Diagnostics. 3. Remplissez la « Liste de vérification de diagnostics », page 56. 4. Utilisez la gamme complète de services en ligne de Dell disponibles sur le site Web de support technique (support.dell.com) pour obtenir de l'aide concernant les procédures d'installation et de dépannage. Reportez-vous à la section « Services en ligne » à la page 52 pour obtenir la liste exhaustive des services de support technique Dell en ligne. 5. Si les étapes précédentes ne vous ont pas permis de résoudre le problème, reportezvous à la section « Avant d'appeler », page 56. REMARQUE : appelez le support technique de Dell depuis un téléphone proche de l'ordinateur afin qu'un technicien puisse vous guider dans la procédure de dépannage. REMARQUE : il se peut que le système de code du service express de Dell ne soit pas disponible dans votre pays. Accès à l'aide INSPIRON51 Accès à l'aide Lorsque le système téléphonique automatisé de Dell vous y invite, saisissez votre code de service express pour acheminer votre appel vers l'équipe de support technique appropriée. Si vous ne disposez pas d'un code de service express, ouvrez le dossier Dell Accessories (Accessoires Dell), doublecliquez sur l'icône Express Service Code (Code de service express) et suivez les instructions qui s'affichent. REMARQUE : certains services ne sont pas toujours disponibles en dehors des États-Unis. Contactez votre représentant Dell local pour en savoir plus. Support technique et service clientèle Le service de support technique de Dell est à votre disposition pour répondre à toutes les questions relatives au matériel Dell. Notre équipe de support technique utilise des tests de diagnostic informatisés pour répondre plus rapidement et plus efficacement à vos questions. Pour contacter le service de support technique Dell, reportez-vous à la section « Avant d'appeler » à la page 56, puis recherchez les informations de contact qui s'appliquent à votre pays ou rendez-vous sur le site support.dell.com.52 Accès à l'aide DellConnect DellConnect, outil d'accès en ligne simple, permet à un technicien de support technique de Dell d'accéder à votre ordinateur, par une connexion haut débit, afin de diagnostiquer les problèmes et de les résoudre sous votre supervision. Pour plus d'informations, rendezvous sur le site www.dell.com/DellConnect. Services en ligne Pour en savoir plus sur les produits et services Dell, consultez les sites suivants : • www.dell.com • www.dell.com/ap (pays d'Asie et du Pacifique uniquement) • www.dell.com/jp (Japon uniquement) • www.euro.dell.com (Europe uniquement) • www.dell.com/la (pays d'Amérique latine et des Caraïbes) • www.dell.ca (Canada uniquement) Vous pouvez accéder au support technique de Dell par l'intermédiaire des sites et adresses e-mail suivants : Sites Web de support technique Dell • support.dell.com • support.jp.dell.com (Japon uniquement) • support.euro.dell.com (Europe uniquement) • supportapj.dell.com (Asie/Pacifique uniquement)53 Accès à l'aide Adresses e-mail du support technique Dell : • mobile_support@us.dell.com • support@us.dell.com • la-techsupport@dell.com (pays d'Amérique latine et des Caraïbes uniquement) • apsupport@dell.com (pays d'Asie et du Pacifique uniquement) Adresses e-mail des services Marketing et Ventes de Dell • apmarketing@dell.com (pays d'Asie et du Pacifique uniquement) • sales_canada@dell.com (Canada uniquement) FTP (File Transfert Protocol [protocole de transfert de fichiers]) anonyme • ftp.dell.com Connectez-vous en tant qu'utilisateur : anonyme et utilisez votre adresse e-mail comme mot de passe. Service d'état des commandes automatisé Pour vérifier l'état de vos commandes de produits Dell, rendez-vous sur le site Web support.dell.com ou appelez le service automatisé d'état des commandes. Un enregistrement vous demande les informations nécessaires pour repérer votre commande et en faire un rapport. Si vous avez rencontré un problème lié à votre commande, tel que des pièces manquantes ou non adaptées, ou une facturation erronée, contactez le Service clientèle de Dell. Gardez votre facture ou votre bordereau d'expédition à portée de main lorsque vous appelez. Pour obtenir le numéro de téléphone à appeler depuis votre pays, consultez la section « Contacter Dell » à la page 57.54 Accès à l'aide Informations sur les produits Pour obtenir des informations sur les autres produits disponibles auprès de Dell ou si vous souhaitez passer commande, rendez-vous sur le site Web www.dell.com. Pour obtenir le numéro de téléphone à appeler à partir de votre pays ou pour parler à un représentant du service des ventes, consultez la section « Contacter Dell » à la page 57. Retour d'articles pour réparation dans le cadre de la garantie ou pour avoir Préparez tous les articles à retourner, pour réparation ou avoir, comme indiqué ci-après : REMARQUE : avant de retourner le produit à Dell, assurez-vous d'avoir sauvegardé toutes les données du ou des disques dur ou de tout autre périphérique de stockage du produit. Supprimez toutes les informations personnelles, privées et confidentielles, et retirez tous les supports amovibles, tels que CD et cartes PC. Nous déclinons toute responsabilité en ce qui concerne vos informations confidentielles, propriétaires ou personnelles, et en cas de perte ou d'endommagement des données ou des supports amovibles qui seraient renvoyés avec le produit.55 Accès à l'aide 1. Appelez Dell pour obtenir un numéro d'autorisation de retour du matériel et inscrivez-le lisiblement et bien en vue sur l'emballage. Pour obtenir le numéro de téléphone à appeler depuis votre pays, consultez la section « Contacter Dell » à la page 57. 2. Joignez une copie de la facture et une lettre décrivant le motif du retour. 3. Joignez une copie de la liste de vérification des diagnostics (voir « Liste de vérification des diagnostics », page 56), indiquant les tests effectués et tous les messages d'erreur mentionnés par Dell Diagnostics (voir « Dell Diagnostics », page 40). 4. Joignez tous les accessoires qui accompagnent le/les article(s) renvoyé(s) (câble de l'adaptateur secteur, logiciels, guides, etc.) s'il s'agit d'un retour pour avoir. 5. Empaquetez l'équipement à renvoyer dans son emballage d'origine (ou équivalent). REMARQUE : les frais d'expédition sont à votre charge. Vous devez également assurer les produits retournés et assumer les risques de perte en cours d'expédition. Les envois en contre remboursement ne sont pas acceptés. REMARQUE : en cas de manquement à l'une des conditions précitées, Dell refusera le retour à la réception et vous renverra les éléments.56 Accès à l'aide Avant d'appeler REMARQUE : munissez-vous de votre code de service express lorsque vous appelez. Ce code permet au système d'assistance téléphonique automatisé de Dell de diriger votre appel plus efficacement. Le système peut également demander le numéro de série (situé à l'arrière de votre ordinateur). Localisation de votre numéro de série et du code de service express Le numéro de série et le code de service express de votre ordinateur se trouvent sur une étiquette située à l'arrière de l'ordinateur(voir « Fonctionnalités du panneau arrière » page 20). N'oubliez pas de remplir la liste de vérification des diagnostics ci-dessous. Si possible, allumez votre ordinateur avant de contacter Dell pour obtenir de l'aide et appelez d'un téléphone qui se trouve à proximité de votre ordinateur. Vous serez peut-être invité à saisir certaines commandes au clavier, à fournir des informations détaillées sur le fonctionnement de l'ordinateur ou à essayer d'autres méthodes de dépannage uniquement possibles sur ce dernier. Assurez-vous que la documentation de l'ordinateur est disponible. Liste de vérification des diagnostics • Nom : • Date : • Adresse : • Numéro de téléphone : • Numéro de série et code de service express (situés sur une étiquette placée à l'arrière de l'ordinateur) :57 Accès à l'aide • Numéro d'autorisation de retour du matériel (s'il vous a été fourni par le support technique Dell) : • Système d'exploitation et version : • Périphériques : • Cartes d'extension : • Êtes-vous connecté à un réseau ? Oui/Non • Réseau, version et carte réseau : • Programmes et versions : Consultez la documentation de votre système d'exploitation pour déterminer le contenu des fichiers de démarrage de l'ordinateur. Si l'ordinateur est connecté à une imprimante, imprimez chaque fichier. Le cas échéant, notez le contenu de chaque fichier avant d'appeler Dell. • Message d'erreur, code sonore ou code de diagnostic : • Description du problème et procédures de dépannage effectuées : Contacter Dell Depuis les États-Unis, appelez le 800-WWW-DELL (800-999-3355). REMARQUE : si vous n'avez pas de connexion Internet, vous trouverez nos coordonnées sur votre confirmation de commande, bordereau d'expédition, facture ou dans le catalogue de produits Dell. Dell fournit plusieurs options de service et de support technique en ligne et par téléphone. Leur disponibilité variant d'un pays à l'autre, il est possible que certains services ne soient pas proposés dans votre pays. Pour prendre contact avec Dell pour des questions commerciales, de support technique ou de service clientèle : 1. Visitez le site www.dell.com/ContactDell. 2. Sélectionnez votre pays ou région. 3. Sélectionnez le lien correspondant au service ou au support technique dont vous avez besoin. 4. Choisissez la méthode de contact qui vous convient.58 Recherche d'informations et de ressources supplémentaires Si vous voulez : Consultez : réinstaller le système d'exploitation « Support de récupération système », page 47 exécuter un programme de diagnostics pour votre ordinateur « Dell Diagnostics », page 40 réinstaller le logiciel système « Mes Téléchargements Dell », page 36 trouver plus d'informations à propos du système d'exploitation Microsoft Windows et de ses fonctionnalités support.dell.com mettre à niveau votre ordinateur en remplaçant ou en ajoutant des composants, comme par exemple un nouveau disque dur Réinstaller ou remplacer une pièce usée ou défectueuse le Manuel de maintenance sur le site support.dell.com/manuals REMARQUE: dans certains pays, l'ouverture de l'ordinateur et le remplacement de pièces peuvent annuler la garantie. Consultez votre garantie et les politiques de retour avant toute intervention à l'intérieur de votre ordinateur. INSPIRON59 Recherche d'informations et de ressources supplémentaires Si vous voulez : Consultez : trouver des informations sur les meilleures pratiques en matière de sécurité pour votre ordinateur consulter les informations sur la garantie, les conditions d'utilisation (États-Unis uniquement), les consignes de sécurité, les informations sur les réglementations, l'ergonomie et le contrat de licence utilisateur final. les documents de sécurité et de garantie fournis avec votre ordinateur ; reportez-vous également à la page Regulatory Compliance (Conformité à la réglementation), à l'adresse www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance accéder au numéro de série/code de service express de votre ordinateur: vous devez fournir un numéro de série pour identifier votre ordinateur sur le site support.dell.com ou pour contacter le support technique. l'arrière de votre ordinateur. « Centre d'assistance Dell Support Center », page 35 accéder aux pilotes et aux téléchargements ; fichiers lisez-moi. bénéficier du support technique et d'une aide relative aux produits vérifier l'état de vos commandes trouver des solutions et des réponses à des questions courantes trouver des informations sur des mises à jour de dernière minute concernant des modifications techniques apportées à votre ordinateur ou des documents de référence destinés aux techniciens ou aux utilisateurs expérimentés support.dell.com60 Cette section fournit des informations qui peuvent vous être utiles lors de la configuration de votre ordinateur, de sa mise à niveau ou de la mise à jour de ses pilotes. REMARQUE : les offres peuvent varier d'un pays à l'autre. Pour plus d'informations sur la configuration de votre ordinateur, consultez la section Informations détaillées sur le système dans le Centre d'assistance Dell Support Center. Pour démarrer le Centre d'assistance Dell Support Center, cliquez sur Démarrer → Tous les programmes→ Dell→ Dell Support Center (Centre d'assistance Dell Support Center)→ Launch Dell Support Center (Démarrer le Centre d'assistance Dell Support Center). Caractéristiques Modèle de l'ordinateur Dell Inspiron 620 Processeur Type Intel Core i3 Intel Core i5 Intel Celeron Intel Pentium double cœur Jeu de puces du système Type Intel H61 Lecteurs et disques Accessibles de l'intérieur deux baies de lecteur de 3,5 pouces pour les disques durs SATA INSPIRON61 Caractéristiques Lecteurs et disques Accessibles de l'extérieur deux baies de lecteur de 5,25 pouces pour un lecteur combiné SATA DVD+/-RW/ Blu-ray Disc (en option)/ Blu-ray Disc réinscriptible (en option) Mémoire Connecteurs pour module de mémoire deux connecteurs accessibles à l'utilisateur Capacité des barrettes de mémoire 1 Go, 2 Go et 4 Go Type de mémoire mémoire non ECC uniquement DDR3 1333 MHz Mémoire minimale 1 Go Mémoire Mémoire maximale 8 Go Configurations possibles de la mémoire 2 Go, 3 Go, 4 Go, 6 Go et 8 Go REMARQUE : pour obtenir des instructions sur la mise à niveau de la mémoire, consultez le Manuel de maintenance à l'adresse support.dell.com/manuals. Audio Contrôleur audio Son haute définition, canal 5.1 intégré62 Caractéristiques Vidéo UMA Contrôleur vidéo Intel HD Graphics Séparée Contrôleur vidéo AMD Radeon HD 6450 AMD Radeon HD 6670 NVIDIA Geforce G420 Connecteurs internes PCI Express x1 trois connecteurs à 36 broches PCI Express x16 un connecteur à 164 broches SATA quatre connecteurs à 7 broches Connecteurs externes Audio : Panneau avant : un connecteur de casque/de hautparleurs stéréo et un connecteur de microphone (entrée) Panneau arrière trois connecteurs pour la prise en charge 5.1 Carte réseau un connecteur RJ45 USB deux connecteurs frontaux et six connecteurs arrière USB 2.0 VGA un connecteur 15 broches femelle HDMI un connecteur à 19 broches Lecteur de carte multimédia lecteur de carte 8 en 163 Caractéristiques Batterie Type 3 V CR-2032 pile bouton au lithium Alimentation Bloc d'alimentation secteur Consommation en watts 300 W Tension d'entrée 100-127 VCA/ 200-240 VCA Fréquence d'entrée 50/60 Hz Courant d'entrée 9 A (8 A)/4,5 A Communication Carte réseau LAN Ethernet 10/100/1000 sur la carte système Sans fil (en option) Wi-Fi Caractéristiques physiques Hauteur 368,20 mm (14,5 po) Largeur 182,80 mm (7,20 po) Profondeur 448,80 mm (17,67 po) Poids 8,94 kg (19,71 livres)64 Caractéristiques Environnement informatique Plage de températures : Fonctionnement 10°C à 35°C (50°F à 95°F) Stockage –40°C à 65°C (–40°F à 149°F) Humidité relative (maximale) 20 à 80 % (sans condensation) Choc maximal (en fonctionnement, mesuré avec Dell Diagnostics exécuté sur une impulsion demi-sinusoïdale de 2 ms ; également mesuré en position de repos des têtes du disque dur et impulsion demisinusoïdale de 2 ms pour le stockage) : Fonctionnement 40 G pour 2 ms avec un changement de vitesse de 51 cm/s (20 pouces/s) Environnement informatique à l'arrêt 50 G pour 26 ms avec un changement de vitesse de 813 cm/s (320 pouces/s) Vibration maximale (avec un spectre de vibration aléatoire simulant l'environnement utilisateur) : Fonctionnement 0,25 GRMS à l'arrêt 2,20 GRMS Altitude (maximale) : Fonctionnement –15,2 à 3 048 m (–50 à 10 000 pieds) Stockage –15,2 à 10 668 m (–50 à 35 000 pieds) Niveau de contaminants atmosphériques G2 ou inférieur, tel que défini par la norme ISA-S71.04-198565 Annexe Informations sur la norme NOM ou Norme Officielle Mexicaine (pour le Mexique uniquement) Les informations suivantes sont fournies sur le(s) appareil(s) décrit(s) dans ce document conformément aux dispositions de la Norme Officielle Mexicaine (NOM) : Importateur: Dell Mexico S.A. de C.V. Paseo de la Reforma 2620 – Piso 11° Col. Lomas Altas 11950 Mexico, D.F. Numéro de modèle réglementaire Type règlementaire Tension d'entrée Fréquence d'entrée Courant d'entrée nominal D11M D11M001 115 V/230 VCA 50/60 Hz 7 A/4 A ou 6 A/2,1 A Pour plus d'informations, reportez-vous aux consignes de sécurité fournies avec votre ordinateur. Pour plus d'informations sur les meilleures pratiques en matière de sécurité, reportez-vous au site www.dell.com/regulatory_compliance. INSPIRON66 A adresses électroniques support technique 53 adresses électroniques de support technique 53 aide obtention d’aide et d’assistance 50 appeler Dell 56 C caractéristiques 60 CD, lecture et création 24 connecteur HDMI 23 connecteur réseau emplacement 23 connecteurs à l’avant 16 connexion câble réseau en option 9 écran 6 Internet 13 connexion à Internet 13 connexion FTP, anonyme 53 connexion réseau dépannage 30 connexion réseau sans fil 29 contacter Dell en ligne 57 D DataSafe Local Backup 44 DellConnect 52 Dell Diagnostics 40 Dell Factory Image Restore 48 Index INSPIRON67 Index Dell Stage 25 DVD, lecture et création 24 E emplacement pour câble de sécurité 21 expédition de produits retour ou réparation 55 F FAI fournisseur d’accès Internet 13 fonctionnalités logicielles 24 fonctions de l’ordinateur 24 L liste de vérification des diagnostics 56 M Messages système 37 N numéro de série 56 O options de réinstallation du système 42 P pilotes et téléchargements 59 problèmes de mémoire résolution 32 problèmes logiciels 33 problèmes matériels diagnostic 39 problèmes, résolution 28 produits informations et achat 5468 Index R recherche d’informations supplémentaires 58 résolution des problèmes 28 ressources, recherche supplémentaire 58 restauration d’une image d’usine 48 Restauration du système 43 retours dans le cadre de la garantie 54 S service clientèle 51 sites d’assistance dans le monde entier 52 support de restauration du système 47 T tuner TV 13 U USB 2.0 connecteurs à l’arrière 23 Utilitaire de résolution de problèmes matériels 39 V voyant d’activité du disque dur 18 W Windows Assistant Compatibilité des programmes 33 Safety information About this user’s guide Features of your new product Introduction Getting started Network setup (Dell 1130n only) Basic setup Media and tray Printing Management tools Maintenance Troubleshooting Supplies Specifications Appendix Glossary www.dell.com | www.support.dell.com Dell 1130 Dell 1130nadjusting tray size booklet printing booklets change percentage of your document cleaning inside outside cleaning a machine control panel convention duplex printing (manual) printer driver Embedded Web Service general information favorites settings, for printing features features machine features power saving feature print media feature printer driver supplied software font setting front view glossary jam clearing paper tips for avoiding paper jams Linux common Linux problems driver installation for network connected driver installation for USB cable connected printer properties printing supplied softwares system requirements unifled driver configurator loading paper in manual tray paper in the tray1 special media Macintosh common Macintosh problems driver installation for network connected adjusting tray size booklet printing booklets change percentage of your document cleaning inside outside cleaning a machine control panel convention duplex printing (manual) printer driver Embedded Web Service general information favorites settings, for printing features features machine features power saving feature print media feature printer driver supplied software font setting front view glossary jam clearing paper tips for avoiding paper jams Linux common Linux problems driver installation for network connected driver installation for USB cable connected printer properties printing supplied softwares system requirements unifled driver configurator loading paper in manual tray paper in the tray1 special mediaCopyright Information in this document is subject to change without notice. ©2010 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo, and Dell Toner Management System are trademarks of Dell Inc.; Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, and Windows Server are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Adobe and Acrobat Reader are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to the entities claiming the marks and names of their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. Refer to the 'LICENSE.txt' file in the provided CD-ROM for the open source license information. REV. 1.00Safety information These warnings and precautions are included in order to prevent injury to you and others, as well as preventing any potential damage to your machine. Be sure to read and understand all of these instructions before using the machine. Use common sense for operating any electrical appliance and whenever using your machine. Also, follow all warnings and instructions marked on the machine and in the accompanying literature. After reading this section, keep it in a safe place for future reference. Important safety symbols This section explains the meanings of all icons and signs in the user's guide. These safety symbols are in order, according to the degree of danger. Explanation of all icons and signs used in the user’s guide: Warning Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in severe personal injury or death. Caution Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in minor personal injury or property damage. Do not attempt. Do not disassemble. Do not touch. Unplug the power cord from the wall socket. Make sure the machine is grounded to prevent electric shock. Call the service center for help. Follow directions explicitly. Operating environment Warning Do not use if the power cord is damaged or if the electrical outlet is not grounded. This could result in electric shock or fire. Do not bend, or place heavy objects on the power cord. Stepping on or allowing the power cord to be crushed by a heavy object could result in electric shock or fire. Do not place anything on top of the machine (water, small metal or heavy objects, candles, lit cigarettes, etc.). This could result in electric shock or fire. Do not remove the plug by pulling on the cord; do not handle the plug with wet hands. This could result in electric shock or fire. If the machine gets overheated, it releases smoke, makes strange noises, or generates an odd odor, immediately turn off the power switch and unplug the machine. This could result in electric shock or fire. Caution During an electrical storm or for a period of non-operation, remove the power plug from the electrical outlet. This could result in electric shock or fire. If the plug does not easily enter the electrical outlet, do not attempt to force it in. Call an electrician to change the electrical outlet, or this could result in electric shock. Be careful, the paper output area is hot. Burns could occur. Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power, telephone or PC interface cords.This could result in electric shock or fire and/or injury to your pet. If the machine has been dropped, or if the cabinet appears damaged, unplug the machine from all interface connections and request assistance from qualified service personnel. Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire. If the machine does not operate properly after these instructions have been followed, unplug the machine from all interface connections and request assistance from qualified service personnel. Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire. If the machine exhibits a sudden and distinct change in performance, unplug the machine from all interface connections and request assistance from qualified service personnel. Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire. Operating method Caution Do not forcefully pull the paper out during printing. It can cause damage to the machine. When printing large quantities, the bottom part of the paper output area may get hot. Do not allow children to touch. Children may be burned. Be careful not to put your hand between the machine and paper tray. You may get injured. When removing jammed paper, do not use tweezers or sharp metal objects. It can cause damage to the machine. Do not block or push objects into the ventilation opening. This could result in elevated component temperatures which can cause damage or fire. Do not allow too many papers to stack up in the paper output tray. It could cause damage to the machine. Use care to avoid paper cuts when replacing paper or removing jammed paper. You may get hurt. This machine's power interception device is the power cord. To switch off the power supply, remove the power cord from the electrical outlet. Installation / Moving Warning Do not place the machine in an area with dust, humidity or water leaks. This could result in electric shock or fire. Caution When moving the machine, turn the power off and disconnect all cords; then lift the machine with at least two people. The machine could fall, causing human injury or machine damage. Do not put a cover over the machine or place it in an airtight location, such as a closet. If the machine is not well-ventilated, this could result in fire. Do not place the machine on an unstable surface. The machine could fall, causing human injury or machine damage. Make sure you plug the power cord into a grounded electrical outlet. Otherwise, this could result in electric shock or fire. The machine should be connected to the power level which is specified on the label. If you are unsure and want to check the power level you are using, contact the electrical utility company. Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords. This can diminish performance, and could result in electric shock or fire. Use only No.26 AWG [a] or larger, telephone line cord, if necessary. Use the power cord supplied with your machine for safe operation. If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 meters (79”) with a 140V machine, then the gauge should be 16 AWG or larger.Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine. Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine, and could result in electric shock or fire. [a] AWG: American Wire Gauge Maintenance / Checking Caution Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning the inside of the machine. Do not clean the machine with benzene, paint thinner or alcohol; do not spray water directly into the machine. This could result in electric shock or fire. Keep cleaning supplies away from children. Children may get hurt. When you are working inside the machine replacing supplies or cleaning the inside, do not operate the machine. You may get injured. Do not disassemble, repair or rebuild the machine by yourself. It can cause damage to the machine. Call a certified technician when the machine needs repair. Keep the power cable and the contact surface of the plug clean from dust or water. This could result in electric shock or fire. To clean and operate the machine, strictly follow the user's guide provided with the machine. Otherwise, it can cause damage to the machine. Do not remove any covers or guards that are fastened with screws. The machine should only be repaired by Dell service technician. Supply usage Caution Do not disassemble the toner cartridge. Toner dust can be dangerous to humans. When storing supplies such as toner cartridges, keep them away from children. Toner dust can be dangerous to humans. Do not burn any of the supplies such as toner cartridge or fuser unit. It can cause an explosion or fire. Using recycled supplies, such as toner, can cause damage to the machine. In case of damage due to the use of recycled supplies, a service fee will be charged. When changing the toner cartridge or removing jammed paper, be careful not to let toner dust touch your body or clothes. Toner dust can be dangerous to humans.About this user’s guide This user’s guide provides information about basic understanding of the machine as well as detailed explanation on each step during actual usage. Read the safety information before using the machine. If you have a problem using the machine, refer to the troubleshooting chapter. (See Troubleshooting.) Terms used in this user’s guide are explained in the glossary chapter. (See Glossary.) All illustrations in this user’s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models. The procedures in this user’s guide are mainly based on Windows XP. Convention Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably, as below: Document is synonymous with original. Paper is synonymous with media, or print media. Machine refers to printer or MFP. The following table offers the conventions of this guide: Convention Description Example Bold For texts on the display or button names on the machine. Cancel Note Provides additional information or detailed specification of the machine function and feature. The date format may differ from country to country. Caution Gives users information to protect the machine from possible mechanical damage or malfunction. Do not touch the green underside of the toner cartridge. Footnote Provides additional more detailed information on certain words or a phrase. a. pages per minute (“Crossreference”) Guides users to a reference page for the additional detailed information. (See Finding more information.) Finding more information You can find information for setting up and using your machine from the following resources, either as a print-out or on screen. Material name Description Quick Install Guide This guide provides information on setting up your machine and this requires that you follow the instructions in the guide to prepare the machine. User’s Guide This guide provides you with step-by-step instructions for using your machine’s full features, and contains information for maintaining your machine, troubleshooting and replacing supplies. Printer Driver Help This help provides you with help information on printer driver and instructions for setting up the options for printing. (See Using help.) Dell website If you have Internet access, you can get help, support, printer drivers, manuals, and order information from the Dell websites www.dell.com or support.dell.com.Features of your new product Your new machine is equipped with a number of special features that improve the quality of the documents you print. Special Features Print with excellent quality and speed You can print with a resolution of up to 1,200 x 600 dpi (Dell 1130) and up to 1,200 x 1,200 dpi (Dell 1130n) effective output. Dell 1130 prints up to 18 ppm, A4-sized paper or up to 19 ppm, letter sized paper. Dell 1130n prints up to 24 ppm, A4-sized paper and letter-sized paper. Handle many different types of printable material Manual tray supports plain paper in various sizes, letterhead, envelopes, labels, custom-sized media, postcards, and heavy paper. The 250-sheet tray supports plain paper. Create professional documents Print Watermarks. You can customize your documents with words, such as “Confidential”. (See Using watermarks.) Print Posters. The text and pictures of each page of your document are magnified and printed across the sheet of paper and can then be taped together to form a poster. (See Printing posters.) You can use preprinted forms and letterhead with plain paper. (See Using overlay.) Save time and money To save paper, you can print multiple pages on one single sheet of paper. (See Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper.) This machine automatically conserves electricity by substantially reducing power consumption when not in use. To save paper, you can print on both sides of the paper (Manual). (See Printing on both sides of paper (Manual).) Print in various environments You can print with Windows as well as Linux and Macintosh systems. Your machine is equipped with a USB interface. The Dell 1130n comes with a built-in Network interface, 10/100 BaseTX. IPv6 This machine supports IPv6 (Dell 1130n only).Features by Models The machine is designed to support all of your document needs from printing to more advanced networking solutions for your business. Features by models include: FEATURES Dell 1130 Dell 1130n Hi-Speed USB 2.0 ● [a] ● Network Interface Ethernet 10/100 BaseTX wired LAN ● Duplex (2-sided) printing (Manual) ● ● [a] USB 1.1 ( ●: Included, Blank: Not available)Introduction This chapter gives you an overview of your machine: This chapter includes: Machine overview Control panel overview Understanding the control panel Machine overview Front view This illustration may differ from your machine depending on its model. 1 Document output tray 6 Manual feeder 2 Control panel 7 Manual feeder guide 3 Front cover handle 8 Output support 4 Front cover 9 Toner cartridge 5 Tray 1 Rear viewThis illustration may differ from your machine depending on its model. 1 Rear cover 3 USB port 2 Network Port [a] 4 Power receptacle [a] Dell 1130n only. Control panel overview This control panel may differ from your machine depending on its model. 1 Jam Shows the status of jam occurrence of your machine. (See LEDs.) 2 Online/Error Shows the status of your machine. (See LEDs.) 3 Cancel Stops an operation at any time. Also there are more functions. (See Understanding the control panel.) 4 Power Turns power on or off. (See Understanding the control panel.) Understanding the control panel LEDs The color of the LEDs indicates the machine's current status. LED Status Description Jam ( ) Orange On A paper jam has occurred. (See Clearing paper jams.) Online/Error ( ) Off The machine is off-line.Green On The machine is in power saver mode. The machine is on-line and can receive data from the computer. Blinking When the LED blinks slowly, the machine is receiving data from the computer. When the LED blinks rapidly , the machine is printing data. Red On The cover is open. Close the cover. There is no paper in the tray. Load paper in the tray. The machine has stopped due to a major error. Your system has some problems. If this problem occurs, contact your service representative. The toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life [a] . It is recommended to replace the toner cartridge. (See Replacing the toner cartridge.) Blinking A minor error has occurred and the machine is waiting for the error to be cleared. When the problem is cleared, the machine resumes. Toner is low. Replace the cartridge. The estimated cartridge life [a] of toner is close. Prepare a new cartridge for replacement. You may temporarily increase the printing quality by redistributing the toner. (See Redistributing toner.) [a] Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated toner cartridge life, which indicates the average capacity of print-outs and is designed pursuant to ISO/IEC 19752. The number of pages may be affected by operating environment, printing interval, media type, and media size. Some amount of toner may remain in the cartridge even when red LED turned on and the printer stops printing. Dell does not recommend using non-genuine Dell toner cartridge such as refilled or re-manufactured. Dell cannot guarantee non-genuine Dell toner cartridge's quality. Service or repair required as a result of using nongenuine Dell toner cartridges will not be covered under the machine warranty. All printing errors will be appear in the Printer Status Monitor program window. If the problem persists, call for service. Buttons (Cancel button) By pressing the (cancel button), you can: Function Description Printing demo page [a] In Ready mode, press and hold this button for about 2 seconds until the status LED blinks slowly, and release. (See Printing a demo page.) Printing configuration sheet [b] In Ready mode, press and hold this button for about 5 seconds until the status LED blinks fast, and release. (See Printing a machine report.) Printing a cleaning sheet [b] In Ready mode, press and hold this button for about 10 seconds until the status LED blinks slowly, and release. (See Cleaning the inside.) Cancel print job Press (cancel button) during printing. The red LED blinks while the print job is cleared from both the machine and the computer and then the machine returns to ready mode. This may take some time depending on the size of the print job. Manual print Press (cancel button) each time you load a sheet of paper in the manual tray when you select Manual Feeder for Source from your software application. [a] When you print the demo page for Dell 1130, configuration sheet is printed as well. [b] Dell 1130n only (Power button) This button must be used to turn the machine on/off. Turning on the machine 1. Plug in the power cord. 2. Press (power) on the control panel.If you want to turn the power off, press and hold this button for 1 second.Getting started This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the USB connected machine and software. This chapter includes: Setting up the hardware Printing a demo page Supplied software System requirements Installing USB connected machine’s driver Sharing your machine locally Setting up the hardware This section shows the steps to set up the hardware, as is explained in the Quick Install Guide. Make sure you read the Quick Install Guide first and follow the steps below: Location 1. Select a stable location. Select a level, stable place with adequate space for air circulation. Allow extra space to open covers and trays. The area should be well ventilated and away from direct sunlight or sources of heat, cold, and humidity. Do not set the machine close to the edge of your desk or table. Printing is suitable for altitudes under 1,000 m (3,281 ft). Refer to the altitude setting to optimize your printing. (See Altitude adjustment.) Place the machine on a flat, stable surface so that there is no incline greater than 2 mm (0.08 inch). Otherwise, printing quality may be affected. 2. Unpack the machine and check all the enclosed items.3. Remove tape holding the machine. 4. Install the toner cartridge. 5. Load paper. (See Loading paper in the tray.) 6. Make sure that all cables are connected to the machine. 7. Turn the machine on. (See Turning on the machine.) This equipment will be inoperable when mains power fails. Printing a demo page Print a demo page to make sure that the machine is operating correctly. To print a demo page: In ready mode, press and hold the (cancel button) for about 2 seconds. Supplied software After you have set up your machine and connected it to your computer, you must install the printer software using the supplied CD. The software CD provides you with the following software. OS Contents Windows Printer driver: Use this driver to take full advantage of your machine’s features. Printer Status Monitor: This program allows you to monitor the machine’s status and alerts you when an error occurs during printing. Printer Settings Utility (Dell 1130n only): This program allows you to set up printer’s other options from your computer desktop. Dell Toner Management System™: Displays the status of the printer and the name of the job when send a job to print. The Dell Toner Management System™window also displays the level of toner remaining and allows you to order replacement toner cartridge. Firmware Update Utility: This program helps you to update printer’s firmware. SetIP (Dell 1130n only): Use this program to set your machine’s TCP/IP addresses. Macintosh Printer Driver: Use this driver to take full advantage of your machine’s features. Linux Unified Linux Driver: Use this driver to take full advantage of your machine’s features. System requirements Before you begin, ensure that your system meets the following requirements: Microsoft® Windows® Your machine supports the following Windows operating systems. OPERATING SYSTEM Requirement (recommended) CPU RAM free HDD space Windows 2000 Intel® Pentium® II 400 MHz (Pentium III 933 MHz) 64 MB (128 MB) 600 MB Windows XP Intel® Pentium® III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz) 128 MB (256 MB) 1.5 GB Windows Server® 2003 Intel® Pentium® III 933 MHz (Pentium IV 1 GHz) 128 MB (512 MB) 1.25 GB to 2 GB Windows Server 2008 Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz (Pentium IV 2 GHz) 512 MB (2048 MB) 10 GB Windows Vista® Intel® Pentium® IV 3 GHz 512 MB (1024 MB) 15 GB Windows 7 Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz 32-bit or 64-bit processor or higher 1 GB (2 GB) 16 GB Support for DirectX® 9 graphics with 128 MB memory (to enable the Aero theme). DVD-R/W Drive Windows Server Intel® Pentium® IV 1 GHz (x86) or 1.4 GHz (x64) processors 512 MB (2048 10 GB2008 R2 (2 GHz or faster) MB) Internet Explorer® 5.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all Windows operating systems. Administrator rights are required to install the software. Windows Terminal Services is compatible with this machine. Macintosh OPERATING SYSTEM Requirements (recommended) CPU RAM free HDD space Mac OS X 10.3 ~ 10.4 Intel Processors PowerPC G4/ G5 128 MB for a PowerPC based Mac (512 MB) 512 MB for a Intel-based Mac (1 GB) 1 GB Mac OS X 10.5 Intel Processors 867 MHz or faster Power PC G4/ G5 512 MB (1 GB) 1 GB Mac OS X 10.6 Intel Processors 1 GB (2 GB) 1 GB Linux Item Requirement (recommended) Operating system RedHat Enterprise Linux WS 4, 5 (32/64 bit) Fedora Core 2~10 (32/64 bit) SuSE Linux 9.1 (32 bit) OpenSuSE 9.2, 9.3, 10.0, 10.1, 10.2, 10.3, 11.0, 11.1 (32/64 bit) Mandrake 10.0, 10.1 (32/64 bit) Mandriva 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 (32/64 bit) Ubuntu 6.06, 6.10, 7.04, 7.10, 8.04, 8.10 (32/64 bit) SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 9, 10 (32/64 bit) Debian 3.1, 4.0, 5.0 (32/64 bit) CPU Pentium IV 2.4 GHz (Intel Core™2) RAM 512 MB (1024 MB) Free HDD space 1 GB (2 GB) Installing USB connected machine’s driver A locally connected machine is a machine directly attached to your computer using the USB cable. If your machine is attached to a network, skip the following steps below and go on to installing network connected machine’s driver. (See Installing network connected machine’s driver.) Only use an USB cable shorter than 3 m (118 in. ). Windows You can install the machine software using the typical or custom method. The following steps below are recommended for most users who use a machine directly connected to your computer. All components necessary for machine operations will be installed. 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to the computer and powered on. If the “Found New Hardware Wizard” window appears during the installation procedure, click Cancel in close the window. 2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive. The software CD should automatically run and an installation window should appear. If the installation window does not appear, click Start and then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents your CD/DVD drive. Click OK. If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2 click Start > All programs > Accessories > Run. Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which represents your CD/DVD drive and click OK.If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2, click Run Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click Continue or Yes in the User Account Control windows. 3. Click Next. If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list. 4. Select Typical installation for a local printer. Then, click Next. The Custom allows you to select the machine’s connection and choose individual component to install. Follow the on-screen instructions. If your machine is not connected to the computer, the following window will appear.After connecting the machine, click Next. If you don’t want to connect the printer at this time, click Next, and No on the following screen. The installation starts and a test page will not print at the end of the installation. The installation window in this user guide may differ depending on the machine and interface in use. 5. After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test page appears. If you choose to print a test page, select the checkbox and click Next. Otherwise, just click Next and skip to step 7. 6. If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes. If not, click No to reprint it. 7. Click Finish. If the printer driver does not work properly, follow the steps below to repair or reinstall the driver. 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your machine and powered on. 2. From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Dell > Dell Printers > your printer driver name > Maintenance. 3. Select the option as you wish, follow the instruction on the window. Macintosh The software CD that came with your machine provides you with the PPD file that allows you to use the CUPS driver or Apple LaserWriter driver (only available when you use a machine which supports the PostScript driver) for printing on a Macintosh computer. 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive. 3. Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop. 4. Double-click the MAC_Installer folder. 5. Double-click the Installer OS X icon. 6. Enter the password and click OK. 7. The Dell Installer window opens. Click Continue. 8. Select Easy Install and click Install. Easy Install is recommended for most users. All components necessary for machine operations will be installed. If you select Custom Install, you can choose individual components to install. 9. When the message which warns that all applications will close on your computer appears, click Continue. 10. After the installation is finished, click Quit. 11. Open the Applications folder > Utilities > Print Setup Utility. For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, open the Applications folder > System Preferences and click Print & Fax. 12. Click Add on the Printer List. For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, click the “+” icon; a display window will pop up. 13. For Mac OS X 10.3, select the USB tab. For Mac OS X10.4, click Default Browser and find the USB connection. For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, click Default and find the USB connection.14. For Mac OS X 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Dell in Printer Model and your machine name in Model Name. For Mac OS X 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Dell in Print Using and your machine name in Model. For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Select a driver to use... and your machine name in Print Using. Your machine appears on the Printer List, and is set as the default machine. 15. Click Add. If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it. Follow steps below to uninstall the driver for Macintosh. 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive. 3. Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop. 4. Double-click the MAC_Installer folder. 5. Double-click the Installer OS X icon. 6. Enter the password and click OK. 7. The Dell Installer window opens. Click Continue. 8. Select Uninstall and click Uninstall. 9. When the message which warns that all applications will close on your computer appears, Click Continue. 10. When the uninstall is done, click Quit. Linux Follow the steps below to install the driver for Linux. While installing the driver, the Unified Linux Driver package will automatically be installed as well. The supplied software CD provides you with the Unified Linux Driver package for using your machine with a Linux computer easily in UI based management tool. (See Using the Unified Linux Driver Configurator.) 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 2. When the Administrator Login window appears, type in root in the Login field and enter the system password. You must log in as a super user (root) to install the machine software. If you are not a super user, ask your system administrator. 3. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive. The software CD will run automatically. If the software CD does not run automatically, click the icon at the bottom of the desktop. When the Terminal screen appears, type in the following: If the software CD is secondary master and the location to mount is /mnt/cdrom, [root@localhost root]#mount -t iso9660 /dev/hdc /mnt/cdrom [root@localhost root]#cd /mnt/cdrom/Linux [root@localhost Linux]#./install.sh If you still failed to run the software CD type the followings in sequence: [root@localhost root]#umount /dev/hdc [root@localhost root]#mount -t iso9660 /dev/hdc /mnt/cdrom The installation program runs automatically if you have an autorun software package installed and configured. 4. When the welcome screen appears, click Next.5. When the installation is complete, click Finish. The installation program has added the Unified Driver Configurator desktop icon and the Unified Driver group to the system menu for your convenience. If you have any difficulties, consult the on screen help that is available through your system menu or can otherwise be called from the driver package Windows applications, such as Unified Driver Configurator or Image Manager. Installing the driver in the text mode: If you do not use the graphical interface or have been unable to install the driver, you have to use the driver in the text mode. Follow the steps 1 to 3, then type [root@localhost Linux]# ./install.sh. Follow the instructions on the terminal screen. The installation is completed. When you want to uninstall the driver, follow the installation instructions above, but type [root@localhost Linux]# ./uninstall.sh on the terminal screen. If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it. Follow the steps below steps to uninstall the driver for Linux. 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 2. When the Administrator Login window appears, type in “root” in the Login field and enter the system password. You must log in as a super user (root) to uninstall the printer driver. If you are not a super user, ask your system administrator. 3. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive. The software CD will run automatically. If the software CD does not run automatically, click the icon at the bottom of the desktop. When the Terminal screen appears, type in: If the software CD is secondary master and the location to mount is /mnt/cdrom, [root@localhost root]#mount -t iso9660 /dev/hdc /mnt/cdrom [root@localhost root]#cd /mnt/cdrom/Linux [root@localhost Linux]#./uninstall.sh The installation program runs automatically if you have an autorun software package installed and configured. 4. Click Uninstall. 5. Click Next. 6. Click Finish. Sharing your machine locally Follow the steps below to set up the computers to share your machine locally. If the Host computer is directly connected to the machine with USB cable and is also connected to the local network environment, the client computer connected to the local network can use the shared machine through the host computer to print.1 Host computer A computer which is directly connected to the machine by USB cable. 2 Client computers Computers which use the machine shared through the host computer. Windows Setting up a host computer 1. Install your printer driver. (See Installing USB connected machine’s driver, Installing network connected machine’s driver.) 2. Click the Windows Start menu. 3. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers. For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printers and Faxes. For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers. For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers. For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers. 4. Right click your printer icon. 5. For Windows XP/Server 2003/ Server 2008/Vista, press Properties. For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus, select the Printer properties. If Printer properties item has ► mark, you can select other printer drivers connected with selected printer. 6. Select the Sharing tab. 7. Check the Change Sharing Options. 8. Check the Share this printer. 9. Fill in the Share Name field. Click OK. Setting up a client computer 1. Install your printer driver. (See Installing USB connected machine’s driver, Installing network connected machine’s driver.) 2. Click the Windows Start menu. 3. Select All programs > Accessories > Windows Explorer. 4. Enter the IP address of the host computer in the address bar and press Enter in your keyboard. In case host computer requires User name and Password, fill in User ID and password of the host computer account. 5. Right click the printer icon you want to share and select Connect. 6. If a set up complete message appears, click OK. 7. Open the file you want to print and start printing. Macintosh The following steps are for Mac OS X 10.5~10.6. Refer to Mac Help for other OS versions. Setting up a host computer 1. Install your printer driver. (See Macintosh.) 2. Open the Applications folder > System Preferences and click Print & Fax. 3. Select the printer to share in the Printers list. 4. Select Share this printer. Setting up a client computer1. Install your printer driver. (See Macintosh.) 2. Open the Applications folder > System Preferences and click Print & Fax. 3. Click the “+” icon. A display window showing the name of your shared printer appears. 4. Select your machine and click Add.Network setup (Dell 1130n only) This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the network connected machine and software. This chapter includes: Network environment Introducing useful network programs Using a wired network Installing network connected machine’s driver IPv6 Configuration Network environment You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your network machine. The following table shows the network environments supported by the machine: Item Requirements Network interface Ethernet 10/100 Base-TX Network operating system Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista/7/2008 Server R2 Various Linux OS Mac OS X 10.3 ~ 10.6 Network protocols TCP/IPv4 DHCP, BOOTP DNS, WINS, Bonjour, SLP, UPnP Standard TCP/IP Printing (RAW), LPR, IPP SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP, IPSec TCP/IPv6 (DHCP, DNS, RAW, LPR, SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP, IPSec (See IPv6 Configuration.) Introducing useful network programs There are several programs available to setup the network settings in network environment. Before using the programs below, set the IP address first. Embedded Web Service Web server embedded on your network machine, which allows you to: Configure the network parameters necessary for the machine to connect to various network environments. Customize machine settings. (See Using Embedded Web Service (Dell 1130n only).) SetIP This utility program allows you to select a network interface and manually configure the IP addresses for use with the TCP/IP protocol. (See IP setting using SetIP Program) TCP/IPv6 is not supported by this program. Using a wired network You must set up the network protocols on your machine to use it on your network. This chapter will show you how this is accomplished. You can use network after connecting network cable to a corresponding port on your machine.Printing network configuration report You can print a Network Configuration Report from the machine's control panel that will show the current machine’s network settings. This will help you to set up a network and troubleshooting problems. To print the report: In ready mode, press and hold the (cancel button) for about 5 seconds. You can find your machine’s MAC address and IP address. For example: MAC Address : 00:15:99:41:A2:78 IP Address : 192.0.0.192 Setting IP address Firstly, you have to set up an IP address for network printing and managements. In most cases a new IP address will be automatically assigned by a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server located on the network. In a few situations the IP address must be set manually. This is called a static IP and is often required in corporate Intranets for security reasons. DHCP IP assignment: Connect your machine to the network, and wait a few minutes for the DHCP server to assign an IP address to the machine. Then, print the Network Configuration Report as explained above. If the report shows that the IP address has changed, the assignment was successful. You will see the new IP address in the report. Static IP assignment: Use SetIP program to change the IP address from your computer. In an office environment, we recommend that you contact a network administrator to set this address for you. IP setting using SetIP Program This program is for manually setting the network IP address of your machine using its MAC address to communicate with the machine. A MAC address is the hardware serial number of the network interface and can be found in the Network Configuration Report. For using SetIP program, disable the computer firewall before continuing by performing the following: 1. Open Start > All programs > Control Panel. 2. Double click Security Center. 3. Click Windows Firewall. 4. Disable the firewall. Installing the program 1. Insert the supplied software CD provided with your machine. When the driver CD runs automatically, close that window. 2. Start Windows Explorer and open the X drive. (X represents your CD/DVD drive.) 3. Double-click Application > SetIP. 4. Double-click Setup.exe to install this program. 5. Click OK. If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list. 6. Follow the instructions in the window and complete the installation. Starting the program 1. Connect your machine to the network with a network cable. 2. Turned on the machine. 3. From the Windows Start menu, select All Programs > Dell Printers > SetIP > SetIP. 4. Click on the icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the TCP/IP configuration window. 5. Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window as follows. In a corporate intranet, you may need to have this information assigned by a network manager before proceeding.MAC Address : Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network Configuration Report and enter it without the colons. For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes 0015992951A8. IP Address: Enter a new IP address for your printer. For example, if your computer’s IP address is 192.168.1.150, enter 192.168.1.X. (X is number between 1 and 254 other than the computer’s address.) Subnet Mask: Enter a Subnet Mask. Default Gateway: Enter a Default Gateway. 6. Click Apply, and then click OK. The machine will automatically print the Network Configuration Report. Confirm that all the settings are correct. 7. Click Exit to close the SetIP program. 8. If necessary, restart the computer’s firewall. Network parameter setting You can also set up the various network settings through the network administration programs such as Embedded Web Service. Restoring factory default settings You may need to reset the machine to the factory default settings when machine that you are using is connected to new network environment. Restoring factory default settings using Embedded Web Service 1. Start a web browser and enter your machine’s new IP address in the browser window. For example, 2. When the Embedded Web Service window opens, click Network Settings. 3. Click Reset. Then, click Clear for network. 4. Turn off and restart machine to apply settings. Installing network connected machine’s driver Windows You can set up the machine driver, follow the steps below. This is recommended for most users. All components necessary for machine operations will be installed. 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to the network and powered on. 2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive. The software CD should automatically run and an installation window appear. If the installation window does not appear, click Start and then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents your drive. Click OK. If you use Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2 click Start > All programs > Accessories > Run.Type X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter which represents your drive and click OK. If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2, click Run Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click Continue or Yes in the User Account Control windows. 3. Click Next. If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list. 4. Select Typical installation for a network printer. Then, click Next. The Custom Installation allows you to select the machine’s connection and choose individual component to install. Follow the guide on the window. 5. The list of printers available on the network appears. Select the printer you want to install from the list and then click Next.If you do not see your printer on the list, click Update to refresh the list, or select Add TCP/IP Port to add your printer to the network. To add the printer to the network, enter the port name and the IP address for the printer. To verify your printer’s IP address, print a Network Configuration page. (By pressing the (cancel button) for about 5 seconds, then release. (Example IP Address is 13.121.52.104) To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select Shared Printer [UNC] and enter the shared name manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse button. If you cannot find your machine in network, please turn off the firewall and click Update. For Windows operating system, Start > Control Panel and start windows firewall, and deactivate this option. For other operating system, refer to its on-line guide. 6. After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test page appears. If you choose to print a test page, select the checkbox and click Next. Otherwise, just click Next and skip to step 8. 7. If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes. If not, click No to reprint it. 8. Click Finish. After the driver setup, you may enable firewall. If the printer driver does not work properly, follow the steps below to repair or reinstall the driver. 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your machine and powered on. 2. From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Dell > Dell Printers > your printer driver name > Maintenance. 3. Select the option as you wish, follow the instruction on the window. Macintosh 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set. 2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive. 3. Double-click the CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop. 4. Double-click the MAC_Installer folder. 5. Double-click the Installer OS X icon. 6. Enter the password and click OK. 7. The Dell Installer window opens. Click Continue. 8. Select Easy Install and click Install. Easy Install is recommended for most users. All components necessary for machine operations will be installed. If you select Custom Install, you can choose individual components to install. 9. The message which warns that all applications will close on your computer appears. Click Continue. 10. After the installation is finished, click Quit. 11. Open the Applications folder > Utilities > Print Setup Utility. For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, open the Applications folder > System Preferences and click Print & Fax.12. Click Add on the Printer List. For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, click the “+” icon; a display window will pop up. 13. For Mac OS X 10.3, select the IP Printing tab. For Mac OS X10.4, click IP Printer. For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, click IP. 14. Select Socket/HP Jet Direct in Printer Type. When printing a document containing many pages, printing performance may be enhanced by choosing Socket for Printer Type option. 15. Enter the machine’s IP address in the Printer Address field. 16. Enter the queue name in the Queue Name field. If you cannot determine the queue name for your machine server, try using the default queue first. 17. For Mac OS X 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Dell in Printer Model and your machine name in Model Name. For Mac OS X 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Dell in Print Using and your machine name in Model. For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, if Auto Select does not work properly, select Select a driver to use... and your machine name in Print Using. Your machine appears on the Printer List, and is set as the default machine. 18. Click Add. If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it. Follow steps below to uninstall the driver for Macintosh. 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on. 2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive. 3. Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your Macintosh desktop. 4. Double-click the MAC_Installer folder. 5. Double-click the Installer OS X icon. 6. Enter the password and click OK. 7. The Dell Installer window opens. Click Continue. 8. Select Uninstall and click Uninstall. 9. When the message which warns that all applications will close on your computer appears, Click Continue. 10. When the uninstall is done, click Quit. Linux Install Linux Driver 1. Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered on. Also, your machine’s IP address should have been set. 2. Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive. 3. Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your Linux desktop. 4. Double-click the Linux folder. 5. Double-click the install.sh icon. 6. The Dell Installer window opens. Click Continue. 7. The Add printer wizard window opens. Click Next. 8. Select Network printer and click Search button. 9. The Printer’s IP address and model name appears on list field. 10. Select your machine and click Next. Add network Printer 1. Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator. 2. Click Add Printer… 3. The Add printer wizard window opens. Click Next. 4. Select Network printer and click the Search button. 5. The printer’s IP address and model name appears on list field. 6. Select your machine and click Next. Input the printer description and Next7. 8. When the add printer is done, click Finish. IPv6 Configuration TCP/IPv6 is supported properly only in Windows Vista or higher. If the IPv6 network seems not working, set all the network setting to the factory defaults and try again. (See Restoring factory default settings.) To use the IPv6 network environment, follow the next procedure to use the IPv6 address: The machine is provided with IPv6 feature on. 1. Connect your machine to the network with a network cable. 2. Turned on the machine. 3. Print a Network Configuration Report from the machine’s control panel that will check IPv6 addresses. 4. Select Start > Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers > Add Printer. 5. Click Add a local printer on the Add Printer windows. 6. Follow the instruction on the window. If the machine does not work in the network environment, activate IPv6. Refer to the next section followed by. Printing network configuration report You can print a Network Configuration Report from the machine's control panel that will show the current machine’s network settings. This will help you to set up a network and troubleshooting problems. To print the report: In ready mode, press and hold the (cancel button) for about 5 seconds. You can find your machine’s MAC address and IP address. For example: MAC Address : 00:15:99:41:A2:78 IP Address : 192.0.0.192 Setting IPv6 addresses Machine supports following IPv6 addresses for network printing and managements. Link-local Address: Self-configured local IPv6 address. (Address starts with FE80.) Stateless Address: Automatically configured IPv6 address by a network router. Stateful Address: IPv6 address configured by a DHCPv6 server. Manual Address: Manually configured IPv6 address by a user. Manual address configuration 1. Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer that supports IPv6 addressing as a URL. (See Using Embedded Web Service (Dell 1130n only).) For IPv4, enter the IPv4 address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go. 2. When the Embedded Web Service window opens, click Network Settings. 3. Click TCP/IP. 4. Enable the Manual Address In the TCP/IPv6 section. 5. Select the Router Prefix and click the Add button, then the router prefix will automatically be entered into the address field. Enter the rest of address. (ex: 3FFE:10:88:194::AAAA. “A” is the hexadecimal 0 through 9, A through F.) 6. Click the Apply button. Installing printer driver Driver installation for network printer in IPv6 network environment is same as TCP/IPv4. (See Installing network connected machine’s driver.) Select TCP/IP Port and when the list of machines is displayed, simply select your machine's IPv6 address. Using Embedded Web Service 1. Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer that supports IPv6 addressing as a URL . 2. Select one of the IPv6 addresses (Link-local Address, Stateless Address, Stateful Address, Manual Address) from Network Configuration Report.3. Enter the IPv6 addresses. (ex: http://[FE80::215:99FF:FE66:7701]) Address must be enclosed in '[]' brackets.Basic setup After installation is complete, you may want to set the machine’s default settings. Refer to the next section if you would like to set or change values. This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the machine. This chapter includes: Altitude adjustment Setting the default tray and paper Changing font setting (Dell 1130n only) Altitude adjustment The print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure, which is determined by the height of the machine above sea level. The following information will guide you on how to set your machine to the best print quality or best quality of print.Before you set the altitude value, find the altitude where you are using the machine. 1. High 1 2. High 2 3. High 3 4. Normal For Dell 1130 1. Install the driver. (See Installing USB connected machine’s driver or Installing network connected machine’s driver.) 2. Click the Windows Start menu. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers. For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes. For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers. For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers. For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers. 3. Select the your machine’s driver and right-click to open Properties. 4. In printer driver properties, select Device Options. 5. Select necessary options in the Altitude Adjustment drop-down list. 6. Click OK. For Dell 1130n You can altitude adjustment in Printer Settings Utility. 1. You can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Dell > Dell Printers > your printer driver name > Printer Settings Utility. 2. Select necessary options in the Altitude Adjustment drop-down list. 3. Click the Apply button. This can also be adjusted via Embedded Web Service. Setting the default tray and paper You can select the tray and paper you would like to keep using for printing job.In the computer Windows 1. Click the Windows Start menu. 2. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers. For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes. For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers. For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers. For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers. 3. Right-click your machine. 4. For Windows XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista, press Printing Preferences. For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus, select the Printing Preferences. If Printing Preferences item has ► mark, you can select other printer drivers connected with selected printer. 5. Click Paper tab. 6. Select tray and its options, such as paper size and type. 7. Press OK. Macintosh Macintosh does not support this function. Macintosh users need to change the default setting manually each time they want to print using other settings. 1. Open a Macintosh application and select the file you want to print. 2. Open the File menu and click Print. 3. Go to Paper Feed pane. 4. Open the File menu and click Print. 5. Go to Paper Feed. 6. Set appropriate tray from which you want to print. 7. Go to Paper pane. 8. Set paper type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from which you want to print. 9. Click Print to print. Using power saving feature When you are not using the machine for a while, use this feature to save power. For Dell 1130 1. Install the driver. (See Installing USB connected machine’s driver or Installing network connected machine’s driver.) 2. Click the Windows Start menu. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers. For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes. For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers. For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers. For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers. 3. Select the your machine’s driver and right-click to open Properties. 4. In printer driver properties, select Device Options. 5. Select the time you want, in the Power Save drop-down list. 6. Click OK. For Dell 1130n You change power save in Printer Settings Utility. 1. You can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Dell > Dell Printers > your printer driver name > Printer Settings Utility. 2. Click Power Save. Select the appropriate value from the dropdown list, and then click Apply. Changing font setting (Dell 1130n only)Your machine has preset font setting depending on your region or country. If you want to change the font or set the font for special condition, such as the DOS environment, you can change the font setting as follows: 1. Ensure that you have installed the printer driver with the provided software CD. 2. If you are a Windows user, you can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Dell > Dell Printers > your printer driver name > Printer Settings Utility. 3. Click Emulation Type. 4. Select your preferred font. 5. Click Apply. Following information shows the proper font list for corresponding languages. Russian: CP866, ISO 8859/5 Latin Cyrillic Hebrew: Hebrew 15Q, Hebrew-8, Hebrew-7 (Israel only) Greek: ISO 8859/7 Latin Greek, PC-8 Latin/Greek Arabic & Farsi: HP Arabic-8, Windows Arabic, Code Page 864, Farsi, ISO 8859/6 Latin Arabic OCR: OCR-A, OCR-BMedia and tray This chapter provides information on how to load print media into your machine. This chapter includes: Selecting print media Changing the tray size Loading paper in the tray Printing on special media Using the output support Selecting print media You can print on a variety of print media, such as plain paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies. Always use print media that meet the guidelines for use with your machine. Guidelines to select the print media Print media that does not meet the guidelines outlined in this user’s guide may cause the following problems: Poor print quality Increased paper jams Premature wear on the machine. Properties, such as weight, composition, grain, and moisture content, are important factors that affect the machine’s performance and the output quality. When you choose print materials, consider the following: The type, size and weight of the print media for your machine are described in print media specifications. (See Print media specifications.) Desired outcome: The print media you choose should be appropriate for your project. Brightness: Some print media are whiter than others and produce sharper, more vibrant images. Surface smoothness: The smoothness of the print media affects how crisp the printing looks on the paper. Some print media may meet all of the guidelines in this section and still not produce satisfactory results. This may be the result of improper handling, unacceptable temperature and humidity levels, or other variables over which cannot be controlled. Before purchasing large quantities of print media, ensure that it meets the requirements specified in this user’s guide. Using print media that does not meet these specifications may cause problems, requiring repairs. Such repairs are not covered by the warranty or service agreements. The amount of paper put into the tray may differ according to media type used. (See Print media specifications.) Media sizes supported in each mode Mode Size Type Source Simplex printing For details about paper size, see Print media specifications. For details about paper type, see Print media specifications. tray 1 manual tray Duplex printing (Manual) [a] Letter, A4, Legal, US Folio, Oficio Plain, Color, Preprinted, Recycled, Bond, Archive tray 1 [a] 75 to 90 g/m2 (20~24 lb bond) only Changing the tray size The tray is preset to Letter or A4 size, depending on your country. To change the size, you need to adjust the paper guides.1. Support guide 2. Paper length guide 3. Guide lock 4. Paper width guide 1. With one hand press and hold the guide lock, and with the other hand, hold the paper length guide and support guide together. Slide the paper length guide and support guide to locate them in the correct paper size slot. 2. Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before loading papers. Insert the paper into the tray. 3. After inserting paper into the tray, adjust the support guide so that it lightly touches the paper stack. 4. Squeeze the paper width guides and slide them to the desired paper size marked at the bottom of the tray. Do not push the paper width guide too far causing the media to warp. If you do not adjust the paper width guide, it may cause paper jams.Do not use a paper with more than 6 mm curl. Loading paper in the tray Tray 1 1. Pull out the paper tray . And adjust the tray size to the media size you are loading. (See Changing the tray size.) 2. Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before loading papers. 3. And place paper with the side you want to print facing down. 4. Set the paper type and size for the tray 1. (See Setting the default tray and paper.) If you experience problems with paper feeding, check whether the paper meets the media specification. (See Print media specifications.) Manual tray The manual tray can hold special sizes and types of print material, such as postcards, note cards, and envelopes. It is useful for single page printing on letterhead or colored paper. Tips on using the manual tray If you select Manual Feeder for Source from your software application, you need to press (cancel button) each time you print a page and load only one type, size and weight of print media at a time in the manual tray. To prevent paper jams, do not add paper while printing. This also applies to other types of print media. Print media should be loaded face up with the top edge going into the manual tray first and be placed in the center of the tray. Always load the specified print media only to avoid paper jams and print quality problems. (See Print media specifications.) Flatten any curl on postcards, envelopes, and labels before loading them into the manual tray. 1. Load the paper in the manual tray.Do not force the paper beyond the surface with mark when loading. When printing the special media, you must follow the loading guideline. (See Printing on special media.) When papers overlap when printing using manual tray, open tray 1 and remove overlapping papers then try printing again. When paper does not feed well while printing, push the paper in manually until it starts feeding automatically. 2. Squeeze the manual tray paper guides and adjust them to the width of the paper. Do not force them too much, or the paper will bent resulting in a paper jam or skew. 3. To print in application, open an application and start the print menu. 4. Open Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.) 5. Press the Paper tab in Printing Preferences, and select an appropriate paper type. For example, if you want to use a label, set the paper type to Label. 6. Select Manual Feeder in paper source, then press OK. 7. Start printing in application. If you are printing multiple pages, load the next sheet after the first page prints out, and press the (cancel button). Repeat this step for every page to be printed. Printing on special media The table below shows the available special media for each tray. When using special media, we recommend you feed one paper at a time. Check the maximum input number of media for each tray. (See Print media specifications.) Types Tray 1 Manual tray Plain ● ● Thick ● ● Thin ● ● Bond ● Color ● CardStock ● Labels ● Transparency ● Envelope ● Preprinted ● Cotton ● Recycled ● ● Archive ● ● ( ●: supported, Blank: Not supported) The media types are shown in the Printing Preferences. This paper type option allows you to set the type of paper to be loaded in the tray. This setting appears in the list, so that you can select it. This will let you get the best quality printout. If not, the desired print quality may not be achieved. 2Plain: 60 to 120 g/m (16 to 32 lb) Normal plain paper. Thick: 90 (24 lb) thick paper. Thin: 60 to 70 g/m2 (16 to 19 lb) thin paper. Bond: 105 to 120 g/m2 (28 to 32 lb) bond. Color: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) color-backgrounded paper. CardStock: 105 to 163 g/m2 (24 to 43 lb) cardstock. Labels: 120 to 150 g/m2 (32 to 40 lb) labels. Transparency: 138 to 146 g/m2 (37 to 39 lb) transparency paper. Envelope: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) envelope. Preprinted: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) preprinted/letterhead paper. Cotton: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) cotton paper. Recycled: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) recycled paper. When you use recycled paper, printouts might be wrinkled. Archive: 70 to 90 g/m2 (19 to 24 lb) If you need to keep the print-out for a long period time, such as archives, select this option. Envelope Successful printing on envelopes depends upon the quality of the envelopes. To print an envelope, the stamp area is on the left side and the end of the envelope with the stamp area enters the printer first and center of the manual tray. If envelopes are printed out with wrinkles, crease or black bold lines, open the rear cover and pull down the pressure lever and try printing again. Keep the rear cover opened during printing. 1. Pressure lever When selecting envelopes, consider the following factors: Weight: The weight of the envelope paper should not exceed 90 g/m2 otherwise, jam may occur. Construction: Prior to printing, envelopes should lie flat with less than 6 mm curl, and should not contain air. Condition: Envelopes should not be wrinkled, nicked, nor damaged. Temperature: Use envelopes that are compatible with the heat and pressure of the machine during operation. Use only well-constructed envelopes with sharp-and well-creased folds. Do not use stamped envelopes. Do not use envelopes with clasps, snaps, windows, coated lining, self-adhesive seals, or other synthetic materials.Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes. Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope extends all the way to the corner of the envelope. 1. Acceptable 2. Unacceptable Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that folds over to seal must use adhesives compatible with the machine’s fusing temperature about 170°C (338 °F) for 0.1 second. The extra flaps and strips might cause wrinkling, creasing, or jams, and may even damage the fuser. For the best print quality, position margins no closer than 15 mm from the edges of the envelope. Avoid printing over the area where the envelope’s seams meet. Transparency To avoid damaging the machine, only use transparencies designed for use in laser printers. Transparencies used in the machine must be able to withstand machine’s fusing temperature. Place them on a flat surface after removing them from the machine. Do not leave unused transparencies in the paper tray for long periods of time. Dust and dirt may accumulate on them, resulting in spotty printing. To avoid smudging caused by fingerprints, handle them carefully. To avoid fading, do not expose printed transparencies to prolonged sunlight. Ensure that transparencies are not wrinkled, curled, or have any torn edges. Do not use transparencies that separates from the backing sheet. To prevent transparencies from sticking to each other, do not let the printed sheets stack up as they are begin printed out. Labels To avoid damaging the machine, use only labels designed for use in laser machines. When selecting labels, consider the following factors: Adhesives: The adhesive material should be stable at your machine’s fusing temperature about 170°C (338 °F). Arrangement: Only use labels with no exposed backing between them. Labels can peel off sheets that have spaces between the labels, causing serious jams. Curl: Prior to printing, labels must lie flat with no more than 13 mm of curl in any direction. Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles, bubbles, or other indications of separation. Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive material between labels. Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off during printing, which can cause paper jams. Exposed adhesive can also cause damage to machine components. Do not run a sheet of labels through the machine more than once. The adhesive backing is designed for only a single pass through the machine.Do not use labels that are separating from the backing sheet or are wrinkled, bubbled, or otherwise damaged. Card stock/Custom-sized paper Postcards, cards and other custom-sized materials can be printed with this machine. Do not print on media smaller than 76 mm (3.00 inches) wide or 127 mm (5.00 inches) long. In the software application, set margins at least 6.4 mm (0.25 inches) away from the edges of the material. If media weight is over 160 g/m2 (43 lb), try printing in the rear cover (face up). Letterhead/Preprinted paper Single-sided Double-sided Tray1 Face down Face up Manual tray Face up Face down Letterhead/ Preprinted paper must be printed with heat-resistant ink that will not melt, vaporize, or release hazardous emissions when subjected to the machine’s fusing temperature about 170°C (338 °F) for 0.1 second. Letterhead/ Preprinted paper ink must be non-flammable and should not adversely affect machine rollers. Forms and letterhead should be sealed in a moisture-proof wrapping to prevent changes during storage. Before you load letterhead/preprinted paper, verify that the ink on the paper is dry. During the fusing process, wet ink can come off preprinted paper, reducing print quality. Photo Make sure not to use the inkjet photo paper with this machine. It could cause damage to the machine. Glossy Load one paper to the manual tray at a time, glossy side facing up. Recommended media: Glossy paper (Letter) for this machine by HP Brochure Paper (Product: Q6611A) only. Recommended media: Glossy paper (A4) for this machine by HP Superior Paper 160 glossy (Product: Q6616A). Using the output support The surface of the output tray may become hot if you print a large number of pages at once. Make sure that you do not touch the surface, and do not allow children near it. The printed pages stack on the output support, and the output support will help the printed pages to align. The printer sends output to the output tray by default. To use the output tray, make sure that the rear cover is closed.If you are using A5 paper, fold the output tray. Otherwise, printed pages might be mis-aligned or jammed.Printing This chapter explains common printing tasks. This chapter includes: Printer driver features Basic printing Opening printing preferences Using help Using special print features Changing the default print settings Setting your machine as a default machine Printing to a file (PRN) Macintosh printing Linux printing The procedures in this chapter are mainly based on Windows XP. Printer driver features Your printer drivers support the following standard features: Paper orientation, size, source, and media type selection Number of copies In addition, you can use various special printing features. The following table shows a general overview of features supported by your printer drivers: Some models or operating system may not support the certain feature(s) in the following table. Printer driver Feature Windows Machine quality option ● Poster printing ● Multiple pages per sheet ● Booklet printing (manual) ● Fit to page printing ● Reduce and enlarge printing ● Different source for first page ● Watermark ● Overlay ● Double-sided printing (manual) ● ( ●: supported, Blank: Not supported) Basic printing Your machine allows you to print from various Windows, Macintosh, or Linux applications. The exact steps for printing a document may vary depending on the application you use. Your Printing Preferences window that appears in this user’s guide may differ depending on the machine in use. However, the composition of the Printing Preferences window is similar. Check the operating system(s) that are compatible with your machine. Refer to the OS compatibility section of Printer Specifications. (See System requirements.) When you select an option in Printing Preferences, you may see a warning mark, , or . An exclamationmark ( ) means you can select that certain option but it is not recommended, and ( ) mark means you cannot select that option due to the machine’s setting or environment. The following procedure describes the general steps required for printing from various Windows applications. Macintosh basic printing. (See Macintosh printing.) Linux basic printing. (See Linux printing.) The following Printing Preferences window is for Notepad in Windows XP. Your Printing Preferences window may differ, depending on your operating system or the application you are using. 1. Open the document you want to print. 2. Select Print from the File menu. The Print window appears. 3. Select your machine from the Select Printer list. The basic print settings including the number of copies and print range are selected within the Print window. To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver, click Properties or Preferences in the application’s Print window to change the print setting. (See Opening printing preferences.) 4. To start the print job, click OK or Print in the Print window. Canceling a print job If the print job is waiting in a print queue or print spooler, cancel the job as follows: 1. Click the Windows Start menu. 2. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers. For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printer and Faxes. For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers. For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers. For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers. 3. For Windows 2000, XP, Server 2003 and Vista, double-click your machine. For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, right click your printer icon > context menus > See what’s printing. If See what’s printing item has ► mark, you can select other printer drivers connected with selected printer. 4. From the Document menu, select Cancel. You can also access this window by simply double-clicking the machine icon ( ) in the Windows task bar. You can also cancel the current job by pressing on the control panel. Opening printing preferencesYou can preview the settings you selected on the upper right of the Printing Preferences. 1. Open the document you want to print. 2. Select Print from the file menu. The Print window appears. 3. Select your machine from the Select Printer. 4. Click Properties or Preferences. Using a favorite setting The Presets option, which is visible on each preferences tab except for Dell tab, allows you to save the current preferences settings for future use. To save a Presets item: 1. Change the settings as needed on each tab. 2. Enter a name for the item in the Presets input box. 3. Click Add. When you save Presets, all current driver settings are saved. If you click Add, the Add button changes to Update button. Select more options and click Update, settings will be added to the Presets you made. To use a saved setting, select it from the Presets drop down list. The machine is now set to print according to the setting you selected. To delete saved setting, select it from the Presets drop down list and click Delete. You can also restore the printer driver’s default settings by selecting Default Preset from the Presets drop down list.Using help Click the question mark from the upper-right corner of the window and click on any option you want to know about. Then a pop up window appears with information about that option's feature which is provided from the driver. If you want to search information via a keyword, click the Dell tab in the Printing Preferences window, and enter a keyword in the input line of the Help option. To get information about supplies, driver update or registration and so on, click appropriate buttons. Using special print features Special print features include: Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper. Printing posters. Printing booklets (Manual). Printing on both sides of paper (Manual). Change percentage of your document. Fitting your document to a selected paper size. Using watermarks. Using overlay. Advanced Options. Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper You can select the number of pages to print on a single sheet of paper. To print more than one page per sheet, the pages will be reduced in size and arranged in the order you specify. You can print up to 16 pages on one sheet. 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.) 2. Click the Basic tab, select Multiple Pages Per Side in the Type drop-down list. 3. Select the number of pages you want to print per sheet (2, 4, 6, 9, or 16) in the Pages per Side drop-down list. 4. Select the page order from the Page Order drop-down list, if necessary. 5. Check Print Page Border to print a border around each page on the sheet. 6. Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source, and Type. 7. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. Printing posters This feature allows you to print a single-page document onto 4, 9, or 16 sheets of paper, for the purpose of pasting the sheets together to form one poster-size document. 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.) 2. Click the Basic tab, select Poster Printing in the Type drop-down list. 3. Select the page layout you want. Specification of the page layout: Poster 2x2: Document will be enlarged and be divided into 4 pages. Poster 3x3: Document will be enlarged and be divided into 9 pages. Poster 4x4: Document will be enlarged and be divided into 16 pages. 4. Select the Poster Overlap value. Specify Poster Overlap in millimeters or inches by selecting the radio button on the upper right of Basic tab to make it easier to paste the sheets together.5. Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source, and Type. 6. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. 7. You can complete the poster by pasting the sheets together. Printing booklets (Manual) This feature prints your document on both sides of a paper and arranges the pages so that the paper can be folded in half after printing to produce a booklet. If you want to make a booklet, you need to print on Letter, Legal, A4, US Folio, or Oficio sized print media. 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access the Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.) 2. Click the Basic tab, select Booklet Printing from the Type drop-down list. 3. Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source, and Type. The Booklet Printing option is not available for all paper sizes. In order to find out the available paper size for this feature, select the available paper size in the Size option on the Paper tab. If you select an unavailable paper size, this option can be automatically canceled. Select only available paper. (paper without or mark). 4. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. 5. After printing, fold and staple the pages. Printing on both sides of paper (Manual) You can print on both sides of a paper; duplex. Before printing, decide how you want your document oriented. You can use this feature with Letter, Legal, A4, US Folio, or Oficio sized paper. (See Print media specifications.) We recommend not to print on both sides of the special media, such as labels, envelopes, or thick paper to print on both sides of paper. It may cause a paper jam or damage the machine. The Double-Sided Printing (Manual) feature is available only for the tray 1. 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.) 2. Click the Advanced tab. 3. From the Double-Sided Printing (Manual) section, select the binding option you want. None Long Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in bookbinding. Short Edge: This option is the conventional layout used in calendars. 4. Click the Paper tab, select the Size, Source, and Type. 5. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. If your machine does not have a duplex unit, you should complete the printing job manually. The machine prints every other page of the document first. After that, a message appears on your computer. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the printing job. Change percentage of your document You can change the size of a document to appear larger or smaller on the printed page by typing in a percentage you want. 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.) 2. Click the Paper tab. 3. Enter the scaling rate in the Percentage input box. You can also click the up/down arrows to select the scaling rate. 4. Select the Size, Source, and Type in Paper Options. 5. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. Fitting your document to a selected paper size This printer feature allows you to scale your print job to any selected paper size regardless of the document size. This can be useful when you want to check fine details on a small document. 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.) 2. Click the Paper tab. 3. Select the paper size you want from the Fit to Page. 4. Select the Size, Source, and Type in Paper Options. 5. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. Using watermarks The watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document. For example, you use it when you want to have large gray letters reading “DRAFT” or “CONFIDENTIAL” printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of a document. There are several predefined watermarks that come with the machine. They can be modified, or you can add new ones to the list. Using an existing watermark 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.) 2. Click the Advanced tab, and select the desired watermark from the Watermark drop-down list. You will see the selected watermark in the preview image. 3. Click OK or Print until you exit the print window. Creating a watermark 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.) 2. From the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears. 3. Enter a text message in the Watermark Message box. You can enter up to 256 characters. The message displays in the preview window.When the First Page Only box is checked, the watermark prints on the first page only. 4. Select watermark options. You can select the font name, style, size, and shade from the Font Attributes section, as well as set the angle of the watermark from the Message Angle section. 5. Click Add to add a new watermark to the Current Watermarks list. 6. When you have finished editing, click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. To stop printing the watermark, select None from the Watermark drop-down list. Editing a watermark 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.) 2. Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears. 3. Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current Watermarks list and change the watermark message and options. 4. Click Update to save the changes. 5. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. Deleting a watermark 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.) 2. Click the Advanced tab, select Edit from the Watermark drop-down list. The Edit Watermarks window appears. 3. Select the watermark you want to delete from the Current Watermarks list and click Delete. 4. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. Using overlay An overlay is text and/or images stored in the computer hard disk drive (HDD) as a special file format that can be printed on any document. Overlays are often used to take the place of letterhead paper. Rather than using preprinted letterhead, you can create an overlay containing exactly the same information that is currently on your letterhead. To print a letter with your company’s letterhead, you do not need to load preprinted letterhead paper in the machine just print the letterhead overlay on your document. Creating a new page overlay To use a page overlay, you must create a new page overlay containing your logo or image. 1. Create or open a document containing text or an image for use in a new page overlay. Position the items exactly as you wish them to appear when printed as an overlay. 2. To save the document as an overlay, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.) 3. Click the Advanced tab, and select Edit from the Text drop-down list. Edit Overlay window appears. 4. In the Edit Overlay window, click Create. 5. In the Save As window, type a name of up to eight characters in the File name box. Select the destination path, if necessary. (The default is C:\Formover.) 6. Click Save. The name appears on the Overlay List. 7. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. 8. The file is not printed. Instead, it is stored on your computer hard disk drive. The overlay document size must be the same as the document you print with the overlay. Do not create an overlay with a watermark. Using a page overlay After an overlay has been created, it is ready to be printed with your document. To print an overlay with a document: 1. Create or open the document you want to print. 2. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Openingprinting preferences.) 3. Click the Advanced tab. 4. Select the desired overlay from the Text drop-down list. 5. If the overlay file you want does not appear in the Text drop-down list, select Edit from the list and click Load. Select the overlay file you want to use. If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an external source, you can also load the file when you access the Open window. After you select the file, click Open. The file appears in the Overlay List box and is available for printing. Select the overlay from the Overlay List box. 6. If necessary, check Confirm Page Overlay When Printing box. If this box is checked, a message window appears each time you submit a document for printing, asking you to confirm your wish to print an overlay on your document. If this box is not checked and an overlay has been selected, the overlay automatically prints with your document. 7. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. The selected overlay prints on your document. The resolution of the overlay document must be the same as that of the document you will print with the overlay. Deleting a page overlay You can delete page overlays that you no longer use. 1. In the Printing Preferences window, click the Advanced tab. 2. Select Edit in the Overlay drop down list. 3. Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay List box. 4. Click Delete. 5. When a confirming message window appears, click Yes. 6. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. Advanced Options Use the following Graphics options to adjust the print quality for your specific printing needs. 1. To change the print settings from your software application, access Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.) 2. Click the Graphics tab. This options you can select may vary depending on your printer model. Refer to the online help for each option’s information provided from the Printing Preferences. Font/ Text: Select Darken Text to print texts darker than on a normal document. Use All Text Black to prints solid black, regardless of the color it appears on the screen. Advanced (Dell 1130n only): You can set advanced settings by clicking the Advanced button. True Type Options: This option determines what the driver tells the printer about how to image the text in your document. Select the appropriate setting according to the status of your document. Download as Outline: When this option is selected, the driver will download any TrueType fonts that are used in your document not already stored (resident) on your printer. If, after printing a document, you find that the fonts did not print correctly, choose Download as bit image and resubmit your print job. The Download as bit image setting is often useful when printing Adobe®. Download as Bit Image: When this option is selected, the driver will download the font data as bitmap images. Documents with complicated fonts, such as Korean or Chinese, or various other fonts, will print faster in this setting. Print as Graphics: When this option is selected, the driver will download any fonts as graphics. When printing documents with high graphic content and relatively few TrueType fonts, printing performance (speed) may be enhanced in this setting. Use Printer Fonts: When Use Printer Fonts is checked, the printer uses the fonts that are stored in its memory (resident fonts) to print your document, rather than downloading the fonts used in your document. Because downloading fonts takes time, selecting this option can speed up your printing time. When using Printer fonts, the printer will try to match the fonts used in your document to those stored in its memory. If, however, you use fonts in your document that are very different from those resident in the printer, your printed output will appear very different from what it looks like on the screen. Graphic Controller: Fine Edge allows user to emphasize edges of texts and fine lines for improving readability. Toner Save: Selecting this option extends the life of your toner cartridge and reduces your cost per pagewithout a significant reduction in print quality. Printer Setting: If you select this option, this feature is determined by the setting you’ve made from the machine. On: Select this option to allow the printer to use less toner on each page. Off: If you do not need to save toner when printing a document, select this option. Darkness: The option adjusts the toner density on print outputs. The values are Normal, Light, and Dark. For Dell 1130n, you change darknesss in the Printer Settings Utility. 3. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window. Changing the default print settings Most Windows applications will override settings you specify in the printer driver. Change all print settings available in the software application first, and change any remaining settings using the printer driver. 1. Click the Windows Start menu. 2. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers. For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printers and Faxes. For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers. For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers. For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers. 3. Right-click your machine. 4. For Windows XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista, press Printing Preferences. For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, from context menus, select the Printing preferences. If Printing preferences item has ► mark, you can select other printer drivers connected with selected printer. 5. Change the settings on each tab. 6. Click OK. If you want to change the settings for each print job, change it in Printing Preferences. Setting your machine as a default machine 1. Click the Windows Start menu. 2. For Windows 2000, select Settings > Printers. For Windows XP/Server 2003, select Printers and Faxes. For Windows Server 2008/Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Printers. For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound > Devices and Printers. For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware > Devices and Printers. 3. Select your machine. 4. Right-click your machine and select Set as Default Printer. For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 If Set as default printer item has ► mark, you can select other printer drivers connected with selected printer. Printing to a file (PRN) You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file. To create a file: 1. Check the Print to file box at the Print window.2. Click Print. 3. Type in the destination path and the file name, and then click OK. For example c:\Temp\file name. If you type in only the file name, the file is automatically saved in My Documents. The saved folder may differ, depending on your operating system. Macintosh printing This chapter explains how to print using Macintosh. You need to set the print environment before printing. USB connected (See Macintosh.) Network connected (See Macintosh.) Printing a document When you print with a Macintosh, you need to check the printer driver setting in each application you use. Follow the steps below to print from a Macintosh: 1. Open an application and select the file you want to print. 2. Open the File menu and click Page Setup (Document Setup in some applications). 3. Choose your paper size, orientation, scaling, other options, and make sure that your machine is selected. Click OK.4. Open the File menu and click Print. 5. Choose the number of copies you want and indicate which pages you want to print. 6. Click Print. Changing printer settings You can use advanced printing features when using your machine. Open an application and select Print from the File menu. The machine name, which appears in the printer properties window may differ depending on the machine in use. Except for the name, the composition of the printer properties window is similar to the following. The setting options may differ depending on printers and Macintosh OS version. Layout The Layout tab provides options to adjust how the document appears on the printed page. You can print multiple pages on one sheet of paper. Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation to access the following features. Pages per Sheet: This option determines how many pages to be printed on one page. (See Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper.) Layout Direction: This option allows you to select the printing direction on a page similar to the examples on UI. Border: This option allows you to print a border around each page on the sheet. Reverse Page Orientation: This option allows you to rotate paper 180 degrees. Graphics The Graphics tab provides options for selecting Resolution. Select Graphics from the drop-down list under Orientation to access the graphic features. Resolution (Quality): This option allows you to select the printing resolution. The higher the setting, thesharper the clarity of printed characters and graphics. The higher setting also may increase the time it takes to print a document. Darkness: This option allows you to enhance printouts. The available options are Normal, Light, and Dark. Paper Set Paper Type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from which you want to print. This will let you get the best quality printout. If you load a different type of print material, select the corresponding paper type. Printer Settings Printer Settings tab provides Toner Save Mode, Reprint When Jammed, and Power Save options. Select Printer Settings from the drop-down list under Orientation to access the following features: Toner Save Mode: Selecting this option extends the life of your toner cartridge and reduces your cost per page without a significant reduction in print quality. Printer Setting: If you select this option, this feature is determined by the setting you’ve made from the machine. On: Select this option to allow the printer to use less toner on each page. Off: If you do not need to save toner when printing a document, select this option. Reprint When Jammed: When this option is checked, the machine retains the image of a printed page until the machine signals that the page has successfully exited the machine. If a paper jam occurs, the printer will reprint the last page sent from the computer after you have cleared the jam. (Dell 1130 only) Power Save: When this option is checked, the machine turns to the power save mode after the selected time. Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper. This feature provides a cost-effective way to print draft pages. 1. Open an application, and select Print from the File menu. 2. Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation. In the Pages per Sheet drop-down list, select the number of pages you want to print on one sheet of paper.3. Select the other options you want to use. 4. Click Print, then the machine prints the selected the number of pages you want to print on one sheet of paper. Linux printing Printing from applications There are a lot of Linux applications that allow you to print using Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS). You can print on your machine from any such application. 1. Open an application, and select Print from the File menu. 2. Select Print directly using lpr. 3. In the LPR GUI window, select the model name of your machine from the printer list and click Properties. 4. Change the print job properties using the following four tabs displayed at the top of the window.General: This option allows you to change the paper size, the paper type, and the orientation of the documents. It enables the duplex feature, adds start and end banners, and changes the number of pages per sheet. Text: This option allows you to specify the page margins and set the text options, such as spacing or columns. Graphics: This option allows you to set image options that are used when printing images/files, such as color options, image size, or image position. Advanced: This option allows you to set the print resolution, paper source and special print features. If an option is grayed out, it means that the grayed out option is not supported. 5. Click Apply to apply the changes and close the Properties window. 6. Click OK in the LPR GUI window to start printing. 7. The Printing window appears, allowing you to monitor the status of your print job. To abort the current job, click Cancel. Printing files You can print many different types of files on your machine using the standard CUPS way, directly from the command line interface. The CUPS lpr utility allows you to do that. But the drivers package replaces the standard lpr tool by a much more user-friendly LPR GUI program. To print any document file: 1. Type lpr from the Linux shell command line and press Enter. The LPR GUI window appears. When you type only lpr and press Enter, the Select file(s) to print window appears first. Just select any files you want to print and click Open. 2. In the LPR GUI window, select your machine from the list, and change the print job properties. 3. Click OK to start printing. Configuring printer properties Using the Printer Properties window provided by the Printers configuration, you can change the various properties for your machine as a printer. 1. Open the Unified Driver Configurator. If necessary, switch to Printers configuration. 2. Select your machine on the available printers list and click Properties. 3. The Printer Properties window opens.The following five tabs display at the top of the window: General: This option allows you to change the printer location and name. The name entered in this tab displays on the printer list in Printers configuration. Connection: This option allows you to view or select another port. If you change the machine port from USB to parallel or vice versa while in use, you must re-configure the machine port in this tab. Driver: Allows you to view or select another printer driver. By clicking Options, you can set the default device options. Jobs: This option shows the list of print jobs. Click Cancel job to cancel the selected job and select the Show completed jobs check box to see previous jobs on the job list. Classes: This option shows the class that your machine is in. Click Add to Class to add your machine to a specific class or click Remove from Class to remove the machine from the selected class. 4. Click OK to apply the changes and close the Printer Properties window.Management tools This chapter introduces management tools provided to help you make full use of your machine. This chapter includes: Introducing useful management tools Using Embedded Web Service (Dell 1130n only) Using the Printer Status Monitor Introducing useful management tools Using the printer settings utility Firmware update utility Using the Unified Linux Driver Configurator Introducing useful management tools The programs below help you to use your machine conveniently. Using Embedded Web Service (Dell 1130n only). Using the Printer Status Monitor. Using the Unified Linux Driver Configurator. Using Embedded Web Service (Dell 1130n only) Your Embedded Web Service window that appears in this user’s guide may differ depending on the machine in use. If you have connected your machine to a network and set up TCP/IP network parameters correctly, you can manage the machine via Embedded Web Service, an embedded web server. Use Embedded Web Service to: View the machine’s device information and check its current status. Change TCP/IP parameters and set up other network parameters. Change printer preference. Set the email notifications advising of the machine’s status. Get support for using the machine. To access Embedded Web Service: 1. Access a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows. Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go. 2. Your machine’s embedded website opens. Embedded Web Service overview Information tab: This tab gives you general information about your machine. You can check things, such as the machine’s IP address, remaining amount of toner, ethernet information, firmware version, and so on. You can also print reports such as an error report and so on. Machine Settings tab: This tab allows you to set options provided by your machine. Network Settings tab: This tab allows you to view and change the network environment. You can set things, such as TCP/IP, enabling EtherTalk and so on. Maintenance tab: This tab allows you to maintain your machine by upgrading firmware and setting security information. Support tab: This tab allows you to set contact information for sending email. You can also connect to Dell website or download drivers by selecting Link. E-mail notification setup You can receive emails about your machine’s status by setting this option. By setting information such as IP address, host name, e-mail address and SMTP server information, the machine status (toner cartridge shortage or machine error) will be sent to the specified e-mail address automatically. This option may be used more frequently by a machine administrator.1. Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows. Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go. 2. Your machine’s embedded website opens. 3. From the Machine Settings, select E-mail Notification Setup. 4. Set required settings. Set SMTP server information and other settings to use E-mail notification function. After setting the network environment, select the recipient list. And just by clicking a radio button, you can select in what case you want to receive an alert. 5. Click Apply. Setting the contact information Set the machine administrator information and this setting is necessary to use E-mail notification option. 1. Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows. Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go. 2. Your machine’s embedded website opens. 3. Select Support. 4. Enter the name of machine administrator, phone number, location or E-mail address. 5. Click Apply. If the firewall is activated, the E-mail may not be sent successfully. In that case, contact the a network administrator. Using the Printer Status Monitor The Printer Status Monitor program can only be used in the Windows system. Printer Status Monitor is a program that monitors and informs you of the machine status. Printer Status Monitor is installed automatically when you install the machine software. To use this program, you need the following system requirements: Windows. Check for windows operating system(s) compatible with your machine. (See System requirements.) Understanding Printer Status Monitor If an error occurs while printing, you can check the error from the Printer Status Monitor. You can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Dell > Dell Printers > your printer driver name > Printer Status Monitor. The Printer Status Monitor program displays the current status of the machine, the estimated level of toner remaining in the toner cartridge(s), and various other types of information. 1 Printing Status The Printer Status Monitor displays the current status of the printer. 2 Toner Level View the level of toner remaining in the toner cartridge(s). 3 Order Supplies Order replacement toner cartridge(s) online. 4 Help me When error occurs, Help me button appears. You can directly open troubleshooting section in the user’s guide. Opening the Troubleshooting Guide Find solutions for problems by using the Troubleshooting Guide.Right-click the Printer Status Monitor icon and select Troubleshooting Guide. Changing the Printer Status Monitor Program Settings Right-click the Printer Status Monitor icon and select Options. Select the settings you want from the Options window. Using the Dell Toner Management System™ The printer status monitor displays the status of the printer (printer ready, printer offline, and error-check printer) and the toner level (100%, 50%, Toner Low) for your printer. . Using the printer settings utility When you install the Dell software, the Printer Settings Utility is automatically installed. To open the Printer Settings Utility. If you are a Windows user, you can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Dell > Dell Printers > your printer driver name > Printer Settings Utility. The Printer Settings Utility window provides several features. For more information, click the help icon button. Firmware update utility Firmware Update Utility allows you to maintain your machine by upgrading firmware. If you are a Windows user, you can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Dell > Dell Printers > your printer driver name > Firmware Update Utility. Using the Unified Linux Driver Configurator The supplied software CD provides you with the Unified Linux Driver package for using your machine with a Linux computer. Unified Linux Driver Configurator is a tool primarily intended for configuring machine devices. After the driver is installed on your Linux system, the Unified Linux Driver Configurator icon will automatically be created on your desktop. Opening the Unified Driver Configurator 1. Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator on the desktop. You can also click the Startup Menu icon and select Dell Unified Driver > Unified Driver Configurator. 2. Click each button on the left to switch to the corresponding configuration window. 1. Printers Configuration 2. Ports ConfigurationTo use the on screen help, click Help. 3. After changing the configurations, click Exit to close the Unified Driver Configurator. Printers configuration Printers configuration has the two tabs: Printers and Classes. Printer tab View the current system’s printer configuration by clicking on the machine icon button on the left side of the Unified Driver Configurator window.1 Switches to Printers configuration. 2 Shows all of the installed machine. 3 Shows the status, model name and URI of your machine. The printer control buttons are, as follows: Refresh: Renews the available machines list. Add Printer: Allows you to add a new machines. Remove Printer: Removes the selected machine. Set as Default: Sets the current selected machine as a default machine. Stop/Start: Stops/starts the machine. Test: Allows you to print a test page to ensure the machine is working properly. Properties: Allows you to view and change the printer properties. Classes tab The Classes tab shows a list of available machine classes.1 Shows all of the machine classes. 2 Shows the status of the class and the number of machines in the class. Refresh: Renews the classes list. Add Class: Allows you to add a new machine class. Remove Class: Removes the selected machine class. Port configuration In this window, you can view the list of available ports, check the status of each port and release a port that is stalled in a busy state when its owner has terminated the job for any reason.1 Switches to Ports configuration. 2 Shows all of the available ports. 3 Shows the port type, device connected to the port, and status. Refresh: Renews the available ports list. Release port: Releases the selected port.Maintenance This chapter provides information for maintaining your machine and the toner cartridge. This chapter includes: Printing a machine report Using toner low alert (Dell 1130n only) Cleaning a machine Storing the toner cartridge Tips for moving & storing your machine Printing a machine report You can print a configuration page to view current printer settings, or to help troubleshoot printer problems. In ready mode, press and hold the (cancel button) for about 5 seconds. A configuration page prints out. For Dell 1130 this information is provided on the demo page. Using toner low alert (Dell 1130n only) If the amount of toner in the cartridge is low, the LED blinks red. You can set the option for this LED to blink or not. 1. Install the driver. (See Installing USB connected machine’s driver or Installing network connected machine’s driver.) 2. You can launch it from the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs > Dell > Dell Printers > your printer driver name > Printer Settings Utility. 3. Click Toner Low Alert. Select the appropriate setting and then click Apply. Cleaning a machine If printing quality problems occur or if you use your machine in a dusty environment, you need to clean your machine regularly to keep the best printing condition and use your machine longer. Cleaning the cabinet of the machine with cleaning materials containing large amounts of alcohol, solvent, or other strong substances can discolor or distort the cabinet. If your machine or the surrounding area is contaminated with toner, we recommend you use cloth or tissue dampened with water to clean it. If you use a vacuum cleaner, toner blows in the air and might be harmful to you. Cleaning the outside Clean the machine cabinet with a soft, lint-free cloth. Dampen the cloth slightly with water, but be careful not to let any water drip onto or into the machine. Printing a cleaning sheet (Dell 1130n only) If you are experiencing blurred or smeared printouts, you can clear the problem by printing a cleaning sheet, provided by your machine. To print the cleaning sheet: In ready mode, press and hold the (cancel button) for about 10 seconds. OPC cleaning sheet: Cleans the OPC drum of the toner cartridge. This process will produce a page with toner debris, which should be discarded. Your machine automatically picks up a sheet of paper from the tray and prints out a cleaning sheet with dust or toner particles on it. Cleaning the inside During the printing process, paper, toner, and dust particles can accumulate inside the machine. This buildup can cause print quality problems, such as toner specks or smearing. Cleaning the inside of the machine clears and reduces these problems.1. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord. Wait for the machine to cool down. 2. Open the front cover and pull the toner cartridge out. Set it on a clean flat surface To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes. Cover it with a piece of paper, if necessary. Do not touch the green surface underside of the toner cartridge. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area. 3. With a dry, lint-free cloth, wipe away any dust and spilled toner from the toner cartridge area. While cleaning the inside of the machine, be careful not to damage the transfer roller or any other inside parts. Do not use solvents such as benzene or thinner to clean. Printing quality problems can occur and cause damage to the machine. 4. Locate the long strip of glass (LSU) inside the machine and gently swab the glass to see if dirt turns the white cotton black. 5. Reinsert the toner cartridge and close the front cover. 6. Plug in the power cord and turn the machine on. Storing the toner cartridge Toner cartridges contain components that are sensitive to light, temperature, and humidity. Dell suggests users follow the recommendations to ensure the optimum performance, highest quality, and longest life from your new Dell toner cartridge.Store this cartridge in the same environment as the printer it will be used in; this should be in controlled office temperature and humidity conditions. The toner cartridge should remain in its original, unopened package until installation – If original packaging is not available, cover the top opening of the cartridge with paper and store in a dark cabinet. Opening the cartridge package prior to use dramatically shortens its useful shelf and operating life. Do not store on the floor. If the toner cartridge is removed from the printer, always store the cartridge: Inside the protective bag from the original package. Store lying flat (not standing on end) with the same side facing up as if they were installed in the machine. Do not store consumables in; Temperature greater than 40°C (104°F). Humidity range less than 20% nor not greater than 80%. An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature. Direct sunlight or room light. Dusty places. A car for a long period of time. An environment where corrosive gases are present. An environment with salty air. Handling instructions Do not touch the surface of the photosensitive drum in the cartridge. Do not expose the cartridge to unnecessary vibrations or shock. Never manually rotate the drum, especially in the reverse direction; this can cause internal damage and toner spillage. Use of non-Dell and refilled toner cartridge Dell does not recommend or approve the use of non-Dell brand toner cartridges in your printer including generic, store brand, refilled, or remanufactured toner cartridges. Dell’s printer warranty does not cover damage to the machine caused by the use of a refilled, remanufactured, or non-Dell brand toner cartridge. Estimated cartridge life Estimated cartridge life (the life of the toner cartridge yield) depends on the amount of toner that print jobs require. The actual print-out number may vary depending on the print density of the pages you print on, operating environment, printing interval, media type, and/or media size. For example, if you print a lot of graphics, the consumption of the toner is high and you may need to change the cartridge more often. Tips for moving & storing your machine When moving the machine, do not tilt or turn it upside down. Otherwise, the inside of the machine may be contaminated by toner, which can cause damage to the machine or bad print quality. When moving the machine, make sure at least two people are holding the machine securely.Troubleshooting This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error. This chapter includes: Redistributing toner Tips for avoiding paper curls Tips for avoiding paper jams Clearing paper jams Solving other problems Redistributing toner When the toner cartridge is near the end of its life: White streaks or light printing occurs. The LED blinks red. If this happens, you can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing the remaining toner in the cartridge. In some cases, white streaks or light printing will still occur even after you have redistributed the toner. 1. Open the front cover. 2. Pull the toner cartridge out. 3. Thoroughly roll the cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge. If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric. Do not touch the green underside of the toner cartridge. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area. 4. Hold the toner cartridge by the handle and slowly insert the cartridge into the opening in the machine. Tabs on the sides of the cartridge and corresponding grooves within the machine will guide the cartridge into the correct position until it locks into place completely.5. Close the front cover. Ensure that the cover is securely closed. Tips for avoiding paper curls 1. Open the rear cover. 2. Pull down the pressure lever on each side. 1. Pressure lever Keep the rear cover opened during printing. Only use when the printout has more than 20 mm curl. Tips for avoiding paper jams By selecting the correct media types, most paper jams can be avoided. When a paper jam occurs, refer to the next guidelines. Ensure that the adjustable guides are positioned correctly. (See Loading paper in the tray.) Do not overload the tray. Ensure that the paper level is below the paper capacity mark on the inside of the tray. Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing. Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading. Do not use creased, damp, or highly curled paper. Do not mix paper types in a tray. Use only recommended print media. Ensure that the recommended side of the print media is facing down in the tray, or facing up in the manual tray. Clearing paper jams If a paper jam occurs, the LED on the control panel lights orange. Find and remove the jammed paper. To resume printing after clearing paper jams, you must open and close the front cover. To avoid tearing the paper, pull the jammed paper out slowly and gently. Follow the instructions in the following sections to clear the jam.In tray Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam. 1. Open and close the front cover. The jammed paper is automatically ejected from the machine. If the paper does not exit, go to the next step. 2. Pull out tray. 3. Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out. If the paper does not move when you pull, or if you do not see the paper in this area, check the fuser area around the toner cartridge. (See Inside the machine.) 4. Insert tray back into the machine until it snaps into place. Printing automatically resumes. In the manual tray Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam. 1. If the paper is not feeding properly, pull the paper out of the machine. 2. Open and close the front cover to resume printing.Inside the machine Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam. The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the machine. 1. Open the front cover and pull the toner cartridge out, lightly pushing it down. 2. Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out. 3. Replace the toner cartridge and close the front cover. Printing automatically resumes. In exit area Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam. 1. Open and close the front cover. The jammed paper is automatically ejected from the machine. If you do not see the jammed paper, go to next step. 2. Gently pull the paper out of the output tray. If you do not see the jammed paper or if there is any resistance when you pull, stop and go to the next step. 3. Open the rear cover. 4. Pull the pressure levers down and remove the paper. Return the pressure levers to their original position.1. Pressure lever If you do not see the jammed paper, go to next step. 5. Pull the fuser cover levers down and remove the paper. Return the fuser cover levers to their original position. The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the machine. 6. Close the rear cover. 7. Open and close front cover, printing automatically resumes. Solving other problems The following chart lists some conditions that may occur and the recommended solutions. Follow the suggested solutions until the problem is corrected. If the problem persists, call for service. Power problems Click this link to open an animation about power problems. Condition Suggested solutions The machine is not receiving power, or the connection cable between the computer and the machine is not connected properly. Plug in the power cord and press (power) on the control panel. Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect it. For Local PrintingFor Network Printing (Dell 1130n only) Paper feeding problems Condition Suggested solutions Paper jams during printing. Clear the paper jam. (See Clearing paper jams.) Paper sticks together. Check the maximum paper capacity of the tray. (See Print media specifications.) Make sure that you are using the correct type of paper. (See Print media specifications.) Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan the paper. Humid conditions may cause some paper to stick together. Multiple sheets of paper do not feed. Different types of paper may be stacked in the tray. Load paper of only one type, size, and weight. Paper does not feed into the machine. Remove any obstructions from inside the machine. Paper has not been loaded correctly. Remove paper from the tray and reload it correctly. There is too much paper in the tray. Remove excess paper from the tray. The paper is too thick. Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine. (See Print media specifications.) The paper keeps jamming. There is too much paper in the tray. Remove excess paper from the tray. If you are printing on special materials, use the manual tray. An incorrect type of paper is being used. Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine. (See Print media specifications.) There may be debris inside the machine. Open the front cover and remove any debris. Transparencies stick together in the paper exit. Use only transparencies specifically designed for laser printers. Remove each transparency as it exits from the machine. Envelopes skew or fail to feed correctly. Ensure that the paper guides are against both sides of the envelopes. Printing problems Condition Possible cause Suggested solutions The machine does not print. The machine is not receiving power. Check the power cord connections. The machine is not selected as the default machine. Select your machine as your default machine in your Windows. Check the machine for the following: The front cover is not closed. Close the front cover.Paper is jammed. Clear the paper jam. (See Clearing paper jams.) No paper is loaded. Load paper. (See Loading paper in the tray.) The toner cartridge is not installed. Install the toner cartridge. If a system error occurs, contact your service representative. The connection cable between the computer and the machine is not connected properly. Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect it. The connection cable between the computer and the machine is defective. If possible, attach the cable to another computer that is working properly and print a job. You can also try using a different machine cable. The port setting is incorrect. Check the Windows printer setting to make sure that the print job is sent to the correct port. If the computer has more than one port, make sure that the machine is attached to the correct one. The machine may be configured incorrectly. Check the Printing Preferences to ensure that all of the print settings are correct. (See Opening printing preferences.) The printer driver may be incorrectly installed. Repair the machine software. (See Installing USB connected machine’s driver, Installing network connected machine’s driver.) The machine is malfunctioning. Check the LEDs on the control panel to see if the machine is indicating a system error. Contact a service representative. Checking an error message is also possible from the Printer Status Monitor on your computer. The machine does not print. The document size is so big that the hard disk space of the computer is insufficient to access the print job. Get more hard disk space and print the document again. The output tray is full. It can hold up to 80 sheets of plain paper. Once the paper is removed from the output tray, the machine resumes printing. The machine selects print materials from the wrong paper source. The paper option that was selected in the Printing Preferences may be incorrect. For many software applications, the paper source selection is found under the Paper tab within the Printing Preferences. Select the correct paper source. See the printer driver help screen. (See Opening printing preferences.) A print job is extremely slow. The job may be very complex. Reduce the complexity of the page or try adjusting the print quality settings. Half the page is blank. The page orientation setting may be incorrect. Change the page orientation in your application. See the printer driver help screen. The paper size and the paper size settings do not match. Ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper in the tray.Or, ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper selection in the software application settings you use. The machine prints, but the text is wrong, garbled, or incomplete. The machine cable is loose or defective. Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect. Try a print job that you have already printed successfully. If possible, attach the cable and the machine to another computer that you know works and try a print job. Finally, try a new machine cable. The wrong printer driver was selected. Check the application’s printer selection menu to ensure that your machine is selected. The software application is malfunctioning. Try printing a job from another application. The operating system is malfunctioning. Exit Windows and reboot the computer. Turn the machine off and back on again. If you are in a DOS environment, the font setting for your machine may be set incorrectly. See Changing font setting (Dell 1130n only).Pages print, but they are blank. The toner cartridge is defective or out of toner. Redistribute the toner, if necessary. If necessary, replace the toner cartridge. The file may have blank pages. Check the file to ensure that it does not contain blank pages. Some parts, such as the controller or the board, may be defective. Contact a service representative. The machine does not print PDF file correctly. Some parts of graphics, text, or illustrations are missing. Incompatibility between the PDF file and the Acrobat products. Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print. Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options. It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image. The print quality of photos is not good. Images are not clear. The resolution of the photo is very low. Reduce the photo size. If you increase the photo size in the software application, the resolution will be reduced. Before printing, the machine emits vapor near the output tray. Using damp paper can cause vapor during printing. This is not a problem. Just keep printing. The machine does not print special- sized paper, such as billing paper. Paper size and paper size setting do not match. Set the correct paper size in the Edit... in the Paper tab in the Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.) Printing quality problems If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly, there might be a reduction in print quality. See the table below to clear the problem. Condition Suggested Solutions Light or faded print If a vertical white streak or faded area appears on the page, the toner supply is low. You may be able to temporarily extend the toner cartridge life. (See Redistributing toner.) If this does not improve the print quality, install a new toner cart The paper may not meet paper specifications; for example, the paper may be too moist or rough. (See Print media specifications.) If the entire page is light, the print resolution setting is too low or the toner save mode is on. Adjust the print resolution and turn the toner save mode off. See the help screen of the printer driver. A combination of faded or smeared defects may indicate that the toner cartridge needs cleaning. (See Cleaning the inside.) The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty. (See Cleaning the inside.) Toner specks The paper may not meet specifications; for example, the paper may be too moist or rough. (See Print media specifications.) The transfer roller may be dirty. Clean the inside of your machine. Contact a service representative. The paper path may need cleaning. Contact a service representative. Dropouts If faded areas, generally rounded, occur randomly on the page: A single sheet of paper may be defective. Try reprinting the job. The moisture content of the paper is uneven or the paper has moist spots on its surface. Try a different brand of paper. (See Print media specifications.) The paper lot is bad. The manufacturing processes can cause some areas to reject toner. Try a different kind or brand of paper. Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click Paper tab, and set type to Thick. (See Opening printing preferences.) If these steps do not correct the problem, contact a service representative. White Spots If white spots appear on the page: The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from a paper falls to the inner devices within the machine, so the transfer roller may be dirty. Clean theinside of your machine. (See Cleaning the inside.) The paper path may need cleaning. (See Cleaning the inside.) Vertical lines If black vertical streaks appear on the page: The surface (drum part) of the toner cartridge inside the machine has probably been scratched. Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one. (See Replacing the toner cartridge.) If white vertical streaks appear on the page: The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty. (See Cleaning the inside.) Black background If the amount of background shading becomes unacceptable: Change to a lighter weight paper. (See Print media specifications.) Check the environmental conditions: very dry conditions or a high level of humidity (higher than 80% RH) can increase the amount of background shading. Remove the old toner cartridge and, install a new one. (See Replacing the toner cartridge.) Toner smear If toner smears on the page: Clean the inside of the machine. (See Cleaning the inside.) Check the paper type and quality. (See Print media specifications.) Remove the toner cartridge and then, install a new one. (See Replacing the toner cartridge.) Vertical repetitive defects If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side of the page at even intervals: The toner cartridge may be damaged. If you still have the same problem, remove the toner cartridge and, install a new one. (See Replacing the toner cartridge.) Parts of the machine may have toner on them. If the defects occur on the back of the page, the problem will likely correct itself after a few more pages. The fusing assembly may be damaged. Contact a service representative. Background scatter Background scatter results from bits of toner randomly distributed on the printed page. The paper may be too damp. Try printing with a different batch of paper. Do not open packages of paper until necessary so that the paper does not absorb too much moisture. If background scatter occurs on an envelope, change the printing layout to avoid printing over areas that have overlapping seams on the reverse side. Printing on seams can cause problems. If background scatter covers the entire surface area of a printed page, adjust the print resolution through your software application or in Printing Preferences. (See Opening printing preferences.) Misformed characters If characters are improperly formed and producing hollow images, the paper stock may be too slick. Try different paper. (See Print media specifications.) Page skew Ensure that the paper is loaded properly. Check the paper type and quality. (See Print media specifications.) Ensure that the guides are not too tight or too loose against the paper stack. Curl or wave Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.Check the paper type and quality. Both high temperature and humidity can cause paper curl. (See Print media specifications.) Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray. Wrinkles or creases Ensure that the paper is loaded properly. Check the paper type and quality. (See Print media specifications.) Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray. Back of printouts are dirty Check for leaking toner. Clean the inside of the machine. (See Cleaning the inside.) Solid Color or Black pages The toner cartridge may not be installed properly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert it. The toner cartridge may be defective. Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one. (See Replacing the toner cartridge.) The machine may require repair. Contact a service representative. Loose toner Clean the inside of the machine. (See Cleaning the inside.) Check the paper type and quality. (See Print media specifications.) Remove the toner cartridge and then, install a new one. (See Replacing the toner cartridge.) If the problem persists, the machine may require repair. Contact a service representative. Character Voids Character voids are white areas within parts of characters that should be solid black: If you are using transparencies, try another type of transparency. Because of the composition of transparencies, some character voids are normal. You may be printing on the wrong surface of the paper. Remove the paper and turn it around. The paper may not meet paper specifications. (See Print media specifications.) Horizontal stripes If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears appear: The toner cartridge may be installed improperly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert it. The toner cartridge may be defective. Remove the toner cartridge and install a new one. (See Replacing the toner cartridge.) If the problem persists, the machine may require repair. Contact a service representative. Curl If the printed paper is curled or paper does not feed into the machine: Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray. Change the printer option and try again. Go to Printing Preferences, click Paper tab, and set type to Thin. (See Opening printing preferences.) An unknown image repetitively appears on a few sheets or loose toner, light print, or contamination occurs. Your machine is probably being used at an altitude of 1,000 m (3,281 ft) or above.The high altitude may affect the print quality, such as loose toner or light imaging. Change the correct altitude setting to your machine. (See Altitude adjustment.) Common Windows problemsCondition Suggested solutions “File in Use” message appears during installation. Exit all software applications. Remove all software from the startup group, then restart Windows. Reinstall the printer driver. “General Protection Fault”, “Exception OE”, “Spool 32”, or “Illegal Operation” messages appear. Close all other applications, reboot Windows and try printing again. “Fail To Print”, “A printer timeout error occurred” messages appear. These messages may appear during printing. Just keep waiting until the machine finishes printing. If the message appears in ready mode or after printing has been completed, check the connection and/or whether an error has occurred. Refer to Microsoft Windows User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Windows error messages. Common Linux problems condition Suggested solutions The machine does not print. Check if the printer driver is installed in your system. Open Unified Driver Configurator and switch to the Printers tab in Printers configuration window to look at the list of available machines. Make sure that your machine is displayed on the list. If not, open Add new printer wizard to set up your device. Check if the machine is started. Open Printers configuration and select your machine on the printers list. Look at the description in the Selected printer pane. If its status contains Stopped string, press the Start button. After that normal operation of the machine should be restored. The “stopped” status might be activated when some problems in printing occurred. Check if your application has special print option such as “-oraw”. If “-oraw” is specified in the command line parameter, then remove it to print properly. For Gimp front-end, select “print” - > “Setup printer” and edit command line parameter in the command item. The machine does not print whole pages, and output is printed on half the page. It is a known problem that occurs when a color machine is used on version 8.51 or earlier of Ghostscript, 64-bit Linux OS, and has been reported to bugs.ghostscript.com as Ghostscript Bug 688252. The problem is solved in AFPL Ghostscript v. 8.52 or above. Download the latest version of AFPL Ghostscript from http://sourceforge.net/projects/ghostscript/ and install it to solve this problem. I encounter error “Cannot open port device file” when printing a document. Avoid changing print job parameters (via LPR GUI, for example) while a print job is in progress. Known versions of CUPS server break the print job whenever print options are changed and then try to restart the job from the beginning. Since Unified Linux Driver locks the port while printing, the abrupt termination of the driver keeps the port locked and unavailable for subsequent print jobs. If this situation occurs, try to release the port by selecting Release port in Port configuration window. Refer to Linux User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Linux error messages. Common Macintosh problems condition Suggested solutions The machine does not print PDF files correctly. Some parts of graphics, text, or illustrations are missing. Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print. Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options. It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image. The document has printed, but the print job has not disappeared from the spooler in Mac OS X 10.3.2. Update your Mac OS to OS Mac OS X 10.3.3. or higher. Some letters are not displayed normally during the Cover page printing. Mac OS cannot create the font during the Cover page printing. The English alphabet and numbers are displayed normally on the Cover page. When printing a document in Macintosh with Acrobat Reader 6.0 or higher, colors print incorrectly. Make sure that the resolution setting in your machine driver matches the one in Acrobat® Reader®. Refer to Macintosh User’s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Macintosh error messages.Supplies This chapter provides information on purchasing supplies and maintenance parts available for your machine. This chapter includes: How to purchase Available supplies Replacing the toner cartridge Available accessories may differ from country to country. Contact your sales representatives to obtain the list of available accessories. How to purchase To order Dell-authorized supplies and accessories visit www.dell.com/supplies, or contact your local Dell dealer or the retailer where you purchased your machine. You can also visit www.dell.com or support.dell.com, select your country/region, and obtain information on calling for service. Available supplies When supplies reach their lifespan, you can order the following types of supplies for your machine: Type Average yield [a] Part name Standard capacity toner cartridge Approx. 1,500 pages 3J11D High capacity toner cartridge Approx. 2,500 pages 2MMJP [a] Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19752. To replace a toner cartridge see Replacing the toner cartridge. Depending on the options and job mode used, the toner cartridge’s lifespan may differ. You must purchase supplies, including toner cartridges, in the same country where you purchased your machine. Otherwise, supplies will be incompatible with your machine since the system configuration of these vary from country to country. Dell does not recommend using non-genuine Dell toner cartridge such as refilled or remanufactured. Dell cannot guarantee non-genuine Dell toner cartridge's quality. Service or repair required as a result of using non-genuine Dell toner cartridges will not be covered under the machine warranty. Replacing the toner cartridge Click this link to open an animation about replacing a toner cartridge. When the toner cartridge reaches its estimated cartridge life: The Printer Status Monitor program window appears on the computer telling you the toner cartridge needs to be replaced. The machine stops printing. At this stage, the toner cartridge needs to be replaced. Check the type of the toner cartridge for your machine. (See Available supplies.) 1. Open the front cover. 2. Pull the toner cartridge out.3. Take a new toner cartridge out of its package. 4. Remove the paper protecting the toner cartridge by pulling the packing tape. 5. Locate the sealing tape at the end of the toner cartridge. Carefully pull the tape completely out of the cartridge and discard it. The sealing tape should be longer than 60 cm when correctly removed. Holding the toner cartridge, pull the sealing tape straight to remove it from the cartridge. Be careful not to cut the tape. If this happens, you cannot use the toner cartridge. Refer to the helpful pictures on the cartridge wrapping paper. 6. Slowly shake the cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge. It will assure maximum copies per cartridge. If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric. Do not touch the green underside of the toner cartridge. Use the handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area. 7. Hold the toner cartridge by the handle and slowly insert the cartridge into the opening in the machine. Tabs on the sides of the cartridge and corresponding grooves within the machine will guide the cartridge into the correct position until it locks into place completely.8. Close the front cover. Make sure that the cover is securely closed.Specifications This chapter guides you about this machine’s specifications. This chapter includes: Hardware specifications Environmental specifications Electrical specifications Print media specifications The specification values here are based on preliminary data. See www.dell.com or support.dell.com for current information. Hardware specifications Item Description Dimension Height 197 mm (7.76 inches) Depth 389 mm (15.31 inches) Width 360 mm (14.17 inches) Weight Machine with consumables Dell 1130: 7.25 Kg (15.98 lbs) Dell 1130n: 7.30 Kg (16.09 lbs) Package weight Paper 1.23 Kg (2.70 lbs) Plastic 0.19 Kg (0.42 lbs) Environmental specifications Item Description Noise Level [a] Ready mode 26 dB(A) Printing mode Dell 1130: 49 dB(A) Dell 1130n: 50 dB(A) Temperature Operation 10 to 32 °C (50 to 90 °F) Storage (unpacked) 0 to 40 °C (32 to 104 °F) Humidity Operation 20 to 80% RH Storage (unpacked) 10 to 80% RH [a] Sound Pressure Level, ISO 7779. Configuration tested: machine basic installation, A4 paper, simplex printing. Electrical specifications Power requirements are based on the country/region where the device is sold. Do not convert operating voltages. Doing so might damage the device and void the product warranty. Item Description Power rating [a] 110 volt models AC 110 - 127 V 220 volt models AC 220 - 240 V Power consumption Average operating mode Less than 360 W Ready mode Dell 1130: Less than 45 W Dell 1130n: Less than 60 W Power save mode Dell 1130: Less than 4.5 WDell 1130n: Less than 6.5 W Power off mode Less than 0.8 W [a] See the rating label on the machine for the correct voltage, frequency (hertz) and type of current for your machine. Print media specifications Type Size Dimensions Print media weight [a] /Capacity [b] Tray1 Manual tray Plain paper Letter 216 x 279 mm (8.50 x 11.00 inches) 60 to 120 g/m2 (16 to 32 lb bond) 250 sheets of 80 g/m2 (20 lb bond) 60 to 220 g/m2 (16 to 43 lb bond) 1 sheet stacking Legal 216 x 356 mm (8.50 x 14.00 inches) US Folio 216 x 330 mm (8.50 x 13.00 inches) A4 210 x 297 mm (8.27 x 11.69 inches) Oficio 216 x 343 mm (8.50 x 13.50 inches) JIS B5 182 x 257 mm (7.17 x 10.12 inches) 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb bond) 150 sheets of 80 g/m2 (20 lb bond) ISO B5 176 x 250 mm (6.93 x 9.84 inches) Executive 184 x 267 mm (7.25 x 0 inches) A5 148 x 210 mm (5.83 x 8.27 inches) A6 105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.83 inches) Envelope Envelope Monarch 98 x 191 mm (3.87 x 7.50 inches) Not available in tray1. 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb bond) 1 sheet stacking Envelope No. 10 105 x 241 mm (4.12 x 9.50 inches) Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 inches) Envelope C5 162 x 229 mm (6.38 x 9.02 inches) Envelope C6 114 x 162 mm (4.49 x 6.38 inches) Thick paper Refer to the Plain paper section Refer to the Plain paper section 90 g/m2 (24 lb bond) 90 g/m2 (24 lb bond) 1 sheet stacking Thin paper Refer to the Plain paper section Refer to the Plain paper section 60 to 70 g/m2 (16 60 to 70 g/m2 (16to 19 lb bond) to 19 lb bond) 1 sheet stacking Transparency Refer to the Plain paper section Refer to the Plain paper section Not available in tray1. 138 to 146 g/m2 (36.81 to 38.91 lb bond) 1 sheet stacking Labels [c] Letter, Legal, US Folio, A4, JIS B5, ISO B5, Executive, A5, Statement Refer to the Plain paper section Not available in tray1. 120 to 150 g/m2 (32 to 40 lb bond) 1 sheet stacking Card stock Letter, Legal, US Folio, A4, JIS B5, ISO B5, Executive, A5, Statement, PostCard 4x6 Refer to the Plain paper section Not available in tray1. 105 to 163 g/m2 ( 28 to 43 lb bond) 1 sheet stacking Minimum size (custom) 76 x 127 mm (3.00 x 5.00 inches) 60 to 163 g/m2 (16 to 43 lb bond) Maximum size (custom) 216 x 356 mm (8.50 x 14.02 inches) [a] If media weight is over 120 g/m2 (32 lb), load a paper into the tray one by one. [b] Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight, thickness and environmental conditions. [c] Smoothness: 100 to 250 (sheffield).Appendix Dell technical support policy Technician-assisted technical support requires the cooperation and participation of the customer in the troubleshooting process and provides for restoration of the Operating System, application software, and hardware drivers to the original default configuration as shipped from Dell, as well as the verification of appropriate functionality of the printer and all Dell-installed hardware. In addition to this technician assisted technical support, online technical support is available at Dell Support website at support.dell.com. Additional technical support options may be available for purchase. Dell provides limited technical support for the printer and any Dell-installed software and peripherals. Support for thirdparty software and peripherals is provided by the original manufacturer, including those purchased and/or installed through Software & Peripherals (DellWare), ReadyWare, and Custom Factory Integration (CFI/DellPlus). Contacting Dell For customers in the United States, call 800-WWW-DELL (800-999-3355). If you do not have an active Internet connection, you can find contact information on your purchase invoice, packing slip, bill, or Dell product catalog. Dell provides several online and telephone-based support and service options. Availability varies by country and product, and some services may not be available in your area. To contact Dell for sales, technical support, or customer service issues: 1. Visit support.dell.com, and verify your country or region in the Choose A Country/Region drop-down menu at the bottom of the page. 2. Click Contact Us on the left side of the page, and select the appropriate service or support link based on your need. Warranty and return policy Dell Inc. (“Dell”) manufactures its hardware products from parts and components that are new or equivalent to new in accordance with industry-standard practices. For information about the Dell warranty for your printer, refer to the Product Information Guide.Glossary The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by understanding the terminologies commonly used with printing as well as mentioned in this user’s guide. 802.11 802.11 is a set of standards for wireless local area network (WLAN) communication, developed by the IEEE LAN/MAN Standards Committee (IEEE 802). 802.11b/g 802.11b/g can share same hardware and use the 2.4 GHz band. 802.11b supports bandwidth up to 11 Mbps; 802.11g up to 54 Mbps. 802.11b/g devices may occasionally suffer interference from microwave ovens, cordless telephones, and Bluetooth devices. Access point Access Point or Wireless Access Point (AP or WAP) is a device that connects wireless communication devices together on wireless local area networks (WLAN), and acts as a central transmitter and receiver of WLAN radio signals. ADF An Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) is a mechanism that will automatically feed an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan some amount of the paper at once. AppleTalk AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple, Inc for computer networking. It was included in the original Macintosh (1984) and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking. BIT Depth A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to represent the color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image. Higher color depth gives a broader range of distinct colors. As the number of bits increases, the number of possible colors becomes impractically large for a color map. 1-bit color is commonly called as monochrome or black and white. BMP A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows graphics subsystem (GDI), and used commonly as a simple graphics file format on that platform. BOOTP Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to obtain its IP address automatically. This is usually done in the bootstrap process of computers or operating systems running on them. The BOOTP servers assign the IP address from a pool of addresses to each client. BOOTP enables 'diskless workstation' computers to obtain an IP address prior to loading any advanced operating system. CCD Charge Coupled Device (CCD) is a hardware which enables the scan job. CCD Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD module to prevent any damage when you move the machine. Collation Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When collation is selected, the device prints an entire set before printing additional copies. Control Panel A control panel is a flat, typically vertical, area where control or monitoring instruments are displayed. They are typically found in front of the machine.Coverage It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing. For example, 5% coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5% image or text on it. So, if the paper or original has complicated images or lots of text on it, the coverage will be higher and at the same time, a toner usage will be as much as the coverage. CSV Comma Separated Values (CSV). A type of file format, CSV is used to exchange data between disparate applications. The file format, as it is used in Microsoft Excel, has become a pseudo standard throughout the industry, even among non-Microsoft platforms. DADF A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) is a mechanism that will automatically feed and flip over an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan on both sides of the paper. Default The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box state, reset, or initialized. DHCP A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server networking protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally, information required by the client host to participate on an IP network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to client hosts. DIMM Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM), a small circuit board that holds memory. DIMM stores all the data within the machine like printing data, received fax data. DNS The Domain Name Server (DNS) is a system that stores information associated with domain names in a distributed database on networks, such as the Internet. Dot Matrix Printer A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head that runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact, striking an ink-soaked cloth ribbon against the paper, much like a typewriter. DPI Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for scanning and printing. Generally, higher DPI results in a higher resolution, more visible detail in the image, and a larger file size. DRPD Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection. Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers. Duplex A mechanism that will automatically flip over a sheet of paper so that the machine can print (or scan) on both sides of the paper. A printer equipped with a Duplex can print double-sided of paper. Duty Cycle Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer performance for a month. Generally the printer has the lifespan limitation such as pages per year. The lifespan means the average capacity of print-outs, usually within the warranty period. For example, if the duty cycle is 48,000 pages per month assuming 20 working days, a printer limits 2,400 pages a day. ECM Error Correction Mode (ECM) is an optional transmission mode built into Class 1 fax machines or fax modems. It automatically detects and corrects errors in the fax transmission process that are sometimes caused by telephoneline noise. Emulation Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as another. An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different system, so that the second system behaves like the first system. Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior, which is in contrast to simulation, which concerns an abstract model of the system being simulated, often considering its internal state. Ethernet Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local area networks (LANs). It defines wiring and signaling for the physical layer, and frame formats and protocols for the media access control (MAC)/data link layer of the OSI model. Ethernet is mostly standardized as IEEE 802.3. It has become the most widespread LAN technology in use during the 1990s to the present. EtherTalk A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer networking. It was included in the original Macintosh (1984) and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking. FDI Foreign Device Interface (FDI) is a card installed inside the machine to allow a third party device such as a coin operated device or a card reader. Those devices allow the pay-for-print service on your machine. FTP A File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a commonly used protocol for exchanging files over any network that supports the TCP/IP protocol (such as the Internet or an intranet). Fuser Unit The part of a laser printer that melts the toner onto the print media. It consists of a hot roller and a back-up roller. After toner is transferred onto the paper, the fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure that the toner stays on the paper permanently, which is why paper is warm when it comes out of a laser printer. Gateway A connection between computer networks, or between a computer network and a telephone line. It is very popular, as it is a computer or a network that allows access to another computer or network. Grayscale A shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image when color images are converted to grayscale; colors are represented by various shades of gray. Halftone An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots. Highly colored areas consist of a large number of dots, while lighter areas consist of a smaller number of dots. HDD Hard Disk Drive (HDD), commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard disk, is a non-volatile storage device which stores digitally-encoded data on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces. IEEE The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an international non-profit, professional organization for the advancement of technology related to electricity. IEEE 1284 The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). The term "1284-B" refers to a specific connector type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches to the peripheral (for example, a printer). IntranetA private network that uses Internet Protocols, network connectivity, and possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share part of an organization's information or operations with its employees. Sometimes the term refers only to the most visible service, the internal website. IP address An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that devices use in order to identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing the Internet Protocol standard. IPM The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a way of measuring the speed of a printer. An IPM rate indicates the number of single-sided sheets a printer can complete within one minute. IPP The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for printing as well as managing print jobs, media size, resolution, and so forth. IPP can be used locally or over the Internet to hundreds of printers, and also supports access control, authentication, and encryption, making it a much more capable and secure printing solution than older ones. IPX/SPX IPX/SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet Exchange. It is a networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare operating systems. IPX and SPX both provide connection services similar to TCP/IP, with the IPX protocol having similarities to IP, and SPX having similarities to TCP. IPX/SPX was primarily designed for local area networks (LANs), and is a very efficient protocol for this purpose (typically its performance exceeds that of TCP/IP on a LAN). ISO The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an international standard-setting body composed of representatives from national standards bodies. It produces world-wide industrial and commercial standards. ITU-T The International Telecommunication Union is an international organization established to standardize and regulate international radio and telecommunications. Its main tasks include standardization, allocation of the radio spectrum, and organizing interconnection arrangements between different countries to allow international phone calls. A -T out of ITU-T indicates telecommunication. ITU-T No. 1 chart Standardized test chart published by ITU-T for document facsimile transmissions. JBIG Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression standard with no loss of accuracy or quality, which was designed for compression of binary images, particularly for faxes, but can also be used on other images. JPEG Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a most commonly used standard method of lossy compression for photographic images. It is the format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide Web. LDAP The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking protocol for querying and modifying directory services running over TCP/IP. LED A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that indicates the status of a machine. MAC address Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier associated with a network adapter. MAC address is a unique 48-bit identifier usually written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs (e. g., 00-00-0c-34-11- 4e). This address is usually hard-coded into a Network Interface Card (NIC) by its manufacturer, and used as anaid for routers trying to locate machines on large networks. MFP Multi Function Peripheral (MFP) is an office machine that includes the following functionality in one physical body, so as to have a printer, a copier, a fax, a scanner and etc. MH Modified Huffman (MH) is a compression method for decreasing the amount of data that needs to be transmitted between the fax machines to transfer the image recommended by ITU-T T.4. MH is a codebook-based run-length encoding scheme optimized to efficiently compress white space. As most faxes consist mostly of white space, this minimizes the transmission time of most faxes. MMR Modified Modified READ (MMR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-T T.6. Modem A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information, and also demodulates such a carrier signal to decode transmitted information. MR Modified Read (MR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-T T.4. MR encodes the first scanned line using MH. The next line is compared to the first, the differences determined, and then the differences are encoded and transmitted. NetWare A network operating system developed by Novell, Inc. It initially used cooperative multitasking to run various services on a PC, and the network protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack. Today NetWare supports TCP/IP as well as IPX/SPX. OPC Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a virtual image for print using a laser beam emitted from a laser printer, and it is usually green or gray colored and a cylinder shaped. An exposing unit of a drum is slowly worn away by its usage of the printer, and it should be replaced appropriately since it gets scratches from grits of a paper. Originals The first example of something, such as a document, photograph or text, etc, which is copied, reproduced or translated to produce others, but which is not itself copied or derived from something else. OSI Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) is a model developed by the International Organization for Standardization (ISO) for communications. OSI offers a standard, modular approach to network design that divides the required set of complex functions into manageable, self-contained, functional layers. The layers are, from top to bottom, Application, Presentation, Session, Transport, Network, Data Link and Physical. PABX A private automatic branch exchange (PABX) is an automatic telephone switching system within a private enterprise. PCL Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language (PDL) developed by HP as a printer protocol and has become an industry standard. Originally developed for early inkjet printers, PCL has been released in varying levels for thermal, matrix printer, and page printers. PDF Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format developed by Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional documents in a device independent and resolution independent format.PostScript PostScript (PS) is a page description language and programming language used primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing areas. - that is run in an interpreter to generate an image. Printer Driver A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer to the printer. Print Media The media like paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies which can be used on a printer, a scanner, a fax or, a copier. PPM Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for determining how fast a printer works, meaning the number of pages a printer can produce in one minute. PRN file An interface for a device driver, this allows software to interact with the device driver using standard input/output system calls, which simplifies many tasks. Protocol A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection, communication, and data transfer between two computing endpoints. PS See PostScript. PSTN The Public-Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) is the network of the world's public circuit-switched telephone networks which, on industrial premises, is usually routed through the switchboard. RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) is a protocol for remote user authentication and accounting. RADIUS enables centralized management of authentication data such as usernames and passwords using an AAA (authentication, authorization, and accounting) concept to manage network access. Resolution The sharpness of an image, measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The higher the dpi, the greater the resolution. SMB Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to share files, printers, serial ports, and miscellaneous communications between nodes on a network. It also provides an authenticated Inter-process communication mechanism. SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for e-mail transmissions across the Internet. SMTP is a relatively simple, text-based protocol, where one or more recipients of a message are specified, and then the message text is transferred. It is a client-server protocol, where the client transmits an email message to the server. SSID Service Set Identifier (SSID) is a name of a wireless local area network (WLAN). All wireless devices in a WLAN use the same SSID in order to communicate with each other. The SSIDs are case-sensitive and have a maximum length of 32 characters. Subnet Mask The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to determine which part of the address is thenetwork address and which part is the host address. TCP/IP The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol (IP); the set of communications protocols that implement the protocol stack on which the Internet and most commercial networks run. TCR Transmission Confirmation Report (TCR) provides details of each transmission such as job status, transmission result and number of pages sent. This report can be set to print after each job or only after failed transmissions. TIFF Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bitmapped image format. TIFF describes image data that typically come from scanners. TIFF images make use of tags, keywords defining the characteristics of the image that is included in the file. This flexible and platform-independent format can be used for pictures that have been made by various image processing applications. Toner Cartridge A kind of bottle within a machine like printer which contains toner. Toner is a powder used in laser printers and photocopiers, which forms the text and images on the printed paper. Toner can be melted by the heat of the fuser, causing it to bind to the fibers in the paper. TWAIN An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a TWAIN-compliant scanner with a TWAIN-compliant program, a scan can be initiated from within the program.; an image capture API for Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems. UNC Path Uniform Naming Convention (UNC) is a standard way to access network shares in Window NT and other Microsoft products. The format of a UNC path is: \\\\ URL Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents and resources on the Internet. The first part of the address indicates what protocol to use, the second part specifies the IP address or the domain name where the resource is located. USB Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the USB Implementers Forum, Inc., to connect computers and peripherals. Unlike the parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently connect a single computer USB port to multiple peripherals. Watermark A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears lighter when viewed by transmitted light. Watermarks were first introduced in Bologna, Italy in 1282; they have been used by papermakers to identify their product, and also on postage stamps, currency, and other government documents to discourage counterfeiting. WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) is a security protocol specified in IEEE 802.11 to provide the same level of security as that of a wired LAN. WEP provides security by encrypting data over radio so that it is protected as it is transmitted from one end point to another. WIA Windows Imaging Architecture (WIA) is an imaging architecture that is originally introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP. A scan can be initiated from within these operating systems by using a WIA-compliant scanner. WPA Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a class of systems to secure wireless (Wi-Fi) computer networks, which was created to improve upon the security features of WEP.WPA-PSK WPA-PSK (WPA Pre-Shared Key) is special mode of WPA for small business or home users. A shared key, or password, is configured in the wireless access point (WAP) and any wireless laptop or desktop devices. WPA-PSK generates a unique key for each session between a wireless client and the associated WAP for more advanced security. w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Dell™ Inspiron™ 1150 Manual del propietario Modelo PP08LNotas, Avisos y Precauciones NOTA: Una NOTA proporciona información importante que le ayuda a utilizar su equipo de la mejor manera posible. AVISO: Un AVISO indica la posibilidad de daños en el hardware o pérdida de datos, y le explica cómo evitar el problema. PRECAUCIÓN: Una PRECAUCIÓN indica un posible daño material, lesión corporal o muerte. Abreviaturas y siglas Para obtener una lista completa de las abreviaturas y siglas, consulte el archivo Dell™ Inspiron™ Help (Ayuda de Dell™ Inspiron™). Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9. Si ha adquirido un equipo Dell™ Serie n, todas las referencias que aparecen en este documento relativas a los sistemas operativos de Microsoft® Windows® no son aplicables. ____________________ La información contenida en este documento puede modificarse sin aviso previo. © 2004 Dell Inc. Todos los derechos reservados. Queda estrictamente prohibido realizar cualquier tipo de reproducción sin el consentimiento por escrito de Dell Inc. Marcas comerciales utilizadas en este texto: Dell, el logotipo de DELL, AccessDirect, Inspiron, Dell Precision, Dimension, OptiPlex, Latitude, PowerApp, PowerEdge, PowerConnect, PowerVault, Axim, TrueMobile y DellNet son marcas comerciales de Dell Inc.; Intel, Pentium, y Celeron son marcas comerciales registradas de Intel Corporation; Microsoft y Windows son marcas comerciales registradas de Microsoft Corporation; EMC es una marca comercial registrada de EMC Corporation; Bluetooth es una marca comercial propiedad de Bluetooth SIG, Inc. que Dell Inc. utiliza bajo licencia. Este documento puede incluir otras marcas y nombres comerciales para referirse a las entidades que son propietarias de los mismos o a sus productos. Dell Inc. renuncia a cualquier interés sobre la propiedad de marcas y nombres comerciales que no sean los suyos. Modelo PP08L Noviembre de 2004 N/P F7577 Rev. A01Contenido 3 Contenido Localización de información . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 1 Descripción del equipo Vista anterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Vista lateral izquierda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Vista lateral derecha. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Vista posterior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Vista inferior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 2 Configuración de su equipo Conexión a Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Configuración de la conexión a Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Problemas con el módem y con la conexión a Internet . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Problemas con el correo electrónico . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Instalación de una impresora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Cable de la impresora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Conexión de una impresora USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Problemas con la impresora . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Dispositivos para protección de la alimentación . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Supresores de sobrevoltaje . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Acondicionadores de línea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Cómo apagar el equipo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 3 Uso de la batería Rendimiento de la batería . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Comprobación de la carga de la batería . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Contenido w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Medidor de energía . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Advertencia de bajo nivel de carga de la batería . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Carga de la batería . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Extracción de una batería . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Instalación de una batería . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Almacenamiento de una batería . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Problemas de alimentación eléctrica y de la batería . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Si la batería no se carga. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Si la batería dura poco . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 4 Uso del teclado y de la superficie táctil Botón Dell™ AccessDirect™. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Reprogramación del botón. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Teclado numérico . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Métodos abreviados del teclado . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Funciones del sistema. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Bandeja de CD o de DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Funciones de la pantalla. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Administración de energía. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Funciones de la tecla con el logotipo de Microsoft ® Windows ® . . . . . 35 Superficie táctil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Personalización de la superficie táctil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Problemas con la superficie táctil o el ratón . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Problemas con el teclado externo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Caracteres inesperados . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 5 Uso de CD, DVD y otros dispositivos multimedia Cómo utilizar los CD y DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Problemas con los CD o DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Si no puede reproducir un CD, CD-RW o DVD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Si no puede expulsar la bandeja de la unidad de CD, CD-RW o DVD . . . 39Contenido 5 Si oye un sonido de roce o chirrido inusual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Si la unidad de CD-RW deja de grabar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Problemas con el sonido y los altavoces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Si tiene problemas con los altavoces integrados . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Si tiene problemas con los altavoces externos . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Cómo copiar CD y DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Cómo copiar un CD o DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Cómo utilizar CD-R y CD-RW vacíos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Consejos prácticos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 6 Configuración de una red particular y una red de oficina Conexión de un adaptador de red. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Asistente para configuración de redes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Problemas con la red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Conexión a una red de área local inalámbrica . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Establecimiento del tipo de red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Conexión a una red inalámbrica en Microsoft ® Windows ® XP . . . . . 45 7 Solución de problemas Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Cuándo utilizar los Dell Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Mensajes de error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Problemas con el vídeo y la pantalla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Si la pantalla aparece en blanco . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Si resulta difícil leer la pantalla . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Si sólo se puede leer parte de la pantalla. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Problemas con el escáner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Problemas con las unidades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Si no puede guardar un archivo en una unidad de disco flexible . . . . . 55 Si tiene problemas con una unidad de disco duro . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Problemas con la tarjeta PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Problemas generales del programa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566 Contenido w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Un programa se bloquea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Un programa no responde . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Aparecen mensajes de error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Solución de otros problemas técnicos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Si el equipo se moja . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Si el equipo se cae o se daña . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Controladores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 ¿Qué es un controlador?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Identificación de controladores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Volver a instalar los controladores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Reinstalación manual de controladores para Windows XP . . . . . . . 60 Cómo resolver incompatibilidades de software y hardware . . . . . . . . . 61 Restauración de su sistema operativo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Cómo utilizar la función Restaurar sistema de MicrosoftWindows XP . . 61 Cómo utilizar la función Restaurar PC de Dell por Symantec . . . . . . . 62 8 Adición y sustitución de piezas Antes de empezar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Herramientas recomendadas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Apagar el equipo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Unidad de disco duro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Devolución de una unidad de disco duro a Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Memoria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Módem y minitarjeta PCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Cómo cambiar el módem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Cómo agregar una minitarjeta PCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Unidad de CD o DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Teclado . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 9 Apéndice Especificaciones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Contenido 7 Utilización del programa Configuración del sistema. . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Visión general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Visualización de las pantallas de configuración del sistema . . . . . . . 87 Pantallas de configuración del sistema. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Opciones más utilizadas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Optimización del rendimiento de la batería y el sistema . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Información general sobre el rendimiento del sistema . . . . . . . . . 88 Optimización del consumo de energía y del tiempo de carga de la batería . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Velocidad variable del ventilador. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Política de soporte técnico de Dell (sólo EE.UU.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Definición de software y dispositivos periféricos “instalados por Dell” . . 90 Definición de software y dispositivos periféricos “de terceros” . . . . . 90 Cómo ponerse en contacto con Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Índice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1098 Contenido w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o mLocalización de información 9 Localización de información NOTA: Es posible que algunas funciones no estén disponibles para su equipo o en determinados países. NOTA: Su equipo puede incluir información adicional. ¿Qué busca? Aquí lo encontrará • Información sobre la garantía • Términos y condiciones (sólo en EE.UU.) • Instrucciones de seguridad • Información reglamentaria • Información ergonómica • End User License Agreement (Contrato de licencia de usuario final) Guía de información del producto Dell™ • Cómo instalar mi equipo Diagrama de instalación10 Localización de información w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m • Consejos sobre la utilización de Microsoft® Windows® • Cómo reproducir CD y DVD • Cómo utilizar el modo de espera y el modo de hibernación • Cómo cambiar la resolución de la pantalla • Cómo limpiar el equipo Archivo de ayuda 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y en Ayuda y soporte técnico. 2 Haga clic en Guías del usuario y del sistema y en Guías del usuario. 3 Haga clic en Dell Inspiron Help (Ayuda de Dell Inspiron). • Etiqueta de servicio y código de servicio rápido • Etiqueta de licencia de Microsoft Windows Etiqueta de servicio y licencia de Microsoft Windows Estas etiquetas están situadas en el panel inferior de su equipo. • Utilice la etiqueta de servicio para identificar el equipo cuando utilice support.dell.com o póngase en contacto con el servicio de asistencia técnica. • Escriba el código de servicio urgente para dirigir su llamada cuando se ponga en contacto con el servicio de asistencia técnica. ¿Qué busca? Aquí lo encontraráLocalización de información 11 • Soluciones — Consejos y sugerencias para la solución de problemas, artículos de técnicos, cursos en línea y preguntas más frecuentes • Comunidad — debates en línea con otros clientes de Dell • Actualizaciones — Información de actualización para componentes como, por ejemplo, la memoria, la unidad de disco duro y el sistema operativo • Atención al cliente — Información de contacto, llamada de servicio y estado de los pedidos, garantía e información de reparación • Servicio y asistencia — Historial de asistencia y estado de las llamadas de servicio, contrato de servicio, debates en línea con el personal de asistencia técnica • Referencia — Documentación del equipo, detalles en la configuración de mi equipo, especificaciones del producto y documentación técnica • Descargas — Controladores certificados, revisiones y actualizaciones de software • —Si vuelve a instalar el sistema operativo del equipo, también debe volver a instalar la utilidad NSS. NSS proporciona actualizaciones importantes del sistema operativo y asistencia para las unidades de disquete de 3,5 pulgadas de Dell™, procesadores Intel® Pentium® M, unidades ópticas y dispositivos USB. La utilidad NSS es necesaria para el correcto funcionamiento de su equipo Dell. El software detecta automáticamente su equipo y sistema operativo e instala las actualizaciones apropiadas a su configuración. Sitio web Dell Support — support.dell.com NOTA: Seleccione su región para ver el sitio web de asistencia adecuado. NOTA: Los clientes de empresas, instituciones gubernamentales y educativas también pueden utilizar el sitio web personalizado Dell Premier Support de premier.support.dell.com. Es posible que este sitio web no esté disponible en todas las regiones. • Cómo utilizar Windows XP • Documentación de mi equipo • Documentación para los dispositivos (como, por ejemplo, un módem) Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico de Windows 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y en Ayuda y soporte técnico. 2 Escriba una palabra o frase que describa el problema y, a continuación, haga clic en el icono de flecha. 3 Haga clic en el tema que describa el problema. 4 Siga las instrucciones que aparecen en pantalla. ¿Qué busca? Aquí lo encontrará12 Localización de información w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o mDescripción del equipo 13 Descripción del equipo Vista anterior SE G U R O D E L A P A N T A L L A — Mantiene la pantalla cerrada. PA N T A L L A — Para obtener más información sobre la pantalla, consulte la sección relativa al uso de la pantalla en el archivo de ayuda de Dell Inspiron. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9. Seguro de la pantalla Pantalla Altavoces (2) Indicadores de estado del teclado Teclado Indicadores de estado del dispositivo Superficie táctil Botones de la superficie táctil Botón de alimentación Botón Dell AccessDirect14 Descripción del equipo w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m INDICADORES DE ESTADO DEL TECLADO Los indicadores luminosos verdes situados sobre el teclado indican lo siguiente: TE C L A D O — El teclado incluye tanto un teclado numérico como la tecla con el logotipo de Microsoft® Windows® . Para obtener información sobre los métodos abreviados de teclado, consulte la página 34. AL T A V O C E S — Para ajustar el volumen de los altavoces integrados, pulse los métodos abreviados de teclado de control del volumen. Para obtener más información, consulte la página 34. Se ilumina cuando el teclado numérico está activado. Se enciende cuando Bloq Mayús está activado. Se ilumina cuando el bloqueo de desplazamiento está activado. 9 ADescripción del equipo 15 INDICADORES DE ESTADO DEL DISPOSITIVO Si el equipo está conectado a una toma de alimentación eléctrica, el indicador funciona de la siguiente manera: – Luz verde continua: la batería se está cargando. Si el equipo utiliza alimentación de la batería, el indicador funciona de la siguiente manera: – Apagado: la batería está cargada de forma correcta (o el equipo está apagado). – Luz naranja parpadeante: la carga de la batería está baja. – Luz naranja continua: la carga de la batería está demasiado baja. BO T O N E S D E L A S U P E R F I C I E T Á C T I L — Los botones de la superficie táctil ofrecen las mismas funciones que un mouse. Consulte la página 36 para obtener más información. SU P E R F I C I E T Á C T I L — La superficie táctil y sus botones ofrecen las mismas funciones que un ratón. Consulte la página 36 para obtener más información. Se enciende al encender el equipo. Parpadea o se apaga en modo de administración de energía. Se ilumina cuando el equipo lee o escribe datos. AVISO: Para evitar que se produzcan pérdidas de datos, no apague nunca el equipo si el indicador parpadea. Parpadea para indicar el estado de carga de la batería.16 Descripción del equipo w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m BO T Ó N D E A L I M E N T A C I Ó N — Pulse el botón de alimentación para encender el equipo o para activar o desactivar un modo de administración de energía. Para obtener más información, consulte la sección relativa a la administración de energía en el archivo de ayuda de Dell Inspiron. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9. AVISO: Para evitar la pérdida de datos, guarde y cierre todos los archivos abiertos y salga de todos los programas abiertos antes de cerrar el equipo (consulte la página 28). Si el equipo deja de responder, mantenga pulsado el botón de alimentación hasta que el equipo se apague totalmente (esto puede tardar unos segundos). BO T Ó N DE L L™ AC C E S SDI R E C T™ — Pulse este botón para iniciar un programa que se utiliza con frecuencia, como herramientas educativas y de soporte. Si lo desea, puede reprogramar el botón para que inicie el programa que prefiera. Para obtener más información, consulte la página 33). Vista lateral izquierda RA N U R A P A R A T A R J E T A PC — Admite una PC Card, como un módem o un adaptador de red. Para obtener más información, consulte la sección relativa al uso de tarjetas PC en el archivo de ayuda de Dell Inspiron. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9. Ranura para la PC Card Conectores de audio (2) Unidad CD o DVDDescripción del equipo 17 CONECTORES DE AUDIO UN I D A D D E CD O DVD — Admite una unidad de CD, una unidad de DVD, una unidad de CD-RW o una unidad combinada CD-RW/DVD. Vista lateral derecha BA T E R Í A/C O M P A R T I M E N T O D E L A B A T E R Í A — Si tiene instalada una batería, puede utilizar el equipo sin conectarlo a una toma de corriente. Consulte la página 29. Conecte los auriculares o los altavoces al conector Conecte un micrófono al conector Batería/ compartimento de la batería Conector para módem Rejillas de ventilación Ranura para cable de seguridad18 Descripción del equipo w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m CONECTOR DEL MÓDEM RE J I L L A S D E V E N T I L A C I Ó N — El equipo utiliza un ventilador interno para permitir que el aire circule a través de las rejillas y evitar así un sobrecalentamiento. NOTA: El ventilador puede funcionar continuamente y su velocidad puede variar según cómo se use. El ruido de los ventiladores es normal y no indica ningún problema del equipo o de los ventiladores. PRECAUCIÓN: No introduzca objetos ni permita que el polvo se acumule en las rejillas de ventilación ni las bloquee. No almacene el equipo en un entorno con poca ventilación, como un maletín cerrado, mientras esté en funcionamiento. La circulación restringida de aire podría dañar el equipo o provocar un incendio. RA N U R A P A R A C A B L E D E S E G U R I D A D — Sirve para conectar al equipo un dispositivo antirrobo disponible en el mercado. Para obtener más información, consulte las instrucciones incluidas con el dispositivo. AVISO: Antes de comprar un dispositivo antirrobo, asegúrese de que encajará en la ranura del cable de seguridad del equipo. Conecte la línea telefónica al conector de módem. Para obtener más información sobre el uso del módem, consulte la documentación en línea del mismo incluida con el equipo.Descripción del equipo 19 Vista posterior RE J I L L A S D E V E N T I L A C I Ó N — El equipo utiliza un ventilador interno para permitir que el aire circule a través de las rejillas y evitar así un sobrecalentamiento. NOTA: El ventilador puede funcionar continuamente y su velocidad puede variar según cómo se use. El ruido de los ventiladores es normal y no indica ningún problema del equipo o de los ventiladores. PRECAUCIÓN: No introduzca objetos ni permita que el polvo se acumule en las rejillas de ventilación ni las bloquee. No almacene el equipo en un entorno con poca ventilación, como un maletín cerrado, mientras esté en funcionamiento. La circulación restringida de aire podría dañar el equipo o provocar un incendio. CO N E C T O R P A R A E L A D A P T A D O R D E CA — Conecte un adaptador de CA al equipo. NOTA: Utilice sólo el adaptador de CA proporcionado con el equipo. El adaptador de CA convierte la corriente alterna en la corriente continua que necesita el equipo. Puede conectar el adaptador de CA al equipo independientemente de que esté encendido o apagado. Conectores USB (2) Conector de red Conector de vídeo Conector del adaptador de CA Rejillas de ventilación Conector del adaptador de CA Adaptador de CA20 Descripción del equipo w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m PRECAUCIÓN: El adaptador de CA funciona con tomas de alimentación eléctrica de todo el mundo. No obstante, los conectores de alimentación y los enchufes múltiples varían de un país a otro. El uso de un cable incompatible o la conexión incorrecta del cable al enchufe múltiple o a la toma eléctrica puede dañar el equipo o provocar un incendio. PRECAUCIÓN: Cuando utilice el adaptador de CA para suministrar alimentación al equipo o para cargar la batería, sitúelo en un área ventilada, como un escritorio o en el suelo. No cubra el adaptador de CA con papeles u otros objetos que reduzcan la ventilación; no utilice el adaptador de CA dentro de un maletín. AVISO: Cuando desconecte el cable del adaptador de CA del equipo, sujete el conector (no el cable) y tire de él firmemente pero con cuidado, procurando no dañar el cable. CONECTORES USB CONECTOR DE VÍDEO CONECTOR DE RED AVISO: El conector de red es ligeramente más grande que el conector de módem. Para evitar dañar el equipo, no conecte una línea telefónica al conector de red. Conecta dispositivos USB, como un ratón, un teclado o una impresora. Conecta un monitor externo. Para obtener más información, consulte la sección relativa al uso de la pantalla en el archivo de ayuda de Dell Inspiron. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9. Conecta el equipo a una red. Los indicadores luminosos del conector indican la actividad de las comunicaciones de red con cable e inalámbricas. Para obtener información sobre el uso del adaptador de red, consulte la documentación en línea del mismo incluida con el equipo.Descripción del equipo 21 Vista inferior CU B I E R T A D E L A M I N I T A R J E T A PCI/M Ó D E M — Cubre el compartimento que contiene el módem y la minitarjeta PCI. Consulte la página 71. BA T E R Í A/C O M P A R T I M E N T O D E L A B A T E R Í A — Si tiene instalada una batería, puede utilizar el equipo sin conectarlo a una toma de corriente. Consulte la página 29. RE J I L L A S D E V E N T I L A C I Ó N — El equipo utiliza un ventilador interno para permitir que el aire circule a través de las rejillas y evitar así un sobrecalentamiento. NOTA: El ventilador puede funcionar continuamente y su velocidad puede variar según cómo se use. El ruido de los ventiladores es normal y no indica ningún problema del equipo o de los ventiladores. PRECAUCIÓN: No introduzca objetos ni permita que el polvo se acumule en las rejillas de ventilación ni las bloquee. No almacene el equipo en un entorno con poca ventilación, como un maletín cerrado, mientras esté en funcionamiento. La circulación restringida de aire podría dañar el equipo o provocar un incendio. SE G U R O D E L I B E R A C I Ó N D E L A B A T E R Í A — Libera la batería. Consulte la página 31 para obtener instrucciones. CU B I E R T A D E L M Ó D U L O D E M E M O R I A — Cubre el compartimiento que contiene los módulos de memoria y el pasador de liberación de la unidad de CD o DVD. Consulte la página 68. UN I D A D D E D I S C O D U R O — Almacena software y datos. Cubierta del módulo de memoria Seguro de liberación de la batería Cubierta del módem/minitarjeta PCI Batería/ compartimento de la batería Unidad de disco duro Rejilla de ventilación22 Descripción del equipo w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o mConfiguración de su equipo 23 Configuración de su equipo Conexión a Internet NOTA: Los ISP y sus ofertas varían según el país. Para conectarse a Internet, se necesita un módem o una conexión de red y un proveedor de servicios de Internet (ISP), como por ejemplo, AOL o MSN. El ISP ofrecerá una o varias de las siguientes opciones de conexión a Internet: • Conexiones telefónicas que proporcionan acceso a Internet a través de una línea telefónica. Las conexiones telefónicas son considerablemente más lentas que las conexiones ADSL y de módem por cable. • Conexiones ADSL que proporcionan acceso a Internet de alta velocidad a través de la línea telefónica existente. Con una conexión ADSL, se puede acceder a Internet y utilizar el teléfono en una sola línea simultáneamente. • Conexiones de módem por cable que proporcionan acceso a Internet de alta velocidad a través de la línea de TV por cable local. Si utiliza una conexión telefónica, enchufe una línea telefónica al conector de módem del equipo y a la toma de teléfono de la pared antes de configurar la conexión a Internet. Si utiliza una conexión ADSL o de módem por cable, póngase en contacto con su ISP para obtener instrucciones de configuración. Configuración de la conexión a Internet Para configurar una conexión para AOL o MSN: 1 Guarde y cierre los archivos que tenga abiertos y salga de todos los programas. 2 Haga doble clic en el icono MSN Explorer o AOL del escritorio de Microsoft® Windows® . 3 Siga las instrucciones de la pantalla para realizar la configuración. Si el escritorio no contiene ningún icono MSN Explorer o AOL, o si desea configurar una conexión a Internet con un ISP diferente: 1 Guarde y cierre los archivos que tenga abiertos y salga de todos los programas. 2 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y en Internet Explorer. Aparece la ventana Asistente para conexión nueva 3 Haga clic en Conectarse a Internet.24 Configuración de su equipo w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m 4 En la siguiente ventana, haga clic en la opción correspondiente: • Si no dispone de un ISP y desea seleccionar uno, haga clic en Elegir de una lista de proveedores de servicios Internet [ISP]. • Si el ISP ya le ha proporcionado la información de configuración, pero no ha recibido el CD de instalación, haga clic en Establecer mi conexión manualmente. • Si dispone de un CD, haga clic en Usar el CD que tengo de un proveedor de servicios Internet [ISP]. 5 Haga clic en Siguiente. Si ha seleccionado Establecer mi conexión manualmente, siga con el step 6. De lo contrario, siga las instrucciones de la pantalla para realizar la configuración. NOTA: Si no sabe qué tipo de conexión seleccionar, póngase en contacto con su ISP. 6 Haga clic en la opción adecuada dentro de ¿Cómo desea conectar a Internet? y, a continuación, haga clic en Siguiente. 7 Utilice la información de configuración proporcionada por el ISP para realizar la configuración. Si conectarse a la internet le está dando problemas, consulte el apartado “Problemas con el módem y con la conexión a Internet”. Si no puede conectarse a internet pero lo ha podido hacer anteriormente, puede ser que el ISP esté sufriendo una interrupción de servicio. Póngase en contacto con su ISP para comprobar el estado de servicio o intente conectarse más tarde. Problemas con el módem y con la conexión a Internet AVISO: Conecte el módem únicamente a una toma de teléfono de pared analógica. Si conecta el módem a una red de telefonía digital, se dañará. AVISO: Los conectores de módem y de red tienen un aspecto similar. No conecte una línea telefónica al conector de red. NOTA: Si se puede conectar con el proveedor de servicios de Internet (ISP), esto quiere decir que el módem funciona correctamente. Si está seguro de que el módem funciona correctamente y, aun así, tiene problemas, póngase en contacto con su ISP. CO M P R U E B E L A T O M A D E T E L É F O N O D E L A P A R E D — Desconecte la línea telefónica del módem y conéctela a un teléfono. Espere el tono de marcado. Asegúrese de que tiene un servicio telefónico por tonos. Intente conectar el módem a otra clavija de teléfono. Las velocidades de conexión lentas pueden deberse a ruido telefónico, así como a las condiciones de la línea telefónica o de la red. Póngase en contacto con su compañía telefónica o su administrador de red para obtener más información.Configuración de su equipo 25 CO N E C T E E L M Ó D E M D I R E C T A M E N T E A L A T O M A D E T E L É F O N O D E L A P A R E D — Si dispone de otros dispositivos telefónicos que comparten la línea, por ejemplo, un contestador automático, una máquina de fax, un supresor de sobrevoltaje o un divisor de línea, omítalos y utilice la línea telefónica para conectar el módem directamente a la toma de teléfono de la pared. CO M P R U E B E L A C O N E X I Ó N — Verifique que la línea telefónica está conectada al módem. CO M P R U E B E L A L Í N E A T E L E F Ó N I C A — Pruebe a utilizar otra línea telefónica. Si utiliza una línea con una longitud de 3 metros (10 pies) o más, pruebe con una más corta. TO N O D E M A R C A D O I R R E G U L A R — Si tiene servicio de buzón de voz, es posible que oiga un tono de marcado irregular cuando tenga mensajes. Póngase en contacto con la compañía telefónica para obtener instrucciones sobre la restauración del tono de marcado. DE S A C T I V E L A L L A M A D A E N E S P E R A (T E L É F O N O D E R E T E N C I Ó N D E L L A M A D A) — Consulte en la documentación de la compañía telefónica las instrucciones sobre cómo desactivar esta función. A continuación, ajuste las propiedades de la conexión de acceso telefónico a redes. 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y en Panel de control. 2 Haga clic en Impresoras y otro hardware, en Opciones de teléfono y módem, seleccione la ficha Reglas de marcado y, a continuación, haga clic en Editar.... 3 En la ventana Editar ubicación, asegúrese de que la opción Deshabilitar llamada en espera al marcar: está activada y, a continuación, seleccione el código adecuado según aparece en la guía telefónica. 4 Haga clic en Aplicar y en Aceptar. 5 Cierre la ventana Opciones de teléfono y módem. 6 Cierre la ventana Panel de control. CO M P R U E B E Q U E E L M Ó D E M S E C O M U N I C A C O N WI N D O W S — 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y en Panel de control. 2 Haga clic en Impresoras y otro hardware y, a continuación, en Opciones de teléfono y módem. 3 Haga clic en la pestaña Módems. 4 Haga clic en el puerto COM para el módem. 5 Haga clic en Propiedades, en la pestaña Diagnósticos y en Consultar módem para comprobar que el módem se comunica con Windows. Si todos los comandos reciben respuestas, significa que el módem funciona correctamente. Problemas con el correo electrónico CO M P R U E B E Q U E E S T Á C O N E C T A D O A IN T E R N E T — Con el programa de correo electrónico Outlook Express abierto, haga clic en Archivo. Si la opción Trabajar sin conexión está activada, desactívela y conéctese a Internet. Instalación de una impresora AVISO: Complete la configuración del sistema operativo antes de conectar una impresora al equipo. Consulte la información de configuración en la documentación proporcionada con la impresora, en la que se describe cómo realizar las siguientes operaciones: • Obtener e instalar controladores actualizados • Conectar la impresora al equipo26 Configuración de su equipo w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m • Cargar el papel e instalar el cartucho de tóner o de tinta • Ponerse en contacto con el fabricante para obtener asistencia técnica Cable de la impresora Es posible que la impresora se entregue sin ningún cable, por lo que si adquiere uno por separado, asegúrese de que sea compatible con la impresora. Si ha adquirido un cable de la impresora al mismo tiempo que el equipo, es posible que el cable se incluya en la caja del equipo. Conexión de una impresora USB NOTA: Puede conectar dispositivos USB con el equipo encendido. 1 Finalice la configuración del sistema operativo, en el caso de que todavía no lo haya hecho. 2 Instale el controlador de la impresora, si es necesario. Consulte la documentación incluida con la impresora. 3 Conecte el cable de la impresora USB a los conectores USB del equipo y de la impresora. Los conectores USB admiten sólo una posición de encaje. Problemas con la impresora CO M P R U E B E L A S C O N E X I O N E S D E L O S C A B L E S D E L A I M P R E S O R A — Asegúrese de que el cable de la impresora está conectado correctamente al equipo (consulte la página 26). PR U E B E L A T O M A D E C O R R I E N T E E L É C T R I C A — Asegúrese de que la toma de corriente eléctrica funciona; para ello, pruébela con otro dispositivo, por ejemplo, una lámpara. Cable de la impresora USB Conector USB del equipo Conector USB de la impresoraConfiguración de su equipo 27 CO M P R U E B E Q U E L A I M P R E S O R A E S T Á E N C E N D I D A — Consulte la documentación que se proporciona con la impresora. CO M P R U E B E Q U E WI N D O W S ® R E C O N O C E L A I M P R E S O R A — 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio. 2 Haga clic en Panel de control. 3 Haga clic en Impresoras y otro hardware. 4 Haga clic en Ver impresoras o impresoras de fax instaladas. Si aparece el modelo de la impresora, haga clic con el botón derecho del ratón en el icono de la impresora. 5 Pulse Propiedades y, a continuación, pulse la ficha Puertos. Asegúrese de que la opción Imprimir en los siguientes puertos es USB 001 (Puerto de la impresora). VU E L V A A I N S T A L A R E L C O N T R O L A D O R D E L A I M P R E S O R A — Consulte la página 59. Dispositivos para protección de la alimentación Existen varios dispositivos que protegen contra las interrupciones y las fluctuaciones de la alimentación eléctrica: • Supresores de sobrevoltaje • Acondicionadores de línea • Sistemas de alimentación ininterrumpida (SAI) Supresores de sobrevoltaje Los supresores de sobrevoltaje y los enchufes múltiples equipados con protección contra sobrevoltajes ayudan a evitar los daños derivados de los picos de voltaje, que pueden producirse durante las tormentas con aparato eléctrico o inmediatamente después de las interrupciones en la alimentación eléctrica. El nivel de protección suele ser proporcional al precio del supresor de sobrevoltaje. Algunos fabricantes de supresores de sobrevoltaje proporcionan cobertura de garantía para cierto tipo de daños. Lea con atención la garantía del dispositivo al elegir un supresor de sobrevoltaje. Un dispositivo con una clasificación en julios más alta ofrece más protección. Compare las clasificaciones en julios para determinar la efectividad relativa de los diferentes dispositivos. AVISO: La mayoría de los supresores de sobrevoltaje no protegen contra las fluctuaciones e interrupciones de la alimentación eléctrica causadas por rayos. Cuando se produzca una tormenta con aparato eléctrico, desconecte la línea telefónica de la toma de teléfono de pared y desenchufe el equipo de la toma de corriente. Muchos supresores de sobrevoltaje disponen de una toma de teléfono para proteger el módem. Consulte la documentación del supresor de sobrevoltaje para obtener instrucciones sobre la conexión del módem. AVISO: No todos los supresores de sobrevoltaje ofrecen protección para el adaptador de red. Desconecte el cable de red de la toma de red de pared durante una tormenta con aparato eléctrico.28 Configuración de su equipo w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Acondicionadores de línea AVISO: Los acondicionadores de línea no protegen contra las interrupciones de la alimentación eléctrica. Los acondicionadores de línea están diseñados para mantener el voltaje de CA a un nivel bastante constante. Sistemas de alimentación ininterrumpida AVISO: La interrupción de la alimentación eléctrica mientras se están guardando datos en la unidad de disco duro puede provocar que se pierdan datos o que el archivo resulte dañado. NOTA: Para prolongar al máximo el tiempo de funcionamiento de la batería, conecte únicamente el equipo al SAI. Los demás dispositivos, como la impresora, puede conectarlos a un enchufe múltiple independiente que proporcione protección contra sobrevoltajes. Un SAI protege contra las fluctuaciones y las interrupciones de la alimentación eléctrica. Los dispositivos SAI contienen una batería que proporciona alimentación eléctrica temporal a los dispositivos conectados cuando se interrumpe la alimentación eléctrica. La batería se carga siempre que haya alimentación de CA disponible. Consulte la documentación del fabricante del SAI para obtener información sobre el tiempo de funcionamiento de la batería y asegurarse de que el dispositivo está aprobado por Underwriters Laboratories (UL). Cómo apagar el equipo AVISO: Para evitar la pérdida de datos, guarde y cierre todos los archivos abiertos y salga de todos los programas abiertos antes de cerrar el equipo. NOTA: Si lo prefiere, en vez de apagar el equipo, puede configurarlo para que entre en el modo de suspensión o de hibernación. Para obtener más información, consulte el archivo Dell Inspiron Help (Ayuda de Dell Inspiron). Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9. 1 Guarde y cierre los archivos abiertos, salga de todos los programas, haga clic en el botón Inicio y luego en Apagar equipo. 2 En la ventana Apagar equipo, haga clic en Apagar. El equipo se apaga cuando concluye el proceso de cierre del sistema.Uso de la batería 29 Uso de la batería Rendimiento de la batería NOTA: Las baterías de los equipos portátiles sólo están cubiertas durante el primer año de validez de la garantía limitada del equipo. Para obtener más información sobre la garantía de Dell de su equipo, consulte la Guía de información del producto. Utilice una batería para suministrar energía al equipo cuando no esté conectado a una toma de alimentación eléctrica. Se proporciona una batería en su compartimento correspondiente como equipamiento estándar. NOTA: El tiempo de funcionamiento de la batería (el tiempo que la batería puede mantener una carga) disminuye con el tiempo. En función de la frecuencia y las condiciones de uso de la batería, es posible que deba comprar una nueva batería durante la vida útil del equipo. El tiempo de funcionamiento de la batería varía en función de las condiciones de funcionamiento. La autonomía de la batería puede reducirse significativamente cuando se realizan, entre otras, las siguientes operaciones: NOTA: Se recomienda conectar el equipo a una toma de corriente eléctrica mientras se graba en un CD. • Uso de unidades ópticas, especialmente unidades de DVD y CD-RW. • Uso de dispositivos de comunicaciones inalámbricas, tarjeta PC o dispositivos USB. • Uso de configuraciones de pantalla de mucho brillo. • Uso de protectores de pantalla 3D u otros programas que utilizan mucha energía, como juegos 3D y programas de ingeniería. • Ejecución del equipo en modo de rendimiento máximo. Para obtener más información, consulte la sección relativa a la administración de energía en el archivo de ayuda de Dell Inspiron. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 10. Puede establecer las opciones de administración de energía para que se le avise cuando la carga de la batería esté baja. PRECAUCIÓN: El uso de baterías incompatibles puede aumentar el riesgo de incendio o explosión. Sustituya la batería únicamente por baterías de Dell. La batería de iones de litio está diseñada para funcionar con equipos Dell™. No utilice la batería de otros equipos en su equipo. PRECAUCIÓN: No deseche las baterías en la basura doméstica. Cuando la batería ya no pueda cargarse, solicite información a una empresa local de gestión de residuos o al departamento responsable en materia de medio ambiente sobre el modo de desechar las baterías de iones de litio. Consulte las instrucciones para desechar las baterías en la Guía de información del producto. PRECAUCIÓN: El uso incorrecto de la batería puede aumentar el riesgo de incendio o quemadura química. No perfore, incinere, desmonte o exponga la batería a temperaturas superiores a 65°C (149 °F). Mantenga la batería fuera del alcance de los niños. Tenga mucho cuidado con las baterías dañadas o que goteen. Las baterías dañadas pueden gotear y causar lesiones personales o daños en el equipo. 30 Uso de la batería w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Comprobación de la carga de la batería La ventana y el icono del medidor de energía de Microsoft® Windows® , y la advertencia de batería baja proporcionan información sobre la carga de la batería. Medidor de energía El medidor de energía de Windows indica la carga que le queda a la batería. Para consultar el medidor de energía, pulse dos veces en el icono de la barra de tareas. Para obtener más información sobre la ficha Medidor de energía, consulte la sección relativa a la administración de energía en el archivo de Ayuda de Dell Inspiron. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 10. Si el equipo está conectado a una toma de corriente, aparece un icono . Advertencia de bajo nivel de carga de la batería AVISO: Para evitar la pérdida de datos o que éstos resulten dañados, tras una advertencia de batería baja guarde inmediatamente el trabajo. A continuación, conecte el equipo a una toma de corriente eléctrica. Si la carga de la batería se agota por completo, el modo de hibernación se activa automáticamente. Cuando se ha agotado aproximadamente un 90 % de la carga, una ventana emergente se lo advierte. Para obtener más información sobre alarmas de bajo nivel de carga de batería, consulte la sección relativa a la administración de energía en el archivo de ayuda de Dell Inspiron. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 10. Carga de la batería NOTA: el adaptador de CA tarda 3 horas aproximadamente en cargar una batería totalmente descargada con el equipo apagado. El tiempo de carga es significativamente superior si el equipo está encendido y funciona a una alta velocidad de procesador y niveles elevados de actividad del sistema. Si se utiliza el equipo con niveles elevados de actividad durante un periodo prolongado de tiempo, puede ser que la batería no se cargue. Cuando se conecta el equipo a un enchufe de alimentación eléctrica o se instala una batería mientras el equipo está conectado a una toma de corriente, éste comprueba la carga y la temperatura de la batería. Si es necesario, el adaptador de CA cargará la batería y mantendrá la carga. Si la batería está caliente porque se ha estado usando en el equipo o porque ha permanecido en un ambiente donde la temperatura es elevada, puede ser que no se cargue cuando se conecte el equipo a una toma de alimentación eléctrica. Si el indicador parpadea alternando entre el verde y el naranja, la batería está demasiado caliente para iniciar la carga. Desconecte el equipo de la toma de corriente y espere a que tanto éste como la batería se enfríen hasta alcanzar la temperatura ambiente. A continuación, conecte el equipo a una toma de corriente y continúe cargando la batería. NOTA: Puede dejar la batería en el equipo todo el tiempo que desee. Los circuitos internos de la batería impiden que se sobrecargue.Uso de la batería 31 Para obtener más información sobre la resolución de problemas de la batería, consulte la sección relativa a la administración de energía en el archivo de ayuda de Dell Inspiron. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 10. Extracción de una batería PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de realizar estos procedimientos, desconecte el módem del enchufe telefónico de pared. 1 Compruebe que el equipo está apagado o conectado a una toma de corriente eléctrica. 2 Deslice y sostenga el pasador de la batería. 3 Extraiga la batería. Instalación de una batería Inserte la batería en el compartimento de la batería hasta que el pasador haga un “clic”. Almacenamiento de una batería Extraiga la batería cuando vaya a guardar el equipo durante un período largo. Las baterías se descargan durante los almacenamientos prolongados. Tras un periodo prolongado de almacenamiento, deberá cargar la batería completamente antes de utilizarla. Problemas de alimentación eléctrica y de la batería NOTA: Consulte el archivo Dell Inspiron Help (Ayuda de Dell Inspiron) para obtener información sobre el modo de espera. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 10. Seguro de la batería Batería32 Uso de la batería w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m CO M P R U E B E E L I N D I C A D O R D E A L I M E N T A C I Ó N — Si el indicador de alimentación está encendido o parpadea, significa que el equipo recibe alimentación. Si el indicador de alimentación parpadea, el equipo está en modo de espera; pulse el botón de alimentación para salir del modo de espera. Si el indicador está apagado, pulse el botón de alimentación para encender el equipo o para activar o desactivar un modo de administración de energía. Si el equipo no se enciende, pulse y mantenga pulsado el botón de alimentación durante unos segundos. CA R G U E L A B A T E R Í A — Puede que la carga de batería se haya agotado. 1 Vuelva a instalar la batería. 2 Utilice el adaptador de CA para conectar el equipo a una toma de corriente. 3 Encienda el equipo. CO M P R U E B E E L I N D I C A D O R D E E S T A D O D E L A B A T E R Í A — Si el indicador parpadea en color naranja o muestra un color naranja continuo, significa que la carga de la batería está baja o agotada. Conecte el equipo a un enchufe eléctrico. Si el indicador parpadea en colores verde y naranja, significa que la batería está demasiado caliente para cargarla. Apague el equipo (consulte la página 28), desconéctelo de la toma de corriente y, a continuación, espere a que tanto éste como la batería se enfríen hasta alcanzar la temperatura ambiente. Si el indicador de estado de la batería parpadea rápidamente en color naranja, puede que la batería esté defectuosa. Póngase en contacto con Dell (consulte la página 90). PR U E B E L A T O M A D E C O R R I E N T E E L É C T R I C A — Asegúrese de que la toma de corriente eléctrica funciona; para ello, pruébela con otro dispositivo, por ejemplo, una lámpara. CO M P R U E B E E L A D A P T A D O R D E CA — Compruebe las conexiones de cable del adaptador de CA. Si el adaptador de CA tiene una luz, asegúrese de que esté encendida. CO N E C T E E L E Q U I P O D I R E C T A M E N T E A U N A T O M A D E C O R R I E N T E E L É C T R I C A — Omita los dispositivos protectores de la alimentación, regletas de enchufes y alargadores para comprobar que el equipo se enciende. EL I M I N E L A S P O S I B L E S I N T E R F E R E N C I A S — Apague los ventiladores, luces fluorescentes, lámparas halógenas u otros aparatos cercanos. AJ U S T E L A S P R O P I E D A D E S D E L A A L I M E N T A C I Ó N — Consulte el archivo Dell Inspiron Help (Ayuda de Dell Inspiron) o busque la palabra clave en espera en el Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico. Para acceder a la ayuda, consulte la página 10. VU E L V A A C O L O C A R L O S M Ó D U L O S D E M E M O R I A — Si el indicador de alimentación del equipo se enciende pero en la pantalla no se ve nada, vuelva a colocar los módulos de memoria (consulte la página 68). Si la batería no se carga AP A G U E E L E Q U I P O — El tiempo de carga es significativamente superior si el equipo está encendido y funciona a una alta velocidad de procesador y niveles elevados de actividad del sistema. Si se utiliza el equipo con niveles elevados de actividad durante un periodo prolongado de tiempo, puede ser que la batería no se cargue. Si la batería dura poco CO N S U L T E E L A P A R T A D O “RE N D I M I E N T O D E L A B A T E R Í A” E N L A P Á G I N A 29 — El tiempo de funcionamiento puede reducirse significativamente bajo determinadas condiciones. OP T I M I Z A C I Ó N D E L R E N D I M I E N T O D E L P R O C E S A D O R Y C O N S U M O D E E N E R G Í A — Consulte la página 88.Uso del teclado y de la superficie táctil 33 Uso del teclado y de la superficie táctil Botón Dell™ AccessDirect™ Presione este botón para iniciar un programa que se utiliza con frecuencia, como las herramientas de soporte técnico y de formación o el explorador de Internet predeterminado. Reprogramación del botón Para cambiar la configuración del botón reprogramable o buscar información sobre el uso del botón: 1 Pulse el botón Inicio → Panel de control → Impresoras y otro hardware → Teclado. 2 Pulse la ficha AccessDirect. 3 Pulse el botón Ayuda y siga las instrucciones que aparecen en la pantalla. Teclado numérico El teclado numérico funciona como el teclado numérico de un teclado externo. Cada tecla del teclado numérico tiene varias funciones. Los números y símbolos del teclado numérico están marcados en azul en la parte derecha de las teclas. Teclado numérico34 Uso del teclado y de la superficie táctil w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Para activar el teclado, pulse . El indicador indica que el teclado numérico está activo. Para utilizar la función numérica cuando el teclado numérico esté activado, pulse y la tecla que desee. Para desactivar el teclado numérico, pulse de nuevo. Métodos abreviados del teclado Funciones del sistema Bandeja de CD o de DVD Funciones de la pantalla Administración de energía Abre la ventana Administrador de tareas de Windows Activa y desactiva el teclado numérico Activa y desactiva el bloqueo de desplazamiento Expulsa la bandeja fuera de la unidad. Cambia la imagen de vídeo a la siguiente opción de pantalla. Entre las opciones están la pantalla integrada, un monitor externo y las dos pantallas a la vez. Si está reproduciendo un DVD o viendo un vídeo, está desactivado. y tecla de flecha hacia arriba Aumenta el brillo únicamente en la pantalla integrada (no en un monitor externo) y tecla de fecha hacia abajo Reduce el brillo únicamente en la pantalla integrada (no en un monitor externo) Activa un modo de administración de energía. Puede reprogramar este método abreviado de teclado para activar otro modo de administración de energía utilizando la ficha Opciones avanzadas de la ventana Propiedades de Opciones de energía. Para obtener más información, consulte la sección relativa a la administración de energía en el archivo de ayuda de Dell Inspiron. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9. 9Uso del teclado y de la superficie táctil 35 Funciones de los altavoces Funciones de la tecla con el logotipo de Microsoft® Windows® Para ajustar el funcionamiento del teclado, como la velocidad de repetición de los caracteres, pulse el botón Inicio → Panel de control → Impresoras y otro hardware → Teclado. Siga las instrucciones que aparecen en pantalla. Aumenta el volumen de los altavoces integrados y de los altavoces externos (si los hay) Disminuye el volumen de los altavoces integrados y de los altavoces externos (si los hay) Activa y desactiva los altavoces integrados y los altavoces externos (si los hay) Tecla del logotipo de Windows y Minimiza todas las ventanas abiertas Tecla del logotipo de Windows y Maximiza todas las ventanas Tecla del logotipo de Windows y Ejecuta el Explorador de Windows Tecla del logotipo de Windows y Abre el cuadro de diálogo Ejecutar Tecla del logotipo de Windows y Abre el cuadro de diálogo Resultados de la búsqueda Tecla del logotipo de Windows y Abre el cuadro de diálogo Resultados de búsquedaPC si el equipo está conectado a una red Tecla del logotipo de Windows y Abre el cuadro de diálogo Propiedades del sistema36 Uso del teclado y de la superficie táctil w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Superficie táctil La superficie táctil detecta la presión y el movimiento del dedo para permitir desplazar el cursor por la pantalla. Utilice la superficie táctil y sus botones del mismo modo que un mouse. • Para mover el cursor, deslice ligeramente el dedo por la superficie táctil. • Para seleccionar un objeto, toque suavemente la superficie táctil o utilice el pulgar para presionar el botón izquierdo de la misma. • Para seleccionar y mover (o arrastrar) un objeto, sitúe el cursor sobre él y toque abajo-arribaabajo en la superficie táctil. En el segundo toque abajo, deje el dedo sobre la superficie táctil y deslícelo por la superficie para mover el objeto seleccionado. • Para hacer doble clic en un objeto, sitúe el cursor en él y, a continuación, toque dos veces la superficie táctil o pulse el botón izquierdo de la misma dos veces. Personalización de la superficie táctil Puede desactivar la superficie táctil o ajustar su configuración utilizando la ventana Propiedades del ratón. 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio, en Panel de control y en Impresoras y otro hardware. 2 Haga clic en Ratón 3 En la ventana Propiedades del ratón, pulse la ficha Configuración de dispositivo. Para desactivar la superficie táctil o el mouse, resalte el dispositivo y pulse Deshabilitar. Superficie táctil Botones de la superficie táctilUso del teclado y de la superficie táctil 37 Para cambiar la configuración de la superficie táctil o el mouse, resalte el dispositivo, pulse Configuración, seleccione la configuración que desee y, a continuación, pulse Aplicar. 4 Pulse Aceptar para guardar la configuración y cerrar la ventana y, a continuación, pulse de nuevo Aceptar para salir de la ventana Propiedades del ratón. Problemas con la superficie táctil o el ratón CO M P R U E B E L A C O N F I G U R A C I Ó N D E L A S U P E R F I C I E T Á C T I L — 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio, en Panel de control y en Impresoras y otro hardware. 2 Haga clic en Ratón 3 Ajuste la configuración. CO M P R U E B E E L C A B L E D E L M O U S E — Apague el equipo (consulte la página 28). Desconecte el cable del ratón y examínelo para ver si está dañado. Vuelva a conectar el cable firmemente. Si utiliza un cable alargador para el mouse, desconéctelo y conéctelo directamente al equipo. PA R A C O M P R O B A R Q U E S E T R A T A D E U N P R O B L E M A C O N E L M O U S E , E X A M I N E L A S U P E R F I C I E T Á C T I L — 1 Apague el equipo (consulte la página 28). 2 Desconecte el mouse. 3 Encienda el equipo. 4 En el escritorio de Windows, use la superficie táctil para mover el cursor, seleccione un icono y ábralo. Si la superficie táctil funciona correctamente, esto quiere decir que el mouse debe estar defectuoso. RE I N S T A L E E L C O N T R O L A D O R D E L A S U P E R F I C I E T Á C T I L — Consulte la página 59. Problemas con el teclado externo NOTA: Cuando conecta un teclado externo, el teclado integrado sigue conservando toda su funcionalidad. CO M P R U E B E E L C A B L E D E L T E C L A D O — Apague el equipo (consulte la página 28). Desconecte el cable del teclado y examínelo para ver si está dañado. Vuelva a conectar correctamente el cable. Si utiliza un cable alargador para el teclado, desconéctelo y conecte el teclado directamente al equipo. CO M P R U E B E E L T E C L A D O E X T E R N O — 1 Apague el equipo (consulte la página 28), espere 1 minuto y vuelva a encenderlo. 2 Compruebe que los indicadores de números, mayúsculas y bloqueo de desplazamiento del teclado parpadean durante la rutina de arranque. 3 En el escritorio de Windows® , pulse el botón Inicio, seleccione Todos los programas, seleccione Accesorios y pulse Bloc de notas. 4 Escriba algunos caracteres con el teclado externo y compruebe que aparecen en pantalla. Si no puede seguir estos pasos, puede que tenga un teclado externo defectuoso. 38 Uso del teclado y de la superficie táctil w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m PA R A C O M P R O B A R Q U E S E T R A T A D E U N P R O B L E M A C O N E L T E C L A D O E X T E R N O, E X A M I N E E L T E C L A D O I N T E G R A D O — 1 Apague el equipo (consulte la página 28). 2 Desconecte el teclado externo. 3 Encienda el equipo. 4 En el escritorio de Windows, pulse el botón Inicio, seleccione Todos los programas , Accesorios y Bloc de notas. 5 Escriba algunos caracteres con el teclado externo y compruebe que aparecen en pantalla. Si los caracteres aparecen ahora, pero no con el teclado externo, puede que tenga un teclado externo defectuoso. Póngase en contacto con Dell (consulte la página 90). Caracteres inesperados DE S A C T I V E E L T E C L A D O N U M É R I C O — Pulse para desactivar el teclado numérico si se muestran números en lugar de letras. Compruebe que el indicador luminoso del bloqueo numérico no esté encendido.Uso de CD, DVD y otros dispositivos multimedia 39 Uso de CD, DVD y otros dispositivos multimedia Cómo utilizar los CD y DVD Para obtener información sobre cómo utilizar CD y DVD en el equipo, consulte el archivo Dell Inspiron Help (Ayuda de Dell Inspiron). Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9. Problemas con los CD o DVD Si no puede reproducir un CD, CD-RW o DVD NOTA: Debido a los diferentes tipos de archivo que se utilizan en todo el mundo, no todos los DVD funcionan en todas las unidades de DVD. La vibración de las unidades de CD de alta velocidad es normal y puede ocasionar ruido. Dicho ruido no indica ningún defecto en la unidad o el CD. AS E G Ú R E S E D E Q U E WI N D O W S ® R E C O N O Z C A L A U N I D A D — Haga clic en el botón Inicio y, a continuación, en Mi PC. Si no aparece la unidad, haga una búsqueda completa con el software antivirus para comprobar si hay virus y eliminarlos. A veces los virus pueden impedir que Windows reconozca la unidad. Inserte un disco de inicio y reinicie el equipo. Compruebe si el indicador de la unidad parpadea, lo cual indica que el funcionamiento es correcto. UT I L I C E O T R O D I S C O — Inserte otro disco para descartar la posibilidad de que el disco original sea defectuoso. ASEGÚRESE DE QUE EL CD ESTÉ BIEN ENCAJADO EN EL EJE DE LA BANDEJA DE LA UNIDAD DE CD AJ U S T E E L C O N T R O L D E V O L U M E N D E WI N D O W S — Haga doble clic en el icono de altavoz que se encuentra en la esquina inferior derecha de la pantalla. Asegúrese de que ha subido el volumen y no ha silenciado el sonido. LI M P I E L A U N I D A D O E L D I S C O — Consulte la sección relativa a la limpieza del equipo en el archivo Dell Inspiron Help (Ayuda de Dell Inspiron) para obtener instrucciones. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9. Si no puede expulsar la bandeja de la unidad de CD, CD-RW o DVD 1 Compruebe que el equipo está apagado (consulte la página 28). 2 Enderece un clip sujetapapeles e introduzca un extremo en el orificio de expulsión situado en la parte frontal de la unidad; empuje firmemente hasta que se expulse parcialmente la bandeja. 3 Tire de la bandeja hacia afuera suavemente hasta que se detenga.40 Uso de CD, DVD y otros dispositivos multimedia w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Si oye un sonido de roce o chirrido inusual • Asegúrese de que el sonido no se debe al programa que se está ejecutando. • Asegúrese de que el disco esté insertado correctamente. Si la unidad de CD-RW deja de grabar DE S A C T I V E E L M O D O D E S U S P E N S I Ó N E N WI N D O W S A N T E S D E G R A B A R E N U N CD-RW — Busque la palabra clave en espera en el centro de ayuda y soporte técnico de Windows. Para acceder a la ayuda, consulte la página 9. CA M B I E L A V E L O C I D A D D E G R A B A C I Ó N A U N A V E L O C I D A D I N F E R I O R — Consulte los archivos de ayuda relativos al software de creación de CD. SA L G A D E L R E S T O D E P R O G R A M A S A B I E R T O S — Para mitigar el problema, salga del resto de programas abiertos antes de grabar en el CD-RW. Problemas con el sonido y los altavoces Si tiene problemas con los altavoces integrados AJ U S T E E L C O N T R O L D E L V O L U M E N D E WI N D O W S ® — Haga doble clic en el icono de altavoz que se encuentra en la esquina inferior derecha de la pantalla. Asegúrese de que ha subido el volumen y no ha silenciado el sonido. Ajuste los controles de volumen para eliminar la distorsión. AJ U S T E E L V O L U M E N U T I L I Z A N D O M É T O D O S A B R E V I A D O S D E T E C L A D O — Pulse para desactivar (quitar el sonido) o volver a activar los altavoces integrados. VU E L V A A I N S T A L A R E L C O N T R O L A D O R D E S O N I D O (A U D I O) — Consulte la página 59. Si tiene problemas con los altavoces externos NOTA: El control de volumen de algunos reproductores de MP3 anula la configuración de volumen de Windows. Si ha estado escuchando canciones MP3, asegúrese de que el control de volumen no está puesto al mínimo ni se ha desactivado. CO M P R U E B E L A S C O N E X I O N E S D E L O S C A B L E S D E L O S A L T A V O C E S — Consulte el diagrama de instalación proporcionado con los altavoces. PR U E B E L A T O M A D E C O R R I E N T E E L É C T R I C A — Asegúrese de que la toma de corriente eléctrica funciona; para ello, pruébela con otro dispositivo, por ejemplo, una lámpara. CO M P R U E B E Q U E L O S A L T A V O C E S E S T Á N E N C E N D I D O S — Consulte el diagrama de instalación proporcionado con los altavoces. AJ U S T E E L C O N T R O L D E V O L U M E N D E WI N D O W S — Haga doble clic en el icono de altavoz que se encuentra en la esquina inferior derecha de la pantalla. Asegúrese de que ha subido el volumen y no ha silenciado el sonido. Ajuste los controles de volumen para eliminar la distorsión. PR U E B E L O S A L T A V O C E S — Conecte el cable de audio del altavoz al conector de salida de línea del equipo. Asegúrese de que el control de volumen de los auriculares esté activado. Reproduzca un CD de música. EJ E C U T E L A A U T O P R U E B A D E L O S A L T A V O C E S — En algunos sistemas de altavoces, el altavoz para bajas Uso de CD, DVD y otros dispositivos multimedia 41 frecuencias incluye un botón de autoprueba. Consulte la documentación incluida con los altavoces con el fin de obtener las instrucciones para realizar autoprueba. EL I M I N E L A S P O S I B L E S I N T E R F E R E N C I A S — Apague las luces fluorescentes, lámparas halógenas o ventiladores cercanos para comprobar si se producen interferencias. VU E L V A A I N S T A L A R E L C O N T R O L A D O R D E S O N I D O (A U D I O) — Consulte la página 59. Cómo copiar CD y DVD NOTA: Asegúrese de no incumplir la legislación sobre copyright al crear un CD. Esta sección se aplica sólo a equipos que disponen de una unidad de CD-R, CD-RW, DVD+RW, DVD+R o una unidad combinada de DVD/CD-RW. Las siguientes instrucciones indican cómo realizar una copia exacta de un CD o DVD. También puede utilizar Sonic RecordNow con otros fines, como la creación de CD de archivos de audio en el equipo y la creación de CD de archivos MP3. Si desea obtener instrucciones, consulte la documentación de Sonic RecordNow incluida en su equipo. Abra Sonic RecordNow, haga clic en el icono de signo de interrogación de la parte superior derecha de la ventana y, a continuación, haga clic en RecordNow Help (Ayuda de RecordNow) o RecordNow Tutorial (Guía de aprendizaje de RecordNow). Cómo copiar un CD o DVD NOTA: Si dispone de una unidad combinada de DVD/CD-RW y tiene problemas de grabación, compruebe si hay revisiones de software disponibles en el sitio web de soporte de Sonic: support.sonic.com. NOTA: La mayoría de los DVD comerciales están protegidos por las leyes de copyright y no se pueden copiar con Sonic RecordNow. 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio, seleccione Todos los programas→ Sonic→ RecordNow!→ RecordNow! 2 Haga clic en la ficha de datos o de audio, según el tipo de CD que desee copiar. 3 Haga clic en Exact Copy (Copia exacta). 4 Para copiar el CD o DVD: • Si tiene una unidad de CD o DVD, asegúrese de que la configuración sea correcta y haga clic en Copy (Copiar). El equipo lee el CD o DVD de origen y lo copia en una carpeta temporal de la unidad de disco duro del equipo. Cuando se le solicite, inserte un CD o DVD vacío en la unidad de CD o DVD y haga clic en OK (Aceptar). • Si dispone de dos unidades de CD o DVD, seleccione la unidad en la que ha insertado el CD o DVD de origen y haga clic en Copy (Copiar). El equipo copia los datos del CD o DVD en el CD o DVD vacío.42 Uso de CD, DVD y otros dispositivos multimedia w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Después de finalizar la copia del CD o DVD de origen, se expulsa automáticamente el CD o DVD que ha creado. Cómo utilizar CD-R y CD-RW vacíos La unidad de CD-RW puede grabar dos tipos distintos de medios de grabación: discos CD-R y CD-RW. Utilice CD-R vacíos para grabar música o almacenar permanentemente archivos de datos. Después de crear un CD-R, no puede grabar en ese CD-R de nuevo sin cambiar el método de grabación (consulte la documentación de Sonic para obtener más información). Utilice discos CDRW vacíos para grabar en CD, borrar, regrabar o actualizar datos en los CD. Consejos prácticos • Utilice el Explorador de Microsoft® Windows® para arrastrar y soltar archivos en un CD-R o CD-RW sólo después de haber iniciado Sonic RecordNow y haber abierto un proyecto de RecordNow. • Utilice discos CD-R para grabar los CD de música que desee reproducir en equipos estéreo normales. Los discos CD-RW no se reproducen en la mayoría de los equipos estéreo domésticos o para automóvil. • No se pueden crear DVD de audio con Sonic RecordNow. • Los archivos MP3 de música sólo se pueden reproducir en reproductores de MP3 o en equipos en que se haya instalado software de BMP3. • No ocupe toda la capacidad de un CD-R o CD-RW vacío al grabar; por ejemplo, no copie un archivo de 650 MB en un CD vacío de 650 MB. La unidad de CD-RW necesita 1 ó 2 MB del CD vacío para finalizar la grabación. • Utilice un CD-RW vacío para practicar la grabación en CD hasta que se familiarice con las técnicas de grabación en CD. Si comete un error, puede borrar los datos del CD-RW e intentarlo de nuevo. También puede utilizar discos CD-RW vacíos para probar un proyecto de archivos de música antes de grabarlos de forma permanente en un CD-R vacío. • Consulte el sitio web de asistencia técnica de Sonic en support.sonic.com para obtener más información.Configuración de una red particular y una red de oficina 43 Configuración de una red particular y una red de oficina Conexión de un adaptador de red Antes de conectar el equipo a una red, es preciso instalar un adaptador de red y conectar un cable de red. Para conectar el cable de red: 1 Conecte el cable de red al conector del adaptador de red del equipo. NOTA: Inserte el cable hasta que encaje en su posición y, a continuación, tire de él suavemente para asegurarse de que está bien encajado. 2 Conecte el otro extremo del cable de red a un dispositivo de conexión de red, como una toma de red de pared. NOTA: No utilice un cable de red en una toma telefónica de la pared. Asistente para configuración de redes El sistema operativo Microsoft® Windows® XP proporciona un asistente para la configuración de la red que le guiará en el proceso de compartición de archivos, impresoras o una conexión de Internet entre equipos en un entorno doméstico o de pequeña oficina. 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio, seleccione Todos los programas→ Accesorios→ Comunicaciones y, a continuación, haga clic en Asistente para configuración de redes. 2 En la pantalla de bienvenida, haga clic en Siguiente. 3 Haga clic en Lista de comprobación para crear una red.44 Configuración de una red particular y una red de oficina w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m NOTA: Al seleccionar el método de conexión Este equipo está conectado directamente a Internet, se activará el servidor de seguridad integrado que incluye Windows XP. 4 Complete la lista de comprobación y los preparativos necesarios, y vuelva a la pantalla del Asistente para configuración de red. 5 Siga las instrucciones que aparecen en pantalla. Problemas con la red NOTA: Un indicador de conexión verde o parpadeante también podría indicar la presencia de un enlace de red inalámbrica en el área. CO M P R U E B E E L C O N E C T O R D E L C A B L E D E R E D — Asegúrese de que el conector del cable de red está bien conectado al conector del equipo y al enchufe de red de la pared. CO M P R U E B E L O S I N D I C A D O R E S D E R E D D E L C O N E C T O R D E R E D — El color verde indica que la conexión de red está activa. Si el indicador de estado no está en verde, pruebe a reemplazar el cable de red. El color ámbar indica que el controlador del adaptador de red está cargado y que el adaptador detecta actividad. CA M B I E E L C A B L E D E R E D — Pruebe a utilizar otro cable. Si hay más de un conector de red disponible, intente enchufar el cable en un conector diferente. RE I N I C I E E L E Q U I P O — Vuelva a intentar conectarse a la red. PÓ N G A S E E N C O N T A C T O C O N E L A D M I N I S T R A D O R D E L A R E D — Compruebe que la configuración de la red es correcta y que la red está en funcionamiento. Conexión a una red de área local inalámbrica NOTA: Estas instrucciones sobre la red no se aplican a los productos Bluetooth™ ni celulares. Establecimiento del tipo de red NOTA: La mayoría de las redes inalámbricas son redes de infraestructura. Configuración de una red particular y una red de oficina 45 Las redes inalámbricas se clasifican en dos categorías: redes de infraestructura y redes ad-hoc. Las redes de infraestructura usan enrutadores o puntos de acceso para conectar varios equipos. Las redes ad-hoc no usan enrutadores o puntos de acceso y se componen de equipos que difunden de uno a otro. Conexión a una red inalámbrica en Microsoft ® Windows® XP La tarjeta inalámbrica requiere el software y los controladores adecuados para conectarse a una red. El software ya está instalado. Si el software se extrae o se daña, siga las instrucciones que se incluyen en la guía del usuario de su tarjeta de red inalámbrica. La guía del usuario también está disponible en el sitio web Dell Support en support.dell.com. Cuando encienda el equipo, aparecerá un mensaje emergente del icono de red en el área de notificación siempre que se detecte una red en la zona para la que su equipo no esté configurado. 1 Haga clic en el mensaje emergente o en el icono de la red con el fin de configurar el equipo para una de las redes inalámbricas disponibles. La ventana Conexiones de red inalámbricas muestra las redes inalámbricas disponibles en la zona. Red de infraestructura Red ad-hoc46 Configuración de una red particular y una red de oficina w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m 2 Haga clic en la red que desee configurar y, a continuación, haga clic en Conectar o haga doble clic en el nombre de red de la lista. Si selecciona una red segura (identificada por un icono ), debe especificar una clave WEP o WPA cuando se le pida. NOTA: La configuración de seguridad de la red es exclusiva de su red. Dell no puede proporcionar esta información. La red se configura automáticamente. NOTA: Es posible que el equipo tarde hasta un minuto en conectarse a la red. Después de configurar el equipo para la red inalámbrica que ha seleccionado, otro mensaje emergente le notificará que el equipo está conectado a la red seleccionada. Configuración de una red particular y una red de oficina 47 Por lo tanto, cada vez que se conecte al equipo en el área de la red inalámbrica, el mismo mensaje emergente le notificará la conexión a la red inalámbrica. 48 Configuración de una red particular y una red de oficina w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o mSolución de problemas 49 Solución de problemas Dell Diagnostics PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad que se encuentran en la Guía de información del producto. Cuándo utilizar los Dell Diagnostics Si tiene problemas con el equipo, realice las comprobaciones de la sección “Solución de problemas” y ejecute los Dell Diagnostics antes de ponerse en contacto con Dell para solicitar asistencia técnica. AVISO: Los Dell Diagnostics sólo funcionan en los equipos Dell™. Los Dell Diagnostics están situados en una partición oculta para la utilidad de diagnóstico (Diagnostic) de la unidad de disco duro. NOTA: Si el equipo no muestra ninguna imagen en la pantalla, póngase en contacto con Dell. 1 Apague el equipo. 2 Si el equipo está conectado (acoplado) a un dispositivo de acoplamiento, desacóplelo. Si desea instrucciones, consulte la documentación incluida con el dispositivo de acoplamiento. 3 Conecte el equipo a un enchufe eléctrico. 4 Encienda el equipo. Cuando aparezca el logotipo de DELL™, pulse inmediatamente. NOTA: Si no aparece nada en la pantalla, mantenga pulsado y pulse el botón de encendido del equipo para iniciar Dell Diagnostics. El equipo ejecutará automáticamente la evaluación del sistema previa al inicio. Si espera demasiado y aparece el logotipo de Microsoft® Windows® , siga esperando hasta que aparezca el escritorio de Windows. A continuación, apague el equipo mediante el menú Inicio y vuelva a intentarlo. 5 Cuando aparezca la lista de dispositivos de inicio, resalte Diagnostics (Diagnósticos)y pulse . El equipo ejecutará la evaluación del sistema previa al inicio, una serie de pruebas iniciales de la tarjeta del sistema, el teclado, la unidad de disco duro y la pantalla. • Durante la evaluación, responda a las preguntas que puedan formularse. • Si se detecta un fallo, el equipo se detiene y emite pitidos. Para detener la evaluación y reiniciar el equipo, pulse ; para continuar con la siguiente prueba, pulse ; para volver a probar el componente que falló, pulse . 50 Solución de problemas w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m • Si se detectaron fallos durante la evaluación del sistema previa al inicio, anote el código o códigos de error y póngase en contacto con Dell antes de continuar con los Dell Diagnostics. Si la evaluación del sistema previa al inicio se realiza correctamente, recibirá el mensaje Booting Dell Diagnostic Utility Partition. Press any key to continue (Iniciando la partición de la utilidad Dell Diagnostic. Pulse cualquier tecla para continuar). 6 Presione cualquier tecla para iniciar los Dell Diagnostics desde la partición para la utilidad de diagnóstico del disco duro. 7 Cuando aparezca el Main Menu (Menú principal) de Dell Diagnostics, seleccione la prueba que desea ejecutar. Menú principal de los Dell Diagnostics 1 Una vez se hayan cargado los Dell Diagnostics y aparezca la pantalla Main Menu (Menú principal), haga clic en el botón de la opción que desea. 2 Si se produce un problema durante una prueba, aparecerá un mensaje con un código de error y una descripción del problema. Anote el código de error y la descripción del problema, y siga las instrucciones de la pantalla. Si no puede resolver la condición del error, póngase en contacto con Dell. NOTA: La etiqueta de servicio para su equipo está situada en la parte superior de cada pantalla de prueba. Si se pone en contacto con Dell, el servicio de asistencia técnica le pedirá su etiqueta de servicio. Opción Función Express Test (Prueba rápida) Realiza una prueba rápida de los dispositivos. Esta prueba suele tardar de 10 a 20 minutos y no requiere ninguna acción por parte del usuario. Ejecute primero Express Test (Prueba rápida) para incrementar la posibilidad de rastrear el problema rápidamente. Extended Test (Prueba extendida) Realiza una prueba completa de los dispositivos. Esta prueba suele tardar una o varias horas y requiere que usted responda de manera periódica a una serie de preguntas. Custom Test (Prueba personalizada) Prueba un dispositivo específico. Puede personalizar las pruebas que desee ejecutar. Symptom Tree (Árbol de síntomas) Hace una lista de los síntomas más habituales que se pueden encontrar y le permite seleccionar una prueba basándose en el síntoma del problema que usted tiene.Solución de problemas 51 3 Si ejecuta una prueba desde la opción Custom Test (Prueba personalizada) o Symptom Tree (Árbol de síntomas), haga clic en la pestaña correspondiente que se describe en la tabla siguiente para obtener más información. 4 Cuando las pruebas hayan finalizado, cierre la pantalla de prueba para volver a la pantalla Main Menu (Menú principal). Para salir de los Dell Diagnostics y reiniciar el equipo, cierre la pantalla Main Menu (Menú principal). Mensajes de error Si el mensaje no aparece en la lista, consulte la documentación del sistema operativo o el programa que se estaba ejecutando en el momento en que apareció el mensaje. Ficha Función Results (Resultado) Muestra el resultado de la prueba y las condiciones de error encontradas. Errors (Errores) Muestra las condiciones de error encontradas, los códigos de error y la descripción del problema. Help (Ayuda) Describe la prueba y puede indicar los requisitos para ejecutarla. Configuration (Configuración) Muestra la configuración de hardware del dispositivo seleccionado. Dell Diagnostics obtiene la información de configuración de todos los dispositivos a partir de la configuración del sistema, la memoria y varias pruebas internas, y la muestra en la lista de dispositivos del panel izquierdo de la pantalla. La lista de dispositivos puede que no muestre los nombres de todos los componentes instalados en el equipo o de todos los dispositivos conectados al equipo. Parameters (Parámetros) Permite personalizar la prueba cambiando su configuración. TH E F I L E B E I N G C O P I E D I S T O O L A R G E F O R T H E D E S T I N A T I O N D R I V E (EL A R C H I V O Q U E S E E S T Á C O P I A N D O E S D E M A S I A D O G R A N D E P A R A L A U N I D A D D E D E S T I N O) — El archivo que está intentando copiar es demasiado grande y no cabe en el disco, o el disco está lleno. Pruebe a copiar el archivo en otro disco o en un disco con mayor capacidad. A F I L E N A M E C A N N O T C O N T A I N A N Y O F T H E F O L L O W I N G C H A R A C T E R S: \ / : * ? “ < > | (UN N O M B R E D E A R C H I V O N O P U E D E C O N T E N E R N I N G U N O D E L O S C A R A C T E R E S S I G U I E N T E S: \ / : * ? “ < > |) — No utilice estos caracteres en los nombres de archivo.52 Solución de problemas w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Problemas con el vídeo y la pantalla Si la pantalla aparece en blanco NOTA: Si utiliza un programa que requiere una resolución superior a la que admite el equipo, se recomienda conectar un monitor externo. IN S E R T B O O T A B L E M E D I A (IN S E R T E U N M E D I O D E A R R A N Q U E) — El sistema operativo está intentando arrancar desde un disquete o CD que no es de arranque. Inserte un disco o un CD de inicio. IN V A L I D C O N F I G U R A T I O N I N F O R M A T I O N-P L E A S E R U N SYS T E M SE T U P PR O G R A M (IN F O R M A C I Ó N D E C O N F I G U R A C I Ó N N O V Á L I D A; E J E C U T E E L P R O G R A M A D E C O N F I G U R A C I Ó N D E L S I S T E M A) — La información de configuración del sistema no coincide con la configuración de hardware. Este mensaje es más probable tras instalar un módulo de memoria. Corrija las opciones apropiadas del programa de configuración del sistema. Consulte el apartado “Utilización del programa Configuración del sistema” en la página 86. KE Y B O A R D C L O C K L I N E F A I L U R E (FA L L A D E L A L Í N E A D E R E L O J D E L T E C L A D O) — Para teclados externos, compruebe la conexión del cable. Ejecute la prueba Keyboard Controller (Controladora de teclado) tal como se describe en “Dell Diagnostics” (consulte la página 49). KE Y B O A R D C O N T R O L L E R F A I L U R E (FA L L A D E L C O N T R O L A D O R D E L T E C L A D O) — Para teclados externos, compruebe la conexión del cable. Reinicie el equipo y evite tocar el teclado o el mouse durante la rutina de inicio. Ejecute la prueba Keyboard Controller tal como se describe en “Dell Diagnostics” (consulte la página 49). KE Y B O A R D D A T A L I N E F A I L U R E (FA L L A D E L A L Í N E A D E D A T O S D E L T E C L A D O) — Para teclados externos, compruebe la conexión del cable. Ejecute la prueba Keyboard Controller tal como se describe en “Dell Diagnostics” (consulte la página 49). KE Y B O A R D S T U C K K E Y F A I L U R E (FA L L A D E T E C L A B L O Q U E A D A D E L T E C L A D O) — Para teclados externos, compruebe la conexión del cable. Reinicie el equipo y evite tocar el teclado o las teclas durante la rutina de inicio. Ejecute la prueba Stuck Key (Tecla bloqueada ) tal como se describe en “Dell Diagnostics” (consulte la página 49).Solución de problemas 53 Si resulta difícil leer la pantalla CO M P R U E B E E L I N D I C A D O R — Si el indicador parpadea significa que el equipo recibe alimentación. • Si el indicador parpadea, el equipo está en modo de espera. Pulse el botón de alimentación para salir del modo de espera. • Si el indicador está apagado, pulse el botón de alimentación. • Si el indicador está encendido, puede que la configuración de administración de energía haya hecho que se apague la pantalla. Pulse cualquier tecla o mueva el cursor para salir del modo de suspensión. CO M P R U E B E L A B A T E R Í A — Si utiliza una batería para la alimentación del equipo, puede que se haya agotado. Conecte el equipo a un enchufe eléctrico con el adaptador de CA y enciéndalo. PR U E B E L A T O M A D E C O R R I E N T E E L É C T R I C A — Asegúrese de que la toma de corriente eléctrica funciona; para ello, pruébela con otro dispositivo, por ejemplo, una lámpara. CO M P R U E B E E L A D A P T A D O R D E CA — Compruebe las conexiones de cable del adaptador de CA. Si el adaptador de CA tiene un indicador, asegúrese de que está encendido. CO N E C T E E L E Q U I P O D I R E C T A M E N T E A U N A T O M A D E C O R R I E N T E E L É C T R I C A — Omita los dispositivos protectores de la alimentación, regletas de enchufes y alargadores para comprobar que el equipo se enciende. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9. AJ U S T E L A S P R O P I E D A D E S D E L A A L I M E N T A C I Ó N — Busque la palabra clave en esperaen el Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico de Windows. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9. CA M B I E L A I M A G E N D E V Í D E O — Si su equipo está conectado a un monitor externo, oprima para cambiar la imagen de vídeo a la pantalla. NOTE: Si está reproduciendo un DVD o viendo un vídeo, está desactivado. AJ U S T E E L B R I L L O — Consulte el archivo Dell Inspiron Help (Ayuda de Dell Inspiron) para obtener instrucciones sobre el ajuste del brillo. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9. AL E J E D E L M O N I T O R O D E L E Q U I P O E L A L T A V O Z D E B A J A S F R E C U E N C I A S — Si el sistema de altavoces externos incluye un altavoz para bajas frecuencias, asegúrese de que dicho altavoz se encuentra como mínimo a 60 cm del monitor.54 Solución de problemas w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Si sólo se puede leer parte de la pantalla Problemas con el escáner EL I M I N E L A S P O S I B L E S I N T E R F E R E N C I A S — Apague los ventiladores, luces fluorescentes, lámparas halógenas u otros aparatos cercanos. OR I E N T E E L E Q U I P O H A C I A O T R A D I R E C C I Ó N — Evite los reflejos de la luz solar, que pueden causar una calidad baja de la imagen. AJ U S T E L A C O N F I G U R A C I Ó N D E P A N T A L L A D E WI N D O W S — 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y, a continuación, en Panel de control. 2 Haga clic en Apariencia y temas. 3 Haga clic sobre la zona que desea cambiar o en el icono Pantalla. 4 Pruebe valores diferentes en Calidad del color y Resolución de pantalla. CO N S U L T E “ME N S A J E S D E E R R O R” — Si aparece un mensaje de error, consulte la página 51. CO N E C T E U N M O N I T O R E X T E R N O — 1 Apague el equipo y conéctele un monitor externo. 2 Encienda el equipo y el monitor, y ajuste los controles de brillo y contraste del monitor. Si el monitor externo funciona, es posible que el controlador de vídeo o la pantalla del equipo estén defectuosos. Póngase en contacto con Dell (consulte la página 90). CO M P R U E B E L A C O N E X I Ó N D E L C A B L E D E A L I M E N T A C I Ó N — Asegúrese de que el cable de alimentación del escáner está debidamente conectado a una fuente de alimentación eléctrica en funcionamiento y que el escáner está encendido. CO M P R U E B E L A C O N E X I Ó N D E L C A B L E D E L E S C Á N E R — Asegúrese de que el cable del escáner está debidamente conectado al equipo y al escáner. DE S B L O Q U E E E L E S C Á N E R — Asegúrese de que el escáner no está bloqueado si éste dispone de una lengüeta o un botón de bloqueo. VU E L V A A I N S T A L A R E L C O N T R O L A D O R D E L E S C Á N E R — Consulte la documentación incluida con el escáner para obtener instrucciones.Solución de problemas 55 Problemas con las unidades NOTA: Para obtener información sobre cómo guardar archivos en un disquete, consulte el archivo Dell Inspiron Help (Ayuda de Dell Inspiron). Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9. Si no puede guardar un archivo en una unidad de disco flexible AS E G Ú R E S E D E Q U E WI N D O W S ® R E C O N O C E L A U N I D A D — Haga clic en el botón Inicio y en Mi PC. Si no aparece la unidad, haga una búsqueda completa con el software antivirus para comprobar si hay virus y eliminarlos. A veces los virus pueden impedir que Windows reconozca la unidad. Inserte un disco de inicio y reinicie el equipo. Compruebe si el indicador de la unidad parpadea, lo cual indica que el funcionamiento es correcto. AS E G Ú R E S E D E Q U E E L D I S C O N O E S T Á P R O T E G I D O C O N T R A E S C R I T U R A — No se pueden guardar datos en un disco protegido contra escritura. Consulte la siguiente figura. UT I L I C E O T R O D I S Q U E T E — Inserte otro disco para descartar la posibilidad de que el disco original sea defectuoso. VU E L V A A C O N E C T A R L A U N I D A D — 1 Guarde y cierre los archivos que estén abiertos, salga de todas las aplicaciones y apague el equipo. 2 Desconecte y vuelva a conectar la unidad. 3 Encienda el equipo. LI M P I E L A U N I D A D — Consulte la sección relativa a la limpieza del equipo en el archivo Dell Inspiron Help (Ayuda de Dell Inspiron) para obtener instrucciones. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la página 9. Protegido contra escritura No protegido contra escritura Dorso del disquete56 Solución de problemas w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Si tiene problemas con una unidad de disco duro Problemas con la tarjeta PC Problemas generales del programa NOTA: Normalmente el software incluye instrucciones de instalación en su documentación o en un disquete o CD. Un programa se bloquea DE J E Q U E E L E Q U I P O S E E N F R Í E A N T E S D E E N C E N D E R L O — Una unidad de disco duro recalentada puede impedir que se inicie el sistema operativo. Deje que el equipo vuelva a adoptar la temperatura ambiente antes de encenderlo. CO M P R U E B E L A U N I D A D P A R A V E R S I T I E N E E R R O R E S — 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y en Mi PC. 2 Haga clic con el botón derecho del ratón en la letra de la unidad (disco local) que desea examinar para comprobar que no tiene errores y, a continuación, haga clic en Propiedades. 3 Haga clic en la ficha Herramientas. 4 En el grupo de opciones de Comprobación de errores, haga clic en Comprobar ahora. 5 Haga clic en Inicio. CO M P R U E B E L A T A R J E T A PC — Asegúrese de que la tarjeta PC está insertada correctamente en el conector. AS E G Ú R E S E D E Q U E WI N D O W S ® R E C O N O C E L A T A R J E T A — Haga doble clic en el icono Safely Remove Hardware (Quitar hardware con seguridad) de la barra de tareas de Windows. Asegúrese de que aparece la tarjeta. SI T I E N E P R O B L E M A S C O N U N A T A R J E T A PC P R O P O R C I O N A D A P O R DE L L — Póngase en contacto con Dell (consulte la página 90). SI T I E N E P R O B L E M A S C O N U N A T A R J E T A PC N O P R O P O R C I O N A D A P O R DE L L — Póngase en contacto con el fabricante de la tarjeta PC. CO N S U L T E L A D O C U M E N T A C I Ó N D E L S O F T W A R E — Muchos fabricantes de software ofrecen sitios Web con información que puede ayudarle a solucionar el problema. Asegúrese de que ha instalado y configurado correctamente el programa. Vuelva a instalar el programa si fuera necesario.Solución de problemas 57 Un programa no responde Aparecen mensajes de error Solución de otros problemas técnicos Si el equipo se moja PRECAUCIÓN: Sólo debe realizar este procedimiento si tiene la certeza de que es seguro hacerlo. Si el equipo está conectado a una toma de corriente, se recomienda apagar la alimentación de CA del interruptor automático antes de desconectar los cables de la toma de corriente. Proceda con la máxima precaución cuando retire cables mojados de una toma de corriente. 1 Apague el equipo (consulte la página 28), desconecte el adaptador de corriente alterna del equipo y, a continuación, desconecte el adaptador de corriente alterna de la toma de corriente. FI N A L I C E E L P R O G R A M A — 1 Pulse simultáneamente . 2 Haga clic en la ficha Aplicaciones y seleccione el programa que no responde. 3 Haga clic en Finalizar tarea. RE V I S E “ME N S A J E S D E E R R O R” E N L A P Á G I N A 51 — Localice el mensaje y lleve a cabo la acción adecuada. Consulte la documentación del software. VA Y A A L S I T I O W E B DE L L SU P P O R T — Vaya a support.dell.com para obtener ayuda sobre cuestiones generales de uso, instalación y solución de problemas. Consulte el apartado “Política de soporte técnico de Dell (sólo EE.UU.)” en la página 89 para obtener una descripción de la asistencia para el hardware y el software proporcionada por Dell. EN V Í E U N M E N S A J E D E C O R R E O E L E C T R Ó N I C O A DE L L — Vaya a support.dell.com y haga clic en Dell E-Mail en la lista Comunicar. Envíe un mensaje de correo electrónico a Dell sobre el problema; en unas horas recibirá una respuesta de Dell a través del correo electrónico. Consulte el apartado “Política de soporte técnico de Dell (sólo EE.UU.)” en la página 89 para obtener una descripción de la asistencia para el hardware y el software proporcionada por Dell. PÓ N G A S E E N C O N T A C T O C O N DE L L — Si no puede solucionar el problema con la ayuda del sitio web Dell™ Support ni con el servicio por correo electrónico, llame a Dell para solicitar asistencia técnica (consulte la página 90). Consulte el apartado “Política de soporte técnico de Dell (sólo EE.UU.)” en la página 89 para obtener una descripción de la asistencia para el hardware y el software proporcionada por Dell.58 Solución de problemas w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m 2 Apague los dispositivos externos que estén conectados y desconéctelos de sus fuentes de alimentación y del equipo. 3 Descargue la electricidad estática de su cuerpo. Para ello, toque uno de los conectores metálicos de la parte posterior del equipo. 4 Extraiga las tarjetas PC que estén instaladas y colóquelas en un lugar seguro para que se sequen. 5 Extraiga la batería. 6 Pase un paño por la batería y colóquela en un lugar seguro para que se seque. 7 Pase un paño por el monitor. 8 Extraiga la unidad de disco duro (consulte la página 66). 9 Extraiga el módulo o módulos de memoria (consulte la página 68). 10 Abra la pantalla y coloque el equipo con su lado derecho hacia arriba sobre dos libros u objetos similares para permitir que el aire circule a su alrededor. Déjelo secar como mínimo durante 24 horas en un lugar seco a temperatura ambiente. AVISO: No utilice medios artificiales, como un secador de pelo o un ventilador, para acelerar el secado. PRECAUCIÓN: Para evitar recibir una descarga eléctrica, compruebe si el equipo está totalmente seco antes de continuar con el procedimiento. 11 Descargue la electricidad estática de su cuerpo. Para ello, toque uno de los conectores metálicos de la parte posterior del equipo. 12 Vuelva a colocar los módulos de memoria, la cubierta y los tornillos. 13 Vuelva a colocar la unidad de disco duro. 14 Reemplace las tarjetas PC que ha extraído. 15 Vuelva a colocar la batería. 16 Encienda el equipo y compruebe que funciona correctamente. NOTA: Para obtener información sobre la cobertura de la garantía, consulte la Guía de información del producto o el documento de la garantia por separado que se envío con su equipo. Si el equipo no se enciende o no identifica los componentes dañados, póngase en contacto con Dell (consulte la página 90). Si el equipo se cae o se daña 1 Guarde y cierre los archivos que estén abiertos, salga de todas las aplicaciones y apague el equipo (consulte la página 28). 2 Desconecte el adaptador de CA de la toma de corriente y del equipo. 3 Apague los dispositivos externos que estén conectados y desconéctelos de sus fuentes de alimentación y del equipo. 4 Extraiga la batería y vuelva a colocarla. 5 Encienda el equipo.Solución de problemas 59 NOTA: Consulte la Guía de información del producto o el documento de la garantía que incluía su equipo para obtener información sobre la garantía. Si el equipo no se enciende o no puede identificar los componentes dañados, póngase en contacto con Dell (consulte la página 90). Controladores ¿Qué es un controlador? Un controlador es un programa que controla un dispositivo, como por ejemplo una impresora, un mouse o un teclado. Todos los dispositivos necesitan un controlador. Un controlador funciona como traductor entre el dispositivo y los programas que lo utilizan. Cada dispositivo posee un conjunto propio de comandos especializados que sólo su controlador puede reconocer. Muchos controladores como, por ejemplo, el controlador de la impresora, se suministran con el sistema operativo Microsoft® Windows® . Deberá instalar los controladores si: • Actualiza el sistema operativo. • Reinstala el sistema operativo. • Conecta o instala un nuevo dispositivo. Si experimenta problemas con algún dispositivo, realice los pasos descritos en las secciones siguientes para determinar si el origen del problema es el controlador y, en caso necesario, actualizarlo. Identificación de controladores 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y seleccione Panel de control. 2 En la ventana Panel de control, pulse Rendimiento y mantenimiento en Elija una categoría. 3 En la ventana Rendimiento y mantenimiento, pulse Sistema. 4 En la pantalla Propiedades del sistema, haga clic en la ficha Hardware. 5 Haga clic en Administrador de dispositivos. 6 En la ventana Administrador de dispositivos, desplácese hacia el final de la lista para ver si algún dispositivo tiene un signo de exclamación (un círculo amarillo con un [!]) en el icono del dispositivo. Si aparece un signo de exclamación junto al nombre del dispositivo, deberá volver a instalar el controlador o instalar uno nuevo. Volver a instalar los controladores AVISO: El sitio web Dell Support proporciona los controladores adecuados para los equipos Dell™. Si instala controladores obtenidos de otras fuentes, puede que el equipo no funcione correctamente.60 Solución de problemas w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Cómo usar la desinstalación del controlador de dispositivo de Windows XP Si se produce un problema en el equipo después de instalar o actualizar un controlador, utilice la función Desintalación del controlador de dispositivo de Windows XP para restaurar la versión previamente instalada del controlador. Para usar la función Volver al controlador anterior de dispositivos: 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y seleccione Panel de control. 2 En la ventana Panel de control, pulse Rendimiento y mantenimiento en Elija una categoría. 3 En la ventana Rendimiento y mantenimiento, pulse Sistema. 4 En la pantalla Propiedades del sistema, haga clic en la ficha Hardware. 5 Haga clic en Administrador de dispositivos. 6 En la ventana Administrador de dispositivos, haga clic con el botón derecho en el dispositivo para el que se instaló el nuevo controlador y, a continuación, haga clic en Propiedades. 7 Haga clic en la ficha Controladores. 8 Haga clic en Desinstalar controlador. Si con esto no se soluciona el problema, utilice la función Restaurar sistema (consulte la página 61) para que el sistema operativo vuelva al estado anterior a la instalación del nuevo controlador. Reinstalación manual de controladores para Windows XP El sitio web Dell Support proporciona los controladores adecuados para los equipos Dell™. Si instala controladores obtenidos de otras fuentes, puede que el equipo no funcione correctamente. 1 Después de copiar los archivos de controlador en su unidad de disco duro, haga clic en el botón Inicio y haga clic con el botón derecho del ratón en Mi PC. 2 Haga clic en Propiedades. 3 Haga clic en la ficha Hardware y en Administrador de dispositivos. 4 Haga doble clic en el tipo de dispositivo para el que va a instalar el controlador (por ejemplo, Módems o Dispositivos de infrarrojos). 5 Haga doble clic en el nombre del dispositivo para el que está instalando el controlador. 6 Haga clic en la ficha Controlador y, a continuación, haga clic en Actualizar controlador. 7 Haga clic en Instalar desde una lista o ubicación específica (avanzado) y, a continuación, haga clic en Siguiente. 8 Haga clic en Examinar y examine la ubicación en la que extrajo anteriormente los archivos del controlador. 9 Cuando aparezca el nombre del controlador adecuado, haga clic en Siguiente. 10 Haga clic en Finalizar y reinicie el equipo.Solución de problemas 61 Cómo resolver incompatibilidades de software y hardware Cómo usar el Solucionador de problemas de hardware de Windows XP: 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y, a continuación, haga clic en Ayuda y soporte técnico. 2 Escriba solucionador de problemas de hardware en el campo Buscar y haga clic en la flecha para iniciar la búsqueda. 3 Haga clic en Solucionador de problemas de hardware en la lista Resultados de la búsqueda. 4 En la lista Solucionador de problemas de hardware, haga clic en Necesito resolver un conflicto de hardware de mi equipo y haga clic en Siguiente. Restauración de su sistema operativo Puede restaurar su sistema operativo de la siguiente manera: • La función Restaurar sistema de Microsoft Windows XP devuelve su equipo a un estado operativo anterior sin que esto afecte a archivos de datos. • La función Dell PC Restore by Symantec (Restaurar PC de Dell por Symantec) restaura su unidad de disco duro al estado operativo que estaba cuando compró el equipo. La función PC Restore (Restaurar PC) de Dell borra permanentemente todos los datos de la unidad de disco duro y quita cualquier aplicación que se instaló después de haber recibido el equipo. Cómo utilizar la función Restaurar sistema de MicrosoftWindows XP El sistema operativo Microsoft WindowsXP dispone de la función Restaurar sistema que permite regresar a un estado operativo anterior del equipo (sin que esto afecte a los archivos de datos) si los cambios efectuados en el hardware, software u otros parámetros del sistema han dejado el equipo en un estado operativo no deseado. Consulte el Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico de Windows para obtener información sobre el uso de la función Restaurar sistema. Para acceder a la ayuda, consulte la página 9. AVISO: Realice copias de seguridad periódicas de los archivos de datos. La función Restaurar sistema no supervisa ni recupera los archivos de datos. NOTA: Los procedimientos de este documento se han escrito para la vista predeterminada de Windows, por lo que podrían no funcionar si cambia el equipo Dell™ a la vista clásica de Windows. Creación de un punto de restauración 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y seleccione Ayuda y soporte técnico. 2 Haga clic en Restaurar sistema. 3 Siga las instrucciones que aparecen en pantalla. Restauración del equipo a un estado operativo anterior Si se producen problemas después de instalar el controlador de un dispositivo, utilice la Desinstalación del controlador de dispositivo (consulte la página 60) para resolver el problema. Si esto no funciona, utilice Restaurar sistema.62 Solución de problemas w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m AVISO: Antes de restaurar el equipo a un estado operativo anterior, guarde y cierre los archivos abiertos y salga de los programas activos. No cambie, abra ni elimine ningún archivo o programa hasta que haya restaurado totalmente el sistema. 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio, seleccione Todos los programas→ Accesorios→ Herramientas del sistema y, a continuación, haga clic en Restaurar sistema. 2 Asegúrese de que ha seleccionado Restaurar mi equipo a un estado anterior y haga clic en Siguiente. 3 En el calendario, haga clic en la fecha a la que desea restaurar el equipo. La pantalla Selección de un punto de restauración proporciona un calendario que permite ver y seleccionar puntos de restauración. Todas las fechas con puntos de restauración disponibles aparecen en negrita. 4 Seleccione un punto de restauración y, a continuación, haga clic en Siguiente. Si una fecha del calendario sólo tiene un punto de restauración, se seleccionará automáticamente dicho punto. Si hay dos o más puntos de restauración disponibles, haga clic en el punto de restauración que prefiera. 5 Haga clic en Siguiente. La pantalla de Restauración finalizada aparece cuando la función Restaurar sistema ha finalizado de recoger los datos y a continuación se reinicia el equipo. 6 Cuando el equipo se reinicie, haga clic en Aceptar. Para cambiar el punto de restauración, puede repetir estos pasos usando un punto de restauración distinto o bien puede deshacer la restauración. Cómo deshacer la última operación de Restaurar sistema AVISO: Antes de deshacer la última restauración del sistema, guarde y cierre todos los archivos abiertos y cierre todos los programas. No cambie, abra ni elimine ningún archivo o programa hasta que haya restaurado totalmente el sistema. 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio, seleccione Todos los programas→ Accesorios→ Herramientas del sistema y, a continuación, haga clic en Restaurar sistema. 2 Seleccione Deshacer la última restauración y haga clic en Siguiente. Cómo utilizar la función Restaurar PC de Dell por Symantec Utilice la función Dell PC Restore by Symantec (Restaurar PC de Dell por Symantec) solamente como último recurso para restaurar su sistema operativo. La función PC Restore (Restaurar PC) restaura su unidad de disco duro al estado operativo que estaba cuando compró el equipo. Cualquier programa o archivo que se haya agregado desde que recibió su equipo— incluidos los archivos de datos—se borrarán permanentemente de la unidad de disco duro. Los archivos de datos Solución de problemas 63 incluyen: documentos, hojas de cálculo, mensajes de correo electrónico, fotos digitales, archivos de música, etc. Si es posible, cree una copia de seguridad de todos los datos antes de utilizar la función Restaurar PC. AVISO: Al utilizar la función Restaurar PC se borrarán permanentemente todos los datos de la unidad de disco duro y se quitarán las aplicaciones que se instalaron después de haber recibido el equipo. Si es posible, cree una copia de seguridad de los datos antes de utilizar la función Restaurar PC. Para utilizar la función Restaurar PC: 1 Encienda el equipo. Durante el proceso de inicio, aparecerá una barra azul con www.dell.com en la parte superior de la pantalla. 2 Pulse en el momento exacto que vea la barra azul. Si no pulsa a tiempo, deje que el equipo termine el reinicio y vuelva a reiniciarlo de nuevo. AVISO: Si no desea continuar con la función Restaurar PC, haga clic en Reiniciar en el siguiente paso. 3 En la pantalla siguiente que aparezca, haga clic en Restaurar. 4 En la pantalla siguiente, haga clic en Confirmar. El proceso de restauración tardará de 6 a 10 minutos aproximadamente para finalizar. 5 Cuando se le indique, haga clic en Terminar para reiniciar el equipo. NOTA: No apague el equipo manualmente. Haga clic en Terminar y deje que el equipo se reinicie completamente. 6 Cuando se le indique, haga clic en Sí. El equipo se reinicia. Puesto que el equipo se restaura a su estado operativo original, las pantallas que aparecen, como, por ejemplo, la pantalla Contrato de licencia del usuario final, son las mismas que aparecen cuando se enciede el equipo por primera vez. 7 Haga clic en Siguiente. Aparece la pantalla Restaurar sistema y, a continuación, el equipo se reinicia. 8 Cuando el equipo se reinicie, haga clic en Aceptar. Activación de la función Restaurar sistema Si vuelve a instalar Windows XP con menos de 200 MB de espacio libre disponible en el disco duro, se desactivará automáticamente la función Restaurar sistema. Para ver si la función Restaurar sistema está activada: 1 Haga clic en el botón Inicio y en Panel de control . 2 Haga clic en Rendimiento y administración. 3 Haga clic en Sistema.64 Solución de problemas w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m 4 Haga clic en la ficha Restaurar sistema. 5 Compruebe que no está activada la opción Desactivar Restaurar sistema. Eliminación de la función PC Restore AVISO: La función PC Restore (Restaurar PC) le permite restaurar el sistema operativo de su equipo al estado que estaba cuando compró el equipo. Se recomienda que no elimine la función PC Restore de su equipo, incluso si es para obtener espacio adicional en el disco duro. Si elimina la función PC Restore de la unidad de disco duro, nunca podrá volver a recuperarla ni tampoco utilizarla para volver el sistema operativo de su equipo al estado original. 1 Inicie el equipo como administrador local. 2 En el Explorador de Windows, vaya a c:\dell\utilities\DSR. 3 Haga doble clic en el nombre de archivo DSRIRRemv2.exe. NOTA: Si no inicia el equipo como administrador local, aparecerá un mensaje indicándole que debe hacerlo. Haga clic en Salir e inicie el equipo como administrador local. Si no existe la partición para la función PC Restore, aparecerá un mensaje indicando que no se ha encontrado la partición. Haga clic en Salir; no hay partición que borrar. 4 Haga clic en Aceptar para eliminar la partición. 5 Haga clic en Sí cuando aparezca un mensaje de confirmación. Se borra la partición y la partición c:\ se expande para incluir el nuevo espacio de disco disponible. Para comprobar el espacio disponible, haga clic con el botón derecho del ratón en la unidad c:\ en el Explorador de Windows y seleccione Propiedades. 6 Haga clic en Terminar para cerrar la ventana PC Restore Removal (Eliminación de la función PC Restore). 7 Reinicie el equipo.Adición y sustitución de piezas 65 Adición y sustitución de piezas Antes de empezar Este apartado proporciona procedimientos para quitar e instalar los componentes de su equipo. A menos que se señale lo contrario, cada procedimiento asume que existen las siguientes condiciones: • Ha realizado los pasos de la sección “Apagar el equipo.” • Ha leído la información de seguridad de la Guía de información del producto. Herramientas recomendadas Los procedimientos de este documento podrían requerir el uso de las siguientes herramientas: • Un destornillador pequeño de paletas planas • Un destornillador Phillips • Una punta trazadora de plástico pequeña • CD o disquete de actualización del programa BIOS flash Apagar el equipo Utilice las siguientes directrices de seguridad para proteger su equipo de posibles daños y para garantizar su propia seguridad personal. PRECAUCIÓN: Antes de comenzar cualquiera de los procedimientos de esta sección, siga las instrucciones de seguridad que se encuentran en la Guía de información del producto. AVISO: Sólo un técnico certificado debe realizar reparaciones en el equipo. La garantía no cubre los daños por reparaciones no autorizadas por Dell. PRECAUCIÓN: Manipule los componentes y las tarjetas con precaución. No toque los componentes o contactos ubicados en una tarjeta. Sostenga las tarjetas por sus bordes o por su soporte metálico de montaje. Sujete un componente, como un procesador, por sus bordes y no por sus patas. AVISO: Cuando desconecte un cable, tire de su conector o de su lazo liberador de tensión, y no del cable mismo. Algunos cables cuentan con un conector que tiene lengüetas de sujeción; si está desconectando un cable de este tipo, pulse las lengüetas de sujeción antes de desconectar el cable. Cuando separe conectores, manténgalos alineados para evitar doblar las patas del conector. Además, antes de conectar un cable, asegúrese de que los dos conectores estén orientados y alineados correctamente. 66 Adición y sustitución de piezas w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m AVISO: Para evitar daños en el equipo, realice los pasos siguientes antes de empezar a trabajar dentro del mismo. 1 Asegúrese de que la superficie de trabajo sea llana y esté limpia para evitar que la cubierta del equipo se raye. 2 Apague el equipo. 3 Asegúrese de que el equipo y los dispositivos conectados estén apagados. Si el equipo o los dispositivos conectados no se apagaron automáticamente cuando desactivó el equipo, pulse y mantenga pulsado el botón de alimentación durante 4 segundos. 4 Si el equipo está conectado (acoplado) a un dispositivo de acoplamiento, desacóplelo. Si desea instrucciones, consulte la documentación incluida con el dispositivo de acoplamiento. AVISO: Para desconectar un cable de red, desconecte primero el cable del equipo y, a continuación, del enchufe de red de la pared. 5 Desconecte del equipo todas las líneas telefónicas o de telecomunicaciones. 6 Desconecte el equipo y todos los dispositivos conectados de sus salidas eléctricas y, a continuación, pulse el botón de alimentación para conectar a tierra la placa base. AVISO: Para conectar un cable de red, primero conecte el cable a la toma de red de la pared y, después, al equipo. 7 Retire las PC Card instaladas de la ranura para PC Card. 8 Cierre la pantalla y coloque el equipo hacia abajo en una superficie plana. AVISO: Para evitar que se dañe la placa base, debe retirar la batería principal cuando abra el equipo. 9 Deslice y sostenga el pasador de liberación del compartimento de la batería y, a continuación, extraiga la batería del compartimento. 10 Extraiga los módulos instalados. 11 Extraiga la unidad de disco duro. Unidad de disco duro PRECAUCIÓN: Si extrae la unidad de disco duro del equipo cuando la unidad está caliente, no toque la caja metálica de dicha unidad. AVISO: Para evitar la pérdida de datos, apague el equipo (consulte la página 28) antes de extraer la unidad de disco duro. No extraiga la unidad de disco duro mientras el equipo se encuentre encendido, en modo de suspensión o en modo de hibernación. AVISO: Las unidades de disco duro son muy frágiles; basta un ligero golpe para dañarlas. NOTA: Dell no garantiza la compatibilidad para las unidades de disco duro de otros fabricantes ni proporciona asistencia técnica si sufren algún problema.Adición y sustitución de piezas 67 Para sustituir la unidad de disco duro en el compartimento correspondiente: 1 Siga las instrucciones que encontrará en el apartado “Antes de empezar” en la página 65. 2 Dé la vuelta al equipo y retire los tornillos de la unidad de disco duro. AVISO: Cuando la unidad de disco duro no esté en el equipo, guárdela en un embalaje protector antiestático. Consulte las instrucciones para desechar las baterías en la Guía de información del producto. 3 Tire de la unidad de disco duro para extraerla del equipo. 4 Extraiga la nueva unidad de su embalaje. Conserve el embalaje original para almacenar o transportar la unidad de disco duro. AVISO: Ejerza una presión firme y constante para deslizar la unidad hasta que encaje en su sitio. Si ejerce una fuerza excesiva, puede dañar el conector. 5 Inserte la unidad en el compartimento y empújela hasta que encaje totalmente en el compartimento. 6 Vuelva a colocar los tornillos y apriételos. 7 Instale el sistema operativo para su equipo. 8 Instale los controladores y utilidades para su equipo. Tornillos (2) Unidad de disco duro68 Adición y sustitución de piezas w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Devolución de una unidad de disco duro a Dell Cuando devuelva la unidad de disco duro a Dell, utilice el embalaje de espuma original o un embalaje similar. De lo contrario, la unidad de disco duro puede resultar dañada durante el transporte. Memoria Puede aumentar la memoria del sistema mediante la instalación de módulos de memoria en la placa base. Consulte la página 80 para obtener información sobre la memoria admitida por el equipo. Instale únicamente módulos de memoria adecuados para su equipo. 1 Siga las instrucciones que aparecen en la sección “Antes de comenzar” de la página 65. 2 Dé la vuelta al equipo, afloje el tornillo cautivo de la cubierta del módulo de memoria y levante la cubierta. Unidad de disco duro Embalaje de espumaAdición y sustitución de piezas 69 NOTA: Los módulos de memoria adquiridos a Dell están incluidos en la garantía del equipo. 3 Si va a cambiar un módulo de memoria, debe retirar el módulo existente. a Separe cuidadosamente con las puntas de los dedos los ganchos de fijación que se encuentran en los extremos del conector del módulo de memoria hasta que el módulo salga de su sitio. b Extraiga el módulo del conector. Tornillo cautivo Cubierta del módulo de memoria Ganchos de fijación Módulo de memoria70 Adición y sustitución de piezas w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m 4 Descargue la electricidad estática de su cuerpo e instale el nuevo módulo de memoria: NOTA: Si el módulo de memoria no está instalado correctamente, es posible que el equipo no arranque. Este fallo no se indicará mediante un mensaje de error. a Alinee la muesca del conector del extremo del módulo con la lengüeta de la ranura del conector. b Deslice el módulo firmemente en la ranura formando un ángulo de 45 grados y gírelo hasta que encaje en su sitio con un chasquido. Si no lo nota, retire el módulo y vuelva a instalarlo. 5 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta. AVISO: Si resulta difícil cerrar la cubierta del módulo de memoria, extraiga el módulo y vuelva a instalarlo. Si fuerza la cubierta para cerrarla, puede dañar el equipo. 6 Inserte la batería en el compartimento correspondiente o conecte el adaptador de CA al equipo y a una toma de corriente. 7 Encienda el equipo. Al reiniciarse el equipo, éste detecta la memoria adicional y actualiza automáticamente la información de configuración del sistema. Para confirmar la cantidad de memoria que hay instalada en el equipo, haga clic en el botón Inicio, seleccione Ayuda y soporte técnico y, a continuación, haga clic en Información del equipo.Adición y sustitución de piezas 71 Módem y minitarjeta PCI 1 Siga las instrucciones que encontrará en el apartado “Antes de empezar” en la página 65. 2 Dé la vuelta al equipo, afloje el tornillo cautivo de la cubierta del módem/minitarjeta PCI y levante la cubierta. 3 Continúe con las instrucciones que correspondan de las secciones: • Para agregar un módem, consulte la siguiente sección: “Cómo agregar un módem”. • Para agregar una minitarjeta PCI, consulte la página 72. Cómo cambiar el módem 1 Retire el módem actual: a Extraiga los tornillos que fijan el módem en la placa base y guárdelos aparte. b Tire de la lengüeta para sacar el módem de su conector de la placa base y desconecte el cable del módem. Tornillo cautivo Cubierta del módem/minitarjeta PCI72 Adición y sustitución de piezas w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m 2 Conecte el cable del módem al módem. AVISO: Los conectores de cable tienen la forma adecuada para una correcta inserción; no fuerce las conexiones. 3 Alinee el módem con los orificios para los tornillos e insértelo en el conector de la placa base. 4 Coloque los tornillos para fijar el módem a la placa base. 5 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta. Cómo agregar una minitarjeta PCI PRECAUCIÓN: La normativa FCC prohibe terminantemente a los usuarios instalar minitarjetas PCI LAN inalámbricas de 5 GHz (802.11a, 802.11a/b, 802.11a/b/g). Bajo ninguna circunstancia debe el usuario instalar ningún dispositivo de dicho tipo. Sólo el personal de servicio técnico formado por Dell tiene autorización para instalar una minitarjeta PCI LAN inalámbrica de 5 GHz. Si extrae o instala una minitarjeta PCI de 2,4 GHz (802.11b, 802.11b/g), siga las instrucciones que se indican a continuación. Sólo se pueden instalar los productos aprobados para su utilización en el equipo portátil. Las minitarjetas PCI aprobadas sólo se pueden comprar a Dell. NOTA: El usuario puede extraer e instalar las tarjetas PC LAN inalámbricas de 2,4 GHz. Conector del cable del módem Cable del módem Lengüeta de tiro Tornillos (2)Adición y sustitución de piezas 73 Si pidió una minitarjeta PCI con el equipo, ya estará instalada. 1 Si no hay ninguna minitarjeta PCI instalada, vaya al paso 2. Si está sustituyendo una minitarjeta PCI, retire la tarjeta existente. a Desconecte la minitarjeta PCI de los cables conectados. b Libere la minitarjeta PCI; para ello, separe las lengüetas metálicas de fijación hasta que la tarjeta se levante ligeramente. c Extraiga la minitarjeta PCI de su conector. AVISO: Para evitar dañar la minitarjeta PCI, no coloque nunca cables encima o debajo de la tarjeta. AVISO: Los conectores tienen la forma adecuada para garantizar que la inserción es correcta. Si nota resistencia, compruebe los conectores y vuelva a alinear la tarjeta. Minitarjeta PCI Conector de minitarjeta PCI Cables de antena (2) Lengüetas metálicas de fijación (2)74 Adición y sustitución de piezas w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m 2 Alinee la minitarjeta PCI con el conector hasta formar un ángulo de 45 grados y, a continuación, presiónela para insertarla en el conector. 3 Conecte los cables de antena a la minitarjeta PCI. 4 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta. Unidad de CD o DVD 1 Siga las instrucciones que encontrará en el apartado “Antes de empezar” en la página 65. 2 Dé la vuelta al equipo, afloje el tornillo cautivo de la cubierta del módulo de memoria y levante la cubierta. Minitarjeta PCI Conector de minitarjeta PCI Cables de antena (2)Adición y sustitución de piezas 75 3 Extraiga el tornillo “O” que se encuentra junto a la cubierta del módulo de memoria. 4 Apriete la palanca que se encuentra junto a los conectores del módulo de memoria en la dirección a la flecha indicada en la palanca (es decir, hacia la unidad) para liberar la unidad. 5 Extraiga la unidad del compartimento. Tornillo cautivo Cubierta del módulo de memoria Tornillo Palanca Unidad CD o DVD76 Adición y sustitución de piezas w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m 6 Inserte la nueva unidad en el compartimento hasta que quede totalmente encajada. 7 Vuelva a colocar el tornillo extraído en el paso 3. 8 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta del módulo de memoria y el tornillo. Teclado 1 Siga las instrucciones que encontrará en el apartado “Antes de empezar” en la página 65. 2 Use un destornillador plano pequeño o una punta de plástico para levantar el extremo derecho con muesca de la cubierta embellecedora y haga palanca en ella para extraerla. 3 Levante la cubierta y extráigala de las bisagras y del estuche inferior. 4 Extraiga los cuatro tornillos del teclado. AVISO: Las teclas del teclado son frágiles, se desencajan fácilmente y resulta muy entretenido volver a colocarlas. Tenga cuidado cuando extraiga y manipule el teclado. 5 Levante el teclado y apóyelo en las bisagras de la pantalla de modo que el conector del teclado quede visible. 6 Tire del conector del teclado para desconectarlo del conector de interfaz de la placa base. Cubierta con bisagrasAdición y sustitución de piezas 77 7 Extraiga el teclado. AVISO: para evitar dañar las patas de los conectores, inserte firmemente el conector del teclado en el conector de interfaz de la placa base y no invierta el conector del teclado. 8 Conecte el conector de teclado del otro teclado en el conector de interfaz de la placa base. Conector de interfaz Conector para teclado Tornillos para teclado (4) Teclado78 Adición y sustitución de piezas w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m 9 Inserte las cuatro pestañas de fijación del teclado en las ranuras correspondientes del apoyamanos y vuelva a colocar el teclado. Antes de intentar encajar completamente el teclado, asegúrese de que las cuatro pestañas de fijación están encajadas. 10 Vuelva a colocar los cuatro tornillos del teclado. 11 Vuelva a colocar la cubierta. Conector de interfaz Conector para teclado Tornillos para teclado (4) Teclado Pestañas de fijación (4)Apéndice 79 Apéndice Especificaciones NOTA: Las funciones de administración de energía limitan la velocidad del procesador cuando el equipo funciona con batería, para mantener los requisitos de ventilación del sistema o para mantener los requisitos de alimentación del sistema. Microprocesador Microprocesador Procesador Mobile Intel® Pentium® 4 o Intel Celeron® Caché L1 8 KB (interna) Caché L2 512 KB (Intel Pentium 4); 128 KB (Intel Celeron) Frecuencia de bus externa 400/533 MHz Información del sistema Conjunto de chips del sistema Intel 852GMV Amplitud del bus de datos 64 bits Amplitud del bus de DRAM 64 bits Amplitud del bus de direcciones del microprocesador 32 bits Tarjeta PC Controlador CardBus TI PCI1510 Conector de tarjetas PC admite una tarjeta del Tipo I o Tipo II Tarjetas admitidas de 3,3 V y 5 V Tamaño del conector de tarjetas PC de 68 patas Amplitud de datos (máxima) PCMCIA de 16 bits CardBus de 32 bits80 Apéndice w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Memoria Conector del módulo de memoria 2 zócalos SODIMM a los que puede acceder el usuario Capacidades del módulo de memoria 64, 128, 256 y 512 MB Tipo de memoria SODIMM de 2,5 V Memoria estándar 128 MB Memoria máxima 1 GB Tiempo de acceso a memoria: velocidad del reloj 266 MHz Puertos y conectores Vídeo conector de 15 orificios Audio Conector de micrófono, conector de auriculares o altavoces estéreo USB (2) Conector de 4 patas compatible con USB 2.0 Módem Conector RJ-11 LAN Ethernet Conector RJ-45 (opcional en algunos países) Comunicaciones Módem: Tipo v.92 56K MDC Controlador softmodem Interfaz Bus interno AC ’97 Adaptador de red tarjeta de sistema LAN Ethernet 10/100Apéndice 81 Vídeo Tipo de vídeo Gráficos directos integrados AGP Interfaz host AGP directo integrado Controlador de vídeo Intel UMA integrada Memoria de vídeo 1 MB con Intel DVMT hasta 32 MB (con 128 MB de memoria del sistema) o 64 MB (con 256 MB o más de memoria del sistema) Interfaz LCD SPWG-B Audio Tipo de audio AC’97 (soft audio) Controlador de audio Sigmatel 9750 Conversión estereofónica 18 bits (de analógica a digital) y 20 bits (de digital a analógica) Interfaces: Interna Bus PCI /AC’97 Externa Conector de entrada de micrófono, conector de auriculares o altavoces estéreo Altavoz Dos altavocesde 8 ohmios Amplificador de altavoz interno Canal de 1,0 W en 8 ohmios Controles de volumen Métodos abreviados de teclado, menús de programa82 Apéndice w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Pantalla Tipo (TFT matriz activa) XGA Dimensiones: 14,1 ó 15 pulgadas Altura: 14.1 pulgada 15 pulgada 214,3 mm (8,4 pulgadas) 228,1 mm (8,99 pulgadas) Anchura: 14.1 pulgada 15 pulgada 285,7 mm (11,2 pulgadas) 304,1 mm (11,97 pulgadas) Diagonal: 14.1 pulgada 15 pulgada 359.16 mm (14.1 pulgadas) 382.4 mm (15.1 pulgadas) Resoluciones máximas 1024 x 768 a 16,8 millones de colores Tiempo de respuesta (típico) 20 ms de subida (máximo) 30 ms de bajada (máximo) Frecuencia de actualización 60 Hz Ángulo de funcionamiento 0° (cerrado) a 180° Ángulos de vista: Horizontal ±40° Vertical +10°/–30° Separación entre píxeles 0,28 x 0,28 mm Consumo eléctrico: Panel con luz de fondo (normal) 5.2 W Controles el brillo puede controlarse mediante métodos abreviados del tecladoApéndice 83 Teclado Número de teclas 85 (EE.UU. y Canadá); 86 (Europa); 90 (Japón) Recorrido de tecla 2,7 mm ± 0,3 mm (0,11 pulgadas ± 0,016 pulgadas) Espacio entre teclas 19,05 mm ± 0,3 mm (0,75 pulgadas ± 0,012 pulgadas) Diseño QWERTY/AZERTY/Kanji Superficie táctil Resolución de posición X/Y (modo de tabla de gráficos) 240 cpp Tamaño: Anchura 64,88 mm (2,55 pulgadas) área activa mediante sensor Altura Rectángulo de 48,88 mm (1,92 pulgadas) Batería (8 celdas) Tipo Ión de litio "inteligente" de 8 celdas (65 WHr) Dimensiones: Profundidad 122,5 mm (4,8 pulgadas) Altura 19,2 mm (0,76 pulgadas) Anchura 147,5 mm (5,8 pulgadas) Peso 0,470 kg (1,03 lb) Voltaje 14,8 VDC Capacidad 4300 mAH Vida útil Puede reducirse significativamente bajo condiciones de mucho consumo. Consulte la página 29 para obtener más información acerca de la duración de la batería. Duración (aproximada) 300 ciclos de carga/descarga 0 Intervalo de temperatura: Carga/Descarga 0° a 35°C (32° a 95°F) En almacenamiento –40° a 65°C (–40° a 149°F)84 Apéndice w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Batería (12 celdas) Tipo Ión de litio "inteligente" de 12 celdas (96 Whr) Dimensiones: Profundidad 122,5 mm (4,8 pulgadas) Altura 19,2 mm (0,76 pulgadas) Anchura 147,5 mm (5,8 pulgadas) Peso 0,615 kg (1,35 lb) Voltaje 14,8 VDC Capacidad 6450 mAH Vida útil Puede reducirse significativamente bajo condiciones de mucho consumo. Consulte la página 29 para obtener más información acerca de la duración de la batería. Duración (aproximada) 300 ciclos de carga/descarga 0 Intervalo de temperatura: Carga/Descarga 0° a 35°C (32° a 95°F) En almacenamiento –40° a 65°C (–40° a 149°F) Adaptador de CA Voltaje de entrada De 100 a 240 V CA Intensidad de entrada (máxima) 1,5 A Frecuencia de entrada De 50 a 60 Hz Intensidad de salida 5,62 A (máximo en pulso de 4 segundos); 4,62 A (continuo) Potencia de salida 90 W estándar Voltaje nominal de salida 19.5 V de CC Dimensiones: Altura 34,2 mm (1,35 pulgadas) Anchura 60,9 mm (2,4 pulgadas) Profundidad 153,4 mm (6,04 pulgadas) Peso (con cables) 0,46 kg (1,0 lb)Apéndice 85 Intervalo de temperatura: En funcionamiento 0° a 35°C (32° a 95°F) En almacenamiento –40° a 65°C (–40° a 149°F) Aspectos físicos Altura Pantalla de 14,1 pulgadas 44,5–47,95 mm (1,75 pulgadas–1,89 pulgadas) Pantalla de 15 pulgadas 46,5–48,3 mm (1,83 pulgadas–1,90 pulgadas) Anchura Pantalla de 14,1 pulgadas 329 mm (12,9 pulgadas) Pantalla de 15 pulgadas 335 mm (13,1 pulgadas) Profundidad Pantalla de 14,1 pulgadas 275 mm (10,8 pulgadas) Pantalla de 15 pulgadas 275 mm (10,8 pulgadas) Peso: Con unidad de CD, batería de 8 celdas y pantalla de 14,1 pulgadas 3,3 kg (7,17 lb) Con unidad de CD, batería de 12 celdas y pantalla de 14,1 pulgadas 3,4 kg (7,57 lb) Con unidad de CD, batería de 8 celdas y pantalla de 15 pulgadas 3,5 kg (7,66 lb) Con unidad de CD, batería de 12 celdas y pantalla de 15 pulgadas 3,7 kg (8,07 lb) Aspectos ambientales Intervalo de temperatura: En funcionamiento 0° a 35°C (32° a 95°F) En almacenamiento –40° a 65°C (–40° a 149°F) Humedad relativa (máxima): En funcionamiento del 10% al 90% (sin condensación) En almacenamiento del 5% al 95% (sin condensación) Adaptador de CA (continuación)86 Apéndice w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Utilización del programa Configuración del sistema Visión general NOTA: El sistema operativo puede configurar automáticamente la mayoría de las opciones disponibles en el programa de configuración del sistema, anulando así las opciones establecidas por el usuario a través del programa de configuración del sistema. Para obtener más información acerca de la configuración de funciones del sistema operativo, consulte el centro de ayuda y soporte técnico. Para acceder a la ayuda, consulte la página 9. Las pantallas de configuración del sistema muestran la información y las selecciones de la configuración actual del equipo, como: • Configuración del sistema • Secuencia de arranque • Configuración de arranque (inicialización) y ajustes de configuración del dispositivo de acoplamiento • Selecciones de configuración básica de dispositivos • Ajustes de seguridad del sistema y de la contraseña de la unidad de disco duro AVISO: A menos que sea un usuario experto en informática o que el servicio de asistencia técnica de Dell le pida que lo haga, no cambie la configuración de este programa. Determinados cambios pueden hacer que el equipo no funcione correctamente. Vibración máxima: En funcionamiento 0,6 GRMS En almacenamiento 1.3 GRMS Impacto máximo (medido con la unidad de disco duro en posición de reposo y pulso de media onda de 2 ms): En funcionamiento 122 G En almacenamiento 163 G Altitud (máxima): En funcionamiento De –15.2 a 3048 m (de –50 a 10,000 pies) En almacenamiento De –15.2 a 10,668 m (de –50 a 35,000 pies) Aspectos ambientales (continuación)Apéndice 87 Visualización de las pantallas de configuración del sistema 1 Encienda (o reinicie) el equipo. 2 Cuando aparezca el logotipo de DELL™, pulse inmediatamente. Si tarda demasiado y aparece el logotipo de Windows, espere hasta que se muestre el escritorio de Windows. A continuación, apague el equipo (consulte la página 28) y vuelva a intentarlo. Pantallas de configuración del sistema NOTA: Para obtener información sobre un elemento específico de la pantalla de configuración del sistema, resalte el elemento y consulte el área de Ayuda de la pantalla. Se lista, en cada pantalla, a la izquierda las opciones de configuración del sistema. A la derecha de cada opción se encuentra la selección o el valor de dicha opción. Puede cambiar las selecciones que aparecen en blanco en la pantalla. Las opciones o valores que no se pueden cambiar (porque los determina o calcula el equipo) aparecen con menos brillo. En el cuadro que aparece en la esquina superior derecha de la pantalla se muestra información de ayuda sobre la opción resaltada actualmente; en el que aparece en la esquina inferior derecha se muestra información acerca del equipo. Las funciones clave del programa de configuración del sistema aparecen en la parte inferior de la pantalla. Opciones más utilizadas Ciertas opciones requieren que reinicie el equipo para que la nueva configuración sea efectiva. Cambio de la secuencia de arranque La secuencia de arranque indica al equipo dónde debe buscar para localizar el software necesario para iniciar el sistema operativo. Puede controlar la secuencia de inicio y activar o desactivar los dispositivos mediante la página Boot Order (Orden de inicio) del programa de configuración del sistema. NOTA: Para cambiar la secuencia de arranque para una sola vez, consulte página 88. La página Boot Order (Orden de inicio) muestra una lista general de los dispositivos de inicio que se pueden instalar en el equipo, que incluyen, entre otros, los siguientes: • Unidad de discos flexibles • Unidad de disco duro de compartimento para módulos • Unidad de disco duro interna • Unidad de CD/DVD/CD-RW Durante la rutina de inicio, el equipo comienza por la parte superior de la lista y examina los archivos de inicio del sistema operativo. Cuando el equipo encuentra los archivos, deja de buscar e inicia el sistema operativo. Para controlar los dispositivos de inicio, seleccione (resalte) un dispositivo presionando la tecla de flecha hacia arriba o hacia abajo y, a continuación, active o desactive el dispositivo o cambie su orden en la lista.88 Apéndice w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m • Para activar o desactivar un dispositivo, resalte el elemento Los elementos activados aparecen de color blanco y con un signo de exclamación a la izquierda; los elementos desactivados aparecen de color azul o atenuados y sin triángulo. • Pulse la tecla de flecha hacia la izquierda o hacia la derecha para cambiar la opción. • Para cambiar la posición de un dispositivo en la lista, resáltelo y, a continuación, pulse o (no se distingue entre mayúsculas y minúsculas) para desplazar hacia arriba o hacia abajo el dispositivo resaltado. Los cambios de la secuencia de inicio tendrán efecto tan pronto como los guarde y salga del programa de configuración del sistema. Arranque para una sola vez Puede configurar una secuencia de inicio para una sola vez sin tener que entrar en el programa de configuración del sistema. (También puede utilizar este procedimiento para iniciar desde los Diagnósticos de Dell en la partición de la utilidad de diagnóstico de la unidad de disco duro). 1 Apague el equipo. 2 Si el equipo está conectado (acoplado) a un dispositivo de acoplamiento, desacóplelo. Si desea instrucciones, consulte la documentación incluida con el dispositivo de acoplamiento. 3 Conecte el equipo a un enchufe eléctrico. 4 Encienda el equipo. Cuando aparezca el logotipo DELL, oprima inmediatamente . Si tarda demasiado y aparece el logotipo de Windows, espere hasta que se muestre el escritorio de Windows. A continuación, apague el equipo y vuelva a intentarlo. 5 Cuando aparezca el dispositivo de arranque, resalte el dispositivo desde el que desea arrancar y pulse . El equipo se iniciará desde el dispositivo seleccionado. La próxima vez que reinicie el equipo, se restaurará el orden de inicio normal. Optimización del rendimiento de la batería y el sistema Información general sobre el rendimiento del sistema El rendimiento del sistema puede verse reducido en determinadas condiciones para evitar que se realice un apagado automático y se pierdan datos. Entre las condiciones en las que se reduce el rendimiento se encuentran las siguientes: CA L EN T AMI EN T O D E L P R O C E S A D O R — El rendimiento se reduce cuando la temperatura del sistema sobrepasa los parámetros establecidos. Esta reducción del rendimiento ayuda a regular las temperaturas del sistema y de la superficie, lo cual evita que el equipo se apague debido a la temperatura excesiva del procesador. REN DIMI EN T O D E L A D A P T A D O R D E CA — El rendimiento se reduce cuando el equipo funciona con alimentación de CA y el consumo de energía sobrepasa los parámetros establecidos del adaptador de CA. Esta reducción del rendimiento garantiza que el sistema no intenta consumir más de lo que el adaptador Apéndice 89 de CA puede suministrar. CA P A CI D A D D E LA B A T E RÍ A — El rendimiento se reduce cuando el equipo funciona con batería y el consumo de energía sobrepasa la capacidad nominal de la batería, sobrepasa los niveles de descarga segura permitidos o cuando la temperatura de la superficie de la batería sobrepasa los 60 °C. Optimización del consumo de energía y del tiempo de carga de la batería El adaptador de CA tarda 3 horas aproximadamente en cargar una batería totalmente descargada con el equipo apagado. El tiempo de carga es significativamente superior si el equipo está encendido y funciona a una alta velocidad de procesador y niveles elevados de actividad del sistema. Si el equipo funciona a elevados niveles de actividad del sistema durante periodos prolongados de tiempo y la batería no se carga, intente operar con el equipo en modo de administración de energía mínima. Este modo puede mejorar el tiempo de carga y la duración de la batería. Según los niveles de actividad del sistema, el rendimiento del sistema puede verse reducido. Para establecer el modo de administración de energía mínima: NOTA: También puede pulsar el icono de medidor de energía de la barra de tareas. 1 Pulse el botón Inicio→ Panel de control→ Rendimiento y mantenimiento→ Opciones de energía. 2 Seleccione la ficha Combinaciones de energía. 3 En el menú desplegable Combinaciones de energía, pulse Modo de bajo consumo. Para obtener más información sobre la administración de energía, consulte el archivo de Ayuda de Dell Inspiron. Para acceder al archivo de ayuda, consulte la .página 9 Velocidad variable del ventilador El equipo utiliza una velocidad variable del ventilador a fin de evitar que el equipo se sobrecaliente. El ventilador funciona continuamente y la velocidad de éste puede variar según el uso. El ruido de los ventiladores es normal y no indica ningún problema del equipo o de los ventiladores. Política de soporte técnico de Dell (sólo EE.UU.) El soporte técnico asistido por personal técnico requiere la cooperación y la participación del cliente en el proceso de solución de problemas y permite restaurar el sistema operativo, los programas de software y los controladores de hardware a la configuración predeterminada original de Dell, así como verificar el funcionamiento correcto del equipo y del hardware instalado por Dell. Además de este soporte con intervención de un técnico, puede encontrar el mismo en línea en support.dell.com. Puede que haya opciones de soporte técnico adicionales con cargo. Dell proporciona asistencia técnica limitada para el equipo y el software y los periféricos instalados por Dell 1 . La asistencia para software y periféricos de terceros corresponde al fabricante original e incluye aquellos artículos comprados o instalados a través de Dell Software and Peripherals, Readyware y Custom Factory Integration 2 . 1 Se ofrecen servicios de reparación conforme a los términos y condiciones de la garantía limitada y el servicio 90 Apéndice w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m de asistencia opcional contratado al comprar el equipo. 2 Todos los componentes estándar de Dell incluidos en un proyecto Custom Factory Integration (CFI) están cubiertos por la garantía limitada estándar de Dell de su equipo. No obstante, Dell también amplía el programa de sustitución de piezas para incluir todos los componentes de hardware no estándar de terceros integrados a través de CFI durante todo el período de vigencia del contrato de asistencia para el equipo. Definición de software y dispositivos periféricos “instalados por Dell” El software instalado por Dell incluye el sistema operativo y parte de los programas de software instalados en el equipo durante el proceso de fabricación (Microsoft® Office, Norton Antivirus, etc.) Los dispositivos periféricos instalados por Dell incluyen las tarjetas internas de expansión, los compartimentos para módulos Dell y los accesorios de la tarjeta PC. Además, se incluyen todos los monitores, teclados, ratones, altavoces, micrófonos para módems telefónicos, estaciones de acoplamiento/replicadores de puerto, productos de red y todos los cables correspondientes de la marca Dell. Definición de software y dispositivos periféricos “de terceros” El software y los periféricos de terceros incluyen los periféricos, accesorios y programas de software vendidos por Dell pero que no son de la marca Dell (impresoras, escáneres, cámaras, juegos, etc.). El soporte para el software y los dispositivos periféricos de terceros lo proporciona el fabricante original del producto. Cómo ponerse en contacto con Dell Para ponerse en contacto con Dell de forma electrónica, puede acceder a los siguientes sitios web: • www.dell.com • support.dell.com (soporte técnico) • premiersupport.dell.com (soporte técnico para clientes de instituciones educativas, gubernamentales, sanitarias y de grandes y medianas empresas, incluidos los clientes Premier, Platinum y Gold) Para obtener las direcciones web de su país, busque la sección correspondiente en la siguiente tabla. NOTA: Los números de teléfono gratuitos son para uso dentro del país para el que aparecen. Cuando necesite ponerse en contacto con Dell, utilice las direcciones electrónicas, los números de teléfono y los códigos que se incluyen en la siguiente tabla. Si necesita ayuda para averiguar los códigos que debe utilizar, póngase en contacto con un operador de telefonía local o internacional.Apéndice 91 País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitos Alemania (Langen) Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 49 Código de ciudad: 6103 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: tech_support_central_europe@dell.com Asistencia técnica 06103 766-7200 Atención al cliente para particulares y pequeñas empresas 0180-5-224400 Atención al cliente para cuentas globales 06103 766-9570 Atención al cliente para cuentas preferentes 06103 766-9420 Atención al cliente para grandes cuentas 06103 766-9560 Atención al cliente para cuentas públicas 06103 766-9555 Centralita 06103 766-7000 Anguilla Asistencia general gratuito: 800-335-0031 Antigua y Barbuda Asistencia general 1-800-805-5924 Antillas Neerlandesas Asistencia general 001-800-882-1519 Argentina (Buenos Aires) Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 54 Código de ciudad: 11 Sitio web: www.dell.com.ar Correo electrónico: us_latin_services@dell.com Correo electrónico para equipos portátiles y de sobremesa: la-techsupport@dell.com Correco electrónico para servidores y productos de almacenamiento EMC® : la_enterprise@dell.com Atención al cliente gratuito: 0-800-444-0730 Asistencia técnica gratuito: 0-800-444-0733 Servicios de asistencia técnica gratuito: 0-800-444-0724 Ventas 0-810-444-3355 Aruba Asistencia general gratuito: 800-157892 Apéndice w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Australia (Sydney) Código de acceso internacional: 0011 Código de país: 61 Código de ciudad: 2 Correo electrónico (Australia): au_tech_support@dell.com Correo electrónico (Nueva Zelanda): nz_tech_support@dell.com Particulares y pequeñas empresas 1-300-655-533 Gobierno y empresas gratuito: 1-800-633-559 División de cuentas preferentes (PAD) gratuito: 1-800-060-889 Atención al cliente gratuito: 1-800-819-339 Asistencia técnica (para equipos portátiles y de escritorio) gratuito: 1-300-655-533 Asistencia técnica (servidores y estaciones de trabajo) gratuito: 1-800-733-314 Ventas corporativas gratuito: 1-800-808-385 Ventas de transacciones gratuito: 1-800-808-312 Fax gratuito: 1-800-818-341 Austria (Viena) Código de acceso internacional: 900 Código de país: 43 Código de ciudad: 1 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: tech_support_central_europe@dell.com Ventas a particulares y pequeñas empresas 0820 240 530 00 Fax para particulares y pequeñas empresas 0820 240 530 49 Atención al cliente para particulares y pequeñas empresas 0820 240 530 14 Atención al cliente para cuentas preferentes y corporaciones 0820 240 530 16 Asistencia técnica a particulares y pequeñas empresas 0820 240 530 14 Asistencia técnica a cuentas preferentes y corporaciones 0660 8779 Centralita 0820 240 530 00 Bahamas Asistencia general gratuito: 1-866-278-6818 Barbados Asistencia general 1-800-534-3066 País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitosApéndice 93 Bélgica (Bruselas) Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 32 Código de ciudad: 2 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico para clientes francófonos: support.euro.dell.com/be/fr/emaildell/ Asistencia técnica 02 481 92 88 Fax de asistencia técnica 02 481 92 95 Atención al cliente 02 713 15 .65 Ventas corporativas 02 481 91 00 Fax 02 481 92 99 Centralita 02 481 91 00 Bermuda Asistencia general 1-800-342-0671 Bolivia Asistencia general gratuito: 800-10-0238 Brasil Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 55 Código de ciudad: 51 Sitio web: www.dell.com/br Atención al cliente, asistencia técnica 0800 90 3355 Fax de asistencia técnica 51 481 5470 Fax de atención al cliente 51 481 5480 Ventas 0800 90 3390 Brunei Código de país: 673 Asistencia técnica al cliente (Penang, Malasia) 604 633 4966 Atención al cliente (Penang, Malasia) 604 633 4949 Ventas de transacciones (Penang, Malasia) 604 633 4955 Canadá (North York, Ontario) Código de acceso internacional: 011 Estado de pedidos en línea: www.dell.ca/ostatus AutoTech (asistencia técnica automatizada) gratuito: 1-800-247-9362 Atención al cliente (ventas a particulares y pequeñas empresas) gratuito: 1-800-847-4096 Atención al cliente para empresas medianas y grandes, y del gobierno gratuito: 1-800-326-9463 Asistencia técnica (ventas a particulares y pequeñas empresas) gratuito: 1-800-847-4096 Asistencia técnica para empresas medianas y grandes, y del gobierno gratuito: 1-800-387-5757 Ventas (particulares y pequeñas empresas) gratuito: 1-800-387-5752 Ventas (pequeñas y medianas empresas, instituciones gubernamentales) gratuito: 1-800-387-5755 Ventas de repuestos y por extensión de servicio 1866 440 3355 País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitos94 Apéndice w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Chile (Santiago) Código de país: 56 Código de ciudad: 2 Atención al cliente, asistencia técnica y ventas gratuito: 1230-020-4823 China (Xiamén) Código de país: 86 Código de ciudad: 592 Sitio web de asistencia técnica: support.dell.com.cn Correo electrónico de asistencia técnica: cn_support@dell.com Correo electrónico de atención al cliente: customer_cn@dell.com Fax de asistencia técnica 592 818 1350 Asistencia técnica (Dell™ Dimension™ e Inspiron™) gratuito: 800 858 2969 Asistencia técnica (OptiPlex™, Latitude™ y Dell Precision™) gratuito: 800858 0950 Asistencia técnica (servidores y almacenamiento) gratuito: 800858 0960 Asistencia técnica (proyectores, PDA, conmutadores, enrutadores y otros) gratuito: 800 858 2920 Soporte técnico (impresoras) gratuito: 800 858 2311 Atención al cliente gratuito: 800 858 2060 Fax de atención al cliente 592 818 1308 Particulares y pequeñas empresas gratuito: 800 858 2222 División de cuentas preferentes gratuito: 800 858 2557 Grandes cuentas corporativas GPC gratuito: 800 858 2055 Grandes cuentas corporativas y cuentas principales gratuito: 800 858 2628 Grandes cuentas corporativas del norte gratuito: 800 858 2999 Grandes cuentas corporativas del norte y del ámbito educativo gratuito: 800 858 2955 Grandes cuentas corporativas del este gratuito: 800 858 2020 Grandes cuentas corporativas del este y del ámbito educativo gratuito: 800 858 2669 Grandes cuentas corporativas del grupo de cola gratuito: 800 858 2572 Grandes cuentas corporativas del sur gratuito: 800 858 2355 Grandes cuentas corporativas del oeste gratuito: 800 858 2811 Grandes cuentas corporativas de diferentes partes gratuito: 800 858 2621 País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitosApéndice 95 Colombia Asistencia general 980-9-15-3978 Corea (Seúl) Código de acceso internacional: 001 Código de país: 82 Código de ciudad: 2 Asistencia técnica gratuito: 080-200-3800 Ventas gratuito: 080-200-3600 Atención al cliente (Penang, Malasia) 604 633 4949 Fax 2194-6202 Centralita 2194-6000 Asistencia técnica (electrónica y accesorios) gratuito: 080-200-3801 Costa Rica Asistencia general 0800-012-0435 Dinamarca (Copenhague) Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 45 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: support.euro.dell.com/dk/da/emaildell/ Asistencia técnica 7023 0182 Atención al cliente (relacional) 7023 0184 Atención al cliente para particulares y pequeñas empresas 3287 5505 Centralita (relacional) 3287 1200 Fax de la centralita (relacional) 3287 1201 Centralita (particulares y pequeñas empresas) 3287 5000 Fax de la centralita (particulares y pequeñas empresas) 3287 5001 Dominica Asistencia general gratuito: 1-866-278-6821 Ecuador Asistencia general gratuito: 999-119 País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitos96 Apéndice w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m EE.UU. (Austin, Texas) Código de acceso internacional: 011 Código de país: 1 Servicio automatizado para averiguar el estado de un pedido gratuito: 1-800-433-9014 AutoTech (para equipos portátiles y de escritorio) gratuito: 1-800-247-9362 Consumidor (Particular y oficina doméstica) Asistencia técnica gratuito: 1-800-624-9896 Atención al cliente gratuito: 1-800-624-9897 Servicio y asistencia DellNet™ gratuito: 1-877-Dellnet (1-877-335-5638) Clientes del programa de compra para empleados (EPP [Employee Purchase Program]) gratuito: 1-800-695-8133 Sitio web de servicios financieros: www.dellfinancialservices.com Servicios financieros (alquiler y préstamos) gratuito: 1-877-577-3355 Servicios financieros (cuentas preferentes de Dell [DPA, Dell Preferred Accounts]) gratuito: 1-800-283-2210 Empresa Atención al cliente y asistencia técnica gratuito: 1-800-822-8965 Clientes del programa de compra para empleados (EPP [Employee Purchase Program]) gratuito: 1-800-695-8133 Asistencia técnica para impresoras y proyectores gratuito: 1-877-459-7298 Público (gobierno, educación y sanidad) Atención al cliente y asistencia técnica gratuito: 1-800-456-3355 Clientes del programa de compra para empleados (EPP [Employee Purchase Program]) gratuito: 1-800-234-1490 Ventas de Dell gratuito: 1-800-289-3355 o gratuito: 1-800-879-3355 Dell Outlet Store (equipos Dell restaurados) gratuito: 1-888-798-7561 Venta de software y periféricos gratuito: 1-800-671-3355 Venta de piezas de repuesto gratuito: 1-800-357-3355 Venta de servicios y garantías ampliados gratuito: 1-800-247-4618 Fax gratuito: 1-800-727-8320 Servicios de Dell para personas sordas, con discapacidades auditivas o del habla gratuito: 1-877-DELLTTY (1-877-335-5889) País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitosApéndice 97 El Salvador Asistencia general 01-899-753-0777 Eslovaquia (Praga) Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 421 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: czech_dell@dell.com Asistencia técnica 02 5441 5727 Atención al cliente 420 22537 2707 Fax 02 5441 8328 Fax de asistencia técnica 02 5441 8328 Centralita (ventas) 02 5441 7585 España (Madrid) Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 34 Código de ciudad: 91 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: support.euro.dell.com/es/es/emaildell/ Residencias y empresas pequeñas Asistencia técnica 902 100 130 Atención al cliente 902 118 540 Ventas 902 118 541 Centralita 902 118 541 Fax 902 118 539 Corporativa Asistencia técnica 902 100 130 Atención al cliente 902 115 236 Centralita 91 722 92 00 Fax 91 722 95 83 Finlandia (Helsinki) Código de acceso internacional: 990 Código de país: 358 Código de ciudad: 9 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: support.euro.dell.com/fi/fi/emaildell/ Asistencia técnica 09 253 313 60 Atención al cliente 09 253 313 38 Fax 09 253 313 99 Centralita 09 253 313 00 País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitos98 Apéndice w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Francia (París) (Montpellier) Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 33 Códigos de ciudad: (1) (4) Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: support.euro.dell.com/fr/fr/emaildell/ Residencias y empresas pequeñas Asistencia técnica 0825 387 270 Atención al cliente 0825 823 833 Centralita 0825 004 700 Centralita (llamadas desde fuera de Francia) 04 99 75 40 00 Ventas 0825 004 700 Fax 0825 004 701 Fax (llamadas desde fuera de Francia) 0499754001 Corporativa Asistencia técnica 0825 004 719 Atención al cliente 0825 338 339 Centralita 01 55 94 71 00 Ventas 01 55 94 71 00 Fax 01 55 94 71 01 Grecia Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 30 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: support.euro.dell.com/gr/en/emaildell/ Asistencia técnica 00800-44 14 95 18 Asistencia técnica Gold Service 00800-44 14 00 83 Centralita 2108129810 Centralita para Gold Service 2108129811 Ventas 2108129800 Fax 2108129812 Granada Asistencia general gratuito: 1-866-540-3355 Guatemala Asistencia general 1-800-999-0136 Guayana Asistencia general gratuito: 1-877-270-4609 País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitosApéndice 99 Hong Kong Código de acceso internacional: 001 Código de país: 852 Sitio web: support.ap.dell.com Correo electrónico de asistencia técnica: apsupport@dell.com Asistencia técnica (Dimension e Inspiron) 2969 3188 Asistencia técnica (OptiPlex, Latitude y Dell Precision) 2969 3191 Asistencia técnica (PowerApp™, PowerEdge™, PowerConnect™ y PowerVault™) 2969 3196 Atención al cliente 3416 0910 Cuentas corporativas grandes 3416 0907 Programas globales para clientes 3416 0908 División de la mediana empresa 3416 0912 División de la pequeña empresa y la particular 2969 3105 India Asistencia técnica 1600 33 8045 Ventas (grandes cuentas corporativas) 1600 33 8044 Ventas (particulares y pequeñas empresas) 1600 33 8046 Irlanda (Cherrywood) Código de acceso internacional: 16 Código de país: 353 Código de ciudad: 1 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: dell_direct_support@dell.com Asistencia técnica 1850 543 543 Asistencia técnica en el Reino Unido (sólo para llamadas dentro del Reino Unido) 0870 908 0800 Atención al cliente (particulares) 01 204 4014 Atención al cliente para pequeñas empresas 01 204 4014 Atención al cliente en el Reino Unido (sólo para llamadas dentro del Reino Unido) 0870 906 0010 Atención al cliente para corporaciones 1850 200 982 Atención al cliente en el Reino Unido (sólo para llamadas dentro del Reino Unido) 0870 907 4499 Ventas para Irlanda 01 204 4444 Ventas en el Reino Unido (sólo para llamadas dentro del Reino Unido) 0870 907 4000 Fax/Fax de ventas 01 204 0103 Centralita 01 204 4444 País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitos100 Apéndice w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Islas Caimán Asistencia general 1-800-805-7541 Islas Turks y Caicos Asistencia general gratuito: 1-866-540-3355 Islas Vírgenes Americanas Asistencia general 1-877-673-3355 Islas Vírgenes Británicas Asistencia general gratuito: 1-866-278-6820 Italia (Milán) Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 39 Código de ciudad: 02 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: support.euro.dell.com/it/it/emaildell/ Residencias y empresas pequeñas Asistencia técnica 02 577 826 90 Atención al cliente 02 696 821 14 Fax 02 696 821 13 Centralita 02 696 821 12 Corporativa Asistencia técnica 02 577 826 90 Atención al cliente 02 577 825 55 Fax 02 575 035 30 Centralita 02 577 821 Jamaica Asistencia general (sólo para dentro de Jamaica) 1-800-682-3639 País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitosApéndice 101 Japón (Kawasaki) Código de acceso internacional: 001 Código de país: 81 Código de ciudad: 44 Sitio web: support.jp.dell.com Asistencia técnica (servidores) gratuito: 0120-198-498 Asistencia técnica fuera de Japón (servidores) 81-44-556-4162 Asistencia técnica (Dimension e Inspiron) gratuito: 0120-198-226 Asistencia técnica fuera de Japón (Dimension e Inspiron) 81-44-520-1435 Asistencia técnica (Dell Precision, OptiPlex y Latitude) gratuito: 0120-198-433 Asistencia técnica fuera de Japón (Dell Precision, OptiPlex y Latitude) 81-44-556-3894 Asistencia técnica (PDA, proyectores, impresoras, enrutadores) gratuito: 0120-981-690 Asistencia técnica fuera de Japón (PDA, proyectores, impresoras, enrutadores) 81-44-556-3468 Servicio Faxbox 044-556-3490 Servicio de pedidos automatizado las 24 horas del día 044-556-3801 Atención al cliente 044-556-4240 División de ventas corporativas (hasta 400 empleados) 044-556-1465 Ventas de la división de cuentas preferentes (más de 400 empleados) 044-556-3433 Ventas de grandes cuentas corporativas (más de 3.500 empleados) 044-556-3430 Ventas al sector público (agencias del Estado, instituciones educativas y médicas) 044-556-1469 Cuentas globales de Japón 044-556-3469 Usuario individual 044-556-1760 Centralita 044-556-4300 País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitos102 Apéndice w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Latinoamérica Asistencia técnica al cliente (Austin, Texas, EE.UU.) 512 728-4093 Atención al cliente (Austin, Texas, EE.UU.) 512 728-3619 Fax (Asistencia técnica y Servicio al cliente) (Austin, Texas, EE.UU.) 512 728-3883 Ventas (Austin, Texas, EE.UU.) 512 728-4397 Fax de ventas (Austin, Texas, EE.UU.) 512 728-4600 ó 512 728-3772 Luxemburgo Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 352 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: tech_be@dell.com Asistencia técnica (Bruselas, Bélgica) 3420808075 Ventas a particulares y pequeñas empresas (Bruselas, Bélgica) gratuito: 080016884 Ventas a corporaciones (Bruselas, Bélgica) 02 481 91 00 Atención al cliente (Bruselas, Bélgica) 02 481 91 19 Fax (Bruselas, Bélgica) 02 481 92 99 Centralita (Bruselas, Bélgica) 02 481 91 00 Macao Código de país: 853 Asistencia técnica gratuito: 0800 105 Servicio al cliente (Xiamen, China) 34 160 910 Ventas de transacción (Xiamen, China) 29115693 Malasia (Penang) Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 60 Código de ciudad: 4 Sitio web: support.ap.dell.com Asistencia técnica (Dell Precision, OptiPlex y Latitude) gratuito: 1 800 88 0193 Asistencia técnica (Dimension, Inspiron, y electrónica y accesorios) gratuito: 1 800 88 1306 Asistencia técnica (PowerApp, PowerEdge, PowerConnect y PowerVault) gratuito: 1 800 88 1386 Atención al cliente (Penang, Malasia) 04 633 4949 Ventas de transacciones gratuito: 1 800 888 202 Ventas corporativas gratuito: 1 800 888 213 País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitosApéndice 103 México Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 52 Asistencia técnica al cliente 001-877-384-8979 ó 001-877-269-3383 Ventas 50-81-8800 ó 01-800-888-3355 Atención al cliente 001-877-384-8979 ó 001-877-269-3383 Principal 50-81-8800 ó 01-800-888-3355 Montserrat Asistencia general gratuito: 1-866-278-6822 Nicaragua Asistencia general 001-800-220-1006 Noruega (Lysaker) Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 47 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: support.euro.dell.com/no/no/emaildell/ Asistencia técnica 671 16882 Atención relacional al cliente 671 17575 Atención al cliente para particulares y pequeñas empresas 23162298 Centralita 671 16800 Centralita de fax 671 16865 Nueva Zelanda Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 64 Correo electrónico (Nueva Zelanda): nz_tech_support@dell.com Correo electrónico (Australia): au_tech_support@dell.com Asistencia técnica (para equipos portátiles y de sobremesa) gratuito: 0800 446 255 Asistencia técnica (para servidores y estaciones de trabajo) gratuito:0800 443 563 Particulares y pequeñas empresas 0800 446 255 Gobierno y empresas 0800 444 617 Ventas 0800 441 567 Fax 0800 441 566 País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitos104 Apéndice w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Países bajos (Amsterdam) Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 31 Código de ciudad: 20 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Asistencia técnica 020 674 45 00 Fax de asistencia técnica 020 674 47 66 Atención al cliente para particulares y pequeñas empresas 020 674 42 00 Atención relacional al cliente 020 674 4325 Ventas a particulares y pequeñas empresas 020 674 55 00 Ventas relacionales 020 674 50 00 Ventas por fax a particulares y pequeñas empresas 020 674 47 75 Fax para ventas relacionales 020 674 47 50 Centralita 020 674 50 00 Fax de la centralita 020 674 47 50 Países del sureste asiático y del Pacífico Asistencia técnica, atención al cliente y ventas (Penang, Malasia) 604 633 4810 Panamá Asistencia general 001-800-507-0962 Perú Asistencia general 0800-50-669 Polonia (Varsovia) Código de acceso internacional: 011 Código de país: 48 Código de ciudad: 22 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: pl_support_tech@dell.com Teléfono de atención al cliente 57 95 700 Atención al cliente 57 95 999 Ventas 57 95 999 Fax de atención al cliente 57 95 806 Fax de la recepción 57 95 998 Centralita 57 95 999 Portugal Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 351 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: support.euro.dell.com/pt/en/emaildell/ Asistencia técnica 707200149 Atención al cliente 800 300413 Ventas 800 300 410, 800 300 411, 800 300 412 o 21 422 07 10 Fax 21 424 01 12 País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitosApéndice 105 Puerto Rico Asistencia general 1-800-805-7545 Reino Unido (Bracknell) Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 44 Código de ciudad: 1344 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Sitio web de atención al cliente: support.euro.dell.com/uk/en/ECare/Form/Home.asp Correo electrónico: dell_direct_support@dell.com Asistencia técnica (cuentas preferentes, corporativas o PAD, para más de 1000 empleados) 0870 908 0500 Asistencia técnica (directa y general) 0870 908 0800 Atención al cliente para cuentas globales 01344 373 186 Atención al cliente para particulares y pequeñas empresas 0870 906 0010 Atención al cliente para corporaciones 01344 373 185 Atención a clientes con cuentas preferentes (500–5.000 empleados) 0870 906 0010 Atención al cliente para el gobierno central 01344 373 193 Atención al cliente para el gobierno local y la educación 01344 373 199 Atención al cliente para temas de salud 01344 373 194 Ventas a particulares y pequeñas empresas 0870 907 4000 Ventas corporativas y al sector público 01344 860 456 Fax para particulares y pequeñas empresas 0870 907 4006 República checa (Praga) Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 420 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: czech_dell@dell.com Asistencia técnica 22537 2727 Atención al cliente 22537 2707 Fax 22537 2714 Fax de asistencia técnica 22537 2728 Centralita 22537 2711 República Dominicana Asistencia general 1-800-148-0530 País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitos106 Apéndice w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o m Singapur (Singapur) Código de acceso internacional: 005 Código de país: 65 Sitio web: support.ap.dell.com Asistencia técnica (Dimension, Inspiron, y electrónica y accesorios) gratuito: 1800 394 7430 Asistencia técnica (OptiPlex, Latitude y Dell Precision) gratuito: 1800 394 7488 Asistencia técnica (PowerApp, PowerEdge, PowerConnect y PowerVault) gratuito: 1800 394 7478 Atención al cliente (Penang, Malasia) 604 633 4949 Ventas de transacciones gratuito: 1 800 394 7412 Ventas corporativas gratuito: 1 800 394 7419 St. Kitts y Nevis Asistencia general gratuito: 1-877-441-4731 St. Lucia Asistencia general 1-800-882-1521 St. Vicente y las Granadinas Asistencia general gratuito: 1-877-270-4609 Sudáfrica (Johannesburgo) Código de acceso internacional: 09/091 Código de país: 27 Código de ciudad: 11 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: dell_za_support@dell.com Gold Queue 011 709 7713 Asistencia técnica 011 709 7710 Atención al cliente 011 709 7707 Ventas 011 709 7700 Fax 011 706 0495 Centralita 011 709 7700 Suecia (Upplands Vasby) Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 46 Código de ciudad: 8 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: support.euro.dell.com/se/sv/emaildell/ Asistencia técnica 08 590 05 199 Atención relacional al cliente 08 590 05 642 Atención al cliente para particulares y pequeñas empresas 08 587 70 527 Soporte para el programa de compra para empleados (EPP [Employee Purchase Program]) 20 140 14 44 Fax de asistencia técnica 08 590 05 594 Ventas 08 590 05 185 País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitosApéndice 107 Suiza (Ginebra) Código de acceso internacional: 00 Código de país: 41 Código de ciudad: 22 Sitio web: support.euro.dell.com Correo electrónico: Tech_support_central_Europe@dell.com Correo electrónico para clientes HSB y corporativos francófonos: support.euro.dell.com/ch/fr/emaildell/ Asistencia técnica (particulares y pequeñas empresas) 0844 811 411 Asistencia técnica (corporaciones) 0844 822 844 Atención al cliente para particulares y pequeñas empresas 0848 802 202 Atención al cliente para corporaciones 0848 821 721 Fax 022 799 01 90 Centralita 022 799 01 01 Tailandia Código de acceso internacional: 001 Código de país: 66 Sitio web: support.ap.dell.com Asistencia técnica (OptiPlex, Latitude y Dell Precision) gratuito: 1800 0060 07 Asistencia técnica (PowerApp, PowerEdge, PowerConnect y PowerVault) gratuito: 1800 0600 09 Atención al cliente (Penang, Malasia) 604 633 4949 Ventas corporativas gratuito: 1800 006 009 Ventas de transacciones gratuito: 1800 006 006 Taiwán Código de acceso internacional: 002 Código de país: 886 Sitio web: support.ap.dell.com Correo electrónico: ap_support@dell.com Asistencia técnica (OptiPlex, Latitude, Inspiron, Dimension, y electrónica y accesorios) gratuito: 00801 86 1011 Asistencia técnica (PowerApp, PowerEdge, PowerConnect y PowerVault) gratuito: 00801 60 1256 Ventas de transacciones gratuito: 00801 65 1228 Ventas corporativas gratuito: 00801 651 227 Trinidad y Tobago Asistencia general 1-800-805-8035 Uruguay Asistencia general gratuito: 000-413-598-2521 Venezuela Asistencia general 8001-3605 País (Ciudad) Código del país Código de acceso internacional Código de la ciudad Nombre del departamento o área de servicio, sitio web y dirección de correo electrónico Códigos de área, números locales y números de teléfono gratuitos108 Apéndice w w w . d e l l . c o m | s u p p o r t . d e l l . c o mÍndice 109 Índice A acondicionadores de línea, 28 alimentación apagar el equipo, 28 dispositivos de protección, 27 solucionar problemas, 31 altavoces descripción, 14 vista del sistema, 14 apagar el equipo, 28 archivo de ayuda, 10 asistencia cómo ponerse en contacto con Dell, 90 B batería advertencia de bajo nivel de carga de la batería, 30 almacenar, 31 cargar, 30 comprobar la carga, 30 descripción, 17, 21 extraer, 31 instalar, 31 medidor de energía, 30 rendimiento, 29 vista del sistema, 17, 21 bloqueos, 56 botón AccessDirect descripción, 16 vista del sistema, 16 botón de alimentación descripción, 16 vista del sistema, 16 botones de la superficie táctil descripción, 15 vista del sistema, 15 C caracteres inesperados, 38 CD copiar, 41 Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico, 11 cerrar el equipo, 28 conector de red descripción, 20 vista del sistema, 20 conector de vídeo descripción, 20 vista del sistema, 20 conector del módem descripción, 18 vista del sistema, 18 conector USB descripción, 20 vista del sistema, 20 conectores de audio descripción, 17 vista del sistema, 17 conexión a Internet acerca de, 23 configurar, 23 opciones, 23 conflictos resolver incompatibilidades de software y hardware, 61 controladores volver a instalar, 59 copiar CD y DVD cómo, 41 consejos prácticos, 42 información general, 41 correo electrónico solucionar problemas, 25 cubierta de la minitarjeta PCI/módem descripción, 21 vista del sistema, 21 cubierta del módulo de memoria descripción, 21 vista del sistema, 21110 Índice 110 Índice D Dell ponerse en contacto, 90 sitio de asistencia, 11 Dell Diagnostics, 49 diagnósticos Dell, 49 Diagrama de instalación, 9 documentación archivo de ayuda, 10 Diagrama de instalación, 9 en línea, 11 Guía de información del sistema, 9 DVD copiar, 41 E equipo bloqueos, 56 especificaciones, 79 restaurar a estado anterior, 61 equipo dañado probar, 58 equipo mojado, 57 escáner solución de problemas, 54 especificaciones, 79 etiqueta de Microsoft Windows, 10 etiqueta de servicio, 10 etiquetas etiqueta de servicio, 10 Microsoft Windows, 10 G garantía, 9 H hardware Dell Diagnostics, 49 I impresora cable, 26 conexión, 25 instalación, 25 USB, 26 indicadores de estado del dispositivo descripción, 15 indicadores de estado del teclado descripción, 14 vista del sistema, 14 instalar piezas antes de empezar, 65 apagar el equipo, 65 herramientas recomendadas, 65 instrucciones de seguridad, 9 M memoria extraer, 69 módem agregar, 71 P pantalla descripción, 13 vista del sistema, 13 problemas Dell Diagnostics, 49 restaurar a estado anterior, 61 programa Configuración del sistema opciones más utilizadas, 87 pantallas, 87 propósito, 86 visualizar, 87 programa de configuración del sistema pantallas, 87 programas bloqueos, 56 no responde, 57 R ranura para cable de seguridad descripción, 18 vista del sistema, 18 ranura para tarjeta PC descripción, 16 vista del sistema, 16Índice 111 red solucionar problemas, 44 red inalámbrica tipo, 44 rejillas de ventilación descripción, 18-19, 21 vista del sistema, 18-19, 21 Restaurar sistema, 61 S SAI, 28 seguro de la pantalla descripción, 13 vista del sistema, 13 seguro de liberación de la batería descripción, 21 vista del sistema, 21 sistema operativo volver a instalar, 61 volver a instalar Windows XP, 61 sistemas de alimentación ininterrumpida Consulte SAI sitio web Dell Premier Support, 9, 11 software solucionar problemas, 56 volver a instalar software, 59 solución de problemas bloqueo de programas, 56 caracteres inesperados, 38 Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico, 11 conflictos, 61 Dell Diagnostics, 49 equipo mojado, 57 equipo que se ha caído o dañado, 58 escáner, 54 no puede guardar en un disco flexible, 55 no se puede guardar en el disquete, 55 problemas con el correo electrónico, 25 problemas con la red, 44 problemas con la tarjeta PC, 56 problemas de alimentación eléctrica, 31 restaurar a estado anterior, 61 Solucionador de problemas de hardware, 61 un programa no responde, 57 Solucionador de problemas de hardware, 61 superficie táctil descripción, 15 personalizar, 36 vista del sistema, 15 supresores de sobrevoltaje, 27 T Tarjeta PC solucionar problemas, 56 teclado caracteres inesperados, 38 descripción, 14 métodos abreviados, 34 numérico, 33 solucionar problemas, 38 sustituir, 76 vista del sistema, 14 U unidad de CD o DVD descripción, 17 sustituir, 74 vista del sistema, 17 unidad de disco duro descripción, 21 devolución a Dell, 68 sustituir, 66 vista del sistema, 21 unidad de disco flexible solución de problemas, 55 solucionar problemas, 55 unidad de DVD Consulte unidad de CD o DVD unidades Consulte unidad de disco duro solucionar problemas, 55 V vistas del sistema anterior, 13 inferior, 19, 21 lateral derecha, 17 lateral izquierda, 16 posterior, 19 volver a inst, 61112 Índice 112 Índice volver a instalar controladores, 59 Windows XP, 61 W Windows XP Centro de ayuda y soporte técnico, 11 Desinstalación del controlador de dispositivo, 60 impresora, 27 Restaurar sistema, 61 Solucionador de problemas de hardware, 61 volver a instalar, 61 Dell PowerEdge C8220 Hardware Owner’s Manual Regulatory Model: B05B Regulatory Type: B05B001Notes, Cautions, and Warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates potential damage to hardware or loss of data if instructions are not followed. WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. ____________________ Information in this publication is subject to change without notice. © 2012 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden. Trademarks used in this text: Dell™, the DELL logo, and PowerEdge™ are trademarks of Dell Inc. Intel is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other countries. Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this publication to refer to either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc. disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than its own. Regulatory Model B05B Regulatory Type: B05B001 2012 - 08 P/N XXXXX Rev. A00Contents 3 Contents 1 About Your System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Accessing System Features During Startup. . . . . . . 11 Front-Panel Features and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . 12 NIC Indicator Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Power and System Board Indicator Codes . . . . . . . 16 BMC Heartbeat Indicator Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Service Tag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 POST Error Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Collecting System Event Log for Investigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 System Event Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Processor Error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Memory Ecc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 PCIe Error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 IOH Core Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 SB Error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 POST Start Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 POST End Event. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 POST Error Code Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 BIOS Recovery Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 ME Fail Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 SEL Generator ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 Contents BMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Other Information You May Need . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 2 Using the System Setup Program . . . . . 45 System Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 System Setup Options at Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Using the System Setup Program Navigation Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 General Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Console Redirection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Enabling and Configuring Console Redirection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Serial Port Connection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Main Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Advanced Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 CPU Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Memory Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 SATA Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 PCI Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 USB Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Security Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Server Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 View System Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Contents 5 Boot Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Exit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Command Line Interfaces for System Setup Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 IPMI Command List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Power Management Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 3 Installing System Components . . . . . . . 125 Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Recommended Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Inside the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Sled Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Sled. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Removing a Sled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Installing a Sled. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Sled Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Removing a Sled Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Installing a Sled Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 SD Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Removing a SD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Installing a SD Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Sled Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Removing the Front Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Installing the Front Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Removing the Back Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Installing the Back Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1356 Contents Cooling Shroud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Removing the Cooling Shroud . . . . . . . . . . 135 Installing the Cooling Shroud . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Heat Sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Removing a Heat Sink. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Installing a Heat Sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Removing a Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Installing a Processor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 System Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Memory Module Installation Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Supported DIMM Configuration . . . . . . . . . 144 Removing Memory Modules . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Installing Memory Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Expansion Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Removing the Expansion Card . . . . . . . . . . 148 Installing the Expansion Card. . . . . . . . . . . 149 Expansion Card Riser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Removing the Expansion Card Riser . . . . . . . 150 Installing the Expansion Card Riser. . . . . . . . 151 Mezzanine Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Removing the Infiniband Mezzanine Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Installing the Infiniband Mezzanine Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Removing the 10 GbE Mezzanine Card . . . . . . 155 Installing the 10 GbE Mezzanine Card . . . . . . 157Contents 7 SD Card Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Removing the SD Card Reader . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Installing the SD Card Reader . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Removing the SD Card Reader Support Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Installing the SD Card Reader Support Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Internal Hard-Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Removing a Hard-Drive Carrier. . . . . . . . . . . 162 Installing a Hard-Drive Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Removing a Hard-Drive From the Hard-Drive Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Installing a Hard-Drive Into a Hard-Drive Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Removing the Hard-Drive Tray . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Installing the Hard-Drive Tray . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Interposer Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Removing the Interposer Extender . . . . . . . . . 167 Installing the Interposer Extender . . . . . . . . . 168 Node Power Distribution Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Removing the Node Power Distribution Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Installing the Node Power Distribution Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 System Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Removing the System Battery . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Installing the System Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . 172 System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Removing the System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Installing the System Board . . . . . . . . . . . . 1758 Contents 4 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Safety First—For You and Your System . . . . . . . . 177 Installation Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Troubleshooting System Startup Failure. . . . . . . . 178 Troubleshooting External Connections . . . . . . . . 178 Troubleshooting the Video Subsystem. . . . . . . . . 178 Troubleshooting a USB Device . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Troubleshooting a Serial I/O Device. . . . . . . . . . 179 Troubleshooting a NIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Troubleshooting a Wet Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Troubleshooting a Damaged Enclosure . . . . . . . . 182 Troubleshooting the Enclosure Fan Modules . . . . . 183 Troubleshooting the Power Sled . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Troubleshooting System Memory . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Troubleshooting a Hard-Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Troubleshooting a Storage Controller . . . . . . . . . 188 Troubleshooting Expansion Cards . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Troubleshooting Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Troubleshooting the System Board . . . . . . . . . . 191 Troubleshooting the System Battery . . . . . . . . . . 192 IRQ Assignment Conflicts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193Contents 9 5 Jumpers and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . 195 System Board Jumper Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 System Board Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Interposer Extender Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 SD Card Reader Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Node Power Distribution Board Connectors . . . . . . 201 6 Getting Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Contacting Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20510 ContentsAbout Your System 11 1 About Your System Accessing System Features During Startup The following keystrokes provide access to system features during startup. The SAS/SATA card or PXE hotkey support are available only in the BIOS boot mode. Hotkey function is not available in the Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) boot mode. Keystroke Description Enters the System Setup program. See "System Setup Menu" on page 45. Enters the BIOS Boot Manager or the Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) Boot Manager, depending on the system's boot configuration. See "System Setup Options at Boot" on page 46. Starts Preboot eXecution Environment (PXE) boot. Enters the LSI 2008 SAS Mezzanine Card Configuration Utility. For more information, see the SAS adapter documentation. Enters the LSI 2008 SAS Mezzanine Card Configuration Utility. For more information, see the documentation for your SAS RAID card. Enters the utility to configure onboard NIC settings for PXE boot. For more information, see the documentation for your integrated NIC. Enters the onboard SAS and SATA controller’s configuration utility. 12 About Your System Front-Panel Features and Indicators Figure 1-1. Front-Panel Features and Indicators Item Indicator, Button, or Connector Icon Description 1 USB connectors Connects USB devices to the system. The ports are USB 2.0 compliant. 2 Mezzanine card expansion slot Installs an I/O module mezzanine card. 3 Low profile PCIe expansion slot Installs a low profile PCI Express x16 card. 4 Release latch Press to release the sled from the enclosure. 1 2 3 5 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12About Your System 13 5 Power-on indicator/ power button The power-on indicator lights when the sled power is on. The power-on indicator lights amber when the system critical event occurs. The power button turns the compute sled on. NOTE: When powering on the sled, the video monitor can take from several seconds to over 2 minutes to display an image, depending on the amount of memory installed in the system. NOTE: On ACPI-compliant operating systems, turning off the sled using the power button causes the sled to perform a graceful shutdown before power to the sled is turned off. NOTE: To force an ungraceful shutdown, press and hold the power button for five seconds. 6 VGA connector Connects a VGA display to the system. 7 Serial connector Connects a serial device to the system. 8 BMC management port Dedicated management port. 9 Ethernet connector 2 Embedded 10/100/1000 Mbit NIC connector. 10 Ethernet connector 1 Embedded 10/100/1000 Mbit NIC connector. 11 Sled identification indicator Lights blue to identify a particular system and system board. 12 Handle Hold to pull the sled from the enclosure. Item Indicator, Button, or Connector Icon Description 2 114 About Your System NIC Indicator Codes Figure 1-2. NIC Indicators 1 link indicator 2 activity indicator Indicator Status Indicator Code Link indicator Solid amber Linking at 100 Mbps port speed Solid green Linking at 1 Gbps port speed (maximum) Blinking green Linking at 1 Gbps port speed Network activity is present • Pre OS POST • OS without driver • OS with driver Blinks at speed relative to packet density Off Linking at 10 Mbps port speed Activity indicator Solid green No activity Blinking green Transmit or receive activity Off IdleAbout Your System 15 Figure 1-3. NIC Indicators (BMC management port) 1 link indicator 2 activity indicator Indicator Status Indicator Code Link indicator Blinking amber Linking at 10 Mbps port speed Blinking green Linking at 100 Mbps port speed (maximum) Activity indicator Solid green No activity Blinking green Transmit or receive activity Off Idle16 About Your System Power and System Board Indicator Codes The indicators on the front of the sled display status codes during system startup. For location of the indicators on the front panel, see Figure 1-1. Table 1-1. Power and System Board Indicator Codes Indicator Color Status Indicator Code Power-on indicator Green Solid Sled power is on (S0) Amber Off Green Solid BMC critical condition event in power off mode (S4/S5) Amber Blinking Green Blinking BMC critical condition event in power on mode (S0) Amber Blinking System identification indicator Blue Solid The IPMI via Chassis Identify Command On or ID Button Press ID On is generated. Blue Blinking Only the IPMI via Chassis Identify Command Blink On is generated. Off The IPMI via Chassis Identify Command Off or ID Button Press ID Off is generated.About Your System 17 BMC Heartbeat Indicator Codes The system board includes a BMC heartbeat indicator (LED17) for debugging the Baseboard Management Controller (BMC). The BMC heartbeat indicator lights green when power is supplied to the sled and blinks green when the BMC firmware is ready. Figure 1-4. BMC Heartbeat Indicator 1 system board 2 BMC heartbeat indicator18 About Your System Service Tag The following illustration provides location of the Service Tag number on the C8220 single-wide compute sled. Figure 1-5. Service Tag Location for C8220 Single-Wide Compute SledAbout Your System 19 POST Error Code Collecting System Event Log for Investigation Whenever possible, the system BIOS will output the current boot progress codes on the video screen. Progress codes are 32-bit quantities plus optional data. The 32-bit numbers include class, subclass, and operation information. The class and subclass fields point to the type of hardware that is being initialized. The operation field represents the specific initialization activity. Based on the data bit availability to display progress codes, a progress code can be customized to fit the data width. The higher the data bit, the higher the granularity of information that can be sent on the progress port. The progress codes may be reported by the system BIOS or option ROMs. The Response section in the following table may be divided into 3 types: • Warning or Not an error – The message is displayed on the screen. An error record is logged to the SEL. The system will continue booting with a degraded state. The user may want to replace the erroneous unit. • Pause – The message is displayed on the screen, an error is logged to the SEL, and user input is required to continue. The user can take immediate corrective action or choose to continue booting. • Halt – The message is displayed on the screen, an error is logged to the SEL, and the system cannot boot unless the error is resolved. The user needs to replace the faulty part and restart the system. Error Code Error Message Response Error Cause Corrective Actions 0010h Local Console Resource Conflict Pause Video device initialization failed See "Troubleshooting the Video Subsystem" on page 178. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 0011h Local Console Controller Error Pause Video device initialization failed See "Troubleshooting the Video Subsystem" on page 178. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203.20 About Your System 0012h Local Console Output Error Pause Video device initialization failed See "Troubleshooting the Video Subsystem" on page 178. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 0013h ISA IO Controller Error Pause ISA device initialization failed See "Troubleshooting Expansion Cards" on page 189. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 0014h ISA IO Resource Conflict Pause ISA device initialization failed See "Troubleshooting Expansion Cards" on page 189. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 0015h ISA IO Controller Error Pause ISA device initialization failed See "Troubleshooting Expansion Cards" on page 189. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 0016h ISA Floppy Controller Error Pause Floppy device initialization failed See "Troubleshooting a USB Device" on page 178. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 0017h ISA Floppy Input Error Pause Floppy device initialization failed See "Troubleshooting a USB Device" on page 178. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 0018h ISA Floppy Output Error Pause Floppy device initialization failed See "Troubleshooting a USB Device" on page 178. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. Error Code Error Message Response Error Cause Corrective ActionsAbout Your System 21 0019h USB Read Error Pause USB port initialization failed See "Troubleshooting a USB Device" on page 178. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 001Ah USB Write Error Pause USB port initialization failed See "Troubleshooting a USB Device" on page 178. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 001Bh USB Interface Error Pause USB port initialization failed See "Troubleshooting a USB Device" on page 178. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 001Ch Mouse Interface Error Pause Mouse device initialization failed To enable USB device, see "USB Configuration" on page 77. See "Troubleshooting a USB Device" on page 178. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 001Eh Keyboard Not Detected Pause No keyboard detected To enable USB device, see "USB Configuration" on page 77. See "Troubleshooting a USB Device" on page 178. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 001Fh Keyboard Controller Error Pause Keyboard controller initialization failed See "Troubleshooting a USB Device" on page 178. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. Error Code Error Message Response Error Cause Corrective Actions22 About Your System 0020h Keyboard Stuck Key Error Pause Keyboard key stuck Disconnect and reconnect the the keyboard to the compute sled. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 0021h Keyboard Locked Error Pause Keyboard locked Disconnect and reconnect the the keyboard to the compute sled. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 0023h Memory Correctable Error Pause Memory correctable error detected Remove AC power to the system for 10 seconds and restart the system. See "Troubleshooting System Memory" on page 185. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 0024h Memory Uncorrectable Error Pause Memory uncorrectable error detected See "Troubleshooting System Memory" on page 185. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 0025h Memory NonSpecific Error Pause Memory nonspecific error detected See "Troubleshooting System Memory" on page 185. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 0026h MP Service Self Test Error Pause MP service self test error detected See "Troubleshooting Processors" on page 190. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. Error Code Error Message Response Error Cause Corrective ActionsAbout Your System 23 0027h PCI IO Controller Error Pause PCI device initialization failed See "Troubleshooting Expansion Cards" on page 189. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 0028h PCI IO Read Error Pause PCI device initialization failed See "Troubleshooting Expansion Cards" on page 189. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 0029h PCI IO Write Error Pause PCI device initialization failed See "Troubleshooting Expansion Cards" on page 189. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 002Ah Serial Port Not Detected Pause Serial device initialization failed See "Troubleshooting a Serial I/O Device" on page 179. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 002Bh Serial Port Controller Error Pause Serial device initialization failed See "Troubleshooting a Serial I/O Device" on page 179. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 002Ch Serial Port Input Error Pause Serial device initialization failed See "Troubleshooting a Serial I/O Device" on page 179. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 002Dh Serial Port Output Error Pause Serial device initialization failed See "Troubleshooting a Serial I/O Device" on page 179. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. Error Code Error Message Response Error Cause Corrective Actions24 About Your System 002Eh Microcode Update Error Pause Processor microcode update error Check microcode. A BIOS update is required. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 002Fh No Microcode Be Updated Pause Processor microcode load failed Ensure that your processors match and conform to the type described in the processor technical specifications outlined in your system’s Getting Started Guide. 8012h SATA 0 Device Not Found Pause SATA 0 device not found Check if the SATA port 0 is enabled. See "SATA Configuration" on page 67. Install a SATA device to SATA port 0. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 8013h SATA 1 Device Not Found Pause SATA 1 device not found Check if the SATA port1 is enabled. See "SATA Configuration" on page 67. Install a SATA device to SATA port 1. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 8014h SATA 2 Device Not Found Pause SATA 2 device not found Check if the SATA port 2 is enabled. See "SATA Configuration" on page 67. Install a SATA device to SATA port 2. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. Error Code Error Message Response Error Cause Corrective ActionsAbout Your System 25 8015h SATA 3 Device Not Found Pause SATA 3 device not found Check if the SATA port 3 is enabled. See "SATA Configuration" on page 67. Install a SATA device to SATA port 3. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 8016h SATA 4 Device Not Found Pause SATA 4 device not found Check if the SATA port 4 is enabled. See "SATA Configuration" on page 67. Install a SATA device to SATA port 4. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 8017h SATA 5 Device Not Found Pause SATA 5 device not found Check if the SATA port 5 is enabled. See "SATA Configuration" on page 67. Install a SATA device to SATA port 5. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 8018h Sparing Mode is not be Configured!!, Please check Memory Configuration!! Pause Memory Sparing Mode Failed Check if the memory configuration is set to Sparing mode. See "Memory Configuration" on page 65. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 8019h Mirror Mode is not be Configured!!, Please check Memory Configuration!! Pause Memory Mirror Mode Failed Check if the memory configuration is set to Sparing mode. See "Memory Configuration" on page 65. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. Error Code Error Message Response Error Cause Corrective Actions26 About Your System 8020h Supervisor and User Passwords have been cleared Pause Supervisor and User Passwords have been cleared Reset password. See "System Board Jumper Settings" on page 195. If the problem persists, see "Getting Help" on page 203. 8020h CMOS Battery Error Pause No CMOS battery See "Troubleshooting the System Battery" on page 192. Error Code Error Message Response Error Cause Corrective ActionsAbout Your System 27 System Event Log Processor Error Message: “Processor Sensor, IERR error, Processor 1” Table 1-2. Processor Error Byte Field Value Description 1 NetFunLun 10h 2 Platform Event Command 02h 3 Generator ID 01h Generated by BIOS 4 Event Message Format Version 04h Event Message Format Revision. 04h for this specification 5 Sensor Type 07h Processor 6 Sensor Number 04h Processor Sensor Number (depends on platform) 7 Event Direction Event Type 6Fh Bit 7: 0 = Assert Event Bit 6: 0 = Event Type Code 8 Event Data1 AXh 00h: IERR 01h: Thermal Trip 02h: FRB1/BIST Failure 03h: FRB2/Hang in POST Failure 04h: FBR3/Processer Startup/Initialization Failure 0Ah: Processor Automatically Throttled 9 Event Data2 XXh 00h: Processor1 01h: Processor2 02h: Processor3 04h: Processor4 10 Event Data3 FFh FFh: Not Present28 About Your System Memory Ecc Message: “Memory Sensor, Correctable ECC error, SBE warning threshold, CPU1 DIMM_A1” Table 1-3. Memory ECC Byte Field Value Description 1 NetFunLun 10h 2 Platform Event Command 02h 3 Generator ID 01h Generated by BIOS 4 Event Message Format Version 04h Event Message Format Revision. 04h for this specification 5 Sensor Type 0Ch Memory 6 Sensor Number 60h Memory Sensor Number (depend on platform) 7 Event Direction Event Type 6Fh Bit 7: 0 = Assert Event Bit 6: 0 = Event Type Code 8 Event Data1 AXh 00h: Correctable ECC Error 01h: Uncorrectable ECC Error 03h: Memory Scrub Failed 04h: Memory Device Disabled 08h: SpareAbout Your System 29 9 Event Data2 XXh Bit 7:4 0x00: SBE warning threshold 0x01: SBE critical threshold 0x0F: Unspecified Bit 3:0 0x00: CPU1 DIMM A1-8 slots (1~8) 0x01: CPU2 DIMM B1-8 slots (9~16) 0x02: CPU3 DIMM C1-8 slots (17~24) 0x03: CPU4 DIMM D1-8 slots (25~32) And so on… 10 Event Data3 XXh DIMM bit-map locatation of bits Bit 0=1: DIMM1 error event Bit 1=1: DIMM2 error event … Bit7=1: DIMM8 error event Table 1-3. Memory ECC Byte Field Value Description30 About Your System PCIe Error Message: “Critical Interrupt Sensor, PCI PERR, Device#, Function#, Bus# ” Table 1-4. PCIe Error Byte Field Value Description 1 NetFunLun 10h 2 Platform Event Command 02h 3 Generator ID 01h Generated by BIOS 4 Event Message Format Version 04h Event Message Format Revision. 04h for this specification 5 Sensor Type 13h Critical Interrupt 6 Sensor Number 73h PCI Sensor ID (depend on platform) 7 Event Direction Event Type 6Fh Bit 7: 0 = Assert Event Bit 6: 0 = Event Type Code 8 Event Data1 AXh 04h: PCI PERR 05h: PCI SERR 07h: Bus Correctable Error 08h: Bus Uncorrectable Error 0Ah: Bus Fatal Error 9 Event Data2 XXh Bit 7:3Device Number Bit 2:0Function Number 10 Event Data3 XXh Bit 7:0 Bus NumberAbout Your System 31 IOH Core Error Message: “Critical Interrupt Sensor, Fatal Error, xxxx bit, QPI[0] Error ” Table 1-5. IOH Core Error Byte Field Value Description 1 NetFunLun 10h 2 Platform Event Command 02h 3 Generator ID 01h Generated by BIOS 4 Event Message Format Version 04h Event Message Format Revision. 04h for this specification 5 Sensor Type C0h OEM Defined Interrupt 6 Sensor Number XXh 71h: QPI Sensor ID (depend on platform) 72h: INT Sensor ID (depend on platform) 7 Event Direction Event Type 6Fh Bit 7: 0 = Assert Event Bit 6: 0 = Event Type Code 8 Event Data1 AXh 07h: Core 08h: Non-Fatal 0Ah: Fatal 9 Event Data2 XXh Local Error Bit 10 Event Data3 XXh 00h: QPI[0] Error 01h: QPI[1] Error 02h: QPI[2] Error 03h: QPI[3] Error 04h: QPI[0] Protocol Error 05h: QPI[1] Protocol Error 06h: QPI[2] Protocol Error 07h: QPI[3] Protocol Error 23h: Miscellaneous Error 24h: IOH Core Error32 About Your System SB Error Message: “Critical Interrupt Sensor, Correctable, MCU Parity Error ” Table 1-6. SB Error Byte Field Value Description 1 NetFunLun 10h 2 Platform Event Command 02h 3 Generator ID 01h Generated by BIOS 4 Event Message Format Version 04h Event Message Format Revision. 04h for this specification 5 Sensor Type 13h Critical Interrupt 6 Sensor Number 77h SB Sensor ID (depend on platform) 7 Event Direction Event Type 6Fh Bit 7: 0 = Assert Event Bit 6: 0 = Event Type Code 8 Event Data1 AXh 07h: Correctable 08h: Uncorrectable 9 Event Data2 XXh Bit 7:5Reserved Local error bit number (4 ~ 0) 00000b: HT Periodic CRC Error 00001b: HT Protocol Error 00010b: HT Flow-Control Buffer Overflow 00011b: HT Response Error 00100b: HT Per-Packet CRC Error 00101b: HT Retry Counter Error 00111b: MCU Parity Error 10 Event Data3 FFh FFh: Not PresentAbout Your System 33 POST Start Event Message: “System Event, POST starts with BIOS xx.xx.xx” Table 1-7. POST Start Event Byte Field Value Description 1 NetFunLun 10h 2 Platform Event Command 02h 3 Generator ID 01h Generated by BIOS 4 Event Message Format Version 04h Event Message Format Revision. 04h for this specification 5 Sensor Type 12h System Event 6 Sensor Number 81h POST Start (depend on platform) 7 Event Direction Event Type 6Fh Bit 7: 0 = Assert Event Bit 6: 0 = Event Type Code 8 Event Data1 AXh 01h: OEM System Boot Event 9 Event Data2 XXh 7~4: BIOS 1st Field Version (0~15) 3~0: BIOS 2nd Field Version higher 4bits (0~63) 10 Event Data3 XXh 7~6: BIOS 2nd Field Version lower 2bits (0~63) 5~0: BIOS 3rd Field Version (0~63)34 About Your System POST End Event Table 1-8. POST End Event Byte Field Value Description 1 NetFunLun 10h 2 Platform Event Command 02h 3 Generator ID 01h Generated by BIOS 4 Event Message Format Version 04h Event Message Format Revision. 04h for this specification 5 Sensor Type 12h System Event 6 Sensor Number 85h POST End (depend on platform) 7 Event Direction Event Type 6Fh Bit 7: 0 = Assert Event Bit 6: 0 = Event Type Code 8 Event Data1 AXh 01h: OEM System Boot Event 9 Event Data2 XXh Bit 7 = Boot Type 0b: PC Compatible Boot (Legacy) 1b: uEFI Boot Bit 3:0 = Boot Device 0001b: Force PXE Boot 0010b: NIC PXE Boot 0011b: Hard Disk Boot 0100b: RAID HDD Boot 0101b: USB Storage Boot 0111b: CD/DVD ROM Boot 1000b: iSCSI Boot 1001b: uEFI Shell 1010b: ePSA Diagnostic Boot 10 Event Data3 FFh FFh: Not PresentAbout Your System 35 POST Error Code Event Message: “System Firmware Progress, POST error code: UBLBh.” Table 1-9. POST Error Code Event Byte Field Value Description 1 NetFunLun 10h 2 Platform Event Command 02h 3 Generator ID 01h Generated by BIOS 4 Event Message Format Version 04h Event Message Format Revision. 04h for this specification 5 Sensor Type 0Fh System Firmware Progress 6 Sensor Number 86h POST Error (depend on platform) 7 Event Direction Event Type 6Fh Bit 7: 0 = Assert Event Bit 6: 0 = Event Type Code 8 Event Data1 AXh 00: System Firmware Error (POST Error) 9 Event Data2 XXh Upper Byte 10 Event Data3 XXh Lower Byte36 About Your System BIOS Recovery Event Table 1-10. BIOS Recovery Event Byte Field Value Description 1 NetFunLun 10h 2 Platform Event Command 02h 3 Generator ID 01h Generated by BIOS 4 Event Message Format Version 04h Event Message Format Revision. 04h for this specification 5 Sensor Type 12h System Event 6 Sensor Number 89h BIOS Recovery fail (depend on platform) 7 Event Direction Event Type 6Fh Bit 7: 0 = Assert Event Bit 6: 0 = Event Type Code 8 Event Data1 AXh 01h: OEM BIOS recovery Event 9 Event Data2 XXh 01h:Start Recovery 02h:Recovery Success 03h:Load Image Fail 04h:Signed Fail 10 Event Data3 FFh FFh: Not PresentAbout Your System 37 ME Fail Event SEL Generator ID Table 1-11. BIOS Recovery Event Byte Field Value Description 1 NetFunLun 10h 2 Platform Event Command 02h 3 Generator ID 01h Generated by BIOS 4 Event Message Format Version 04h Event Message Format Revision. 04h for this specification 5 Sensor Type 12h System Event 6 Sensor Number 8Ah ME fail (depend on platform) 7 Event Direction Event Type 6Fh Bit 7: 0 = Assert Event Bit 6: 0 = Event Type Code 8 Event Data1 AXh 01h: OEM ME fail Event 9 Event Data2 XXh 01h:ME fail 10 Event Data3 FFh FFh: Not Present Table 1-12. SEL Generator ID Generator ID BIOS 0x0001 BMC 0x0020 ME 0x002C Windows 2008 0x013738 About Your System BMC The following table includes an overview of the system sensors. In the Offset column: • SI = Sensor Initialization • SC = Sensor Capabilities • AM = Assertion Mask • DM = Deassertion Mask • RM = Reading Mask • TM = Settable/Readable Threshold Mask Table 1-13. Sensor Summary Sensor Number Sensor Name Sensor Type Event/Reading Type Offset 01h SEL Fullness Event Logging Disabled (10h) Sensor-specific (6Fh) SI: 67h SC: 40h AM: 0035h DM: 0000h RM: 0035h 02h P1 Thermal Trip Processor (07h) Sensor-specific (6Fh) SI: 01h SC: 40h AM: 0002h DM: 0000h RM: 0002h 03h P2 Thermal Trip Processor (07h) Sensor-specific (6Fh) SI: 01h SC: 40h AM: 0002h DM: 0000h RM: 0002hAbout Your System 39 Table 1-14. Sensor Summary (continued) Sensor Number Sensor Name Sensor Type Event/Reading Type Offset 04h CPU ERR2 Processor (07h) Sensor-specific (6Fh) SI: 01h SC: 40h AM: 0001h DM: 0000h RM: 0001h 05h 12V Standby Voltage (02h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh SC: 59h AM: 7A95h DM: 7A95h TM: 3F3Fh 06h 5V Voltage (02h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh SC: 59h AM: 7A95h DM: 7A95h TM: 3F3Fh 07h 5V Standby Voltage (02h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh SC: 59h AM: 7A95h DM: 7A95h TM: 3F3Fh 08h 3.3V Voltage (02h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh SC: 59h AM: 7A95h DM: 7A95h TM: 3F3Fh40 About Your System Table 1-15. Sensor Summary (continued) Sensor Number Sensor Name Sensor Type Event/Reading Type Offset 09h 3.3V Standby Voltage (02h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh SC: 59h AM: 7A95h DM: 7A95h TM: 3F3Fh 0Ah Battery low Battery (29h) Sensor-specific (6Fh) SI: 67h SC: 40h AM: 0001h DM: 0000h RM: 0001h 41h MEZZ1 TEMP Temperature (01h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh SC: 68h AM: 0A80h DM: 0A80h TM: 3838h 41h CPU1 Temp Temperature (01h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh SC: 68h AM: 0A80h DM: 0A80h TM: 3838h 42h CPU2 Temp Temperature (01h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh SC: 68h AM: 0A80h DM: 0A80h TM: 3838hAbout Your System 41 Table 1-16. Sensor Summary (continued) Sensor Number Sensor Name Sensor Type Event/Reading Type Offset 43h DIMM ZONE 1 Temp Temperature (01h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh SC: 68h AM: 0A80h DM: 0A80h TM: 3838h 44h DIMM ZONE 1 Temp Temperature (01h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh SC: 68h AM: 0A80h DM: 0A80h TM: 3838h 45h PCH Temp Temperature (01h) Threshold (01h) SI: 7Fh SC: 68h AM: 0A80h DM: 0A80h TM: 3838h 60h Memory Memory (0Ch) Sensor-specific (6Fh) SI: 01h SC: 40h AM: 0023h DM: 0000h RM: 0023h A0h Watchdog Watchdog 2 (23h) Sensor-specific (6Fh) SI: 67h SC: 40h AM: 000Fh DM: 0000h RM: 000Fh42 About Your System Table 1-17. Sensor Summary (continued) Sensor Number Sensor Name Sensor Type Event/Reading Type Offset A1h Soft Reset System Boot/ Restart Initiated (1Dh) Sensor-specific (6Fh) SI: 01h SC: 40h AM: 0004h DM: 0000h RM: 0004h A2h AC lost Power Unit (09h) Sensor-specific (6Fh) SI: 01h SC: 40h AM: 0010h DM: 0000h RM: 0010h A3h Power off Power Unit (09h) Sensor-specific (6Fh) SI: 01h SC: 40h AM: 0002h DM: 0000h RM: 0002hAbout Your System 43 Other Information You May Need WARNING: See the safety and regulatory information that shipped with your system. Warranty information may be included within this document or as a separate document. • The Getting Started Guide provides an overview of rack installation, system features, setting up your system, and technical specifications. • The PowerEdge C8000 Hardware Owner’s Manual for information about the server enclosure features, troubleshooting, and component replacement.. This document is available at support.dell.com/manuals. • The Baseboard Management Controller Guide provides information about installing and using the systems management utility. See Using the Baseboard Management Controller Guide at support.dell.com/manuals. NOTE: Always check for updates on support.dell.com/manuals and read the updates first because they often supersede information in other documents. 44 About Your SystemUsing the System Setup Program 45 2 Using the System Setup Program The System Setup program is the BIOS program that enables you to manage your system hardware and specify BIOS-level options. From the System Setup program, you can: • Change the NVRAM settings after you add or remove hardware • View the system hardware configuration • Enable or disable integrated devices • Set performance and power management thresholds • Manage system security System Setup Menu The system employs the latest Insyde® BIOS, which is stored in Flash memory. The Flash memory supports the Plug and Play specification, and contains a System Setup program, the Power On Self Test (POST) routine, and the PCI auto-configuration utility. This system supports system BIOS shadowing which enables the BIOS to execute from 64-bit onboard write-protected DRAM. You can configure items such as: • Hard-drives, diskette drives, and peripherals • Password protection • Power management features The Setup utility should be executed under the following conditions: • When changing the system configuration • When a configuration error is detected by the system and you are prompted to make changes to the Setup utility • When redefining the communication ports to prevent any conflicts46 Using the System Setup Program • When changing the password or making other changes to the security setup NOTE: Only items in brackets [ ] can be modified, Items that are not in brackets are display only. System Setup Options at Boot You can initiate Setup by pressing the respective key during the POST: Using the System Setup Program Navigation Keys The following table lists the keys found in the legend bar with their corresponding alternates and functions: Keystroke Description Enter the System Setup Load customized defaults Load optimal defaults in Setup menu Save and exit Setup Keys Function F1 General Help or  Select Screen or  Select Item  Change Option/Field Tab Select Field Esc Exit Enter Go to Sub Screen Home Go to Top of Screen End Go to Bottom of ScreenUsing the System Setup Program 47 General Help In addition to the Item Specific Help window, the Setup Utility also provides a General Help screen. This screen can be called up from any menu by pressing . The General Help screen lists the legend keys with their corresponding alternates and functions. To exit the help window, press or . Console Redirection The console redirection allows a remote user to diagnose and fix problems on a server, which has not successfully booted the operating system (OS). The centerpiece of the console redirection is the BIOS Console. The BIOS Console is a Flash ROM-resident utility that redirects input and output over a serial or modem connection. The BIOS supports console redirection to a serial port. If serial port based headless server support is provided by the system, the system must provide support for redirection of all BIOS driven console I/O to the serial port. The driver for the serial console must be capable of supporting the functionality documented in the ANSI Terminal Definition. The console redirection behavior shows a change of string displays that reduce the data transfer rate in the serial port and cause the absence or an incomplete POST screen. If you see an abnormal POST screen after you connect to the console, it is recommended to press to reflash the screen. Enabling and Configuring Console Redirection Console redirection is configured through the System Setup program. There are three options available to establish console redirection on the system. • External serial port • Internal serial connector as Serial Over LAN (SOL) • BMC SOL48 Using the System Setup Program Enabling and Configuring Console Redirection Via COM1 To activate console redirection via COM1, you must configure the following settings: 1 Connect the serial cable to the serial port and host system. See Figure 1-1 for the location of the serial port on the sled. 2 Press immediately after a power-on or reboot to enter System Setup. 3 In the System Setup screen, select the Server menu and press . 4 In the Server screen, select Remote Access Configuration and press . 5 In the Remote Access Configuration screen, verify the following settings: • Remote Access: Enabled • Serial port number: COM1 • Serial Port Mode: 115200 8,n,1 • Flow Control: None • Redirection After BIOS POST: Always • Terminal Type: ANSI See "Remote Access Configuration" on page 83 for details. Make sure the last four options syncs with the host and client. 6 Press to return to the System Setup screen. Press again, and a message prompts you to save the changes. Enabling and Configuring Console Redirection Via COM2 SOL To activate console redirection via COM2 SOL, you must configure the following settings: 1 Connect the serial cable to the serial port and host system. See Figure 1-1 for the location of the serial port on the sled. 2 Press immediately after a power-on or reboot to enter System Setup. 3 In the System Setup screen, select the Server menu and press . 4 In the Server screen, select Remote Access Configuration and press .Using the System Setup Program 49 5 In the Remote Access Configuration screen, verify the following settings: • Remote Access: Enabled • Serial port number: COM2 as SOL • Serial Port Mode: 115200 8,n,1 • Flow Control: None • Redirection After BIOS POST: Always • Terminal Type: ANSI See "Remote Access Configuration" on page 83 for details. Make sure the host and client are on the same network. 6 Press to return to the System Setup screen. Press again, and a message prompts you to save the changes. Enabling and Configuring Console Redirection Via BMC SOL When using the BMC management port, you have two options for connecting and managing servers: Dedicated-NIC mode and Shared-NIC mode. The following procedures show the setup option of the BMC management port through a Dedicated-NIC or Shared-NIC. To activate console redirection via a dedicated BMC management port, you must configure the following settings: 1 Connect the network cable to the BMC management port. See Figure 1-1 for the location of the BMC management port on the sled. 2 Press immediately after a power-on or reboot to enter System Setup. 3 In the System Setup screen, select the Server menu and press . 4 In the Server screen, select Remote Access Configuration and press . 5 In the Remote Access Configuration screen, verify the following settings: • Remote Access: Enabled • Serial port number: COM2 as SOL • Serial Port Mode: 115200 8,n,1 • Flow Control: None • Redirection After BIOS POST: Always50 Using the System Setup Program • Terminal Type: ANSI See "Remote Access Configuration" on page 83 for details. Make sure the last four options syncs with the host and client. 6 In the Server screen, select BMC LAN Configuration and press . 7 In the BMC LAN Configuration screen, verify the following settings: • BMC LAN Port Configuration: Dedicated-NIC • BMC NIC IP Source: DHCP or Static (Use DHCP if your network servers are using automatic assignment of IP addresses) • IP Address: 192.168.001.003 • Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.000 • Gateway Address: 000.000.000.000 See "Set BMC LAN Configuration" on page 82 for details. Make sure the host and client are on the same network 8 Press to return to the System Setup screen. Press again, and a message prompts you to save the changes. To activate console redirection via a shared BMC management port, you must configure the following settings: 1 Connect the network cable to the Ethernet connector 1. See Figure 1-1 for the location of the Ethernet connector 1 on the sled. 2 Press immediately after a power-on or reboot to enter System Setup. 3 In the System Setup screen, select the Server menu and press . 4 In the Server screen, select Remote Access Configuration and press . 5 In the Remote Access Configuration screen, verify the following settings: • Remote Access: Enabled • Serial port number: COM2 • Serial Port Mode: 115200 8,n,1 • Flow Control: None • Redirection After BIOS POST: Always • Terminal Type: ANSIUsing the System Setup Program 51 See "Remote Access Configuration" on page 83 for details. Make sure the last four options syncs with the host and client. 6 In the Server screen, select BMC LAN Configuration and press . 7 In the BMC LAN Configuration screen, verify the following settings: • BMC LAN Port Configuration: Shared-NIC • BMC NIC IP Source: DHCP or Static (Use DHCP if your network servers are using automatic assignment of IP addresses) • IP Address: 192.168.001.003 • Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.000 • Gateway Address: 000.000.000.000 See "Set BMC LAN Configuration" on page 82 for details. Make sure the host and client are on the same network 8 Press to return to the System Setup screen. Press again, and a message prompts you to save the changes. Serial Port Connection List Signal Type Setup Option OS Setting Output Remote Access Serial Port Number Serial Port Address Serial Console Redirection Enabled COM1 3F8h/2F8h ttyS0 Serial Port Enabled COM1 2F8h/3F8h ttyS1 BMC Serial Over LAN Enabled COM2 as SOL 3F8h/2F8h ttyS1 Management Port Enabled COM2 as SOL 2F8h/3F8h ttyS052 Using the System Setup Program Main Menu The main menu displays information about your system boards and BIOS. Main Screen NOTE: Press to enter the BIOS debug mode and reset the BIOS to default settings. NOTE: The options for the System Setup program change based on the system configuration. NOTE: The System Setup program defaults are listed under their respective options in the following sections, where applicable. Using the System Setup Program 53 System Settings Option Description System Date Scroll to this item to adjust the date. Use , or to select a field. Use [+] or [-] to configure system date. System Time Scroll to this item to adjust the time. Use , or to select a field. Use [+] or [-] to configure system time. Product Name Displays the system product name. BIOS Version Displays the BIOS version. NOTE: Check this version number when updating BIOS from the manufacturer. BIOS Build Date Displays the date the BIOS was created. Service Tag Displays the system service tag number. The service tag field should match what is physically on the service tag of the system. Asset Tag Displays the system asset tag number. MRC Version Displays the Memory Reference Code (MRC) firmware version. ME Version Displays the Manageability Engine (ME) firmware version. BMC Version Displays the Baseboard Management Controller (BMC) firmware version. ePPID Displays the information from Electronic Piece Part Identification (ePPID) label. NIC1 MAC Address Displays the Media Access Control (MAC) address for the NIC1 connector. NIC2 MAC Address Displays the MAC address for the NIC2 connector. BMC NIC MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the BMC management port. Processor Type Displays the processor type. Processor Speed Displays the maximum speed of the processor. Processor Core Displays the processor core. System Memory Size Displays total memory size installed on the system board.54 Using the System Setup Program System Memory Speed Displays the maximum speed of your system memory. System Memory Voltage Displays the maximum voltage of your system memory. Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 55 Advanced Menu The advanced menu displays a table of items that defines advanced information about your system. Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. CAUTION: Making incorrect settings to items on these pages may cause the system to malfunction. Unless you have experience adjusting these items, it is recommended that you leave these settings at the default values. If making settings to items on these pages causes your system to malfunction or prevents the system from booting, open BIOS and choose "Load Optimal Defaults" in the Exit menu to boot up normally.56 Using the System Setup Program Power Management Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. Power Management Option Description Power Management (OS Control default) Select a system power management mode. • Maximum Performance: Sets the system power management to maximum performance. • OS Control: Allows the operating system to control the power management. • Node Manager: Enables Node Manager to moderate power consumption and performance of the processors in the compute sled. Node manager delivers power reporting and power capping functionality for individual compute sleds. Using the System Setup Program 57 CPU Power Capping (P-State 0 default) Select a processor performance state (P-state). Options are [P-State 0], [P-State 1], [P-State 2], [P-State 3] and [P-state 4]. NOTE: This option is enabled when Power Management is set to OS Control mode. Chassis Power Management Press to set the different power management options that must be provided to support throttling and capping. Energy Efficient Policy (Max Performance default) Select a power policy option. • Max Performance: Sets the processors at the highest performance state at all times. • Balanced: Offers full performance and saves power by reducing system power consumption during periods of inactivity. • Low Power: Use different processor power saving modes (C-states) to reduce system power consumption. NOTE: This option works when the OS does not support power management control of processor. Option Description58 Using the System Setup Program Chassis Power Management Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. Chassis Power Management Option Description Chassis PSU Configuration Press to configure the chassis power supply. This option provides management and monitoring of the PSUs and allows you to set the minimum PSU requirements for the server. Power Capping Press to set PSU power and server loading limited in selected watts. Emergency Throttling Press to set sled level policy when emergency throttling event is triggered. Using the System Setup Program 59 Chassis PSU Configuration Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. Chassis PSU Configuration Option Description Required Power Supplies (1 default) Select the number of power supplies to provide load-shared power to run the sleds in the enclosure. Options are [1], [2], [3], and [4]. Redundant Power Supplies (1 default) Select the number of power supplies to provide power redundancy to the enclosure. Options are [0], [1], and [2].60 Using the System Setup Program Power Capping Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. Power Capping Option Description Chassis Level Capping (Disabled default) Enables or disables chassis level capping. Sled Power Capping (0 default) Specify the maximum amount of power to be consumed by the sled. Settings range from 0 or 100 to 1000 W. Using the System Setup Program 61 Emergency Throttling Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. Emergency Throttling Option Description Sled Level Policy (Chassis Level default) Select a sled level policy when an emergency throttle event is triggered. • Chassis Level: Overrides the chassis level policy for a specific server. • Throttling: Allows compute sled throttling when an emergency throttle event is triggered. • Power Off: Turns off the compute sled when an emergency throttle event is triggered. • Do Nothing: The compute sled will do nothing when an emergency throttle event is triggered. 62 Using the System Setup Program CPU Configuration Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. CPU Configuration Chassis Level Policy (Throttling default) Select a chassis level policy when an emergency throttle event is triggered. This option can be configured when the Sled Level Policy is set as Chassis Level. • Throttling: Allows chassis sled throttling when an emergency throttle event is triggered. • Power Off: The server power turns off when an emergency throttle event is triggered. Option Description Active Processor Cores (All Cores default) Allows you to control the number of enabled core in each processor. Options are [1], [2], [4], and [All Cores]. Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 63 Frequency Ratio (Auto default) Sets the frequency multipliers as maximum level. Max CPUID Value Limit (Disabled default) Some OS, which is (NT4), fails if the value returned in EAX is >3 when CPUID instruction is executed with EAX=0. When enabled, this setting limits CPUID function to 3. When disabled, this setting disables the 3 or less. Virtualization Technology (Disabled default) Allows you to set the Virtualization Technology in applicable CPUs. Enabled (applicable CPUs)/Disabled (unusable in any OS). QPI Frequency (Auto default) Select the link speed. Options are [6.4GTs], [7.2GTs], and [8.0GTs]. Turbo Mode (Enabled default) Enables or disables processor Turbo mode (Requires enabling the EMTTM.). C-States (Enabled default) When enabled, the processor(s) can operate in all available power C states. When disabled, the user power C states are not available for the processor. C1E State (Enabled default) Enables or disables the Enhanced Halt (C1E) state. NOTE: Disable this option at your own risk. When you disable this option, pop up message appears on the screen and warning appears in the System Setup Help. C6 State (Enabled default) Enables or disables the processor C6 state. NOTE: Disable this option at your own risk. When you disable this option, pop up message appears on the screen and warning appears in the System Setup Help. C7 State (Enabled default) Enables or disables the processor C7 state. NOTE: Disable this option at your own risk. When you disable this option, pop up message appears on the screen and warning appears in the System Setup Help. XD Bit Capability (Enabled default) Enables or disables the processor’s Execute Disable (XD) Memory Protection Technology feature. Option Description64 Using the System Setup Program Prefetch Configuration Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. Prefetch Configuration Direct Cache Access (Enabled default) Enables or disables the direct cache access. Hyper-Threading Technology (Enabled default) Enables or disables the Hyper-Threading technology. Prefetch Configuration Press to configure the prefetch settings. Option Description Adjacent Cache Line Prefetch (Enabled default) Enables or disables system optimization for sequential memory access. Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 65 Memory Configuration Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. Memory Configuration Hardware Prefetcher (Enabled default) Enables or disables the speculative unit within the processor(s). DCU Streamer Prefetcher (Enabled default) Enables or disables Data Cache Unit (DCU) streamer prefetcher. DCU IP Prefetcher (Enabled default) Enables or disables DCU IP Prefetcher. Option Description Memory Frequency (Auto default) Select an operating memory frequency. Options are [Auto], [800], [1066], [1333], and [1600]. Option Description66 Using the System Setup Program Memory Turbo Mode (Disabled default) Enables or disables the memory turbo mode. Memory Throttling Mode (Enabled default) Enables or disables the memory to run in closed-loop thermal throttling mode. Memory Operating Mode (Optimizer Mode default) Select the type of memory operation if a valid memory configuration is installed. • Optimizer Mode: The two memory controllers run in parallel 64-bit mode for improved memory performance. • Spare Mode: Enables memory sparing • Mirror Mode: Enables memory mirroring • Advanced ECC Mode: Controllers are joined in 128-bit mode running multi-bit advanced ECC. Demand Scrubbing (Enabled default) Enables or disables DRAM scrubbing. DRAM scrubbing is the ability to write corrected data back to the memory once a correctable error is detected on read transaction. Patrol Scrubbing (Enabled default) Enables or disables patrol scrubbing. Patrol scrubbing proactively searches the system memory, repairing correctable errors. Memory Operating Voltage (Auto default) If set to Auto, the system sets the voltage to an optimal value based on the capacity of the installed memory modules. You can also set the voltage of the memory module to a higher value (1.5 V) provided that the modules support multiple voltages. Options are [Auto], [1.5 volts], and [1.35 volts]. NOTE: BIOS will auto restrict selection if DIMM is not supporting low voltage. NUMA Support (Enabled default) Enables or disables Non-Uniform Memory Access (NUMA) support to improve processor performance. NOTE: This option is available for NUMA systems that allow memory interleaving across all processor nodes. Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 67 SATA Configuration Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen.68 Using the System Setup Program SATA Configuration Option Description Embedded SATA Controller (AHCI default) Select an operation mode for the onboard SATA controller. • Off: Disables the SATA controller. This token applies to the first onboard SATA controller. • IDE: Enables the SATA controller to run in IDE mode. Sets the device class code as IDE and uses PCI IRQ (referred as Native mode). This token applies to the first onboard SATA controller. • AHCI: Enables the SATA controller to run in AHCI mode. Sets the device class code as SATA and sets up the AHCI BARs and registers. This token applies to the first onboard SATA controller. • RAID: Enables the SATA controller to run in RAID mode. Sets the device class code as RAID and executes the RAID Option ROM. This token applies to the first onboard SATA controller. This provides access to the RAID setup utility during system bootup. Embedded SATA Link Rate (Auto default) Select a SATA link speed. • Auto: Sets the SATA link speed at maximum 6.0 Gbps. • 1.5 Gbps: Sets the SATA link speed to 1.5 Gbps. For power consumption. • 3.0 Gbps: Sets the SATA link speed to 3.0 Gbps. SATA Port 0 (Auto default) When set to off, turns off the 1st Serial ATA drive controller. When set to auto, enables BIOS support for the 1st Serial ATA drive controller (enabled if present, POST error if not present). SATA Port 1 (Auto default) When set to off, turns off the 2nd Serial ATA drive controller. When set to auto, enables BIOS support for the 2nd Serial ATA drive controller (enabled if present, POST error if not present).Using the System Setup Program 69 SATA Port 2 (Auto default) When set to off, turns off the 3rd Serial ATA drive controller. When set to auto, enables BIOS support for the 3rd Serial ATA drive controller (enabled if present, POST error if not present). SATA Port 3 (Auto default) When set to off, turns off the 4th Serial ATA drive controller. When set to auto, enables BIOS support for the 4th Serial ATA drive controller (enabled if present, POST error if not present). SATA Port 4 (Auto default) When set to off, turns off the 5th Serial ATA drive controller. When set to auto, enables BIOS support for the 5th Serial ATA drive controller (enabled if present, POST error if not present). SATA Port 5 (Auto default) When set to off, turns off the 6th Serial ATA drive controller. When set to auto, enables BIOS support for the 5th Serial ATA drive controller (enabled if present, POST error if not present). Power Saving Features (Auto default) Enables or disables the feature that allows SATA harddrives to initiate link power management transitions. HDD Security Erase (Disabled default) Enables or disables the hard-drive security freeze lock feature. Option Description70 Using the System Setup Program PCI Configuration Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. PCI Configuration Option Description Embedded Network Devices Press to configure available network drives. NIC Enumeration (Onboard default) Select a LAN boot ROM option. • Onboard: Uses the PXE boot on NICs to boot the system. • Add-in: Use the PXE boot on add-in network adapters to boot the system. Active State Power Management Configuration Press to configure power management for PCI Express devices. Using the System Setup Program 71 PCI Slot Configuration Press to configure PCI Express devices. NOTE: When you install a MIC GPGPU card in the C8220X sled, BIOS automatically enables the PCI memory 64-bit decode option. PCIe Generation (Gen3 default) Select a PCI signaling rate. • Gen1: 2.5 GT/s • Gen2: 5 GT/s • Gen3: 8 GT/s VT for Direct I/O (Disabled default) Enables or disables Intel hardware virtualization support. SR-IOV Global Enable (Disabled default) Enables or disables BIOS configuration of Single Root I/O Virtualization (SR-IOV) devices. I/OAT DMA Engine (Disabled default) If set to Enabled, the I/O Acceleration Technology (I/OAT) feature is enabled for network controllers that support this technology. Maximum Payload Size (Auto default) Sets the maximum payload size of the PCI Express controller. Options are Auto, 128 bytes, and 256 bytes. Embedded Video Controller (Enabled default) Enables or disables the onboard video controller. NOTE: This option should always be set to Enabled. The remote KVM function cannot function if set to disabled. Video Enumeration (Onboard default) Select video controller enumeration type. • Onboard - The onboard video controller is used for boot-time messages. • Add-in - The first add-in video controller is used for boot-time messages. Depending on the BIOS search order and system slot layout. WHEA Support (Disabled default) Enables or disables the Windows Hardware Error Architecture (WHEA) feature. Reboot on WOL (ROW) (Disabled default) Enables or disables reboot on wake-on-LAN feature. Reboot On WOL targets network controllers when the network controller receives a magic packet. This option displays when the network chip supports Reboot on WOL feature. Option Description72 Using the System Setup Program Embedded Network Devices Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen.Using the System Setup Program 73 Embedded Network Devices iSCSI Remote Boot Option Description Embedded NIC1 (Enabled with PXE default) Enables or disables the onboard NIC1 controller. • Enabled with PXE: Allows you to enable the system’s primary embedded NIC (full function), including its PXE boot-ROM. • Enabled without PXE: Allows you to enable the system’s primary embedded NIC only. The NIC associated PXE or RPL boot-ROM are disabled in this option. • iSCSI Remote Boot: Allows you to configure the iSCSI target and initiator variables to support iSCSI Remote Boot. Changes take effect after the system reboots. • Disabled: Allows you to disable the system’s primary embedded NIC. Embedded NIC2 (Enabled without PXE default) Enables or disables the onboard NIC2 controller. • Enabled with PXE: Allows you to enable the system’s secondary embedded NIC (full function), including its PXE boot-ROM. • Enabled without PXE: Allows you to enable the system’s secondary embedded NIC only. The NIC associated PXE or RPL boot-ROM are disabled in this option. • iSCSI Remote Boot: Allows you to configure the iSCSI target and initiator variables to support iSCSI Remote Boot. Changes take effect after the system reboots. • Disabled: Allows you to disable the system’s primary embedded NIC. Option Description iSCSI Initiator Name Displays the worldwide unique name of the initiator. Only iqn format is accepted. Enable DHCP (Disabled default) Enables or disables the DHCP network settings. Initiator IP Address Sets the initiator’s static IP address. Initiator Subnet Mask Sets the subnet mask for the static IP address.74 Using the System Setup Program Gateway Sets the IP gateway for the static IP address. Target IP Sets the name for the target IP. Target IP Address Sets the target’s IP address. Target Port Sets the target port. Boot LUN Sets the hexadecimal representation of LU number. CHAP Type (None default) Select CHAP type. Options are [None], [One Way CHAP], and [Mutual CHAP]. Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 75 Active State Power Management Configuration Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. Active State Power Management Configuration Option Description PCIe Slot ASPM (Disabled default) Select an active state power management (ASPM) protocol for the PCI Express slot. Options are [Disabled], [L0], [L1], [L0 & L1], [L0s Downstream], and [L0s Downstream + L1]. Onboard LAN ASPM (Disabled default) Select an ASPM protocol for the onboard network controller. Options are [Disabled], [L0], [L1], [L0 & L1], [L0s Downstream], and [L0s Downstream + L1]. Mezzanine Slot ASPM (Disabled default) Select an ASPM protocol for the mezzanine slot. NB-SB Link ASPM (Disabled default) Select an ASPM protocol for the northbridge and southbridge chipsets. 76 Using the System Setup Program PCI Slot Configuration Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. PCI Slot Configuration Option Description PCIe Slot1 (Enabled default) Enables or disables the PCIe slot1. Options are [Disabled], [Enabled], [Enabled without OPROM]. NOTE: When you install a MIC GPGPU card in the C8220X sled, BIOS automatically enables the PCI memory 64-bit decode option. You can set the GPGPU information using IPMI commands. See Table 2-18 for more information.Using the System Setup Program 77 USB Configuration Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. USB Configuration Option Description Embedded USB Controller (Enabled default) Enables or disables the onboard USB controller at system startup. USB Port with BMC (Enabled default) Enables or disables internal USB port with BMC support. External USB Port1 (Enabled default) Enables or disables the external USB port1. External USB Port2 (Enabled default) Enables or disables the external USB port2. Internal USB Connector (Disabled default) Enables or disables the internal USB port. 78 Using the System Setup Program Security Menu The security menu enables you to set the security parameters. Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. Security Settings Option Description Supervisor Password Indicates whether a supervisor password has been set. If the password has been installed, Installed displays. If not, Not Installed displays. User Password Indicates whether a supervisor password has been set. If the password has been installed, Installed displays. If not, Not Installed displays.Using the System Setup Program 79 Change Supervisor You can install a Supervisor password, and if you install a supervisor password, you can then install a user password. A user password does not provide access to many of the features in the Setup utility. Note, the Change User Password option only appears after a Supervisor password has been set. Select this option and press to access the sub menu, a dialog box appears which lets you enter a password. You can enter no more than six letters or numbers. Press after you have typed in the password. A second dialog box asks you to retype the password for confirmation. Press after you have retyped it correctly. If the password confirmation is incorrect, an error message appears. The password is stored in NVRAM after ezPORT completes. The password is required at boot time, or when the user enters the Setup utility. Change User Password Installs or changes the User password. Option Description80 Using the System Setup Program Server Menu The server menu enables you to configure compute sled parameters. Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. Server Settings Option Description Status of BMC Displays BMC status. IPMI Specification Version Displays the Intelligent Platform Management Interface (IPMI) firmware version number. BMC Firmware Version Displays the BMC firmware version number. NIC1 MAC Address Displays the MAC address for the NIC1 connector. NIC2 MAC Address Displays the MAC address for the NIC2 connector.Using the System Setup Program 81 ACPI SPMI Table (Enabled default) When enabled, BIOS enables Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) Service Processor Management Interface (SPMI) table for IPMI driver installation. When disabled, BIOS disables the ACPI SPMI table for BMC ROM update. Set BMC LAN Configuration Press to set the BMC network. Remote Access Configuration Press to configure serial port settings related to console redirection. Restore on AC Power Loss (Power On default) Select the power state when the AC power is back. • Power Off: System remains off until the power button is pressed. • Last State: System reverts to the last power state before power loss. • Power On: System switches back on after the AC power loss. Power Staggering AC Recovery (Immediate default) Set the time period for the system to turn back on from an AC power loss once power is resumed. • Immediate: Power On (No Delay) • Random: Auto • User Defined: User defined delay time. Power Button (Enabled default) When enabled, the power button can turn the system's power off. When disabled, the power button can only turn on system power. View System Event Log Press to view the BMC system event log. Event Logging (Enabled default) Enables or disables BIOS to log system events. NMI on Error (Enabled default) Enables or disables BIOS to generate an Non-masked Interrupt (NMI) when an uncorrectable PCI Express error occurs. Option Description82 Using the System Setup Program Set BMC LAN Configuration Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. Set BMC LAN Configuration Option Description Channel Number Displays the channel number used for BMC LAN. Channel Number Status Displays the BMC channel number status. BMC LAN Port Configuration (Shared-NIC default) Set the BMC management port to dedicated or shared NIC port. Options are [Dedicated NIC] and [Shared NIC]. BMC NIC IP Source (DHCP default) Set BMC to obtain its IP address using DHCP or establish a static IP address. IP Address Sets the static IP address. Subnet Mask Sets the subnet mask for the static IP address. Using the System Setup Program 83 Remote Access Configuration Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. Remote Access Configuration Gateway Address Sets the IP gateway for the static IP address. IPv6 Mode (Disabled default) Enables or disables the IPv6 internet protocol support. If set to enabled, configure the IPv6 prefix, IP and gateway addresses. Option Description Remote Access (Enabled default) Enables or disables serial console redirection. Option Description84 Using the System Setup Program Serial port number (COM1 default) Select a serial port for console redirection. • COM1: Enables console redirection via COM1. See token D7h. • COM2 as SOL: Enables console redirection via COM2. Serial Port Address (3F8h/2F8h default) Specifies the base I/O port address of the serial port. • 3F8h/2F8h: Sets the front serial port address as 0x3F8 and internal serial port address as 0x2F8. • COM2 as SOL: Sets the front serial port address as 0x2F8 and internal serial port address as 0x3F8. Serial Port Mode (115200 8,n,1 as default) Select a baud rate for the serial port. Options are [115200 8,n,1], [57600 8,n,1], [38400 8,n,1], [192008,n,1], and [9600 8,n,1]. Flow Control (None default) Select a flow control for console redirection. Options are [None] and [Software]. Redirection After BIOS POST (Always default) If set to Always, the console redirection is always active. When Disabled, console redirection is turned off after POST. Terminal Type (ANSI default) Select a target terminal type for console redirection. Options are [ANSI], [VT100], and [VT-UTF8]. VT-UTF8 Combo Key Support (Enabled default) Enables or disables the VT-UTF8 Combination Key support for ANSI/VT100 terminals. Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 85 View System Log Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. View System Log Option Description View BMC SEL Event Log View all events in the BMC system event log. Clear BMC SEL Event Log Deletes all records in the BMC system event log. 86 Using the System Setup Program Boot Menu The boot menu enables you to set POST boot parameters. Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. Boot Settings Option Description Quiet Boot (Enabled default) Enable this item to display the splash or summary screen, rather than the detail of the POST flow. When disabled, normal POST messages appear. Pause on Errors (Disabled default) Enables or disables BIOS to prompt you to press or keys on errors during POST. Force PXE Boot only (Disabled default) Enables or disables PXE to be the only boot device.Using the System Setup Program 87 Boot Mode (BIOS default) Select a system boot mode. • BIOS: The standard BIOS-level boot interface • UEFI: An enhanced 64-bit boot interface based on Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) specifications that overlays the system BIOS. Boot Type Order Press to set the preferred boot sequence from the available devices. Legacy Boot Device Press to set the preferred boot sequence from the available legacy USB devices. Option Description88 Using the System Setup Program Exit Menu Scroll to this item and press to view the following screen. Exit Options Option Description Save Changes and Exit Highlight this item and press to save any changes that you have made in the Setup utility and exit the Setup utility. When the Save Changes and Exit dialog box appears, press to save the changes and exit, or press to return to the setup main menu. Discard Changes and Exit Highlight this item and press to discard any changes that you have made in the Setup utility and exit the Setup utility. When the Discard Changes and Exit dialog box appears, press to discard changes and exit, or press to return to the setup main menu.Using the System Setup Program 89 Save Changes Select this item and press to save changes you have made without leaving the setup utility. Discard Changes Select this item and press to discard any changes you have made without leaving the setup utility. Load Optimal Defaults If you highlight this item and press , a dialog box asks if you want to install optimal settings for all the items in the Setup utility. Press the key to indicate Yes, and then press to install the optimal settings. The optimal settings default values are quite demanding and your system might not function properly if you are using slower memory chips or other kinds of low-performance components. Load Customized Defaults Load 2nd default values from NVRAM for all the setup parameters. Save Customized Defaults Save all the setup parameters to NVRAM as 2nd default values. Option Description90 Using the System Setup Program Command Line Interfaces for System Setup Options The options in the System Setup menu allows you to control the System Configuration Utility (syscfg). This utility is included in the Dell OpenManage Deployment Toolkit (DTK). See the Deployment Toolkit Version 1.3 User's Guide for additional information about installing and using the DTK utilities, and the Deployment Toolkit Version 1.3 Command Line Interface Reference Guide for a complete list of all valid options, suboptions, and arguments for using the BMCCFG.EXE to configure and manage your BMC. You can use the system configuration utility for the following conditions: • To change the System Setup option by D4 token: ./syscfg –t=D4_token_id (Example: ./syscfg -t=0x002D to enable NIC1 Option ROM) • To check token activity status: ./syscfg --istokenactive=D4_token_id (Example: ./syscfg --istokenactive=0x002D to check the token active status of NIC1 Option ROM) • To directly change the System Setup option through BMC memory: ./ipmitool raw (Example: ./ipmitool raw 0xc 1 1 3 10 106 42 120 to set IP address of BMC management port as 10.106.42.120) Table 2-1. D4 Token Table Token Setup Option Description 002D Embedded NIC1 Enables the onboard NIC1 controller (full-function), including its PXE boot-ROM. 002E Embedded NIC1 Disables the onboard NIC1 controller. 0051 N/A For the next system boot, set the IPL priority to: USB storage, hard disk, CD/DVD-ROM, RAID, Network (if the devices are available).Using the System Setup Program 91 0052 N/A For the next system boot, set the IPL priority to: hard disk then option ROMs (if the devices are available). 0053 N/A For the next system boot, set the IPL priority to: Network, hard disk, RAID,USB storage, CD/DVDROM (if the devices are available). 0054 N/A For the next system boot, set the IPL priority to: CD/DVD-ROM, USB Storage, hard disk, RAID, Network (if the devices are available). 005C N/A Enables BIOS remote update on the next reboot, to search for an operating-system initiated BIOS update image. 005D N/A Disables BIOS remote update on the next reboot, to search for an operating-system initiated BIOS update image. 006E Embedded NIC1 Enables the onboard NIC1 controller, but disables the NIC associated PXE or RPL boot-ROM. 0087 Video Enumeration Allows BIOS to use the onboard video controller for boot-time messages. 0088 Video Enumeration Allows BIOS to use the first add-in video controller for boot-time messages. Depending on the BIOS search order and system slot layout. 008C Embedded USB Controller Allows BIOS to enable the built-in USB controller at system startup. 008D Embedded USB Controller Allows BIOS to enable the built-in USB controller at system startup. 00A1 Restore on AC Power Loss System remains off until the power button is pressed. 00A2 Restore on AC Power Loss System reverts to the last power state before power loss. 00A3 Restore on AC Power Loss System switches back on after the AC power loss. 00BA Embedded NIC2 Disables the onboard NIC2 controller. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option Description92 Using the System Setup Program 00BB Embedded NIC2 Enables the onboard NIC2 controller, but disables the NIC associated PXE or RPL boot-ROM. 00BC Embedded NIC2 Enables the onboard NIC2 controller (full-function), including its PXE boot-ROM. 00BF Remote Access Disables serial console redirection. 00C0 Serial port number Enables console redirection via COM1. See token D7h. 00C1 Power Button Enables the power button to turn off the system power. (default) 00C2 Power Button Disables the power button to turn off the system power. 00D1 Hyper-Threading Technology Enables Hyper-Threading Technology. 00D2 Hyper-Threading Technology Disables Hyper-Threading Technology. 00D7 Serial port number Enables console redirection via COM2. 00D8 Load Optimal Defaults Install optimal default settings for all the items in the Setup utility on the next boot. 00FE Legacy USB Support Disables the system to provide legacy USB support for the operating system. 00FF Legacy USB Support Enables the system to provide legacy USB support for the operating system. 0117 SATA Port0 Turns off the 1st Serial ATA drive controller. 0118 SATA Port0 Enables BIOS support for the 1st Serial ATA drive controller (enabled if present, POST error appears if not present). 0119 SATA Port1 Turns off the 2nd Serial ATA drive controller. 011A SATA Port1 Enables BIOS support for the 2nd Serial ATA drive controller (enabled if present, POST error appears if not present). Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 93 011B SATA Port2 Turns off the 3rd Serial ATA drive controller. 011C SATA Port2 Enables BIOS support for the 3rd Serial ATA drive controller (enabled if present, POST error appears if not present). 011D SATA Port3 Turns off the 4th Serial ATA drive controller. 011E SATA Port3 Enables BIOS support for the 4th Serial ATA drive controller (enabled if present, POST error appears if not present). 011F SATA Port4 Turns off the 5th Serial ATA drive controller. 0120 SATA Port4 Enables BIOS support for the 5th Serial ATA drive controller (enabled if present, POST error appears if not present). 0121 SATA Port5 Turns off the 6th Serial ATA drive controller. 0122 SATA Port5 Enables BIOS support for the 6th Serial ATA drive controller (enabled if present, POST error appears if not present). 0135 Embedded SATA Controller Disables the SATA controller. This token applies to the first onboard SATA controller. 0137 Embedded SATA Controller Enables the SATA controller to run in IDE mode. Sets the device class code as IDE and uses PCI IRQ (referred as Native mode). This token applies to the first onboard SATA controller. 0138 Embedded SATA Controller Enables the SATA controller. Sets the device class code as SATA and sets up the AHCI BARs and registers. This token applies to the first onboard SATA controller. 0139 Embedded SATA Controller Enables the SATA controller. Sets the device class code as RAID and executes the RAID Option ROM. This token applies to the first onboard SATA controller. 013E Memory Remapping (3GB~4GB) When disabled, memory remapping relocates memory space behind PCI hole to the space above 4 GB. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option Description94 Using the System Setup Program 013F Memory Remapping (3GB~4GB) When enabled, memory remapping relocates memory space (3GB - 4 GB) to the space above 4 GB. 0140 Execute-Disable (XD) Bit Capability When disabled, the Intel processors supporting the XD feature reports the support to the operating system. 0141 Execute-Disable (XD) Bit Capability When enabled, the Intel processors supporting the XD feature reports the support to the operating system. If the operating system supports this extended paging mechanism, it will provide some protection against software viruses that exploit buffer overflows. 014A Virtualization Technology Allows you to disable the VT technology in applicable processors. If disabled, the VT feature is unusable in any OS. 014B Virtualization Technology Allows you to enable the VT technology in applicable processors. 014E External USB PORT1 Allows you to electrically disable the external USB connector 1. 014F External USB PORT1 Allow you to electrically enable the external USB connector 1. 0168 Max CPUID Value Limit Some OS, which is (NT4), fails if the value returned in EAX is >3 when CPUID instruction is executed with EAX=0. This setting disables the 3 or less. 0169 Max CPUID Value Limit Some OS, which is (NT4), fails if the value returned in EAX is >3 when CPUID instruction is executed with EAX=0. This setting limits CPUID function to 3. 0171 Adjacent Cache Line Prefetch Disables system optimization for sequential memory access. The processor fetches the cache line that contains the data it currently requires. 0172 Adjacent Cache Line Prefetch Enables system optimization for sequential memory access. The processor fetches the adjacent cache line in the other half of the sector. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 95 0173 Hardware Prefetcher Disables the processor’s HW prefetcher.. 0174 Hardware Prefetcher Enables the processor’s HW prefetcher.. 0178 Remote Access Enables serial console redirection. 0189 External USB PORT2 Allows you to electrically disable the external USB connector 2. 018A External USB PORT2 Allow you to electrically enable the external USB connector 2. 0199 Power Saving Features Disables the feature that allows SATA hard-drives to initiate link power management transitions. 019A Power Saving Features Enables the feature that allows SATA hard-drives to initiate link power management transitions. 01C4 NUMA Support Disables the NUMA support to improve processor performance. This option is available for NUMA systems that allow memory interleaving across all processor nodes. 01C5 NUMA Support Enables the NUMA support to improve processor performance. This option is available for NUMA systems that allow memory interleaving across all processor nodes. 01C4 Node Interleave Disables the node interleave option. This option is available for NUMA systems that allow memory interleaving across all processor nodes. 01C5 Node Interleave Enable the node interleave option. This option is available for NUMA systems that allow memory interleaving across all processor nodes. 01CF I/OAT DMA Engine Enables the I/O Acceleration Technology (I/OAT) DMA Engine feature. Set to enabled only if the hardware and software support I/OAT. 01D0 I/OAT DMA Engine Disables the I/OAT DMA Engine feature. This option should be disabled only if the hardware and software support I/OAT. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option Description96 Using the System Setup Program 01DA Embedded NIC1 Enables NIC1 with iSCSI Remote Boot. 01DB Embedded NIC2 Enables NIC2 with iSCSI Remote Boot. 01EA Turbo Mode Disables memory turbo mode. It disables the processor core to increase its frequency. 01EB Turbo Mode Enables memory turbo mode. It allows the processor core to increase its frequency. 01F0 Embedded NIC3 Enables the onboard NIC3 controller. 01F1 Embedded NIC3 Enables the onboard NIC3 controller, but disables the NIC associated PXE or RPL boot-ROM. 01F2 Embedded NIC3 Enables the onboard NIC3 controller (full-function), including its PXE boot-ROM. 01F3 Embedded NIC3 Enables NIC3 with iSCSI Remote Boot. 0204 VT for Direct I/O Disables Intel Virtualization Technology for Direct I/O (VT-d) that enhances I/O support (DMA) when running a Virtual Machine Monitor. 0205 VT for Direct I/O Enables Intel Virtualization Technology for Direct I/O (VT-d) that enhances I/O support (DMA) when running a Virtual Machine Monitor. 0211 Internal USB PORT Disables the internal USB connector. 0212 Internal USB PORT Enables the internal USB connector. 021F Maximum Performance Sets the system power management to maximum performance. 0221 OS Control Allows the OS to change the P-state. 0224 Embedded Video Controller Enables the onboard video controller as the primary video device. 0225 Embedded Video Controller Disables the onboard video controller. 022D Boot Mode Enables booting to Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI) capable operating systems. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 97 022E Boot Mode Enables booting to legacy mode, ensures compatibility with operating systems that do not support UEFI. 0231 Active Processor Cores Four cores of the processor are enabled This applies to Quad-core processors only. 0232 Active Processor Cores Two cores of the processor are enabled. This applies to Quad-core and Dual-core processors. 0233 Active Processor Cores Single core of the processor is enabled. This applies to Quad-core and Dual-Core processors. 024B C States When enabled, the processor can operate in all available Power C States. (default) 024C C States When disabled, there are no C states available for the processor. 024D Pause on Errors Enables the BIOS from prompting for F1/F2 on error. BIOS pauses at F1/F2 prompt. 024E Pause on Errors Disables the BIOS from prompting for F1/F2 on error. BIOS pauses at F1/F2 prompt. 024F Quiet Boot Enables the display of the splash or summary screen, rather than the detail of the POST flow. 0250 Quiet Boot Disables the display of the splash or summary screen. The user is able to see the detail of the POST messages. 0251 N/A The NIC1 is used for PXE boot, followed by NIC2. 0252 N/A The NIC2 is used for PXE boot, followed by NIC1. 0254 3F8h/2F8h Sets the back serial port address to 0x3F8 and internal serial port address to 0x2F8 0257 2F8h/3F8h Set back serial port address to 0x2F8 and internal serial port address to 0x3F8. 025D Optimizer Mode Selects optimizer mode as the memory operating mode. 025E Spare Mode Selects spare mode as the memory operating mode. 025F Mirror Mode Selects mirror mode as the memory operating mode. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option Description98 Using the System Setup Program 0260 Advanced ECC Mode Selects Advanced ECC (i.e. Lockstep, Chipkill) as the memory operating mode. 026A Coherent HT Link Speed Sets to support HyperTransport 1 specification. 026B Coherent HT Link Speed Sets to support HyperTransport 3 specification. 026E Active Processor Cores This field controls the number of enabled all of cores in each processor. By default, the maximum number of cores per processor will be enabled. 026F Active Processor Cores This field controls the number of enabled 6 cores in each processor. By default, the maximum number of cores per processor will be enabled. 0270 Active Processor Cores This field controls the number of enabled 8 cores in each processor. By default, the maximum number of cores per processor will be enabled. 0271 Active Processor Cores This field controls the number of enabled 10 cores in each processor. By default, the maximum number of cores per processor will be enabled. 0272 Active Processor Cores This field controls the number of enabled 12 cores in each processor. By default, the maximum number of cores per processor will be enabled. 027B HT Assist Disables the Probe Filter chipset option in the System setup. There are some applications that may lower chipset performance when this is enabled. 027C HT Assist Enables the Probe Filter chipset option in the System setup. There are some applications that may lower chipset performance when this is disabled. 02A1 C1E State Enables the processor Enhanced Halt (C1E) state. (default) 02A2 C1E State Disables the processor C1-E state. Do at your own risk. When you disable this option, a warning appears in the BIOS Setup help text and a pop up message appears when this option is changing. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 99 02A9 DRAM Prefetcher Disables DRAM references from triggering DRAM prefetch requests. 02AA DRAM Prefetcher Turns on the DRAM prefetch unit in the Northbridge. 02AB HW Prefetch Training on SW Disables hardware prefetcher from considering software prefetches when detecting strides for prefetch requests. 02AC HW Prefetch Training on SW Enables Hardware prefetcher considers software prefetches when detecting strides for prefetch requests. (default) 02AD SR-IOV Global Enable Enables BIOS support for SRIOV devices. 02AE SR-IOV Global Enable Disables BIOS support for SRIOV devices. 02B6 Memory Operating Voltage Indicates all DIMMs in the system are operating at 1.5 volts. 02B7 Memory Operating Voltage Indicates all DIMMs in the system are operating at 1.35 volts. 02B8 Memory Operating Voltage This setting indicates the memory operating voltage will be set automatically by the Memory initialization code and depending upon the installed DIMM's capability and the memory configuration of the system. This is the default setting and will set the Memory Operating voltage to the POR voltage. 02C5 DCU Streamer Prefetcher Enables the DCU Streamer Prefetcher. (default) 02C6 DCU Streamer Prefetcher Disables the DCU Streamer Prefetcher. 02C7 Data Reuse Optimization Sets to enable for HPC applications. (default) 02C8 Data Reuse Optimization Sets to disable for energy efficiency. 02C9 QPI Bandwidth Priority Sets to compute for computation-intensive applications. (default) Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option Description100 Using the System Setup Program 02CA QPI Bandwidth Priority Sets to I/O for I/O-intensive applications. 02CE DCU IP Prefetcher Enables the DCU IP Prefetcher. (default) 02CF DCU IP Prefetcher Disables the DCU IP Prefetcher. 401A Terminal Type The BIOS console redirection, if enabled, operates in VT100 emulation model. See tokens BFh, C0h, and D7h. 401B Terminal Type The BIOS console redirection, if enabled, operates in ANSI emulation model. See also tokens BFh, C0h, and D7h. 401C Redirection After BIOS POST The BIOS console redirection, if enabled, continues to operate after the OS boot hand-off. 401D Redirection After BIOS POST The BIOS console redirection, if enabled, operates during the BIOS boot only and is disabled prior to OS boot hand-off. See also tokens BFh, C0h, D7h, 401Ah and 401Bh. 4022 1st Boot Device Whenever the BIOS boots the system, the first PXEcapable device is inserted as the first device in the boot sequence. Enabling this feature causes the BIOS operation to occur on the next and all subsequent boots and causes a change in the system's defined boot sequence. The BIOS chooses the first PXEcapable device as the system's onboard network controller, if present and enabled, or the first bootable network device found in the system's standard PCI search order. 4026 Manufacturing Mode Enables the manufacturing mode to bypass POST tasks/memory tests and F1/F2 prompts on specific error messages. Used by manufacturers only and is not for general use. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 101 4027 Manufacturing Mode Disables the manufacturing mode to bypass POST tasks/memory tests and F1/F2 prompts on specific error messages. Used by manufacturers only and is not for general use. 4033 Serial Port Mode Console Redirection baud rate is set to 115,200 bits per second. 4034 Serial Port Mode Console Redirection baud rate is set to 57,600 bits per second 4035 Serial Port Mode Console Redirection baud rate is set to 19,200 bits per second. 4036 Serial Port Mode Console Redirection baud rate is set to 9,600 bits per second. 403F Clear SMBIOS System Event Log Deletes all records in the BMC system event log on the next boot. 4800 Node Manager Enables the Node Manager mode for Intel processors. 4801 APML Enable the Advanced Platform Management Link mode for AMD processors. 4802 CPU Power Capping To decide the highest processor performance state in the OS. (P0-state). 4803 CPU Power Capping To decide the highest processor performance state in the OS. (P1-state). 4804 CPU Power Capping To decide the highest processor performance state in the OS. (P2-state). 4805 CPU Power Capping To decide the highest processor performance state in the OS. (P3-state). 4806 CPU Power Capping To decide the highest processor performance state in the OS. (P4-state). 480A C6 State Disables the processor C6 state. Do at your own risk. When you disable this option, a warning appears in the BIOS Setup help text and a pop up message appears when this option is changing. 480B C6 State Enables the processor C6 state. (default) Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option Description102 Using the System Setup Program 480C L3 Cache Power Control Disable the clock stop for an idle subcache. 480D L3 Cache Power Control Enable the clock stop for an idle subcache. 480E C7 State Disables the processor C7 state. Do at your own risk. When you disable this option, a warning appears in the BIOS Setup help text and a pop up message appears when this option is changing. 480F C7 State Enables the processor C7 state. (default) 4810 Non Coherent HT Link Width Sets the HT link to 8 bit width. 4811 Non Coherent HT Link Width Sets the HT link to 16 bit width. 4812 Non Coherent HT Link Speed Sets the HT link speed to 800MHz. 4813 Non Coherent HT Link Speed Sets the HT link speed to 1000MHz. 4814 Non Coherent HT Link Speed Sets the HT link speed to 1200MHz. 4815 Non Coherent HT Link Speed Sets the HT link speed to 1600MHz. 4816 Non Coherent HT Link Speed Sets the HT link speed to 2000MHz. 4817 Non Coherent HT Link Speed Sets the HT link speed to 2600MHz. 4820 Memory Turbo Mode Disables memory turbo mode. 4821 Memory Turbo Mode Enables memory turbo mode. 4822 NUMA Support Enables the node interleave option for SLES11. This applies to NUMA systems that allow memory interleaving across all processor nodes. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 103 4823 Memory Frequency Detects the memory running speed from H/W designed (SPD, memory population). 4824 Memory Frequency Sets memory running speed up to 800MHz. 4825 Memory Frequency Sets memory running speed up to 1066MHz. 4826 Memory Frequency Sets memory running speed up to 1333MHz. 4827 Memory Frequency Sets memory running speed up to 1600MHz. 4828 Memory Throttling Mode Sets memory running as Open Loop Throughput Throttling (OLTT). (default) 4829 Memory Throttling Mode Sets memory running as Closed Loop Thermal Throttling (CLTT). 482A DRAM Scrubbing Disables DRAM scrubbing to write corrected data back to the memory once a correctable error is detected on a read transaction. 482B DRAM Scrubbing Enables Dram scrubbing to write corrected data back to the memory once a correctable error is detected on a read transaction. 482C Demand Scrubbing Disables Demand scrubbing to write corrected data back to the memory once a correctable error is detected on a read transaction. 482D Demand Scrubbing Enables Demand scrubbing to write corrected data back to the memory once a correctable error is detected on a read transaction. 482E Patrol Scrubbing Disables Patrol scrubbing to proactively search the system memory, repairing correctable errors. 482F Patrol Scrubbing Enables Patrol scrubbing to proactively search the system memory, repairing correctable errors. 4830 HDD Security Erase Sets security freeze lock to all hard-drives. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option Description104 Using the System Setup Program 4831 HDD Security Erase Unlocks the security freeze lock on all hard-drives. 4832 AHCI-AMD Supports AMD inbox AHCI driver. 4833 AHCI-MS Supports Microsoft inbox AHCI driver. 4834 Embedded SATA Link Rate Sets the SATA link rate at maximum rate speed of 6.0 Gbps. 4835 Embedded SATA Link Rate Sets the SATA link rate at minimum rate speed of 1.5 Gbps. For power consumption. 4836 Embedded SATA Link Rate Sets the SATA link rate at minimum rate speed of 3.0 Gbps. 4840 PCIe Slot ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on the PCI Express Link of port. All entry disabled. 4841 PCIe Slot ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on the given PCI Express Link of port. L0s entry enabled. 4842 PCIe Slot ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on the given PCI Express Link of port. L1 entry enabled. 4843 PCIe Slot ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on the given PCI Express Link of port. L0s and L1 entry enabled. 4844 PCIe Slot ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on the given PCI Express Link of port. L0s entry downstream enabled. 4845 PCIe Slot ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on the given PCI Express Link of port. L0s entry downstream and L1 enabled 4846 Onboard LAN ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported to onboard LAN. All entry disabled. 4847 Onboard LAN ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported to onboard LAN. L0s entry enabled. 4848 Onboard LAN ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported to onboard LAN. L1 entry enabled. 4849 Onboard LAN ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported to onboard LAN. L0s and L1 entry enabled. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 105 484A Onboard LAN ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported to onboard LAN. L0s entry downstream enabled. 484B Onboard LAN ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported to onboard LAN. L0s entry downstream and L1 enabled. 484C Mezzanine Slot ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on Mezzanine Slot. All entry disabled. 484D Mezzanine Slot ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on Mezzanine Slot. L0s entry enabled. 484E Mezzanine Slot ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on Mezzanine Slot. L1 entry enabled. 484F Mezzanine Slot ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on Mezzanine Slot. L0s and L1 entry enabled. 4850 Mezzanine Slot ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on Mezzanine Slot. L0s entry downstream enabled. 4851 Mezzanine Slot ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on Mezzanine Slot. L0s entry downstream and L1 enabled. 4852 NB-SB Link ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on the NB-SB. All entry disabled. 4853 NB-SB Link ASPM Controls the level of ASPM supported on the NB-SB. L1 entry enabled. 4854 Maximum Payload Size Auto detects the PCIe maximum payload size. 4855 Maximum Payload Size Sets the PCIe maximum payload size to 128 Bytes. 4856 Maximum Payload Size Sets the PCIe maximum payload size to 256 Bytes. 4857 WHEA Support Disables Windows Hardware Error Architecture. 4858 WHEA Support Enables Windows Hardware Error Architecture. 4859 NIC Enumeration Sets PXE boot from onboard NIC to Add-on NIC adapter. (default) Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option Description106 Using the System Setup Program 485A NIC Enumeration Sets PXE boot from Add-on NIC adapter to onboard NIC. 485B PCIe Generation Sets the PCI signaling rate at Gen3 8.0 Gigabits bandwidth. 485C PCIe Generation Sets the PCI signaling rate at Gen2 5.0 Gigabits bandwidth. 485D PCIe Generation Sets the PCI signaling rate at Gen1 2.5 Gigabits bandwidth. 485E Reboot on WOL (ROW) Disables ROW. (default) The ROW repurposes the Wake on LAN (WOL) signal to reboot the system board when the system is in S0/S3 state. 485F Reboot on WOL (ROW) Enables ROW. ROW repurposes the WOL signal to reboot the system board when the system is in S0/S3 state. When a WOL packet is received by the NIC, the wake up signal generated by the NIC shall cause a hardware reboot of the system board. 4860 USB PORT with BMC Allows you to electrically disable the internal USB port which contacts to BMC. 4861 USB PORT with BMC Allow the users to electrically enable the internal USB port which contacts to BMC. 4870 Force PXE Boot only Disables PXE to be the boot device only. 4871 Force PXE Boot only Enables PXE to be the boot device only. The system retrying to boot from PXE device. 4873 Active Processor Cores This field controls the number of enabled 16 cores in each processor. By default, the maximum number of cores per processor will be enabled. 4877 PCIe Slot1 Allows you to electrically disable PCIe Slot1. 4878 PCIe Slot1 Allows you to electrically enable PCIe Slot1. 4879 PCIe Slot2 Allows you to electrically disable PCIe Slot2. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 107 487A PCIe Slot2 Allows you to electrically enable PCIe Slot2. 487B PCIe Slot3 Allows you to electrically disable PCIe Slot3. 487C PCIe Slot3 Allows you to electrically enable PCIe Slot3. 487D PCIe Slot4 Allows you to electrically disable PCIe Slot4. 487E PCIe Slot4 Allows you to electrically enable PCIe Slot4. 487F Mezzanine Slot Allows you to electrically disable Mezzanine Slot. 4880 Mezzanine Slot Allows you to electrically enable Mezzanine Slot. 4881 1st Boot Device Sets the hard-drive as the first boot device. 4882 1st Boot Device Sets RAID as the first boot device. 4883 1st Boot Device Sets a USB storage device as the first boot device. 4884 1st Boot Device Sets a CD/DVD ROM as the first boot device. 4885 2nd Boot Device Sets a network device as the 2nd boot device. 4886 2nd Boot Device Sets the hard-drive as the 2nd boot device. 4887 2nd Boot Device Sets RAID as the 2nd boot device. 4888 2nd Boot Device Sets a USB storage device as the 2nd boot device. 4889 2nd Boot Device Sets the CD/DVD ROM as the 2nd boot device. 488A 3rd Boot Device Sets the network device as the 3rd boot device. 488B 3rd Boot Device Sets the hard-drive as the 3rd boot device. 488C 3rd Boot Device Sets RAID as the 3rd boot device. 488D 3rd Boot Device Sets a USB storage device as the 3rd boot device. 488E 3rd Boot Device Sets the CD/DVD ROM as the 3rd boot device. 488F 4th Boot Device Sets the network device as the 4th boot device. 4890 4th Boot Device Sets the hard-drive as the 4th boot device. 4891 4th Boot Device Sets RAID as the 4th boot device. 4892 4th Boot Device Sets a USB storage device as the 4th boot device. 4893 4th Boot Device Sets the CD/DVD ROM as the 4th boot device. 4894 5th Boot Device Sets the network device as the 5th boot device. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option Description108 Using the System Setup Program 4895 5th Boot Device Sets the hard-drive as the 5th boot device. 4896 5th Boot Device Sets RAID as the 5th boot device. 4897 5th Boot Device Sets a USB storage device as the 5th boot device. 4898 5th Boot Device Sets the CD/DVD ROM as thes 5th boot device. 48A0 ACPI SPMI Table Disables the ACPI SPMI Table for BMC ROM update. 48A1 ACPI SPMI Table Enables the ACPI SPMI Table for IPMI driver installation. 48A2 BMC LAN Port Configuration Sets BMC LAN Port to Dedicated-NIC. 48A3 BMC LAN Port Configuration Sets BMC LAN Port to Shared-NIC. 48A4 BMC NIC IP Source Sets BMC LAN to get LAN IP from Static mode. 48A5 BMC NIC IP Source Sets BMC LAN to get LAN IP from DHCP mode. 48A6 IPv6 Mode Disables IPv6 internet protocol support. 48A7 IPv6 Mode Enables IPv6 internet protocol support. 48A8 IPv6 AutoConfig Disables IPv6 auto configuration. 48A9 IPv6 AutoConfig Enables IPv6 auto configuration. 48AA Serial Port Mode Sets the console redirection baud rate to 3,8400 bits per second. 48AB Flow Control Selects none as the flow control for console redirection. 48AC Flow Control Selects hardware as the flow control for console redirection. 48AD Flow Control Selects software as the flow control for console redirection. 48AE Terminal Type The BIOS console redirection, if enabled, operates in VTUTF8 emulation model. See also tokens BFh, C0h, and D7h. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 109 48AF VT-UTF8 Combo Key Support Disables VT-UTF8 Combination Key Support for ANSI/VT100 terminals. 48B0 VT-UTF8 Combo Key Support Enables VT-UTF8 Combination Key Support for ANSI/VT100 terminals. 48B1 Event logging Disables BIOS to log system events to BMC, errors include ECC/PCI/PCIe/HT…etc. 48B2 Event logging Enables BIOS to log system events to BMC, errors include ECC/PCI/PCIe/HT…etc. 48B3 NMI on Error Disables BIOS to generate NMI when PCIe uncorrectable errors occur. 48B4 NMI on Error Enables BIOS to generate NMI when PCIe uncorrectable errors occur. 48B5 Memory Operating Voltage Indicates all DIMMs in the system are operating at 1.25 volts. 48C0 Frequency Ratio Sets frequency multiplier as maximum level. 48C1 Frequency Ratio Downgrades frequency multiplier one level. 48C2 Frequency Ratio Downgrades frequency multiplier two levels. 48C3 Frequency Ratio Downgrades frequency multiplier three levels. 48C8 QPI Frequency Sets the QPI frequency runs at maximum speed. 48C9 QPI Frequency Sets the QPI frequency runs at 4.800GT. 48CA QPI Frequency Sets the QPI frequency runs at 5.866GT. 48CB QPI Frequency Sets the QPI frequency runs at 6.400GT. 48CC QPI Frequency Sets the QPI frequency runs at 7.200GT. 48CD QPI Frequency Sets the QPI frequency runs at 8.000GT. 48D0 Energy Efficient Policy Controls the energy efficient policy as performance profile to configure all necessary settings. 48D1 Energy Efficient Policy Controls the energy efficient policy as balance profile to configure all necessary settings. (default) 48D2 Energy Efficient Policy Controls the energy efficient policy as low power profile to configure all necessary settings. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option Description110 Using the System Setup Program 48D3 Direct Cache Access Disables the Direct Cache Access. 48D4 Direct Cache Access Enables the Direct Cache Access. 48D8 Load Customized Defaults Requests a customized default of SETUP values on the next boot. 48DA Save Customized Defaults Saves current settings to customized defaults of SETUP on next boot. 48DB N/A Requests maximum performance settings of SETUP values on the next boot. 48DC N/A Requests a energy efficiency settings of SETUP values on the next boot. 48DD N/A Requests HPCC efficiency settings of SETUP values on the next boot. Dell will provide the settings before A-can BIOS. 48DE Shell Requests the uEFI Shell as first boot device on the next boot. 48E0 N/A Use NIC3 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot followed by NIC1. 48E1 N/A Use NIC4 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot followed by NIC1. 48E2 N/A Use NIC5 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot followed by NIC1. 48E3 N/A Use NIC6 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot followed by NIC1. 48E4 N/A Use NIC7 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot followed by NIC1. 48E5 N/A Use NIC8 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot followed by NIC1. 48E6 N/A Use HDD1 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 111 48E7 N/A Use HDD2 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48E8 N/A Use HDD3 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48E9 N/A Use HDD4 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48EA N/A Use HDD5 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48EB N/A Use HDD6 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48EC N/A Use RAID HDD1as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48ED N/A Use RAID HDD2 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48EE N/A Use RAID HDD3 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48EF N/A Use RAID HDD4 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48F0 N/A Use RAID HDD5 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48F1 N/A Use RAID HDD6 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48F2 N/A Use RAID HDD7 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48F3 N/A Use RAID HDD8 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48F4 N/A Use RAID HDD9 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48F5 N/A Use RAID HDD10 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48F6 N/A Use RAID HDD11 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option Description112 Using the System Setup Program 48F7 N/A Use RAID HDD12 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48F8 N/A Use RAID HDD13 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48F9 N/A Use RAID HDD14 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48FA N/A Use RAID HDD15 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. 48FB N/A Use RAID HDD16 as the 1st PXE boot device on the next boot. Table 2-1. D4 Token Table (continued) Token Setup Option DescriptionUsing the System Setup Program 113 IPMI Command List The following tables include all commands defined in the IPMI v2.0 specifications. All mandatory commands and some optional functions are supported. Special functions beyond the scope of IPMI v2.0 are implemented as original equipment manufacturer (OEM) commands. In the O/M column: • M = Mandatory in the IPMI spec and is implemented. • O = Optional command supported in this implementation. • N = Not supported in this implementation. See the Deployment Toolkit Version 1.3 User's Guide for additional information about installing and using the DTK utilities, and the Deployment Toolkit Version 1.3 Command Line Interface Reference Guide for a complete list of all valid options, suboptions, and arguments for using the BMCCFG.EXE to configure and manage your BMC. NOTE: For more information about the standard IPMI tool commands, see ipmitool.sourceforge.net/manpage.html. Table 2-2. IPMI Device Global Commands (NetFn: 0x06H) Command NetFn Code IPMI 2.0 BMC Get Device ID App 0x01h M Yes Broadcast Get Device ID App 0x02h M Yes Cold Reset App 0x03h O Yes Warm Reset App 0x04h O No Get Self Test Results App 0x05h M Yes Manufacture Test On App 0x06h O Yes Get ACPI Power State App 0x07h O Yes Get Device GUID App 0x08h O Yes Get NetFn Support App 0x09h O Yes Get Command Support App 0x0Ah O Yes Get Command Sub-function Support App 0x0Bh O Yes114 Using the System Setup Program Table 2-2. IPMI Device Global Commands (NetFn: 0x06H) (continued) Command NetFn Code IPMI 2.0 BMC Get Configurable Commands App 0x0C O Yes Get Configurable Command Sub-functions App 0x0Dh O Yes Set Command Enables App 0x60h O Yes Get Command Enables App 0x61h O Yes Set Command Sub-function Enables App 0x62h O Yes Get Command Sub-function Enables App 0x63h O Yes Get OEM NetFn IANA Support App 0x64h O Yes Table 2-3. BMC Watchdog Timer Commands (NetFn: 0x06H) Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC Reset Watchdog Timer App 0x22h M Yes Set Watchdog Timer App 0x24h M Yes Get Watchdog Timer App 0x25h M Yes Table 2-4. BMC Device and Messaging Commands (NetFn: 0x06H) Command NetFn Code IPMI 2.0 BMC Set BMC Global Enables App 0x2Eh M Yes Get BMC Global Enables App 0x2Fh M Yes Clear Message Buffer Flags App 0x30h M Yes Get Message Buffer Flags App 0x31h M Yes Enable Message Channel Receive App 0x32h O Yes Get Message App 0x33h M Yes Send Message App 0x34h M Yes Read Event Message Buffer App 0x35h O YesUsing the System Setup Program 115 Table 2-5. BMC Device and Messaging Commands (NetFn: 0x 06H) (continued) Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC Get BT Interface Capabilities App 0x36h M No Get System GUID App 0x37h M Yes Set System Info Parameters App 0x58h O Yes Get System Info Parameters App 0x59h O Yes Get Channel Authentication Capabilities App 0x38h O Yes Get Session Challenge App 0x39h O Yes Activate Session Command App 0x3Ah O Yes Set Session Privilege Level Command App 0x3Bh O Yes Close Session App 0x3Ch O Yes Get Session Information App 0x3Dh O Yes Get Authentication Code Command App 0x3Fh O Yes Set Channel Access Commands App 0x40h O Yes Get Channel Access Commands App 0x41h O Yes Get Channel Info Command App 0x42h O Yes Set User Access Commands App 0x43h O Yes Get User Access Commands App 0x44h O Yes Set User Name Commands App 0x45h O Yes Get User Name Commands App 0x46h O Yes Set User Password Commands App 0x47h O Yes Active Payload Command App 0x48h O Yes Deactivate Payload Command App 0x49h O Yes Get Payload Activation Status App 0x4Ah O Yes Get Payload Instance Info Command App 0x4Bh O Yes Set User Payload Access App 0x4Ch O Yes Get User Payload Access App 0x4Dh O Yes Get Channel Payload Support App 0x4Eh O Yes116 Using the System Setup Program Table 2-5. BMC Device and Messaging Commands (NetFn: 0x 06H) (continued) Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC Get Channel Payload Version App 0x4Fh O Yes Get Channel OEM Payload Info App 0x50h O Yes Master Write-Read I2C App 0x52h M Yes Get Channel Cipher Suites App 0x54h O Yes Suspend/Resume Payload Encryption App 0x55h O Yes Set Channel Security Keys App 0x56h O Yes Get System Interface Capabilities App 0x57h O No Table 2-6. Chassis Device Commands (NetFn: 0x00H) Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC Get Chassis Capabilities Chassis 0x00h M Yes Get Chassis Status Chassis 0x01h M Yes Chassis Control Chassis 0x02h M Yes Chassis Reset Chassis 0x03h O No Chassis Identify Chassis 0x04h O Yes Set Chassis Capabilities Chassis 0x05h O Yes Set Power Restore Policy Chassis 0x06h O Yes Get System Restart Cause Chassis 0x07h O Yes Set System Boot Options Chassis 0x08h O Yes Get System Boot Options Chassis 0x09h O Yes Set Front Panel Button Enable Chassis 0x0Ah O No Set Power Cycle Interval Chassis 0x0Bh O Yes Get POH Counter Chassis 0x0Fh O NoUsing the System Setup Program 117 Table 2-7. Event Commands (NetFn: 0x04H) Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC Set Event Receiver S/E 0x00h M Yes Get Event Receiver S/E 0x01h M Yes Platform Event S/E 0x02h M Yes Table 2-8. PEF/PET Alerting Commands (NetFn: 0x04H) Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC Get PEF Capabilities S/E 0x10h M Yes Arm PEF Postpone Timer S/E 0x11h M Yes Set PEF Configuration Parameters S/E 0x12h M Yes Get PEF Configuration Parameters S/E 0x13h M Yes Set Last Processed Event ID S/E 0x14h M Yes Get Last Processed Event ID S/E 0x15h M Yes Alert Immediate S/E 0x16h O Yes PET Acknowledge S/E 0x17h O Yes Table 2-9. Sensory Device Commands (NetFn: 0x04H) Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC Get Device SDR Info S/E 0x20h O No Get Device SDR S/E 0x21h O No Reserve Device SDR Repository S/E 0x22h O No Get Sensor Reading Factors S/E 0x23h O Yes Set Sensor Hysteresis S/E 0x24h O Yes Get Sensor Hysteresis S/E 0x25h O Yes Set Sensor Threshold S/E 0x26h O Yes Get Sensor Threshold S/E 0x27h O Yes Set Sensor Event Enable S/E 0x28h O Yes118 Using the System Setup Program Table 2-10. Sensory Device Commands (NetFn: 0x04H) (continued) Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC Get Sensor Event Enable S/E 0x29h O Yes Set Sensor Reading and Event Status S/E 0x30h O Yes Re-arm Sensor Events S/E 0x2Ah O Yes Get Sensor Event Status S/E 0x2Bh O Yes Get Sensor Reading S/E 0x2Dh M Yes Set Sensor Type S/E 0x2Eh O No Get Sensor Type S/E 0x2Fh O No Table 2-11. FRU Inventory Device Commands (NetFn: 0x0AH) Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC Get FRU Inventory Area Info Storage 0x10h M Yes Read FRU Inventory Data Storage 0x11h M Yes Write FRU Inventory Data Storage 0x12h M Yes Table 2-12. SDR Repository Commands (NetFn: 0x0AH) Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC Get SDR Repository Info Storage 0x20h M Yes Get SDR Repository Allocation Info Storage 0x21h O No Reserve SDR Repository Storage 0x22h M Yes Get SDR Storage 0x23h M Yes Add SDR Storage 0x24h M No Partial ADD SDR Storage 0x25h O Yes Delete SDR Storage 0x26h O No Clear SDR Repository Storage 0x27h M Yes Get SDR Repository Time Storage 0x28h O YesUsing the System Setup Program 119 * Support for Partial Add SEL is not required when Add SEL is supported. Table 2-12. SDR Repository Commands (NetFn: 0x0AH) (continued) Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC Set SDR Repository Time Storage 0x29h O Yes Enter SDR Repository Update Mode Storage 0x2Ah O No Exit SDR Repository Update Mode Storage 0x2Bh O No Run Initialization Agent Storage 0x2Ch O Yes Table 2-13. SEL Commands (NetFn: 0x40H) Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC Get SEL Info Storage 0x40h M Yes Get SEL Allocation Info Storage 0x41h O No Reserve SEL Storage 0x42h O Yes Get SEL Entry Storage 0x43h M Yes Add SEL Entry Storage 0x44h M Yes Partial Add SEL Entry Storage 0x45h M No * Delete SEL Entry Storage 0x46h O No Clear SEL Storage 0x47h M Yes Get SEL Time Storage 0x48h M Yes Set SEL Time Storage 0x49h M Yes Get Auxiliary Log Status Storage 0x5Ah O No Set Auxiliary Log Status Storage 0x5Bh O No Get SEL Time UTC Offset Storage 0x5Ch O No Set SEL Time UTC Offset Storage 0x5D O No120 Using the System Setup Program Table 2-14. LAN Device Commands (NetFn: 0x0CH) Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC Set LAN Configuration Parameters (Note: Parameter 9 and 25 are not supported.) Transport 0x01h M Yes Get LAN Configuration Parameters (Note: Parameter 9 and 25 are not supported.) Transport 0x02h M Yes Suspend BMC ARP Transport 0x03h O No Get IP/UDP/RMCP Statistics Transport 0x04h O No Table 2-15. Serial/Modem Device Commands (NetFn: 0x 0CH) Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC Set Serial/Modem Configuration Transport 0x10h M Yes Get Serial/Modem Configuration Transport 0x11h M Yes Set Serial/Modem Mux Transport 0x12h O Yes Get TAP Response Codes Transport 0x13h O No Set PPP UDP Proxy Transmit Data Transport 0x14h O No Get PPP UDP Proxy Transmit Data Transport 0x15h O No Send PPP UDP Proxy Packet Transport 0x16h O No Get PPP UDP Proxy Receive Data Transport 0x17h O No Serial/Modem Connection Active Transport 0x18h M Yes Callback Transport 0x20h O No SOL Activating Transport 0x19h O No Set SOL Configuration Transport 0x20h O No Get SOL Configuration Transport 0x21h O No Set User Callback Options Transport 0x1Ah O No Get User Callback Options Transport 0x1Bh O No Set Serial Routing Mux Transport 0x1Ch O YesUsing the System Setup Program 121 Table 2-16. Command Forwarding Commands (NetFn: 0x0CH) Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC Forwarded Command Transport 0x30h O Yes Set Forwarded Commands Transport 0x31h O Yes Get Forwarded Commands Transport 0x32h O Yes Enable Forwarded Commands Transport 0x33h O Yes Table 2-17. Firmware Update Commands (NetFn: 0x08H) Command NetFn Code IPMI2.0 BMC Firmware Update Phase 1 Firmware 0x10h O Yes Firmware Update Phase 2 Firmware 0x11h O Yes Get Firmware Update Status Firmware 0x12h O Yes Get Firmware Version Firmware 0x13h O Yes Set Firmware Update Status Firmware 0x16h O Yes Firmware Update Phase 3 Firmware 0x21h O Yes Table 2-18. GPGPU Setting Commands (NetFn: 0x30H) Command NetFn LUN CMD Privelege Set GPGPU ID 0x30h 0h 32h Admin Get GPGPU ID 0x30h 0h 33h Admin122 Using the System Setup Program Power Management Settings The system BIOS provides various options for power settings to help you save energy, maximize system performance. The following table provides a guide for power management settings. Table 2-19. Power Management Settings System Setup Maximum Performance (48DB) Energy Efficiency (48DC) Setup Page Setting Option D4 Token Option D4 Token Power Management Power Management Max. Performance 021F Node Manager 4800 Energy Efficiency Policy Performance 48D0 Low Power 48D2 CPU Configuration Active Processor Cores All 026E 1/2 0233/ 0232 Frequency Ratio Auto 48C0 3 48C3 QPI Frequency Auto 48C8 4.80GT/s 48C9 Turbo Mode Enabled 01E8 Disabled 01EA C State Disabled 024C Enabled 024B C1E State Disabled 02A2 Enabled 02A1 C6 State Disabled 480A Enabled 480B C7 State Disabled 480E Enabled 480F Direct Cache Access Enabled 48D4 Disabled 48D3 Hyper-Threading Technology Enabled 00D1 Disabled 00D2 Adjacent Cache Line Prefetch Enabled 0172 Disabled 0171 Hardware Prefetcher Enabled 0174 Disabled 0173 DCU Streamer Prefetcher Enabled 02C5 Disabled 02C6 DCU IP Prefetcher Enabled 02CE Disabled 02CFUsing the System Setup Program 123 Memory Configuration Memory Frequency Auto 4823 800 MHz 4824 Memory Turbo Mode Enabled 4821 Disabled 4820 Memory Throttling Mode Disabled 4828 Enabled 4829 Memory Operating Voltage 1.5 V 02B6 1.35V/ 1.25V 02B7/ 48B5 SATA Configuration Embedded SATA Link State Auto 4834 1.5 Gbps Power Saving Features Disabled 0199 Enabled 019A PCI Configuration PCIe Slot ASPM Disabled 4840 L0s & L1 4843 Onboard LAN ASPM Disabled 4846 L0s & L1 4849 Mezzing Slot ASPM Disabled 484C L0s & L1 484F Table 2-19. Power Management Settings (continued) System Setup Maximum Performance (48DB) Energy Efficiency (48DC) Setup Page Setting Option D4 Token Option D4 Token124 Using the System Setup ProgramInstalling System Components 125 3 Installing System Components Safety Instructions WARNING: Working on systems that are still connected to a power supply can be extremely dangerous. CAUTION: System components and electronic circuit boards can be damaged by discharge of static electricity. CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized by Dell is not covered by your warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. To avoid injury to yourself or damage to your system, follow these guidelines: • Always disconnect the system from the power outlet whenever you are working inside the system. • If possible, wear a grounded wrist strap when you are working inside the system. Alternatively, discharge any static electricity by touching the bare metal chassis of the system case, or the bare metal body of any other grounded appliance. • Hold electronic circuit boards by the edges only. Do not touch the components on the board unless it is necessary to do so. Do not flex or stress the circuit board. • Leave all components inside the static-proof packaging until you are ready to use the component for the installation.126 Installing System Components • Some cables have a connector with locking tabs; if you are disconnecting this type of cable, press in on the locking tabs before you disconnect the cable. As you pull connectors apart, keep them evenly aligned to avoid bending any connector pins. Also, before you connect a cable, ensure that both connectors are correctly oriented and aligned. Recommended Tools • #1 Phillips screwdriver • #2 Phillips screwdriver • Torx drivers • Set of jeweler screwdriversInstalling System Components 127 Inside the System CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. CAUTION: This system must be operated with the sled or a sled blank installed to make sure of proper cooling. Figure 3-1. Inside the Sled 1 system board 2 heat sinks/processors (2) 3 memory (16) 4 cooling shroud 5 interposer extender 6 internal 2.5-inch hard-drives (2)128 Installing System Components Sled Configuration The following illustrations show a 10-Sled and 8-Sled configuration. A mixture of differing sled types is also supported in the PowerEdge C8000 server enclosure. For more information, refer to the PowerEdge C8000 Hardware Owner’s Manual. Figure 3-2. PowerEdge C8220 10-Sled SKU Figure 3-3. PowerEdge C8220 8-Sled SKU with 2 Power SledsInstalling System Components 129 Sled Removing a Sled CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. CAUTION: To ensure proper airflow in the system, if a module is removed it should be immediately replaced with another sled or sled blank. CAUTION: Operating the system for extended periods of time without a sled blank installed can cause the PowerEdge C8000 server enclosure to overheat. See "Installing a Sled Blank" on page 131. 1 Power down the sled using OS commands or the Baseboard Management Controller, and ensure that the sled's power is off. When a sled is powered off, its front-panel power indicator is off. 2 Press the release latch and using the handle, slide the sled out of the enclosure. See Figure 3-4. Figure 3-4. Removing and Installing a Sled 1 handle 2 release latch130 Installing System Components Installing a Sled CAUTION: Many repairs may only be done by a certified service technician. You should only perform troubleshooting and simple repairs as authorized in your product documentation, or as directed by the online or telephone service and support team. Damage due to servicing that is not authorized is not covered by warranty. Read and follow the safety instructions that came with the product. 1 Orient the sled so that the release latch is in the bottom of the sled. See Figure 3-4. 2 Slide the new sled into the enclosure until the sled is fully seated and the release latch snaps into place. See Figure 3-4. Sled Blank CAUTION: To ensure proper airflow in the system, if a module is removed it should be immediately replaced with another sled or sled blank. Removing a Sled Blank Press the release latches and slide the blank out of the enclosure. See Figure 3-5. Figure 3-5. Removing and Installing a Sled Blank 1 release latches (2) 2 sled blankInstalling System Components 131 Installing a Sled Blank Hold the blank with the guide rail facing forward. Slide the blank into the enclosure until it is fully seated and the release latches snap into place. See Figure 3-5. SD Card Removing a SD Card 1 Power down the sled using OS commands or the Baseboard Management Controller, and ensure that the sled's